SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

Division 03 - Concrete 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

MODIFIED K WEST ANNEX 

CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 

44577-CSI-SPEC-001, Rev D & E i 

No. of 

Pages 

03 3000 Cast-In-Place Concrete ................................................................. 19 

Division 05 - Metals 

05 1200 Structural Steel Framing ................................................................. 9 

05 3100 Steel Decking .................................................................................. 5 

05 5000 Metal Fabrications ........................................................................... 8 

05 5100 Metal Stairs ..................................................................................... 7 

05 5213 Pipe and Tube Railings ................................................................... 4 

05 5300 Metal Grating................................................................................... 3 

Division 06 - Wood 

06 1000 Rough Carpentry ............................................................................. 2 

Division 07 - Thermal and Moisture Protection 

07 4219 Fire Resistive-Core Metal Wall Panels ............................................ 6 

07 5323 Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing ................... 6 

07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim ....................................................... 4 

07 7100 Roof Specialties .............................................................................. 6 

07 8123 Intumescent Mastic Fireproofing ..................................................... 4 

07 8413 Penetration Firestopping ................................................................. 9 

07 8446 Fire-Resistive Joint Systems ........................................................... 4 

07 9200 Joint Sealant ................................................................................... 5 

Division 08 - Openings 

08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames ..................................................... 6 

08 3323 Overhead Coiling Doors .................................................................. 6 

08 7100 Door Hardware ................................................................................ 9 

Division 09 - Finishes 

09 2216 Non-Structural Metal Framing ......................................................... 3 

09 2900 Gypsum Board ................................................................................ 3 

09 6513 Resilient Base ................................................................................. 3

09 9113 Exterior Painting .............................................................................. 4 

09 9123 Interior Painting ............................................................................... 5 

09 9600 High-Performance Coatings ............................................................ 7 

Division 10 - Specialties 

10 1400 Signage ........................................................................................... 4 

10 4413 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets .............................................................. 3 

10 4416 Fire Extinguishers ........................................................................... 3 

10 5113 Metal Lockers .................................................................................. 7 

Division 11 - Equipment 

11 1300 Loading Dock Equipment ................................................................ 2 

Division 21 – Fire Suppression 

21 1220 Storage Tanks ................................................................................. 3 

21 1313 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System ........................................................... 14 

Division 22 – Plumbing 

22 0523 General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping ....................................... 5 

22 0529 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment ........... 7 

22 0533 Heat Tracing for Plumbing Piping ................................................... 4 

22 0548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping 

and Equipment................................................................................ 8 

22 0553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment ........................... 6 

22 1329 Sanitary Sewerage Pumps (Fire Water Drainage Lift Station) ...... 10 

22 1413 Facility Storm Drainage Piping (Fire Water Drainage) .................. 13 

22 1513 General Service Compressed Air Piping ....................................... 32 

22 1519 General Service Packaged Air-Compressors and Receivers ........ 13 

22 6313 Nitrogen Gas Piping ...................................................................... 33 

Division 23 – Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning 

23 0513 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment ...................... 3 

23 0519 Meter and Gages for HVAC Piping ................................................. 5 

23 0523 General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping ............................................ 6 

23 0529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment ................ 8 

23 0548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping Equipment .......... 7 

23 0553 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment ................................ 6 

23 0593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC ................................. 22 

23 0700 HVAC Insulation ............................................................................ 21 

23 0900 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC .......................................... 19 

23 0993 Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls ................................. 20 

23 2113 Hydronic Piping ............................................................................. 15 

44577-CSI-SPEC-001, Rev D & E ii

23 2123 Hydronic Pumps .............................................................................. 4 

23 3113 Metal Ducts ................................................................................... 15 

23 3300 Air Duct Accessories ..................................................................... 12 

23 3713 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles ...................................................... 4 

23 4100 Particulate Air Filtration ................................................................... 3 

23 5100 Breachings and Stacks ................................................................... 3 

23 5213 Electric Boilers ................................................................................ 7 

23 6423 Scroll Heat Pump Chillers ............................................................... 9 

23 7313 Modular Indoor, Central-Station Air Handling Units ....................... 16 

Division 26 - Electrical 

26 0513 Medium-Voltage Cables .................................................................. 5 

26 0519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables ................... 7 

26 0523 Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables ........................................ 5 

26 0526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems ............................... 6 

26 0529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems ................................. 5 

26 0533 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems .................................... 9 

26 0536 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems ................................................. 4 

26 0543 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems ............. 7 

26 0548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems .................... 6 

26 0553 Identification for Electrical Systems ................................................. 7 

26 1200 Medium-Voltage Transformers ........................................................ 7 

26 2200 Low-Voltage Transformers .............................................................. 5 

26 2416 Panelboards .................................................................................. 10 

26 2713 Electricity Metering .......................................................................... 3 

26 2726 Wiring Devices ................................................................................ 5 

26 2816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers ......................................... 6 

26 2913 Enclosed Controllers ....................................................................... 6 

26 2923 Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers ............................................ 9 

26 4313 Transient- Voltage Suppression for Low-Voltage 

Electrical Power Circuits ................................................................. 5 

26 5100 Interior Lighting ............................................................................... 7 

26 5600 Exterior Lighting .............................................................................. 5 

Division 27 - Communications 

27 1000 Communications Horizontal Cabling ............................................... 5 

Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security 

28 2300 Video Surveillance .......................................................................... 9 

28 3100 Fire Detection and Alarm .............................................................. 20 

28 3233 Radiation Detection and Alarm ....................................................... 3 

44577-CSI-SPEC-001, Rev D & E iii

Division 31 - Earthwork 

31 1000 Site Clearing ................................................................................... 3 

31 2000 Earth Moving ................................................................................... 8 

Division 32 – Exterior Improvements 

32 1216 Asphalt Paving ................................................................................ 5 

Division 33 – Utilities 

33 1116 Facility Water Distribution Piping ..................................................... 5 

Division 40 – Process Integration 

40 0511 Compression Fittings on Copper and Stainless Steel Tubing ....... 19 

40 0527 Piping and Tubing Inspection Checklist .......................................... 6 

40 2319 Process Plant Non-Potable Water Pipe (Modified for IXM) ........... 27 

Division 43 – Process Gas and Liquid Handling, Purification and Storage 

Equipment 

43 1510 Low Pressure Air Purge Piping ..................................................... 28 

Revision D (no highlighting) 

Revision E (yellow highlighting) 

44577-CSI-SPEC-001, Rev D & E iv

Sludge Treatment Project Engineered Container Retrieval and Transfer System January 2012 

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 

PART 1 - GENERAL 

1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, 

mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. 

B. Related Sections: 

1. Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications” for embedded items. 

2. Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS 

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when 

characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances 

warrant adjustments. 

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. 

2. Provide documentation of design compressive strength per ACI 301. 

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and 

placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar 

diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, 

and supports for concrete reinforcement. 

D. Wall Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified 

professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. Drawings shall 

be stamped by a Washington state licensed engineer. 

E. Wall Formwork Calculations: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional 

engineer for support of formwork. Calculations shall be stamped by a Washington state 

licensed engineer. 

F. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the 

structure. 

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Buyer’s Technical 

Representative. 

G. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): 

Provide according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, “Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel” for 

each welded joint qualified by testing, including the following: 

Contract 44577 KW Annex - Rev. E 44577-CSI-SPEC-001 033000 - 1


1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage). 

2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds. 

H. Manufacturer Qualifications. 

I. Repair Methods: Per ACI 301 5.1.2. 

J. Finisher Qualifications for Finisher Contractor and Finishers per ACI 301 5.1.2. 

K. Testing Agency Qualifications including field personnel. 

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing 

Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or a similar certification program or through 

experience and training. 

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 

A. Welding certificates. 

B. Material certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 

1. Cementitious materials. 

2. Admixtures. 

3. Steel reinforcement. 

4. Fiber reinforcement. 

5. Waterstops. 

6. Curing compounds. 

7. Bonding agents. 

8. Adhesives. 

9. Joint-filler strips. 

10. Repair materials. 

C. Material test reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance 

with requirements: 

1. Aggregates. 

D. Field quality-control reports: For the following, from the Contractor, indicating compliance 

with requirements: 

1. Concrete Pour Checklist. 

2. Batch ticket. 

E. Field quality-control reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating 

compliance with requirements: 

1. Steel reinforcement placement. 

2. Steel reinforcement welding. 

3. Headed bolts and studs. 

4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 



5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 

6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 

7. Composite Sample (Slump, Air Content, Concrete Temperature) Tests. 

8. Unit Weight Tests. 

9. Compressive-Strength Tests. 

F. Conveying Equipment: Per ACI 301 5.1.2. 

G. Temperature Measurements: Per ACI 301 5.1.2. 

H. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements. 

I. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete 

products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and 

equipment. 

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA’s “Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete 

Production Facilities”. 

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 

and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 

C. For fire resistance, concrete walls in the Loading Bay are Safety Significant, SSC’s (Structure 

Systems or Components) as shown on the drawings. 

1. All safety SSCs will be procured, inspected, accepted, and verified in accordance with the 

requirements of PRC-MP-QA-599, Quality Assurance Program. 

2. The critical characteristics are: 

a. Concrete wall shall be 4.6” minimum thickness 

b. Cover for reinforcing shall be 3/4” minimum. 

c. Wall shall be reinforced with #4 at 18” each way, each face. 

D. For wind and seismic resistance, concrete (walls and foundations directly under the walls) in the 

Loading Bay is Safety Significant, SSC’s (Structure Systems or Components) as shown on the 

drawings. 



2. Critical characteristics apply to the concrete (walls and foundations directly under the 

walls) as well as all embedded items shown on the structural drawings, including, but not 

limited to, reinforcing, steel embeds, anchor bolts, and anchor rods, etc., except for the 

embedded strut. 


a. Concrete compressive strength 



b. Reinforcing yield strength 

c. Placement of concrete and reinforcing per ACI 117 

d. For embedded steel items, see section 05. 

E. Concrete hose-in-hose chase in the HEPA room and exterior is Safety Significant, SSC’s 

(Structure Systems or Components) as shown on the drawings. 







F. Slope of exterior slab to east of the Loading Bay is Safety Significant, SSC’s (Structure Systems 

or Components) as shown on the drawings. 



2. The critical characteristic is slope. The slab shall slope away from the building a 

minimum of 1% for at least 10 feet. 

G. For fire resistance, concrete roof in the Loading Bay is Safety Significant, SSC’s (Structure 

Systems or Components) as shown on the drawings. 




a. Lightweight concrete shall consist of a combination of expanded clay, shale, slag, 

slate, sintered fly ash, and/or any natural lightweight aggregrate meeting ASTM 

C330 and natural sand. Unit weight shall be between 105 pcf and 120 pcf. 

b. Equation 7-3 of IBC 2006 shall be equal or greater than 2.7”. For minimum 

thickness over top of flutes of 2 1/2”, minimum total thickness of roof of 4”, and 

metal deck rib spacing of 6”, Equation 7-3 equal 2.8”. 

c. Cover for reinforcing shall be 3/4” minimum, both from top surface and above 

metal deck. 

H. For Wind and Seismic resistance, concrete roof in the Loading Bay is Safety Significant, SSC’s 










I. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract 

Documents: 

1. ACI 301, “Specifications for Structural Concrete”, Sections 1 through 5 and Section 7, 

“Lightweight Concrete”. 

2. ACI 117, “Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials”. 

3. ACI 211.1, “Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and 

Mass Concrete”. 

4. ACI 211.2, “Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight 

Concrete”. 

5. ACI 305R, “Hot Weather Concreting”. 

6. ACI 306R, “Cold Weather Concreting”. 

J. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material 

evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. 

K. Mockups: Cast structural lightweight concrete mixture on metal deck to demonstrate surface 

finish, texture, tolerances, unit weight, compressive strength, delivery time, conveying and 

standard of workmanship. 

1. Build panel approximately 100 sq. ft. in the location near indicated by Buyer’s Technical 

Representative. Deck shall have supports at 5’ centers and be at least two spans. Metal 

deck shall be same used for roofing. Deck need not be anchored to the supports. 

2. Mockup may be near ground level but shall be conveyed as will be done for roof decks. 

3. Mockup may be removed after approval including 28 day test reports. 

L. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine 

procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each 

entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: 

a. Contractor's superintendent. 

b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. 

c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. 

d. Concrete subcontractor. 

2. Coordinate meeting. Request the following representatives to attend: 

a. BTR 

b. CHPRC Construction Manager. 

c. CHPRC QC. 

d. Structural Engineer. 

3. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality 

control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold and hot-weather concreting procedures, fall 

protection, lifts, critical lifts, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation 

joints, and joint-filler strips, forms and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring 

procedures, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation 



tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness 

measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection. 

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and 

damage. 

B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other 

contaminants. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS 

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and 

smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. 

Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. 

C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum. 

D. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, 

stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of 

concrete surfaces. 

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. 

E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic 

form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of 

concrete on removal. 

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than one inch to the plane of 

exposed concrete surface. 

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than one inch in diameter in 

concrete surface. 

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT 

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel 

products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not 

less than 60 percent. No documentation is required since The Steel Recycling Institute indicates 

that reinforcing bars are made by the electric arc furnace method, which typically has 57.5 

percent postconsumer recycled content and 6.5 percent preconsumer recycled content. 

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. 



C. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed. 

D. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from asdrawn 

steel wire into flat sheets. 

E. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet. 

F. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening 

reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel 

wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's “Manual of Standard Practice”. 

2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES 

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with 

ends square and free of burrs. 

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening 

reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel 

wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice”, of greater 

compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use 

CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 

C. Tie Wire: ASTM A853 carbon steel, 16 gage minimum. 

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS 

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and 

source, throughout Project: 

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, Type II, or Type I/II. Supplement with the 

following: 

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. 

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded. 

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 1/2 inches nominal. 

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. 

C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 3/4 inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 

D. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 

2.5 ADMIXTURES 

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 



B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with 

other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those 

permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium 

chloride. 

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 

5. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 

2.6 FIBER REINFORCEMENT 

A. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Polypropylene micro-fibers engineered and designed for use in 

concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches 

2.7 WATERSTOPS 

A. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl 

rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 

3/4 by 1 inch. 

2.8 VAPOR RETARDERS 

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer’s recommended 

adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. 

1. Not less than 12 mils thick. 

2.9 CURING MATERIALS 

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application 

to fresh concrete. 

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing 

approximately 9 oz/sq. yd. when dry. 

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene 

sheet. 

D. Water: Potable. 

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, 

Type 1, Class A, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of 

floor covering or coatings. 



2.10 RELATED MATERIALS 

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. 

B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or 

styrene butadiene. 

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES 

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of 

laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301 and ACI 211.1, or ACI 

211.2. 

B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which 

would otherwise be used, by not more than 20 percent. 

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer’s written instructions. 

1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing and/or plasticizing admixture in concrete, 

as required, for placement and workability. 

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low 

humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial 

slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a 

water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 

D. All concrete except where Lean or Lightweight concrete called out on drawings: Proportion 

normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4,000 psi at 28 days. 

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 

3. Slump Limit: 7 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding 

high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch. 

4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1 1/2 inch 

nominal maximum aggregate size. 

5. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1 inch or less 


6. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 

7. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's 

recommended rate, but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd. 

E. Lean Concrete: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 


2. Slump Limit: 7 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding 

high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch. 

3. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1 1/2 inch 


4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1 inch or less 




5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 

F. Roofs: Proportion structural lightweight concrete mixture as follows: 


2. Calculated Equilibrium Unit Weight: 110 lb/cu. ft., plus or minus 3 lb/cu. ft. as 

determined by ASTM C 567. 

3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 

4. Air Content: Do not allow air content to exceed 3 percent, except: 

a. If during construction, slab will be exposed to severe weather, then air content 

shall be: 

1) 6 percent, plus or minus 2 percent at point of delivery for nominal maximum 

aggregate size greater than 3/8 inch. 

2) 7 percent, plus or minus 2 percent at point of delivery for nominal maximum 

aggregate size 3/8 inch or less. 

2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT 

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice”. 

2.13 CONCRETE MIXING 

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to 

ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information. 

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 

1 1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and 

delivery time to 60 minutes. 

PART 3 - EXECUTION 

3.1 FORMWORK 

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, 

lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure 

can support such loads. 

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, 

elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. 

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 

1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 

2. Class C, 1/2 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces. 

D. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. 



3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS 

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that 

is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. All embedded items shall be securely 

supported to prevent displacement during concrete placement and finishing. Use setting 

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be 

embedded. 

3.3 VAPOR RETARDERS 

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to 

ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer’s written instructions. 

1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturers recommended tape. 

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT 

A. General: Comply with CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice” for placing reinforcement. 

3.5 JOINTS 

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before 

placing concrete. 

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. 

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at 

locations indicated or as approved by Buyer’s Technical Representative. 

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning 

concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least onefourth 

of concrete thickness as follows: 

1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof 

abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8 inch wide joints into concrete when cutting 

action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops 

random contraction cracks. Maximum 12 hours after placement. 

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab 

junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and 

other locations, as indicated. 

E. Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated according to 

manufacturer's written instructions. 



3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT 

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded 

items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. 

1. Contractor shall develop a Concrete Pour Checklist. Checklist shall be reviewed with the 

Buyer’s Technical Representative prior to placing concrete. At a minimum, checklist 

shall include: 

a. Formwork. 

b. Reinforcing. 

c. Embedded items. 

d. Expected weather. 

e. Concrete Mix. 

f. Testing Requirements. 

g. Approval of all submittals related to pour. 

h. Availability of materials, equipment and labor. 

2. Use separate checklist for each day and each concrete mix. 

B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to 

limitations of ACI 301. 

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to 

mixture. 

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, batch ticket shall be reviewed by the Testing 

Agency’s field inspector. After depositing concrete, batch ticket shall be completed and 

submitted. 

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new 

concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of 

weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. 

Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures 

and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators 

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 

inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that 

have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time 

necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other 

embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. 

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of 

construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked 

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 



3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 

4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 

5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured 

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb 

slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. 

F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from 

physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low 

temperatures. 

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F, maintain 

delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by 

ACI 301. 

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete 

on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or 

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. 

G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and 305R and as follows: 

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing 

water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of 

ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete 

is Contractor's option. 

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep 

subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 

3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES 

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes 

and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified 

limits on formed-surface irregularities. 

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. 

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in 

an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and 

defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface 

irregularities. 

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view. 

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces 

adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent 

formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent 

unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 



3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS 

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and 

finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. 

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small 

or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. 

Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular 

texture. 

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish. 

2. Apply float finish to roof slabs. 

C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by 

hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of 

trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that 

would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view. 

2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an 

unleveled, freestanding, 10 ft. long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed 

anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch. 

D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and 

elsewhere as indicated. 

3.9 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS 

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in 

place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with inplace 

construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to 

complete the Work. 

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still 

green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and 

terminations slightly rounded. 

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as 

shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, 

complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 

3.10 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING 

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot 

temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hotweather 

protection during curing. 

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or 

windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing 



operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and 

bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. 

C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days. 

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining 

cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped 

at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than 7 

days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material 

and waterproof tape. 

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller 

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall 

within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage 

during curing period. 

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without 

damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound 

manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere 

with bonding of floor covering or coatings used on Project. 

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a 

continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial 

application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity 

of coating and repair damage during curing period. 

3.11 JOINT FILLING 

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing and sealing compound 

without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound 

manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere 

with bonding of floor covering or coatings used on Project. 

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six month(s). Do not fill joints until 

construction traffic has permanently ceased. 

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact 

faces of joint clean and dry. 

C. Install semi-rigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed 

joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 



3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS 

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Buyer’s Technical 

Representative. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Buyer’s 

Technical Representative's approval. 

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two 

and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling 

and placing. 

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, 

spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and 

stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 

1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of 

cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes 

and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding 

agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place 

with bonding agent. 

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and 

standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding 

color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match 

before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher 

than surrounding surface. 

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and 

structural performance as determined by Buyer’s Technical Representative. 

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and 

verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces 

sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, 

honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that 

penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of 

width, and other objectionable conditions. 

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 

3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing 

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired 

areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping capable of 

taking heavy vehicle traffic. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth 

of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and 

primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, 

plane, and level surface. 

5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, 

by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, 

square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4 inch clearance all around. 

Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. 

Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without 



coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish; to blend with adjacent finished concrete. 

Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 

6. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. 

Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and 

loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place 

patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to 

match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. 

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Buyer’s Technical Representative's approval, 

using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. 

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Buyer’s Technical 

Representative's approval. 

3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency 

to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 

B. Inspections: 

1. Steel reinforcement placement. 

2. Steel reinforcement welding. 

3. Headed bolts and studs. 

4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 

5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 

6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to 

ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 

1. Testing Frequency for Concrete Walls: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 

100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. 

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests 

for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly 

selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 

2. Testing Frequency for all other concrete: Obtain one composite sample for each day's 

pour of each concrete mixture exceeding five cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set 

for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. 


for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly 


3. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, 

but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform 

additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 



4. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; 

ASTM C 173/C 173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test 

for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete 

mixture. 

5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 

40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite 

sample. 

6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test 

for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete 

mixture. 

7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. 

a. Standard cylinder shall be 6” diameter by 12” long. 

b. Cast and laboratory cure three sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each 

composite sample. 

c. Cast and field cure one set of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite 

sample. 

8. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured 

specimens at seven days and one set of two specimens at 28 days and one set of 

laboratory-cured specimens at 56 days unless directed earlier by the Buyer’s Technical 

Representative. 

a. Test two field-cured specimens at seven days. 

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of 

two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 

9. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratorycured 

cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures 

for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 

10. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three 

consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength 

and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by 

more than 500 psi. 

11. Test results shall be reported in writing to Buyer’s Technical Representative, concrete 

manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressivestrength 

tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete 

placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in 

Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and 

materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7 and 28 day tests. 

12. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may 

be permitted by Buyer’s Technical Representative but will not be used as sole basis for 

approval or rejection of concrete. 

13. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete 

when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other 

requirements have not been met, as directed by Buyer’s Technical Representative. 

Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by 

cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by 

Buyer’s Technical Representative. 

14. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine 

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 



15. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply 

with the Contract Documents. 

3.14 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS 

A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction 

period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in 

writing by liquid floor treatments installer. 

END OF SECTION 033000 



SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes structural steel and grout. 


1. Division 05, Section "Steel Decking". 

2. Division 05, Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to 

structural-steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications, and other metal items not defined 

as structural steel. 

3. Division 05, Section "Metal Stairs." 

4. Division 09, Sections “Exterior Painting,” “Interior Painting,” and “High-Performance 

Coatings” for surface-preparation and priming requirements. 

1.2 DEFINITIONS 

A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, “Code of 

Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges”. 

B. Seismic-Load-Resisting System: Elements of structural-steel frame designated as "SLRS" or 

along grid lines designated as "SLRS" on Drawings, including columns, beams, and braces and 

their connections. 

C. Protected Zone: Structural members or portions of structural members indicated as "Protected 

Zone" on Drawings. Connections of structural and nonstructural elements to protected zones 

are limited. 

D. Demand Critical Welds: Those welds, the failure of which would result in significant 

degradation of the strength and stiffness of the Seismic-Load-Resisting System and which are 

indicated as "Demand Critical" or "Seismic Critical" on Drawings. 



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 

2. Include embedment drawings. 

3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, 

and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed 

and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 

Contract 44577 KW Annex - Rev. E 44577-CSI-SPEC-001 051200 - 1


4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. 

Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. 

5. Identify members and connections of the seismic-load-resisting system. 

6. Indicate locations and dimensions of protected zones. 

7. Identify demand critical welds. 

C. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): 

Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded 

joint qualified by testing, including the following: 



D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. 

E. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator. 

F. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. 

G. Grout Procedures. 



B. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. 

C. Product Test Reports: For the following: 

1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 

2. Direct-tension indicators. 

3. Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 

4. Shear stud connectors. 

5. Shop primers. 

6. Nonshrink grout. 

D. Source quality-control reports. 

E. Field quality-control reports. 

F. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that has 5 years experience fabricating steel for 

projects of similar type, size and quality. 

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer that has 5 years experience installing steel for 




C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency that has inspection personnel that meet IBC 

qualified special inspector and have 5 years experience inspecting steel for projects of similar 

type, size and quality. 

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, 

“Structural Welding Code – Steel”. 

1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical 

welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8. 

FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel 

qualification. 

E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 

1. AISC 303. 

2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1. 

3. AISC 360. 

4. RCSC’s “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts”. 

5. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code – Steel. 

6. AWS QC1, Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors. 

F. Steel framing in the Loading Bay is Safety Significant, SSC’s (Structure Systems or 

Components) as shown on the drawings. 



2. Critical characteristics apply to steel member and its connections in their entirty. 


a. Yeild strength (all materials). 

b. Shapes conform to dimensions in ASTM A6. 

c. Welds per AWS for size, spacing and quality. 

d. Bolts installed per RCSC’s “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 

or A 490 Bolts”. 

e. Fabrication and installation conform to AISC 303 and 360. 

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with structural steel framing to 

attend, including the following: 

a. Contractor's superintendent. 

b. Independent testing agency. 

c. Steel fabricator. 

d. Steel installer. 

2. Coordinate meeting. Request the following representatives to attend: 

a. BTR 

b. CHPRC Construction Manager. 

c. CHPRC QC. 

d. Structural Engineer. 



3. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality 

control, fall protection, lifts, critical lifts, installation tolerances. 


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off 

ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel 

members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or 

overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or 

structures as directed. 

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes 

repackaging and seals containers. 

2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 

3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating 

ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication. 


2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS 

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of 

preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. No documentation is required since 

USGBC allows a default value of 25 percent to be used for steel, without documentation. 

B. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M. 

C. Channels, Angles-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

D. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. 

F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. 

G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. E70xx minimum. 

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS 

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural 

bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, 

hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish. 



1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible-washer type with plain 

finish. 

B. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, head 

assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, 

and hardened carbon-steel washers. 

1. Finish: Plain. 

C. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished 

carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B. 

D. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 

1. Configuration: As shown. 


E. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight. 


F. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

2.3 PRIMER 


A. Primer: Comply with Division 09 painting Sections and Division 09 Section “High- 

Performance Coatings”. 

B. Primer: Fabricator’s standard lead and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer 

complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 

2.4 GROUT 

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic 

aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for 

application and a 30 minute working time. 

2.5 FABRICATION 

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate 

according to AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges” and 

AISC 360. 

B. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear 

connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to 

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. 



C. Fabrication Tolerances, unless specified otherwise, shall be: 

1. Fractional: 0.125” +/-. 

2. Decimal: 0.06+/-. 

3. Angular: 1 +/- degree. 

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS 

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC’s “Specification for 

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts” for type of bolt and type of joint 

specified. 

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. 

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding 

procedure specifications, weld quality and methods used in correcting welding work. 

2.7 SHOP PRIMING 

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded 

members to a depth of two inches. 

2. Surfaces to be field welded. 

3. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 

4. Galvanized surfaces. 

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and 

spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and 

standards: 

1. SSPC-SP 2, “Hand Tool Cleaning”. 

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's 

written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness 

of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and 

exposed surfaces. 

2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Testing Agency: Engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests 

and inspections and prepare test reports. 

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being 

fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. 

B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the 

Contract Documents. 



C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC’s 

“Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts”. 

D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested 

and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at 

testing agency's option: 

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 

2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished 

weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 

3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 

4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. 


3.1 EXAMINATION 

A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and 

locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with 

requirements. 

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.2 ERECTION 

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to 

AISC 303 and AISC 360. 

B. Base Plates: Clean concrete and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and 

roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 

2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 

3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. 

Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before 

packing with grout. 

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. 

Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with 

manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. 

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for 

Steel Buildings and Bridges”. 

D. Erected tolerances for crane runway beams shall be as specified on the drawings. 



3.3 FIELD CONNECTIONS 

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC’s “Specification for 


specified. 




1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary 

connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field 

welds, high-strength bolted connections, and grout. 

B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC’s “Specification 

for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts”. 

C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 

1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to 

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 

b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on 

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be 

accepted. 

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 

d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. 

D. Grout Tests: Testing of grout obtained according to ASTM C 109 shall be performed according 

to the following requirements: 

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one sample per location, but not less than one sample 

for each bag of mix. 


for each grout mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly 


2. Strength of each grout mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three 




3. Test results shall be reported in writing to Buyer’s Technical Representative, grout 

manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive- 



strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of grout 

placement, name of grout testing and inspecting agency, location of grout batch in Work, 

design compressive strength at 28 days, grout mixture proportions and materials, 

compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7 and 28 day tests. 



approval or rejection of grout. 

5. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of grout 

when test results indicate that compressive strengths or other requirements have not been 

met, as directed by Buyer’s Technical Representative. 



E. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Buyer’s 

Technical Representative. 

F. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the 


END OF SECTION 051200 



SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: 

1. Composite floor deck. 

B. Related Requirements: 

1. Division 03, Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight and lightweight 

structural concrete fill over steel deck. 

2. Division 05, "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field-welded shear connectors. 


A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: 

1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, 

cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. 

C. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): 

Provide according to AWS D1.3, “Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel” for each welded joint 

qualified by testing, including the following: 



D. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. 

E. Evaluation Reports: For steel deck. 



B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck. 

C. Field quality-control reports. 




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, “Structural 

Welding Code - Sheet Steel”. 

C. Steel decking in the Loading Bay is Safety Significant, SSC’s (Structure Systems or 

Components). 



2. For fire resistance, the critical characteristics are: 

a. Equation 7-3 of IBC 2006 shall be equal or greater than 2.7”. For minimum 

thickness over top of flutes of 2 1/2”, minimum total thickness of roof of 4”, and 

metal deck rib spacing of 6”, Equation 7-3 equal 2.8”. 

3. For Wind and Seismic resistance, the critical characteristics are: 

a. Metal deck shall be 20 gage (0.0359”) thick. 

b. Welds per AWS for size, spacing and quality. 

c. Size, type and spacing of fasteners match drawings. 

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and 

handling. 

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a 

waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. 


2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according 

to AISIs “North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural 

Members”. 

B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of 


USGBC allows a default value of 25 percent to be used for steel without documentation. 



2.2 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK 

A. Composite Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and 

interlocking side laps, to comply with “SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite 

Steel Floor Deck”, in SDI Publication No. 31, with the minimum section properties indicated, 

and with the following: 

1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 

minimum, with top surface phosphatized and unpainted and underside surface shop 

primed with manufacturers' standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. 

2. Alternate to Prime-Painted Steel Sheet, Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, 

Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, G60 zinc coating. 

3. Profile Depth: As shown. 

4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As shown. 

2.3 ACCESSORIES 

A. General: Provide manufacturer’s standard accessory materials for deck that comply with 

requirements indicated. 

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically 

driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws. 

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel 

screws, No. 10 minimum diameter. 

D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber. 

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 

psi, not less than 0.0359 inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of 

profile indicated or required for application. 

F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of same 

material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile indicated, or if not indicated, 

recommended by SDI Publication No. 31 for overhang and slab depth. 

G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, 

finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated. 

H. Flat Sump Plates: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as 

deck. For drains, cut holes in the field. 

I. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780 or SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B, with dry film 

containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight. 

J. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer. 




3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 

A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in 

SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer’s written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 

B. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned 

and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract 

side-lap interlocks. 

C. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. 

D. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting 

through or adjacent to deck. 

E. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, 

continuity of deck, and support of other work. 

F. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, 

appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. 

G. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical 

fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. 

H. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and 

mechanically fasten flanges to top of deck. Space mechanical fasteners not more than 12 inches 

apart with at least one fastener at each corner. 

1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld or 

mechanically fasten. 

I. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel-sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting 

structure according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated. 

J. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel-sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, 

according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and 

sides of deck. 


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection. 

C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Buyer’s 


D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. 



E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor’s expense, will be performed to determine compliance of 

corrected work with specified requirements. 

3.3 PROTECTION 

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck 

with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of 

prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint. 




SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 

2. Miscellaneous steel trim. 

3. Metal bollards. 

4. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section: 

1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated 

to be cast into concrete. 

2. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete. 


A. Product Data: For the following: 

1. Metal nosings and treads. 

2. Paint products. 

3. Grout. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. Include plans, 

elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and 

accessory items. 

C. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide 

according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded joint 

qualified by testing, including the following: 




E. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator. 

F. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. 

G. Grout Procedures. 






A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that has 5 years experience fabricating steel for 


B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer that has 5 years experience installing steel for 


C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency that has inspection personnel that meet IBC 

qualified special inspector and have 5 years experience inspecting steel for projects of similar 

type, size and quality. 

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, 


1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical 

welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8. 

FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel 

qualification. 

E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 

1. AISC 303. 

2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1. 

3. AISC 360. 

4. RCSC’s “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts”. 

5. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code – Steel. 

6. AWS QC1, Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors. 

F. Steel framing and concrete embedments in the Loading Bay is Safety Significant, SSC’s 




2. Critical characteristics apply to steel member and its connections in their entirety. 


a. Yield strength (all materials). 

b. Shapes conform to dimensions in ASTM A6. 

c. Welds per AWS for size, spacing and quality. 

d. Bolts installed per RCSC’s “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 

or A 490 Bolts”. 

e. Fabrication and installation conform to AISC 303 and 360. 




2.1 METALS, GENERAL 

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. 

2.2 FERROUS METALS 

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel 

products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not 

less than 25 percent. No documentation is required since the USGBC allows a default value of 25 

percent to be used for steel without documentation 

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. First paragraph below specifies yield 

strength of 30 ksi; revise if higher strength is required. 

C. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with 

ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. 

D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. 

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4. 

1. Size of Channels: 1 and 5/8 by 1 and 5/8 inches. 

2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, Grade 33, with G90 

coating; 0.105 inch nominal thickness. 

3. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 33; 0.0966inch 

minimum thickness; coated with rust-inhibitive, baked-on, acrylic enamel. 

G. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M. 

2.3 FASTENERS 

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use 

and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, 

Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. 

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 

2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. 

3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver. 

4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze. 

B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise 

indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or 

ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip 

galvanized per ASTM F 2329. 

C. Post-Installed Anchors: As indicated. 



2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 

A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections and Division 09, 

Section “High-Performance Coatings”. 

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and 

compatible with paints specified to be used over it. 

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 

D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout 

complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for 

interior and exterior applications. 

E. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for 

normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 4,000 psi. 

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL 

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that 

maintain structural value of joined pieces. 

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove 

sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. 

C. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion 

resistance of base metals. 

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 

3. Remove welding flux immediately. 

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended. 

D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or 

welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 

E. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude 

water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 

F. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally 

welded steel strap anchors not less than 24 inches o.c. 

G. First 14 articles below specify fabrication requirements for typical metal fabrications; revise those 

retained to suit Project and add others as required. 

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS 

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to 

complete the Work. 



B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise 

indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent 

construction. 

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM 

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown 

with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed 

field splices where possible. 

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with 

other work. 

C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim. Otherwise, prime miscellaneous steel trim with 

primer specified in Division 09, Section “High-Performance Coatings”. 

2.8 METAL BOLLARDS 

A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 

B. Prime bollards with primer specified in Division 09, Section “High-Performance Coatings”. 

2.9 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES 

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete 

construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. 

2.10 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES 

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from 

concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two 

integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 

2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL 

A. Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for 

recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 

2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES 

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for 

steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 



B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in 

concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Shop prime with primers specified in Division 09 painting Sections unless primers 

specified in Division 09, Section “High-Performance Coatings” are indicated. 

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below: 

1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, “Commercial Blast Cleaning”. 

2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, “Commercial 

Blast Cleaning”. 

3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Division 09, Section “High-Performance 

Coatings”: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, “Commercial Blast Cleaning”. 

4. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, “Power Tool Cleaning”. 

D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, “Paint Application Specification 

No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel”, for shop painting. 



A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal 

fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges 

and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. 

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not 

to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do 

not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after 

fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. 

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 





4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended. 

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal 

fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. 

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, 

masonry, or similar construction. 



3.2 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS 

A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before 

installing. 

B. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for 

consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. 

C. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. 

3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES 

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to 

improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. 

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have 

been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if 

protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 

C. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 



welds, high-strength bolted connections, and grout. 





AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 




accepted. 



D. Grout Tests: Testing of grout obtained according to ASTM C 109 shall be performed according 

to the following requirements: 

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one sample per location, but not less than one sample 

for each bag of mix. 




for each grout mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly 


2. Strength of each grout mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three 




3. Test results shall be reported in writing to Buyer’s Technical Representative, grout 

manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressivestrength 

tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of grout 

placement, name of grout testing and inspecting agency, location of grout batch in Work, 

design compressive strength at 28 days, grout mixture proportions and materials, 

compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7 and 28 day tests. 



approval or rejection of grout. 

5. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of grout 

when test results indicate that compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been 

met, as directed by Buyer’s Technical Representative. 



E. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Buyer’s 


F. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the 


3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded 

areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to 

comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair 

galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. 




SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Industrial-type stairs with steel grating treads. 

2. Alternating tread ladders. 

3. Railings attached to metal stairs. 

4. Handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs. 

B. See Division 05, Section “Pipe and Tube Railings” for pipe and tube railings not attached to 

metal stairs or to walls adjacent to metal stairs. 


A. Product Data: For metal stairs. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 

C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. 

D. Certification of Performance Requirements: For alternating tread ladders required to comply 

with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by 

the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 

E. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): 

Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded 

joint qualified by testing, including the following: 





B. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. 

C. Source quality-control reports. 

D. Field quality-control reports. 




A. Structural Performance of Alternating Tread Ladders: Alternating tread devices shall withstand 

the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ICC's 

International Building Code. 

1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. 

2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in. 

3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 

4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition 

to loads specified above. 

5. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: 

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. 

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. 

c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 

6. Infill of Guards: 

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. 

b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 


A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with “Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for 

Fixed Metal Stairs” in NAAMM AMP 510, “Metal Stairs Manual”, for class of stair designated, 

unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 

1. Industrial-Type Stairs: Industrial class. 

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, 



2.1 METALS 

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise 

indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without 

seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 

B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of 



C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513 (Fy = 72 ksi minimum). 



E. Steel Bars for Grating Treads: ASTM A 36/A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M or 

ASTM A 1018/A 1018M. 

F. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510. 

G. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless 

otherwise indicated. 

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS 

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural 

bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened 

carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish. 

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible-washer type with plain 

finish. 

B. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, head 

assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, 

and hardened carbon-steel washers. 



A. Cast-Metal Units: Cast iron, with an integral abrasive, as-cast finish. 

B. Extruded Units: Aluminum units with abrasive filler in an epoxy-resin binder. 

1. Provide ribbed units, with abrasive filler strips projecting 1/16 inch above aluminum 

extrusion. 

2. Provide solid-abrasive-type units without ribs. 

C. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard 

with manufacturer. 

D. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units set into concrete. 

E. Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units set into concrete. 

F. Fasteners: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or 

ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior 

walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 

G. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections. 




A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, 

brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and 

platforms on supporting structure. 

1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 

B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units 

only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. 

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove 

sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. 

D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without impairing work. 

E. Weld connections to comply with the following: 





4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's “Voluntary 

Joint Finish Standards” for Type 2 welds: completely sanded joint, some undercutting 

and pinholes okay. 

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners 

where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 

G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep 

holes where water may accumulate. 

H. Fabrication Tolerances, unless specified otherwise, shall be: 

1. Fractional: 0.125” +/-. 

2. Decimal: 0.06+/-. 

3. Angular: 1 +/- degree. 

2.5 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS 

A. Metal Bar-Grating Stairs: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, “Metal Bar Grating Manual”. 

1. Fabricate treads and platforms from steel grating with 1 1/4 by 3/16 inch bearing bars at 

15/16 inch o.c. and crossbars at 4 inches o.c. 

2. Fabricate grating treads with rolled-steel floor plate nosing and with steel angle or steel 

plate carrier at each end for stringer connections. Secure treads to stringers with bolts. 



2.6 STAIR RAILINGS 

A. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at 

connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at 

connections, including at fittings. 

1. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA’s “Voluntary Joint Finish Standards” for Type 2 

welds: completely sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes okay. 

B. Form changes in direction of railings by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. 

C. Form curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling. 

D. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. 

E. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails. 

F. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, 

miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other 

work. 

1. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding. 

2.7 ALTERNATING TREAD LADDERS 

A. Alternating Tread Ladders: Fabricate alternating tread devices to comply with ICC's 

International Building Code. Fabricate of open-type construction with channel or plate stringers 

and pipe and tube railings unless otherwise indicated. Provide brackets and fittings for 

installation. 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers 

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, 

the following: 

a. Lapeyre Stair Inc. 

b. Schmidt Structural Products; a subsidiary of Penco Products, Inc. 

2. Fabricate from steel and assemble by welding or with stainless-steel fasteners. 

3. Comply with applicable railing requirements in Division 05, Section “Pipe and Tube 

Railings”. 

B. Prime steel alternating tread devices, including treads, railings, brackets, and fasteners, with 

zinc-rich primer. 

2.8 FINISHES 

A. Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for 

recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 

B. Finish metal stairs after assembly. 



C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC- 

SP 3, “Power Tool Cleaning”. 

D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, 

“Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel”, for 

shop painting. 


3.1 INSTALLATION 

A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing 

metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from 

established lines and levels and free of rack. 

B. Field fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints that cannot be shop 

connected because of shipping size limitations. Field weld connections that are not to be left as 

exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, 

cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and 

are for bolted or screwed field connections. 

C. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in “Fabrication, General” Article. 

D. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for 

exposed bolt anchorage. 


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and 

abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop 

painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 

3.3 FIELD CONNECTIONS 

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC’s “Specification for 


specified. 




1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary 

connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 





welds and high-strength bolted connections. 





AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency’s option: 




accepted. 



D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the 





SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Steel railings. 

B. See Division 05, Section “Metal Stairs” for steel tube railings associated with metal stairs. 



1. Manufacturer’s product lines of mechanically connected railings. 

2. Railing brackets. 

3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 


A. Field quality-control reports. 


2.1 METALS, GENERAL 

A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as 

supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 

2.2 STEEL AND IRON 

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of 

preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. No documentation required since 


B. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) except ASTM A 513 (Fy = 72 ksi minimum) for all 

removable guardrails. 

C. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless 

another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 



D. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

E. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless 



A. Fasteners: Provide the following: 

1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or 

ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating. 

2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel 

fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating. 

B. Post-Installed Anchors: As shown. 

C. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy 

welded. 

D. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. 

E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and 


F. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections and 

Division 09, Section “High-Performance Coatings”. 

G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 

H. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous 

grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by 

manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 


A. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of 

approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed 

surfaces. 

B. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. 

C. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings 

designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 




3. Remove flux immediately. 

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness 

shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. 



D. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. 

Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 

E. Form changes in direction by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. 

F. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling or otherwise deforming 


G. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. 

H. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. 

I. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous 

fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 

2.5 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES 

A. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC- 

SP 3, “Power Tool Cleaning”. 



A. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines 

and levels and free of rack. 

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or 

finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or 

other means without further cutting or fitting. 

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in three (3) feet. 

3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel 

with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. 

B. Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into preset metal pipe sleeves or formed or core-drilled 

holes and grouting annular space. 

C. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction. 

D. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces. 

E. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Use type of 

bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. 

F. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or 

lag bolts. 




A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and 

abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop 

painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect post 

installed anchors. 

B. Anchor and anchor installation shall conform to ICC report. 

C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and 

Architect. 

D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the 





SECTION 055300 - METAL GRATINGS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Metal bar gratings. 



1. Formed-metal plank gratings. 

2. Clips and anchorage devices for gratings. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 


A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, “Metal Bar Grating Manual” 

and NAAMM MBG 532, “Heavy-Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual”. 

B. For wind and seismic resistance, grating clips in the Loading Bay is Safety Significant, SSC’s 






2.1 FERROUS METALS 

a. Minimum downward holding force of 70 pounds per clip. 

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel 

products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is 

not less than 25 percent. Note: no documentation is required since the USGBC allows a default 

value of 25 percent to be used for steel without documentation. 

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 



C. Steel Bars for Bar Gratings: ASTM A 36/A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M or 

ASTM A 1018/A 1018M. 

D. Wire Rod for Bar Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510. 

E. Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, structural steel, Grade 30. 

F. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 33, with G90 

coating. 

2.2 FASTENERS 

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use 

and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, 

Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 


A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer 

complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and 



A. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius 

of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on 


B. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to 

support indicated loads. 

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. 

D. Fabricate toe-plates for attaching in the field. 

2.5 METAL BAR GRATINGS 

A. Welded Steel Grating: 

1. Bearing Bar Spacing: As shown. 

2. Bearing Bar Depth: As shown. 

3. Bearing Bar Thickness: As shown. 

4. Crossbar Spacing: As shown. 

5. Traffic Surface: Plain. 

6. Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 1.8 oz/sq. ft. of 

coated surface. 



B. Grating Sections: All grating shall be banded. Fabricate with banding bars attached by 

welding to entire perimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, 

if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for attaching to supports. 

C. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Arrange cutouts to permit 

grating removal without disturbing items penetrating gratings. 

1. Edge-band openings in grating that interrupt four or more bearing bars with bars of same 

size and material as bearing bars. 

D. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation. 

2.6 STEEL FINISHES 

A. Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly. 

B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for 

steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 



A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing 

gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established 

lines and levels and free of rack. 

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. 

3.2 INSTALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS 

A. General: Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating 

standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clearances 

and standard anchoring details. 

B. All grating shall be removable. Attach removable units to supporting members with type and 

size of clips and fasteners indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by grating 

manufacturer for type of installation conditions shown. 


A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair 

galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. 



Sludge Treatment Project Engineered Container Retrieval and Transfer System December 2011 

SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 

2. Wood nailers. 


A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 

1. Power-driven fasteners. 

2. Powder-actuated fasteners. 

3. Expansion anchors. 


A. Lumber: Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for two inch nominal thickness or less. 

2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING 

A. Rooftop nailers, bases and equipment curbs: No. 2 grade. 

1. Species: 

2.3 FASTENERS 

a. Douglas fir-larch; WWPA. 

b. Hem-fir; WWPA. 

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified 

in this article for material and manufacture. 

1. Provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or 

Type 304 stainless steel. 

B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. 

Contract 44577 KW Annex - Rev. D 44577-CSI-SPEC-001 061000 - 1


C. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, 

where indicated, flat washers. 



A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and 

fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. 

Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other 

construction. 

B. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, 

complying with the following: 

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 


A. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes 

sufficiently wet that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered borate 

treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. 




SECTION 074219 – FIRE RESISTIVE-CORE METAL WALL PANELS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Fire resistive mineral wool-core metal wall panels. 


A. Structural Performance: Metal wall panel assemblies shall withstand the effects the following 

loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to 

ASTM E 330: 

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures: 

a. Uniform pressure of 30 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward or outward. 

2. Deflection Limits: Metal wall panel assemblies shall withstand wind loads with 

horizontal deflections no greater than 1/240 of the span. 

B. Air Infiltration: Air infiltration shall not exceed .04 cfm per square foot of wall area when 

tested per ASTM E 283 at a static pressure of 12.0 psf. 

C. Static Water Penetration: There shall be no uncontrolled water penetration through the panel 

joints at a static pressure of 20.0 psf when tested per ASTM E 331. 

D. Surface Burning Characteristics: The insulated core shall have been tested in accordance with 

ASTM E 84 for surface burning characteristics. The core shall have a maximum flame spread 

of zero and a maximum smoke developed rating of zero. 

E. Fire Resistance: Metal wall panel assemblies shall meet the requirements of fire endurance 

rating for nonbearing wall in accordance with UL 263 Fire Endurance Tests, Design No. U050 

and ASTM E 119 Fire Test of Building Construction and Materials. 

1. The finished panel in a seven inch thickness shall meet the requirements of a two hour 

fire endurance rating. 

2. Through-Penetrations: The two hour fire rated wall panel shall meet the requirements of 

composite panel penetration conditions listed by UL and in accordance with ASTM E 

814 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. Maximum diameter of opening is 6 

and 7/8”. Openings can be located on or off panel unit joints. 





B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal wall panels; details of edge 

conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, 

closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory, shop, and fieldassembled 

work. 

C. Calculations: Provide fastener spacing and design to meet uniform pressure acting on panels. 

D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. 


A. Coordination Drawings: Exterior elevations, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and 

wall-mounted items. 

B. Product test reports. 

C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 

A. Maintenance data. 


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. 

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide metal wall panels and system components with the 

following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical panels and system 

components per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency 

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of 

applicable testing agency. 

1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Per ASTM E 119. 

C. Fire-resistive mineral wool core metal wall panels and system components that make up the 

envelope of the Sludge Loading Bay (Room 100) are Safety Significant, SSC’s (Structure, 

Systems or Components) based on UL 263 and ASTM E 119 fire resistance testing. 


requirements of the Quality Assurance Program. 


1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or 

replace components of metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within 

specified warranty period. 



1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer 

agrees to repair finish or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of 

factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 

1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 


2.1 PANEL MATERIALS 

A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip 

process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755. 

1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation; 

structural quality. 

2. Surface: Embossed finish. 

3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: 

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less 

than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. 

4. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer’s standard white or lightcolored 

acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a 

minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. 

B. Panel Sealants: 

1. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Continuous silicone sealant. 

2.2 INSULATION FOR PANEL CORES 

A. Mineral Wool Insulation: Non-combustible, rigid mineral wool insulation board that is water 

repellent with fibers oriented perpendicular to the panel faces. 

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING 

A. Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet, 

ASTM A 653G60 hot-dip galvanized, or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance unless 


B. Subgirts: Manufacturer's standard C or Z-shaped sections, 0.064 inch nominal thickness. 

C. Base or Sill Angles or Channels: 0.079 inch nominal thickness. 




A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws; bolts and nuts; self-locking rivets and bolts; end-welded 

studs; and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed 

fasteners with heads matching color of metal wall panels by means of plastic caps or factoryapplied 

coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers. 

2.5 FIRE RESISTIVE-CORE METAL WALL PANELS 

A. Exposed-Fastener, Fire Resistive-Core Metal Wall Panels: Mechanically attach panels to 

supports using exposed fasteners. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be 

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Kingspan: MF Fire Rated. 

b. Metl-Span; ThermalSafe Wall Panel. 

2. Facings: Fabricate panel with exterior and interior facings of same material and 

thickness. 

a. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.022 inch nominal thickness. 

b. Exterior Facing Finish: Two coats fluoropolymer. 

1) Color: Regal Gray. 

c. Interior Facing Finish: Manufacturer's standard siliconized polyester. 

1) Color: Polar White. 

d. Exterior Surface: Shallow ribs. 

3. Panel Coverage: 42 inches nominal. 

4. Panel Thickness: Seven inches. 

5. Thermal-Resistance Value (R-Value): 25. 


A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel 

assembly including trim, copings, fascia, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, 

fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels unless 


1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal wall 

panels. 

2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from 

material recommended by manufacturer. 

3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or 

closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1 inch thick, flexible closure strips; cut or 



premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or 

necessary to ensure weathertight construction. 

B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.018 inch minimum thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel 

sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather 

and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, 

jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and 

fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal wall panels. 


A. General: Fabricate and finish metal wall panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent 

possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated 

performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles 

and with dimensional and structural requirements. 

B. Fabricate metal wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel 

and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals. 

C. Provide panel profile, including intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. 

D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in 

SMACNA’s “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, 

and other characteristics of item indicated. 


3.1 PREPARATION 

A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, base angles, sills, and other miscellaneous wall panel 

support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal wall panel 

manufacturer's written recommendations. 

3.2 FIRE RESISTIVE-CORE METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION 

A. Foamed-Fire Resistive-Core Metal Wall Panels: Through fasten metal wall panels to supports 

at spacing and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Fully engage tongue and groove 

of adjacent panels. 

1. Install wall panels to supports with self-tapping fasteners. 

3.3 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and 

provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 



1. Install components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, 

copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and 

similar items. 

B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation 

instructions, and SMACNA’s “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual”. Provide concealed 

fasteners, where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with 

laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are 

installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer’s written installation instructions. On 

completion of metal wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal 

wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. 

B. After metal wall panel installation, clear drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant. 




SECTION 075323 - ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Adhered EPDM membrane roofing system. 


A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified 

uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to 

defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane 

roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight. 

B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under 

conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing 

manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 

C. Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that 

have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift 

pressure calculated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 

1. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: 44 sq. ft. 

2. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: 74 sq. ft. 

3. Corner Uplift Pressure: 112 sq. ft. 

4. “a” Distance: 8 ft. 

D. FM Approved Roof Assemblies. The contractor shall submit a RoofNav Contractor Package or 

an “Application for Acceptance of Roofing System” (FM Global form X2688) with detailed 

installation plans and materials submittals to FM Global for review prior to installation. 

1. Design and install roofs in accordance with the FM Global on-line RoofNav application 

at www.roofnav.com and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheets 1-29 “Roof 

Deck Securement and Above-Deck Roof Components”, and 1-49 “Perimeter Flashing”. 

The RoofNav data base application at www.roofnav.com can be used to access and 

apply the above referenced standards to roof designs. 

2. Roof Assemblies shall conform to a 1-hour listed system. 





B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and 

attachments to other work. 

C. Samples: For each product included in the roofing system. 


A. Research/evaluation reports. 

B. Field quality-control reports. 




A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is FM Approved for membrane 

roofing system identical to that used for this Project. 

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane 

roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive 

manufacturer's special warranty. 

C. Source Limitations: Obtain all components for membrane roofing system from the same 

manufacturer as membrane roofing or components approved by membrane roofing 

manufacturer. 

D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated, 

as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing agency. 

Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 

E. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS 

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather 

conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer’s written 

instructions and warranty requirements. 

1.8 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, 

in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that 

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. 



2. Wind Speed: A minimum peak wind speed of 72 miles per hour shall be the basis of the 

warrantee exclusions or “Hurricane” winds per the Beaufort scale. 


2.1 EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 

A. EPDM: ASTM D 4637, Type I, non-reinforced, uniform, flexible EPDM sheet. 




a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. 

b. Firestone Building Products. 

c. GAF Materials Corporation. 

d. Johns Manville. 

2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal. 

3. Exposed Face Color: Black. 

2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS 

A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer 

for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. 

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

B. Sheet Flashing: 60 mil thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application. 

C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer’s standard. 

D. Seaming Material: Manufacturer’s standard, synthetic-rubber polymer primer and three inch 

wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film. 

E. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance 

provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and 

acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. 

F. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide lap sealant, water cutoff mastic, metal termination bars, 

metal battens, pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and 

outside corner sheet flashings, reinforced EPDM securement strips, T-joint covers, in-seam 

sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories. 

G. Protection Mat: Woven or nonwoven polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fabric, water 

permeable and resistant to UV degradation, type and weight as recommended by roofing system 

manufacturer for application. 



2.3 ROOF INSULATION 

A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber 

mat facer on both major surfaces. 

1. Firestone, ISO 95+GL. 

2. GAF, EnergyGuard. 

3. John Manville, E’NRG’Y 3. 

B. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch 

per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where 

indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 

2.4 INSULATION ACCESSORIES 

A. Cold-Applied Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer’s recommended cold-applied two component 

foam polyurethane adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to another insulation layer or 

cover board. 

2.5 COVER BOARDS 

A. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/4 inch 

thick, factory primed. 

1. Georgia-Pacific Corporation; Dens Deck Prime. 

2.6 ROOFTOP SUPPORTS 

A. General: The use of wood block supports and straps is prohibited. 

B. Rooftop Supports: Provide factory-formed, rubber or high density polypropylene rooftop 

supports for all conduits and piping acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. 

Space supports at a maximum of eight feet on-center, and select support device appropriate for 

commodity being supported. 

1. Products: Products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to 

the following: Proposed “or equal” substitutions of products must be pre-approved in 

writing prior to bidding. 

a. PHP Systems. 

b. Cooper B-Line, Dura Block. 




3.1 INSULATION INSTALLATION 

A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to 

precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. 

B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for 

installing roof insulation. 

C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. 

D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation 

thickness is 2.7” or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer 

staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6” in each direction. 

E. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows: 

1. Set each bottom layer of insulation to concrete deck in two component foam 

polyurethane adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. Adhesive 

coverage rates shall be per the manufactures recommendation. 

2. Set each layer of insulation and coverboard in two component foam polyurethane 

adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. Adhesive coverage rates 

shall be per the manufactures recommendation. 

3.2 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION 

A. Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system 

manufacturer’s written instructions. Unroll membrane roofing and allow to relax before 

installing. 

B. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum 

dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. 

C. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by 

manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not apply to 

splice area of membrane roofing. 

D. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations, 

penetrations, and perimeters. 

E. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and 

firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofing according to manufacturer’s 

written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed 

edges of membrane roofing terminations. 

F. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements. 



3.3 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION 

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to 

membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow 

to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing. 

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet 

flashing. 

D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping 

sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of 

sheet flashing terminations. 

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through 

termination bars. 

3.4 ROOFTOP SUPPORTS 

A. Rooftop Supports: Install rooftop products as required to support commodities and in locations 

indicated. 


A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to 

inspect roofing installation on completion. 

B. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections 

indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. 




SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 



B. Shop Drawings: Show installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, 

elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop and fieldassembled 

work. 

1. Include details for forming, joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and 

trim, including pattern of seams, termination points, fixed points, expansion joints, 

expansion-joint covers, edge conditions, special conditions, and connections to adjoining 

work. 

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified. 


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 




A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA’s “Architectural Sheet Metal 

Manual” unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to 

repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of 

factory-applied finishes within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 




2.1 SHEET METALS 

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a 

strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. 

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip 

process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 

1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; 

structural quality. 

2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating 

designation, Grade 40; structural quality. 

3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: 

a. Two Coats Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less 

than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. 

4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, 

separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing 

and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured 

item unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and 

bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by 

manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item. 

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. 

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or 

factory-applied coating. 

2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: 

Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or 

Series 300 stainless steel. 

C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, 

class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain 

watertight. 

D. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; 

polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited 

movement. 



E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 


A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in 

SMACNA’s “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, 

metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to 

greatest extent possible. 

1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 

2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool 

marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form 

hems. 

3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not 

allowed on faces exposed to view. 

B. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric 

sealant. 

C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion 

joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than one inch deep, filled with butyl sealant 

concealed within joints. 

D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or 

from compatible, noncorrosive metal. 

E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, 

and solder. 

2.4 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS 

A. Roof-Edge Flashing Drip Edge and Fascia Cap: Fabricate in minimum 96 inch long, but not 

exceeding 10 foot long, sections. Furnish with six inch wide, joint cover plates. Fabricate from 

the following materials: 

1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick. 

2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch thick. 



A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in 

place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement so that completed sheet metal 

flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. Use fasteners, 

solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as 

required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 



1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, 

neat seams with minimum exposure of sealant. 

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight 

performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating 

sheet metal. 

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with 2 fasteners. Bend 

tabs over fasteners. 

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and 

tool marks. 

5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, 

protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other 

permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 

1. Coat the back side of uncoated sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating 

where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space 

movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or 

intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently 

watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than one 1 inch deep, 

filled with sealant concealed within joints. 

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood blocking not less than 1 1/4” for 

nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. 

E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. 

3.2 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and 

SMACNA’s “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual”. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, 

set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be 

permanently watertight and weather resistant. 

B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations 

in SMACNA’s “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of 

roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3” centers. 


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim 

are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturers written installation instructions. 




SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Copings. 

2. Roof-edge drainage systems. 

3. Reglets. 


A. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings roof-edge flashings tested 

according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the design pressures indicated on the Structural 

Drawings: 



B. Shop Drawings: For roof specialties. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, 

keyed details, and attachments to other work. Distinguish between plant and field-assembled 

work. 

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 


A. Product test reports. 

B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 



1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer 

agrees to repair finish or replace roof specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factoryapplied 

finishes within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 




2.1 EXPOSED METALS 

A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation. 

1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 

2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with 

ASTM A 755/A 755M. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to 

comply with coating and resin manufacturers’ written instructions. 

a. Two Coats Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. System consisting of primer and 

fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by 

weight. 

2.2 CONCEALED METALS 

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304. 

B. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation. 


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other 

miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation. 

1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color of 

sheet metal. 

2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip 

zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. 

B. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant of type, grade, class, and use 

classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application. 

C. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; 

polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited 

movement. 

2.4 COPINGS 

A. Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of formed-metal coping cap in section 

lengths not exceeding 12 feet, concealed anchorage; corner units, end cap units, and concealed 

splice plates with same finish as coping caps. 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering 

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the 

following: 



a. ATAS International, Inc. 

b. Hickman Company, W. P. 

c. Johns Manville. 

d. Metal-Era, Inc. 

e. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC. 

2. Coping-Cap Material: Zinc-coated steel, nominal thickness as required to meet 

performance requirements. 

a. Finish: Two coat fluoropolymer. 

b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

3. Exterior Cleat: Concealed continuous, galvanized-steel sheet. 

2.5 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering 

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. ATAS International, Inc. 

2. Hickman Company, W. P. 

3. Metal-Era, Inc. 

4. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC. 

B. Gutters: Manufactured in uniform section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, with matching corner 

units, ends, outlet tubes, and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1 inch above front 

edge. Furnish flat-stock gutter straps, gutter brackets, expansion joints, and expansion-joint 

covers fabricated from same metal as gutters. 

1. Fabricate from the following exposed metal: 

a. Zinc-Coated Steel: Nominal 0.028 inch thickness. 

2. Gutter Profile: Style K according to SMACNA’s “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual”. 

3. Gutter Size: 6 inches depth x six 6 inches width. 

4. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight. 

5. Gutter Supports: Gutter brackets with finish matching the gutters. 

6. Gutter Accessories: Wire ball downspout strainer and Flat ends. 

C. Downspouts: Plain rectangular complete with machine-crimped or smooth-curve elbows, 

manufactured from the following exposed metal. Furnish with metal hangers, from same 

material as downspouts, and anchors. 

1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Nominal 0.028 inch thickness. 

2. Downspout Size: 3 inches depth x four 4 inches width. 

D. Zinc-Coated Steel Finish: Two coat fluoropolymer. 

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 



2.6 REGLETS 



1. Fry Reglet Corporation. 

2. Hickman Company, W. P. 

3. Metal-Era, Inc. 

4. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC. 

B. Reglets: Manufactured units formed to provide secure reglet, from the following exposed 

metal: 

1. Stainless Steel: 0.020 inch thick. 

2. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight. 

3. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide reglets with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with 

neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top 

edge. 

C. Stainless-Steel Finish: No. 2B (bright, cold rolled, unpolished). 



A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Anchor roof 

specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use 

fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items, as 

required to complete roof-specialty systems. 

1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning and 

without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks. 

2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of sealant. 

3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify 

shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture. 

4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted. 

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from 

contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with 

bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 

1. Coat concealed side of stainless-steel roof specialties with bituminous coating where in 

contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 

C. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties. 

1. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 18 inches of corners 

or intersections unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 



2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint 

members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for 

installation at higher ambient temperatures. 

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood blocking not less than 1 1/4 

inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. 

E. Seal joints with sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer. 

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in 

joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F. 

3.2 COPING INSTALLATION 

A. Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with 

concealed fasteners. 

B. Anchor copings to meet performance requirements. 

1. Interlock face and back leg drip edges of snap-on coping cap into cleated anchor plates 

anchored to substrate at manufacturer's required spacing that meets performance 

requirements. 

3.3 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system according to 


B. Gutters: Join and seal gutter lengths. Allow for thermal expansion. Attach gutters to firmly 

anchored gutter supports spaced not more than 24 inches apart. Attach ends with rivets and 

seal with sealant to make watertight. Slope to downspouts. 

1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50 feet apart. 

Install expansion joint caps. 

C. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer’s standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers 

with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch away from walls; 

locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. 

3.4 REGLET AND COUNTERFLASHING INSTALLATION 

A. Surface-Mounted Reglets: Install reglets to receive flashings where flashing without embedded 

reglets is indicated on Drawings. Install at height so that inserted counterflashings overlap 4 

inches over top edge of base flashings. 

B. Counterflashings: Insert counterflashings into reglets or other indicated receivers; ensure that 

counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings. Lap counterflashing joints a 

minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant. Fit counterflashings tightly to base flashings. 




A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed. 




SECTION 078123 - INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes mastic and intumescent fire-resistive coatings (MIFRC). 

1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS 

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product. 

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 


A. Product certificates. 

B. Evaluation reports. 



A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by 

fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install 

manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. 

B. Mastic and intumescent fire-resistive coats located in the Sludge Loading Bay (Room 100) are 

Safety Significant, SSC’s (Structure, Systems or Components) based on the two hour fireresistive 

testing according to ASTM E 119 or UL 263 by a qualified testing agency. 



C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 




2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL 

A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of 

each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E 119 or UL 263 by 

a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing 

agency. 

1. Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted otherwise. 

C. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos. 

2.2 MASTIC AND INTUMESCENT FIRE-RESISTIVE COATINGS 

A. MIFRC: Manufacturer’s standard, factory-mixed, multicomponent system consisting of 

intumescent base coat and topcoat, and complying with indicated fire-resistance design. 



a. Albi Manufacturing, Division of StanChem Inc.; Albi Clad 800. 

b. Carboline Company, subsidiary of RPM International, Fireproofing Products Div.; 

AD Firefilm III. 

c. Isolatek International; Cafco SprayFilm-WB 3. 

2. Application: Designated for “conditioned interior space purpose”, use by a qualified 

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

3. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to 

requirements of fire-resistance design. 

4. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 

50, respectively, or less according to ASTM E 84. 

5. Finish: Rolled, spray-textured finish. 

a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and 

are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated. 

B. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer. 

C. Topcoat: Suitable for application over applied fireproofing; of type recommended in writing by 

fireproofing manufacturer for each fire-resistance design. 





A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during 

application. 

B. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in writing by 

fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory 

condition to receive fireproofing. 

C. For applications visible on completion of Project, repair substrates to remove surface 

imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of 

fireproofing. 

3.2 APPLICATION 

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with 

requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and 

according to each fire-resistance design. Verify that objects penetrating fireproofing are 

securely attached to substrates and that substrates receiving fireproofing are not obstructed by 

ducts, piping, equipment, or other suspended construction that will interfere with fireproofing 

application. 

B. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and 

products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, topcoats, 

finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work. 

C. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each 

area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in 

writing by fireproofing manufacturer. 

D. Extend fireproofing 12” onto all secondary steel, gussets and base plates that are directly 

welded or bolted into primary fireproofed members. The bottoms of base plates that are in direct 

contact with concrete are not to be fireproofing. 

E. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied, 

inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications. 

F. Finishes: Where indicated, apply fireproofing to produce the following finishes: 

1. Rolled, Spray-Textured Finish: Even finish produced by rolling spray-applied finish with 

a damp paint roller to remove drippings and excessive roughness. 


A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special 

inspections: 



1. Test and inspect as required by the IBC, 1704.11. 

B. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 

1. Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and retest. 

2. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results 

indicate insufficient thickness, and retest. 

C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 

3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING 

A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of 

Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean 

exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling. 

B. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction. 

C. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using 

manufacturers recommended trowel-applied product. 




SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 



B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design 

designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting 

agency’s illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit 

illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping 

manufacturer’s fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fireresistance-rated 

assembly for approval by the Hanford Fire Marshall’s Office. 


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. 

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified 

testing agency, for penetration firestopping. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in 

material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in 

construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the 

necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer’s products per specified 

requirements. Manufacturer’s willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to 

Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. 

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following 

requirements: 

1. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in 

“Penetration Firestopping Schedule”. Provide rated systems complying with the 

following requirements: 



a. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations 

listed by the following: 

1) UL in its “Fire Resistance Directory”. 

C. Penetration firestopping systems that penetrate into the Sludge Loading Bay (Room 100) 

envelope are Safety Significant, SSC’s (Structure, Systems or Components) based on the 

firestopping systems “F” Rating as listed in the UL in its “Fire Resistance Directory”. 





A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate 

temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when 

substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer’s written instructions using natural 

means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 

1.6 COORDINATION 

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration 

firestopping is installed according to specified requirements. 

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate 

penetration firestopping. 

C. Notify testing agency at least 7 days in advance of penetration firestopping installations; 

confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations. 


2.1 MANUFACTURERS 



1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 

2. Grace Construction Products. 

3. Hilti, Inc. 

4. 3M Fire Protection Products. 

5. Rectorseal. 

6. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. 

7. USG Corporation. 



2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 

A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according 

to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fireresistance 

rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be 

compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items 

if any. 

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings 

determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 

0.01 inch wg. 

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire-barrier walls. 

2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings 

determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 

0.01 inch wg. 

1. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions 

penetrated. 

D. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed 

indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. 

E. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to 

install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by 

penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency 

for firestopping indicated. 

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: 

a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation. 

b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to 

prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. 

c. Fire-rated form board. 

d. Fillers for sealants. 

2. Temporary forming materials. 

3. Substrate primers. 

4. Collars. 

5. Steel sleeves. 

2.3 FILL MATERIALS 

A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete 

floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial 

extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a 

neoprene gasket. 



B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during 

exposure to moisture. 

C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with 

intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. 

D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric 

sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet. 

E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, 

inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. 

F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum 

foil on one side. 

G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, 

fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a 

nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. 

H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled 

with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant 

additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect 

pillows/bags from being easily removed. 

I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand 

and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. 

J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of 

grade indicated below: 

2.4 MIXING 

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal 

surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless 

indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions. 

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping 

manufacturer’s written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), 

type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other 

items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance 

characteristics for application indicated. 



A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting 

performance of the Work. 





A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to 

comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and with the following requirements: 

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials 

that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping. 

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable 

of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles 

remaining from cleaning operation. 

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that 

manufacturer’s recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not 

allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. 

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining 

surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be 

permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. 

Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. 


A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer’s written installation 

instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. 

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during 

their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths 

required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible 

forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of 

firestopping. 

C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results: 

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and 

penetrating items, as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and 

penetrating items. 

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce 

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 



3.4 IDENTIFICATION 

A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels 

permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be 

visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical 

fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to 

surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 

1. The words “Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building 

Management of Any Damage”. 

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 

3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 

4. Date of installation. 

5. Manufacturer’s name. 

6. Installer's name. 


A. Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of 

testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements. 

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection 

reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. 


A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with 

cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and 

that do not damage materials, in which openings occur. 

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that 

penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 

If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove 

damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems 

complying with specified requirements. 

3.7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE 

A. Retain paragraphs in schedule below to suit Project. Where UL-classified systems are 

indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL’s “Fire Resistance Directory” under product 

Category XHEZ. 

B. Firestopping with No Penetrating Items located in Concrete Walls: 

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- 0001-0999. 

2. F-Rating: 2 hours. 



3. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating. 

C. Firestopping with No Penetrating Items located in GWB Walls: 

1. UL-Classified Systems: W-L- 0001-0999. 



D. Firestopping for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing located in Concrete Walls: 




E. Firestopping for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing located in GWB Walls: 




F. Firestopping for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing located in Concrete Walls: 


2. F-Rating: Two 2 hours. 


G. Firestopping for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing located in GWB Walls: 




H. Firestopping for Electrical Cables located in Concrete Walls: 




I. Firestopping for Electrical Cables located in GWB Walls: 




J. Firestopping for Cable Trays with Electric Cables located in Concrete Walls: 




K. Firestopping for Cable Trays with Electric Cables located in GWB Walls: 






L. Firestopping for Insulated Pipes located in Concrete Walls: 




M. Firestopping for Insulated Pipes located in GWB Walls: 




N. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants located in Concrete Walls: 




O. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants located in GWB Walls: 




P. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants located in Concrete Walls: 




Q. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants located in GWB Walls: 




R. Firestopping for Groupings of Penetrants located in Concrete Walls: 




S. Firestopping for Groupings of Penetrants located in GWB Walls: 









SECTION 078446 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions. 



B. Product Schedule: For each fire-resistive joint system. Include location and design designation 

of qualified testing agency. 

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency’s illustration 

for a particular fire-resistive joint system condition, submit illustration, with 

modifications marked, approved by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer’s fireprotection 

engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated 

assembly, for approval by the Hanford Fire Marshall’s office. 


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. 

B. Product test reports. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing fire-resistive joint system similar in 

material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in 

construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the 

necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified 

requirements. Manufacturer’s willingness to sell its fire-resistive joint system products to 

Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. 

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Fire-resistive joint systems shall comply with the following 

requirements: 

1. Fire-resistive joint system tests are performed by UL or a qualified testing agency 

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 



C. Fire-resistance-rated joint systems that seal joints into the Sludge Loading Bay (Room 100) 

envelope are Safety Significant, SSC’s (Structure, Systems or Components) based on the Fireresistive 

joint system’s “F” Rating as listed by UL in its “Fire Resistance Directory”. 





2.1 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 

A. Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist 

spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and 

maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire-resistive joint 

systems are installed. Fire-resistive joint systems shall accommodate building movements 

without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases. 

B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Ratings determined per 

ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079: 

1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of construction 

they will join. 




a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 

b. Grace Construction Products. 

c. Hilti, Inc. 

d. 3M Fire Protection Products. 

e. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. 

f. USG Corporation. 

C. Exposed Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Provide products with flame-spread and smokedeveloped 

indexes of less than 25 and 50, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. 

D. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming 

materials that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only 

components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified 

testing agency for systems indicated. 





A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

B. Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer’s written installation instructions 

and published drawings for products and applications indicated. 

C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during 

their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to 

achieve fire ratings indicated. 

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible 

forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fireresistive 

joint system. 

D. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the 

following results: 

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fireresistance 

ratings indicated. 

2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce 

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 


A. Identify fire-resistive joint systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels 

permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of joint edge so labels will be visible to 

anyone seeking to remove or penetrate joint system. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adheringtype 

labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels 

are placed. Include the following information on labels: 

1. The words “Warning - Fire-Resistive Joint System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building 

Management of Any Damage”. 

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 

3. Designation of applicable testing agency. 

4. Date of installation. 

5. Manufacturer's name. 

6. Installer's name. 


A. Inspecting Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and 

inspections. 



B. Where deficiencies are found or fire-resistive joint systems are damaged or removed due to 

testing, repair or replace fire-resistive joint systems so they comply with requirements. 

C. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection 

reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. 

3.4 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE 

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire 

Resistance Directory" under product Category XHBN. 

B. Wall-to-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: 

1. UL-Classified Systems: WW-D - 0000-0999. 

C. Floor-to-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: 

1. UL-Classified Systems: FW-D - 0000-0999. 

D. Head-of-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: 

1. UL-Classified Systems: HW-D - 0000-0999. 




SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Silicone joint sealants. 

2. Latex joint sealants. 


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. 

B. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 

3. Joint-sealant formulation. 

4. Joint-sealant color. 



B. Warranties. 

1.4 WARRANTY 

A. Special Installer’s Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which Installer agrees to repair 

or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified 

in this Section within specified warranty period. 


B. Special Manufacturer’s Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which joint-sealant 

manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with 

performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 





2.1 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. 




a. BASF Building Systems. 

b. Dow Corning Corporation. 

c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones. 

d. May National Associates, Inc. 

e. Pecora Corporation. 

f. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division. 

g. Tremco Incorporated. 

2. Type: Single component (S). 

3. Grade: Nonsag (NS). 

4. Class: 50. 

5. Uses Related to Exposure: Nontraffic (NT). 

2.2 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, 

Grade NF. 




a. BASF Building Systems. 

b. Bostik, Inc. 

c. May National Associates, Inc. 

d. Pecora Corporation. 

e. Tremco Incorporated. 

2.3 JOINT SEALANT BACKING 

A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), and of size and 

density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant 

performance. 

B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant 

manufacturer. 




A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of 

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate 

tests and field tests. 

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants 

and sealant backing materials. 

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces 

adjacent to joints. 



A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to 

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer’s written instructions. 

1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 

2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do 

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint 

sealants. 

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as 

indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to 

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant 

bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with 

adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or 

by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling 

without disturbing joint seal. 


A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint 

sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. 

B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position 

required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint 

widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and 

replace them with dry materials. 



C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants 

and backs of joints. 

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time 

backings are installed: 

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow 

optimum sealant movement capability. 

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or 

curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form 

smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure 

contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not 

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 

3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

F. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods 

and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of 

products in which joints occur. 


A. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure or 

noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove 

sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates or to comply with other requirements. Retest 

failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 

1. Joint Locations: 

a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. 

b. Joints between metal panels. 

c. Joints between different materials listed above. 

d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and louvers. 

e. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. 

f. Other joints as indicated. 

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone. 

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors. 

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 




a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 

b. Other joints as indicated. 

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone. 


D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 


a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. 

b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. 

c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of concrete walls and partitions. 

d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors. 

e. Other joints as indicated. 

2. Joint Sealant: Latex. 





SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes hollow-metal work. 


A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to 

NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 



B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, 

preparations for hardware, and other details. 

C. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for 

details and openings as those on Drawings. 




A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing 

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based 

on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 

B. Fire-resistance-rated hollow metal doors and frames that are located in the Sludge Loading Bay 

(Room 100) envelope are Safety Significant, SSC’s (Structure, Systems or Components) based 

on NFPA 80 and either NFPA 252 or UL 10B fire testing. 










1. Amweld International, LLC. 

2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 

3. Republic Doors and Frames. 

4. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 

2.2 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES 

A. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. At locations indicated in the Door and 

Frame Schedule. 

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 

2. Doors: 

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. 

b. Thickness: 1 3/4 inches. 

c. Face: Metallic-coated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch. 

d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. 

e. Core: Manufacturer’s standard. 

3. Frames: 

a. Materials: Metallic-coated, steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. 

b. Construction: Full profile welded. 

4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 

2.3 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 

A. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. At locations indicated in the Door and 

Frame Schedule. 

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 

2. Doors: 

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. 

b. Thickness: 1 3/4 inches. 

c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, with 

minimum A40 coating. 

d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. 

e. Core: Polystyrene. 



3. Thermal-Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) 

of not less than 4.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 

4. Frames: 

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with 

minimum A40 coating. 

b. Construction: Full profile welded. 

5. Exposed Finish: Prime. 

2.4 FRAME ANCHORS 

A. Jamb Anchors: 

1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 

inch thick. 

2. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete: Minimum 3/8 inch diameter bolts 

with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat 

reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. 

3. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Structural Steel Sub-Framing: Minimum 1/4 

inch diameter bolts and fasteners. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat 

reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. 

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and 

as follows: 

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with 2 holes to receive fasteners. 

2.5 MATERIALS 

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed 

applications. 

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. 

C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill 

phosphatized. 

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008 or 

ASTM A 1011, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153, Class B. 

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153. 

E. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing). 

F. Glazing: Section 088000 “Glazing”. 




A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form 

metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, 

fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly 

identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. 

B. Hollow-Metal Doors: 

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit 

moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 

C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling 

limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal 

as frames. 

1. Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated 

from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt 

welding. 

2. Provide countersunk, flat or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners 

unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least 4 spot welds per anchor. 

However, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at 

bottoms of jambs. 

4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: 

a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of 

frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 

1) 4 anchors per jamb 84 inches in height. 

2) 6 anchors per jamb 120 inches in height. 

b. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top 

and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 

c. Postinstalled Bolted Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and 

bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 

D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised 

hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to 

SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door 

hardware. 

2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for 

preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware. 

2.7 STEEL FINISHES 

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer’s standard primer. 



1. Shop Primer: SDI A250.10. 



A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with 

SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent 

anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving 

surfaces smooth and undamaged. 

a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. 

b. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been 

properly set and secured. 

c. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as 

necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, 

and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. 

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 

4. In-Place Concrete Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion 

anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed 

faces. 

5. In-Place Structural Steel Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled bolts. 

Countersink bolts, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 

6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, 

twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: 

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees 

from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line 

parallel to plane of wall. 

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on 

parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. 

B. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified 

below. Shim as necessary. 

1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 

C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 “Glazing” and with hollowmetal 

manufacturer’s written instructions. 

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat or oval head machine screws spaced uniformly not 

more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner. 




A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final 

inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace 

defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. 

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after 

installation. 

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of 

prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. 




SECTION 083323 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes: 

1. Fire-rated, insulated service doors. 


A. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Exterior overhead coiling doors shall withstand the 

wind loads, the effects of gravity loads, and loads and stresses within limits and under 

conditions indicated according to SEI/ASCE 7. 

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on the Structural Drawings. 

B. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance Performance: Provide impact-protective overhead coiling 

doors that pass missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests when tested according to ASTM E 1886 

and ASTM E 1996. 

1. Large Missile Test: For overhead coiling doors located within 30 feet of grade. 

C. Seismic Performance: Overhead coiling doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions 

determined according to SEI/ASCE 7. 


A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. 

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed 

in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to 

other work. 

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required 

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field 

connection. 

2. Show locations of replaceable fusible links. 

3. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 





A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For overhead coiling doors, accessories, and components, 

from manufacturer. 

B. Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire-rated, and that 

exceed size limitations of labeled assemblies. 


A. Maintenance Data. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer’s authorized representative who is trained and approved 

for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. 

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled 

by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to 

neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B. 

C. The fire-resistance-rated insulated coiling service door is a Safety Significant, SSC’s (Structure, 

Systems or Components) based on NFPA 80 and either NFPA 252 or UL 10B fire testing. 



D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, 

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 


2.1 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION 

A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats, designed to 

withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. 

Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended 

by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows: 

1. Insulation: Fill slats for insulated doors with manufacturer's standard thermal insulation 

complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, 

respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within slat faces. 

2. Metal Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match metal of exterior curtain-slat face. 

B. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer’s standard angles or channels and angles of same material 

and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain 



2.2 HOOD 

curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide 

adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent over travel of curtain. 

A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at 

opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and 

bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any 

portion of between-jamb mounting, which projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with 

intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging. 

1. Exterior-Mounted Doors: Fabricate hood to act as weather protection and with a 

perimeter sealant-joint-bead profile for applying joint sealant. 

2.3 LOCKING DEVICES 

A. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by 

padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side. 

B. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage 

power supply when door is locked. 

2.4 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES 

A. Weatherseals: Equip each exterior door with weather-stripping gaskets fitted to entire perimeter 

of door for a weathertight installation, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Push/Pull Handles: Equip the door with emergency-operated lifting handles on each side of 

door, finished to match door. 

C. Automatic-Closing Device for Fire-Rated Doors: Equip each fire-rated door with an automaticclosing 

device that is inoperative during normal door operations and that has a governor unit 

complying with NFPA 80 and an easily tested and reset release mechanism designed to be 

activated by the following: 

1. Replaceable fusible links with temperature rise and melting point of 165 deg F mounted 

on inside of door opening. 

2. Building fire-detection and alarm systems and manufacturer’s standard door-holderrelease 

devices. 

2.5 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM 

A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer’s standard mechanism with an 

adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a 

spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or selflubricating 

graphite bearings for rotating members. 



B. Brackets: Manufacturer’s standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel 

plate. 

2.6 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS 

A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by 

door manufacturer for door and operation-cycles requirement specified, with electric motor and 

factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, 

remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories 

required for proper operation. 

1. Comply with NFPA 70. 

2. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and 

NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24 V, ac or dc. 

B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than 

number of cycles per hour indicated for each door. 

C. Electric Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure 

type, and efficiency requirements specified in Division 11 Section “Common Motor 

Requirements for Equipment” unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Electrical Characteristics: 

a. Phase: Single phase. 

b. Volts: 115 V. 

c. Hertz: 60. 

2. Motor Type and Controller: Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch) for 

motor exposure indicated. 

3. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, 

accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 

eight (8) in/sec. and not more than 12 in/sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or 

service factor. 

4. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring: 

Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Obstruction Detection Device: Equip motorized door with indicated external automatic safety 

sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening, activation delays closing. 

1. Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping 

mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device. Connect to control circuit 

using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable. Provide self-monitoring 

capability designed to interface with door operator control circuit to detect damage to or 

disconnection of sensing device. 

E. Remote-Control Station: Momentary-contact, three-button control station with push-button 

controls labeled “Open”, “Close”, and “Stop”. 



1. Interior units, full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose 

NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure. 

F. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for 

emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation 

does not exceed 25 lbf. 

G. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect 

mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency 

manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount 

mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically 

prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. 

H. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch 

adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation. 

2.7 DOOR ASSEMBLY 

A. Insulated Service Door: Overhead fire-rated coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking 

metal slats. 




a. Cookson Company. 

b. Cornell Iron Works, Inc. 

c. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc. 

d. Overhead Door Corporation. 

e. Raynor. 

f. Wayne-Dalton Corp. 

g. Windsor Door. 

B. Operation Cycles: Not less than 20,000. 

C. Fire Rating: 2 hours. 

D. Curtain R-Value: 4.5 deg F x h x sq. ft/Btu. 

E. Door Curtain Material: Galvanized steel. 

F. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 2 and 5/8 inch center-to-center height. 

1. Insulated-Slat Interior Facing: Metal. 

G. Curtain Jamb Guides: Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats. 

H. Hood: Galvanized steel. 

1. Shape: Round. 



2. Mounting: Face of wall. 

I. Locking Devices: Equip door with slide bolt for padlock. 

J. Electric Door Operator: 

1. Usage Classification: Medium duty, up to 15 cycles per hour. 

2. Motor Exposure: Exterior, wet, and humid. 

3. Emergency Manual Operation: Push-up type. 

4. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic pneumatic sensor edge on bottom bar; selfmonitoring 

type. 

5. Remote-Control Station: Interior. 

K. Door Finish: 

1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Gray color as selected from manufacturer's full 

range. 

2. Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match finish of exterior curtain-slat face. 



A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, 

anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written 

instructions and as specified. 

B. Fire-Rated Doors: Install according to NFPA 80. 

C. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of 

warp, twist, or distortion. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by 

manufacturer. Adjust seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter. 

3.2 DEMONSTRATION 

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to 

adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors. 




SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes: 

1. Mechanical door hardware for the following: 

a. Swinging doors. 

2. Permanent lock cores to be installed by Owner. 



B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following: 

1. Wiring Diagrams: For signal and control wiring and including the following: 

a. Details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security 

systems. 


D. Other Action Submittals: 

1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing 

fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and 

diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work 

to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 

a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as 

in the Contract Documents. 

b. Content: Include the following information: 

1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each 

door and frame. 

2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor 

plans and to door and frame schedule. 

3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, 

function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. 

2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner’s 

final keying instructions for locks. 




A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products to employ trained workers and an Architectural 

Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, 

Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 

B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing 

consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and 

extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as follows: 

1. For door hardware, an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). 

C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door 

hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a 

qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive 

pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do 

not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. 

1. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more 

than 1/2 inch high. 

2. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door 

will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the 

leading edge of the door. 


A. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 

1.5 WARRANTY 


replace components of door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified 

warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise 

indicated. 


2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE 

A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 “Door Hardware Schedule” Article 

to comply with requirements in this Section. 



1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named 

manufacturers’ products. 

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive 

qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 “Door Hardware Schedule” 

Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 

2.2 HINGES 

1. Named Manufacturers’ Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for 

each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. 

Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 “Door Hardware Schedule” Article. 

A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollowmetal 

doors and hollow-metal frames. 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 

following: 

a. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 

b. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. 

2.3 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES 

A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer’s standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with 

requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended 

to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch. 

1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three piece antifriction latch-bolts, as recommended by 

manufacturer. 

B. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Security Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; 

Series 1000. 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product 

indicated on schedule: 

a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 

2.4 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS 

A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3. 



a. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 



2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS 

A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel 

silver. 



a. Medeco Security Locks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 

B. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. 

Provide six construction master keys. 

2.6 KEYING 

A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, 

Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. 

1. Existing System: 

a. Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. 

B. Keys: Nickel silver or Brass. 

1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include 

the following notation: 

a. Notation: “DO NOT DUPLICATE”. 

2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following: 

a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. 

b. Master Keys: Two. 

c. Grand Master Keys: Two. 

2.7 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS 

A. Astragals: BHMA A156.22. 

2.8 SURFACE CLOSERS 

A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and 

latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with 

manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, 

exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable 

to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 





a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 

2.9 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS 

A. Wall and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16; polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum 

base metal. 



a. Trimco. 

2.10 DOOR GASKETING 

A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length 

for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or 

flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by 

manufacturer. 



2.11 THRESHOLDS 

a. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 

A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated. 



a. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 

2.12 MAGNETIC CONTACT SENSORS 

A. Low Voltage Magnetic Contact Sensors: See electrical drawings and specifications. 


A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared 

for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially 

recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not 



permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door 

hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Fire-Rated Applications: 

a. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided: 

1) Closers to doors and frames. 

2) Surface-mounted exit devices. 

2. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors. 

3. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and 

elsewhere as indicated. 


A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. 

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, 

temporary protective covering before shipping. 



A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames 

according to ANSI/SDI A250.6. 

B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless 

otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 

C. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions. Where 

cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be 

painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface 

protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install 

surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment 

substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space 

fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. 

D. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than 

the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 

inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for 

door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. 



E. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction 

period. 

1. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation. 

F. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant 

complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants”. 

G. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door 

hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. 

H. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 

I. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. 

J. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure 

proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as 

intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and 

ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 

3.2 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 

Door Hardware Group No. 1. 

Locations: #101, and #106; each to have the following: 

Qty. Item Manufacturer Product Finish 

3 ea Hinges McKinney T4A3786 NRP 4 ½”x4 ½” 26D 

1 ea Exit Device Von Duprin 98L-EO-F 626 

1 ea Strike Von Duprin 299F Dull Black 

1 ea Closer Corbin-Ruswin 210-A11-M4-M73-M103 626 

1 ea Floor Stop Trimco 1211 630 

1 ea Threshold Pemko 2001AT x 36” Mill fnsh alum 

17 ft Gasketing Pemko 29310CS Clear andz alum 


Locations: #102; is to have the following: 



1 ea Exit Device Von Duprin 98L-F 626 


1 ea Cylinder Housing Medeco 32-0475H 626 

1 ea Const. Core - - - 

1 ea Perm. Core Medeco 32W4201-B3 626 

1 ea Closer Corbin-Russwin DC6 210-A11-M4-M73-M103 626 







Locations: #103; each to have the following: 



1 ea Lockset Corbin-Russwin ML2010-LWA 626 

1 ea Closer Corbin-Russwin 210-A11-M4-M73-M103 626 


Locations: #104 and #201; each to have the following: 



1 ea Exit Device Von Duprin 98TL-BE-F 626 





1 ea Contact Sensor See Electrical See Electrical - 


Is not used. 


Locations: #107 to have the following: 



1 ea Mullion Von Duprin 9954-10’-0” 626 

2 ea Exit Device Von Duprin 98L-BE-F 626 





1 set Astragal Pemko 297AS x120” Clear andz alum 


Locations: #108 to have the following: 



1 ea Mullion Von Duprin 9954-10’-0” 626 

1 ea Exit Device Von Duprin 98L-NL-F 626 



1 ea Cylinder Housing Medeco 32-0475H 626 



1 ea Const. Core - - - 

1 ea Perm. Core Medeco 32W4201-B3 626 





1 set Astragal Pemko 297AS x120” Clear andz alum 


Locations: #202 has to have the following: 





1 ea Closer Corbin-Russwin DC6210-A11-M4-M73-M103 626 

1 ea Wall Stop Trimco 1270CV 630 






SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 





A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested 

according to ASTM E 119. 

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS 

A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel 

studs and runners of equivalent minimum base-metal thickness. 

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 

2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 

B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following in thickness not less than 

indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs: 

1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes 

due to deflection of structure above. 

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be 


1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 

2) MBA Building Supplies; Slotted Deflecto Track. 

3) Scafco; Standard Slotted Track. 

C. Firestop Tracks: Manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement 

of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in 

thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 



D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width 

indicated. 

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch. 

E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053 inch minimum base-metal thickness, with 

minimum 1/2 inch wide flanges. 

1. Depth: 1 and 1/2 inches. 

2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1 and 1/2 by 1 and 1/2 inches, 0.068 inch thick, galvanized 

steel. 


A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power and 

other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 



A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply 

to framing installation. 

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, 

grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. 

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. 

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing 

members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 

3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES 

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than 

spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior concrete walls or dissimilar metals at exterior 

walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. 

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. 

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural 

supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to 

terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above 

ceiling. 



1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to 

produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished 

assemblies. 

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; 

install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. 

b. Extend jamb studs to underside of overhead structure. 

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required 

for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to 

match framing required above door heads. 

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated 

assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to 

underside of solid structure. 

E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 

1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 




SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Interior gypsum board. 





A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and 

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an 

independent testing agency. 

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical 

to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to 

ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 

2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD 

A. Gypsum Board, Type C: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to have increased fireresistive 

capability. 



a. CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Type C. 

b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; Fireguard C. 

c. Lafarge North America Inc.; Firecheck Type C. 

d. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Fire-Shield C. 

e. USG Corporation; Firecode C Core. 

2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 

3. Long Edges: Tapered. 



2.3 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS 

A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, with fiberglass mat laminated 

to both sides and with manufacturer’s standard edges. 



a. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Sheathing. 

b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; Dens-Glass Gold. 

c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond, e(2)XP. 

d. USG Corporation; Securock Glass Mat Sheathing. 

2. Core: 1/2 inch, regular type. 

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES 

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced 

galvanized steel sheet. 

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS 

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. 

B. Joint Tape: 

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible 

with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 


A. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 


A. Finish: Smooth. 


3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS 

A. Comply with ASTM C 840. 



B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold 

damaged. 

C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural 

abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide spaces at these locations and trim edges 

with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting 

structural surfaces with fire-resistive joint systems as indicated. 

D. Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used 

for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

E. Allow for field inspection of fastener spacing prior taping and applying joint compound. 

F. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. 

G. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not 

intended to receive tape. 

H. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to 

ASTM C 840: 

1. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. 

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections. 

I. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove 

from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise 

damaged during drywall application. 

J. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 




SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Resilient base. 



B. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer’s standard-size Samples but not 

less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. 


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive 

resilient products. 

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by 

manufacturer. 

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been 

completed. 


2.1 RESILIENT BASE 

A. Resilient Base: 




a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 

b. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. 

c. Flexco, Inc. 

d. Johnsonite. 

e. Roppe Corporation, USA. 

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 



1. Material Requirement: Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic). 

2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 

3. Style: Cove (base with toe). 

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. 

D. Height: 4 inches. 

E. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length. 

F. Outside Corners: Preformed. 

G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed. 

H. Finish: Satin. 

I. Colors and Patterns: Gray color as selected from full range of industry colors. 

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS 

A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and 

substrate conditions indicated. 



A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of 

resilient products. 

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching 

compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. 

C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to 

be installed. 

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed 

at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 

D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before 

installation. 

3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. 



B. Apply resilient base to GWB walls, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base 

is required. 

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of 

adjacent pieces aligned. 

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in 

continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. 


A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient 

products. 

B. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. 




SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following 

exterior substrates: 

1. Steel. 

2. Galvanized metal. 


A. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application 

instructions. 

B. Samples: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat. 

C. Product List: For each product indicated. Include printout of current “MPI Approved Products 

List” for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS 

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are 

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Paint: One gal. of each material and color applied. 



A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be 

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in other Part 2 articles 

for the paint category indicated. 



2.2 PAINT, GENERAL 

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed 

in its “MPI Approved Products List”. 

B. Material Compatibility: 

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another 

and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by 

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by 

manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. 

C. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 

2.3 METAL PRIMERS 

A. Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive for Metal: MPI #79. 

1. Akzo Nobel Paints; Devoe High Performance Coatings, Devguard 4160 Multi-Purpose 

Tank & Structural Primer, 4160. 

2. Columbia Paint; Industrial, Brushable Metal Primer-Red, 07-022. 

3. Kelly-Moore; Kelly-Moore Professional, Kel-Guard Alkyd Rust Inhibitive Primer, 1710- 

120. 

4. PPG; Pittsburgh Paints, Porter Paints, Porter Guard Alkyd Metal Primer – Red, PP272. 

5. Rodda; Barrier III HS, High Solids Rust Inhibitive Metal Primer, 70 82951. 

6. Sherwin-Williams; Protective & Marine, Kem Kromik Universal Primer, B50WZ1. 

B. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134. 

1. Akzo Nobel Paints; Devoe High Performance Coatings, Devflex 4020 Direct to Metal 

Primer & Flat Finish, 4020PF. 

2. Columbia Paint; Industrial, Universal H2O Metal Primer – White, 05-550-PP. 

3. Kelly-Moore; Premium, Acry-Shield 100% Acrylic Metal Primer, 1725-100. 

4. PPG; PPG, Int/Ext WB Industrial Primer, 90-912. 

5. Rodda; Rodda Paint, Metal Master Primer – White, 508901. 

6. Sherwin-Williams; Industrial & Marine, DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish, B66W1. 

2.4 WATER-BASED PAINTS 

A. Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #164. 

1. Akzo Nobel Paints; Devoe High Performance Coatings, Devflex WB Acrylic SG 

Enamel, 4216L. 

2. Columbia Paint; Hi-Performance, Acry-Shield Gloss Enamel, 05-260. 

3. Kelly-Moore; Acry-Sheild, 100% Acrylic Gloss Enamel, 1260. 



4. PPG; Pitt-Tech Plus, Int./Ext. High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamel, 90-1310. 

5. Rodda; Metal Master, W.B. Light Industrial Coatings - Gloss, 33580. 

6. Sherwin-Williams; Industrial & Marine, Sher-Cryl HPA Gloss, B66W311. 



A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements 

for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing 

finishes and primers. 

C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 


A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations in “MPI Manual” 

applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. 

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, 

and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie 

coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. 


A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in “MPI 

Manual”. 

B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, 

roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color 

breaks. 


A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of 

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and 

leave in an undamaged condition. 

B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or 

defaced painted surfaces. 



3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE 

A. Steel Substrates: 

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System: 

a. Prime Coat: Approved shop primer or prime with alkyd, anti-corrosive for 

metal, MPI #79. 

b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching 

topcoat. 

c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, gloss (Gloss 

Level 6), MPI #164. 

B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System: 


a. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified or prime 

with alkyd, anti-corrosive for metal, MPI #134. 

b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching 

topcoat. 

c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, gloss (Gloss 




SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following 

interior substrates: 

1. Concrete. 

2. Steel. 

3. Cast iron. 

4. Galvanized metal. 

5. Gypsum board. 


A. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to 

ASTM D 523. 

B. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application 

instructions. 

B. Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide high-performance coating systems with finishes 

meeting one of the following as determined by testing identical products by UL or another 

testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing per ASTM E 84. 

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are 

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Paint: One gal. of each material and color applied. 








2.2 PAINT, GENERAL 

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed 

in its “MPI Approved Products List”. 


1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another 

and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by 

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by 

manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. 

C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS 

A. Primer Sealer, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC: MPI #149. 

1. Akzo Nobel Paints; Glidden Professional, Lifemaster No VOC Interior Acrylic Primer, 

9116. 

2. Columbia Paint; Pure Coat, Low Odor Primer 05-574. 

3. Kelly-Moore; Kelly-Moore Premium, Acy-Plex Zero VOC Interior Wall Primer and 

Undercoat, 973-100. 

4. PPG; Pure Performance, Interior Latex Primer 9-900. 

5. Parker Paint; Enviro Kote, Primer 1849. 

6. Rodda; Horizon Interior, Wall Primer 503501. 

7. Sherwin-Williams; Harmony, Interior Latex Primer, B11 Series. 


A. Primer, Rust-Inhibitive, Water Based: MPI #107. 

1. Akzo Nobel Paints; Devoe Paint, DevFlex 4020 Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish, 

4020PF. 

2. Columbia Paint; Industrial, Universal H2O Metal Primer, 05-550-PP. 

3. PPG; Pitt-Tech Plus, Interior/Exterior DTM Industrial Primer, 90-912. 

4. Parker Paint; Latex Metal Prime, 9195. 

5. Rodda; Professional Maintenance, Metal Master Primer, 508901. 



6. Sherwin-Williams; Pro Industrial, Pro-Cryl Universal Primer B66 Series. 

B. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134. 

1. Akzo Nobel Paints; Devoe Paint, DevFlex 4020 Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish, 

4020PF. 

2. Columbia Paint; Industrial, Universal H2O Metal Primer, 05-550-PP. 

3. Kelly-Moore; Kelly-Moore Premium, Acy-Shield 100% Acrylic Metal Primer, 1725-100. 

4. PPG; Int/Ext WB Industrial Primer, 90-912. 

5. Parker Paint; Latex Metal Prime, 9195. 

6. Rodda; Metal Master Primer, 508901. 

7. Sherwin-Williams; Pro Industrial, Pro-Cryl Universal Primer B66 Series. 

2.5 WATER-BASED PAINTS 

A. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3): MPI #145. 

1. Akzo Nobel Paints; Glidden Professional, Diamond 450 Eggshell, 7200. 

2. Columbia Paint; Pure Coat, Low Odor Acrylic Eggshell 05-577. 

3. Kelly-Moore; Kelly-Moore Premium, Enviro Coat Zero VOC Eggshell Paint, 1510-121. 

4. PPG; Pure Performance, Interior Eggshell Latex, 9-500. 

5. Parker Paint; Enviro Kote, Klean Air Eggshell 4350. 

6. Rodda; Horizon Interior, Satin, 423501x. 

7. Sherwin-Williams; Harmony, Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B9 Series. 

B. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #147. 

1. Akzo Nobel Paints; Glidden Professional, Diamond 450 Semi-Gloss, 7400. 

2. Columbia Paint; Pure Coat, Low Odor Acrylic Semi-Gloss 05-572. 

3. Kelly-Moore; Kelly-Moore Premium, Enviro Coat Zero VOC Interior Semi-Gloss 

Enamel, 1520-1211. 

4. PPG; Pure Performance, Interior Semi-Gloss Latex, 9-500. 

5. Parker Paint; Enviro Kote, Klean Air Semi-gloss, 5950. 

6. Rodda; Horizon Interior, Semi Gloss (423501x) 

7. Sherwin-Williams; Harmony, Interior Latex Semi-Gloss, B10 Series. 

2.6 WALL COATINGS 

A. Clear Sealer, Water Based, for Concrete Walls: MPI #99. 

1. Akzo Nobel Paints; Glidden Professional, Concrete Coatings Clear Acrylic Sealer, 3215. 

2. Columbia Paint; Tamms, Clearseal, WB 300. 

3. PPG; Perma-Crete, Plex-Seal W.B. Interior/Exterior Sealer, 3215. 

4. Parker Paint; Monochem, Aquaseal, W20. 

5. Rodda; Vexon, Starseal, 1315. 

6. Sherwin-Williams; H&C, Concrete & Masonry Waterproofing Sealer, 50032A. 







B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter 

as follows: 

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 

2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing 


D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 


A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations in “MPI Manual” 

applicable to substrates indicated. 

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are 

not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, 

provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to 

reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, 

and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 


coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. 


A. Apply paints according to manufacturer’s written instructions and to recommendations in “MPI 

Manual”. 

B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, 

roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color 

breaks. 




A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of 

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and 

leave in an undamaged condition. 

B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or 

defaced painted surfaces. 

3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE 

A. Concrete Substrates, Substrates: 

1. Water-Based Clear Sealer System: 

a. First Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete walls, MPI #99. 

b. Topcoat: Sealer, water based, for concrete walls, MPI #99. 

B. Concrete Substrates, NonTraffic Surfaces: 

1. Water-Based Clear Sealer System: 

a. First Coat: Sealer, water-based, for concrete, MPI #99. 

b. TopCoat: Sealer, water-based, for concrete, MPI #99. 

2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: 

a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based MPI #107. 

b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss 


C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 


a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. 

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. 

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss 


D. Gypsum Board Substrates: 



a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149. 

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. 

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #145. 



SECTION 099600 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance coating systems on 

the following substrates: 

1. Interior Substrates: 


a. Concrete, vertical and horizontal surfaces. 

b. Steel. 

c. Galvanized metal. 

A. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 

B. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and 

application instructions. 

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. 

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 

2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 

3. Label each coat of each Sample. 

4. Label each Sample for location and application area. 

C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations 

indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 

2. Printout of current “MPI Approved Products List” for each product category specified in 

Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 

3. VOC content. 


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective 

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 



1. Coatings: One gal. of each; finish coat material and color applied. 


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide high-performance coating systems with finishes 

meeting one of the following as determined by testing identical products by UL or another 

testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing per ASTM E 84. 

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient 

temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS 

A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air 

temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. 

B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 

degrees F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 





1. Cloverdale Paint. 

2. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 

3. Rodda Paint Co. 

4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be 





2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL 

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and are listed in 

“MPI Approved Products List”. 


1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one 

another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as 

demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 

2. For each coat in a coating system, provide products recommended in writing by 

manufacturers of topcoat for use in coating system and on substrate indicated. 

3. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system. 

C. Coating Chemistry: Provide materials that are chloride and PCB free. 

D. Finish Coat Properties: Select materials to facilitate decontamination and general cleaning 

processes. 

2.3 BLOCK FILLERS 

A. Concrete Bug Hole Filler, Epoxy: MPI #116. 

1. Cloverdale Paint; High Performance, Epoxy block Filler, 83065. 

2. PPG; Aquapon, Epoxy Block Filler, 97-685. 

3. Sherwin-Williams; Industrial & Marine, Kem Cati-Coat HS Epoxy Filler/Sealer, B42 

Series. 


A. Primer, Epoxy, Anti-Corrosive, for Metal: MPI #101. 

1. Cloverdale Paint; Cloverdale Paint, ClovaPrime 21 Epoxy Primer Grey, 83021. 

2. PPG; Amerocoat 35, Amerlock, 400. 

3. Sherwin-Williams; Industrial & Marine, Duraplate 235 Multi-Purpose Epoxy, B67 

Series. 

2.5 EPOXY COATINGS 

A. Epoxy, Gloss: MPI #77. 

1. Cloverdale Paint; Hi Performance, Clovacoat 300, 83300. 

2. PPG; Aquapon 35, Aquapon 35 Polyamide Epoxy Gloss, 95 Series. 

3. Sherwin-Williams; Industrial & Marine, Tile-Clad HS Epoxy, B62WZ111/B60VZ70. 

2.6 SLIP RESISTANT SURFACE ADDITIVE 

A. Paint Finish Coat Admixture. 



1. Rust-Oleum; Epoxy Shield, Aluminum Oxide Powder. 


A. Testing of Coating Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating materials. 

Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If 

coating materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at 

Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being 

used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying 

coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with 

rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from 

previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with complying materials, the two coatings are 

incompatible. 





1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture 

meter as follows: 

a. Concrete: 12 percent. 

B. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. 

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing 


D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor’s acceptance of substrates and 

conditions. 


A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations in “MPI Architectural 

Painting Specification Manual” applicable to substrates indicated. 



B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are 

not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, 

provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to 

reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection. 

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, 

grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 


coat as required to produce coating systems indicated. 

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do 

not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted 

in manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Abrasive blast clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, “Brush-Off Blast 

Cleaning”. 

E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods 

recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following: 

1. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, “Commercial Blast Cleaning”. 

F. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop 

paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with 

SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. 

G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by 

mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of 

subsequently applied coatings. 


A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and 

recommendations in “MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual”. 

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 

2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. 

Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment with prime 

coat only. 

3. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to 

match exposed surfaces. 

4. Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, 

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 

B. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film 

has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. 



C. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush 

marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp lines and color 

breaks. 

3.4 SLIP RESISTANT SURFACE ADDITIVE 

A. Mix slip resistive surface additive into the final topcoat at rate recommended by manufacture. 

1. Install at location indicated on drawing to receive surface treatment. 


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing and 

inspecting agency to inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness. 

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing. 

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with 

coating manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and 

apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating 

manufacturer's written recommendations. 


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from 

Project site. 

B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by 

washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by 

cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an 

undamaged condition. 

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or 

defaced coated surfaces. 

3.7 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE 

A. Concrete Substrates, Vertical Surfaces: 

1. Epoxy System: 

a. Prime Coat: Epoxy Filler, MPI #116. 

b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77. 

c. Topcoat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77. 

B. Concrete Substrates, Horizontal Surfaces. 




C. Steel Substrates: 

a. Prime Coat: Epoxy Filler, MPI #116. 




a. Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #101. 



D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 



a. Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #101. 





SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGE 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following: 

1. Dimensional characters. 

2. Panel signs. 




B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs. 

1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by 

others, and accessories. 

2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements and layout for each sign. 

C. Samples: For each sign type and for each color and texture required. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26, of alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for 

casting process used and for use and finish indicated. 

B. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum 

producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and 

durability properties of Alloy 5005-H32. 

C. Polycarbonate Sheet: Of thickness indicated, manufactured by extrusion process, coated on 

both surfaces with abrasion-resistant coating: 

1. Impact Resistance: 16 ft lbf/in. per ASTM D 256, Method A. 

2. Tensile Strength: 9,000 lbf/sq. in. per ASTM D 638. 

3. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 340,000 lbf/sq. in. per ASTM D 790. 

4. Heat Deflection: 265 degrees F at 264 lbf/sq. in. per ASTM D 648. 

5. Abrasion Resistance: 1.5 percent maximum haze increase for 100 revolutions of a Taber 

abraser with a load of 500 g per ASTM D 1044. 



2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS 

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering 


1. ACE Sign Systems, Inc. 

2. ASI-Modulex, Inc. 

3. Bunting Graphics, Inc. 

4. Gemini Incorporated. 

5. Grimco, Inc. 

6. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc. 

7. Metal Arts; Div. of L&H Mfg. Co. 

8. Mills Manufacturing Company. 

B. Cast Characters: Produce characters with smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed 

lines and profiles, free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Cast lugs into back of 

characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Alloy and temper recommended by sign 

manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated. Comply with the 

following requirements. 

1. Character Material: Aluminum. 

2. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 

3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

4. Finish: Painted. 

5. Mounting: Concealed studs for substrates encountered. 

C. Cutout Characters: Provide characters with square-cut, smooth, eased edges. Comply with the 

following requirements: 

1. Aluminum Sheet: 0.25 inch thick. 

2.3 PANEL SIGNS 

a. Finish: Painted. 

b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 



1. ACE Sign Systems, Inc. 

2. Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division. 

3. ASI-Modulex, Inc. 

4. Bunting Graphics, Inc. 

5. Gemini Incorporated. 

6. Grimco, Inc. 

7. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc. 

8. Mills Manufacturing Company. 

9. Mohawk Sign Systems. 

10. Signature Signs, Incorporated. 



B. Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under 

installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from 

corner to corner, complying with the following requirements: 

1. Laminated, Etched Photopolymer: Raised graphics 1/32 inch above surface with 

contrasting colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range and laminated 

to acrylic back. 

2. Edge Condition: Square cut. 

3. Corner Condition: Rounded. 

4. Interior Mounting: Unframed. 

a. Wall mounted with two-face tape. 

5. Exterior Mounting: Unframed. 


a. Wall mounted, with manufacturer's standard noncorroding anchors for substrates 

encountered. 

A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for 

exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or 

lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set 

into concrete. 


A. General: Provide manufacturer’s standard signs of configurations indicated. 

1. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water 

penetration. 

2. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be 

inconspicuous. 

2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES 

A. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; 

Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as 

specified below). Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions 

for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting. 

1. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system 

complying with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils, 

medium gloss. 





A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and 

complying with manufacturer’s written instructions. 

1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion 

and other defects in appearance. 

2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. 

Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent 

walls. 

B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more 

stringent requirements apply. 

1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for 

rough surfaces. 

2. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, surfaces. 

C. Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods to comply with 

manufacturer’s written instructions for character form, type of mounting, wall construction, and 

condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing 

and to locate holes for fasteners. 

1. Flush Mounting: Mount characters with backs in contact with wall surface. 




SECTION 104413 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 

PART 1 GENERAL 

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Recessed portable fire extinguisher cabinets for non-fire rated construction 

2. Recessed portable fire extinguisher cabinets for fire rated construction 


1.3 DEFENITIONS 

1. Division 10 Fire Protection Specialties for mounting portable fire extinguishers 

recessed in gypsum wallboard. 

A. Fire Rated Construction: Wall construction that is required for 1-hr or 2-hr fire resistance 

and is constructed as a UL assembly. 

1.4 SECTION INCLUDES 

A. Fire extinguishers cabinets for portable fire extinguishers mounted to gypsum wallboard. 

1.5 SUBMITTALS 

A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 013300, Submittal Procedures: 

PART 2 PRODUCTS 

1. Catalog data indicating roughing-in dimensions and details showing mounting 

methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door 

hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style and door construction, and panel 

style and materials. 

2. Shop Drawings indicating location and type of fire extinguisher. 

2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 

A. Comply with Section 012500, Substitution Procedures. 

2.2 MANUFACTURERS (CABINETS) 

A. J. L. Industries 



B. Larsen's Mfg. Co. 

C. Johnson-Lee, Division of W. F. Lee Corp. 

D. Muckle Manufacturing, Division of Technico, Inc. 

E. Watrous, Inc. 

2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 

A. General: Provide fire extinguisher cabinets in locations where portable fire extinguishers 

are mounted to gypsum wallboard, of suitable size for housing fire extinguishers of types 

and capacities indicated. 

B. Fire Resistive Construction: Provide fire rated extinguisher cabinets in locations where 

cabinets are installed in gypsum wallboard 1-hr and 2-hr fire rated walls, consistent with 

ASTM E-814. 

C. Construction: Manufacturer's standard enameled steel box, with trim, frame, door and 

hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld all joints and 

grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. 

D. Cabinet Type: Suitable for mounting conditions indicated, of the following types: 

1. Semi-Recessed: Cabinet box (tub) recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit 

style of trim indicated. Minimum size of 12 x 27 x 8 inches inside to house one 

Subcontractor-furnished and installed extinguisher. 

E. Trim Style: Fabricate trim in one piece with corners metered, welded and ground 

smooth. 

1. Exposed Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame 

overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at 

outer edge (backbend). 

a. Rolled-Edged Trim: Rolled edges with backbend depth of 4 1/2 inches. 

b. Trim Metal: of same metal as door. 

F. Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer's standard door construction, of hollow 

steel construction, coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 

G. Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design with Full-Glass Panel with 1/4 inch 

tempered glass. 

H. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door operating hardware of proper type 

for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever 

handle with cam action latch, or door pull, exposed or concealed, and friction latch. 

Provide concealed or continuous type hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees. 

Breakable glass front cabinets are not permitted. 



2.4 FACTORY FINISHING OF FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 

A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and 

application recommendations except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes in factory 

after products are assembled. Protect cabinets with plastic or paper covering, prior to 

shipment. 

B. Painted Finishes: Apply baked enamel finish to both concealed and exposed surfaces of 

cabinet components except where other than a painted finish is indicated. 

PART 3 EXECUTION 


1. Color: Red. 

A. Install cabinets in locations indicated on the Drawings and at the mounting height of 5 

feet maximum from finished floor to top inside surface of cabinet. 

1. Prepare recesses in walls for fire extinguisher cabinets as required by type and 

size of cabinet and style of trim and to comply with manufacturer's instructions. 

2. Securely fasten mounting brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets to structure, 

square and plumb, to comply with manufacturer's instructions. 

END OF SECTION 



SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire 

extinguishers. 






A. Operation and maintenance data. 


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, “Portable 

Fire Extinguishers”. 

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent 

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

C. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and 

function. 

1.6 WARRANTY 


replace fire extinguishers which fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty 

period. 

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. 

b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 





2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each indicated. 




a. Amerex Corporation. 

b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. 

c. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. 

d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 

e. Potter Roemer LLC. 

2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, 

Appendix B. 

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 10 LB (4A-80BC) nominal capacity, with 

monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container. 

2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS 

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire 

extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers 

indicated, with plated or red or black baked-enamel finish. 




a. Amerex Corporation. 

b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. 

c. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. 

d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 

e. Potter Roemer LLC. 

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, 

spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words “FIRE EXTINGUISHER” in 

red letter decals applied to mounting surface. 

a. Orientation: Vertical. 





A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. 

B. Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with 

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Mounting Brackets: 42 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. 

C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations 

indicated. 




SECTION 105113 - METAL LOCKERS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Standard metal lockers. 

2. Storage cabinets 

3. Locker benches. 



B. Shop Drawings: For metal lockers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments 

to other work. 

C. Samples: For units with factory-applied color finishes. 





1.5 WARRANTY 


replace components of metal lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, 

within specified warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period for Knocked-Down Metal Lockers and Storage Cabinets: 2 years from 

date of Substantial Completion. 




2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable 

for exposed applications. 

B. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, cold rolled. 

C. Fasteners: Zinc or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type, exposed bolt heads; with self-locking nuts 

or lock washers for nuts on moving parts. 

D. Anchors: Material, type, and size required for secure anchorage to each substrate. 

1. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of 

exterior walls, and elsewhere as indicated, for corrosion resistance. 

2. Provide toothed-steel expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 

2.2 STANDARD METAL LOCKERS 



1. Art Metal Products; Standard K.D. Lockers. 

2. ASI Storage Solutions Inc.; Traditional Collection. 

3. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc.; Emperor Lockers. 

4. List Industries Inc.; Classic Line of Superior KD Lockers. 

5. Lyon Workspace Products, LLC; Standard Lockers. 

6. Penco Products, Inc.; Guardian Lockers. 

7. Republic Storage Systems Company; Standard Lockers. 

8. Shanahan's Manufacturing Limited; Deluxe Series Lockers. 

9. Tennsco Corp.; Tennsco Lockers. 

B. Size: 12” wide, 12” deep and 72” high. 

C. Locker Arrangement: Single tier. 

D. Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet. 

E. Body and Shelves: Assembled by riveting or bolting body components together. Fabricate 

from unperforated 0.024 inch nominal-thickness steel sheet. 

F. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.060 inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; lapped and 

factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into vertical main 

frames. Form continuous, integral door strike full height on vertical main frames. 

G. Doors: One piece; fabricated from 0.060 inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; formed into 

channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right-angle single bend at horizontal 

edges. 



1. Reinforcement: Manufacturer’s standard reinforcing angles, channels, or stiffeners for 

doors more than 15 inches wide; welded to inner face of doors. 

2. Stiffeners: Manufacturer’s standard full-height stiffener fabricated from 0.048 inch 

nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded to inner face of doors. 

3. Door Style: Louvered vents at top and bottom. 

H. Hinges: Welded to door and attached to door frame with no fewer than two factory-installed 

rivets per hinge which are completely concealed and tamper resistant when door is closed; 

fabricated to swing 180 degrees. 

1. Continuous Hinges: Manufacturer’s standard, steel, full height. 

I. Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Stainless-steel cup with integral door pull, recessed so 

locking device does not protrude beyond face of door; pry and vandal resistant. 

1. Multipoint Latching: Finger-lift latch control designed for use with padlocks; positive 

automatic latching and prelocking. 

a. Latch Hooks: Equip doors with three latch hooks; fabricated from 0.105 inch 

nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded or riveted to full-height door strikes; with 

resilient silencer on each latch hook. 

J. Equipment: Equip each metal locker with identification plate and the following unless 

otherwise indicated: 

1. Single-Tier Units: Shelf, one double-pronged ceiling hook, and two single-pronged wall 

hooks. 

K. Accessories: 

1. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from manufacturer's standard thickness, but not 

less than 0.036 inch nominal-thickness steel sheet. 

a. Closures: Vertical-end type. 

2. Individual Sloping Tops: Fabricated from 0.024 inch nominal-thickness steel sheet. 

3. Recess Trim: Fabricated from 0.048 inch nominal-thickness steel sheet. 

4. Filler Panels: Fabricated from manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.036 

inch nominal-thickness steel sheet. 

5. Finished End Panels: Fabricated from 0.024 inch nominal-thickness steel sheet. 

L. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat. 

1. Color(s): As selected from manufacturer’s full range. 

2.3 METAL STORAGE CABINETS 





1. Art Metal Products; 815 KD Cabinet. 

2. List Industries Inc.; 815-S-18 Cabinet. 

3. Lyon Workspace Products, 1080 Storage Cabinet. 

4. Penco Products, Inc.; Storage Cabinet. 

5. Republic Storage Systems Company; Storage Cabinet. 

6. Tennsco Corp.; Tennsco Storage Cabinet. 

B. Size: 36” wide, 18” deep and 78” high. 

C. Cabinet Arrangement: Double Door. 

D. Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet. 

E. Body: Assembled by riveting or bolting body components together. Fabricate from 

unperforated 0.024 inch nominal-thickness steel sheet. 

F. Shelves: Fabricate from unperforated 0.024 inch nominal-thickness steel sheet. Four shelves 

per unit, adjustable up or down in 2 inch increments. 

G. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.060 inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; lapped and 

factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into vertical main 

frames. Form continuous, integral door strike full height on vertical main frames. 

H. Doors: One piece; fabricated from 0.060 inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; formed into 

channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right-angle single bend at horizontal 

edges. 

1. Doors for box Storage Units less than 15 inches wide may be fabricated from 0.048 inch 

nominal-thickness steel sheet. 

2. Reinforcement: Manufacturer’s standard reinforcing angles, channels, or stiffeners for 

doors more than 15 inches wide; welded to inner face of doors. 

3. Stiffeners: Manufacturer’s standard full-height stiffener fabricated from 0.048 inch 

nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded to inner face of doors. 

4. Door Style: Unperforated panel. 

I. Hinges: Welded to door and attached to door frame with no fewer than two factory-installed 

rivets per hinge which are completely concealed and tamper resistant when door is closed; 

fabricated to swing 180 degrees. 

1. Knuckle Hinges: Steel, full loop, five or seven knuckles, tight pin; minimum 2 inches 

high. Provide no fewer than three 3 hinges for each door more than 42 inches high. 

J. Projecting Door Handle and Latch: Finger-lift latch control designed for use with either built-in 

combination locks or padlocks; positive automatic latching, chromium plated; pry and vandal 

resistant. 

1. Latch Hooks: Equip; fabricated from 0.105 inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded or 

riveted to full-height door strikes; with resilient silencer on each latch hook. 

2. Latching Mechanism: Manufacturer’s standard, rattle-free latching mechanism and 

moving components isolated to prevent metal-to-metal contact, and incorporating a 



prelocking device that allows Storage Unit door to be locked while door is open and then 

closed without unlocking or damaging lock or latching mechanism. 

K. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat. 

1. Color(s): As selected from manufacturer’s full range. 

2.4 LOCKER BENCHES 

A. Provide bench units with overall assembly height of 17 and 1/2 inches. 

B. Bench Tops: Manufacturer’s standard one-piece units, with rounded corners and edges. 

1. Size: Minimum 9 and 1/2 inches wide by 1 and 1/4 inches thick. 

2. Laminated clear hardwood with one coat of clear sealer on all surfaces and one coat of 

clear lacquer on top and sides. 

3. Tubular Steel: 1 and 1/4 inch diameter steel tubing, with 0.1265 inch thick steel flanges 

welded at top and base; with zinc-plated finish; anchored with exposed fasteners. 


A. Fabricate metal lockers and cabinets square, rigid, and without warp and with metal faces flat 

and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp edges 

and burrs. 

1. Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet unless 


2. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for complete 

installation. 

B. Fabricate each metal locker and storage cabinet with an individual door and frame; individual 

top, bottom, and back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. Factory 

weld frame members of each metal locker together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly. 

C. Knocked-Down Construction: Fabricate metal lockers using nuts, bolts, screws, or rivets for 

nominal assembly at Project site. 

D. Hooks: Manufacturer’s standard ball-pointed type, aluminum or steel; zinc plated. 

E. Identification Plates: Manufacturer’s standard, etched, embossed, or stamped aluminum plates, 

with numbers and letters at least 3/8 inch high. 

F. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated in lengths as long as practical, without visible fasteners at 

splice locations; finished to match lockers. 

1. Sloping-top corner fillers, mitered. 

G. Recess Trim: Fabricated with minimum 2 and 1/2 inch face width and in lengths as long as 

practical; finished to match lockers. 



H. Filler Panels: Fabricated in an unequal leg angle shape; finished to match lockers. Provide slipjoint 

filler angle formed to receive filler panel. 

I. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated with 1 inch wide edge dimension, and designed for concealing 

fasteners and holes at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers. 

J. Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners, except for 

perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers. 

2.6 STEEL SHEET FINISHES 

A. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning, pretreating, and phosphatizing, apply 

manufacturer’s standard thermosetting baked-enamel finish. Comply with paint manufacturer's 

written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. 

B. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply 

manufacturer’s standard, baked-polymer, thermosetting powder finish. Comply with resin 

manufacturer’s written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. 



A. General: Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. 

1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more 

than 36 inches o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through backup reinforcing 

plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion. 

2. Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top of lockers and to floor. 

3. Anchor back-to-back metal lockers to floor. 

B. Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Assemble with standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners 

on door faces or face frames. 

C. Equipment and Accessories: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately 

together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates. 

1. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners. 

2. Attach door locks on doors using security-type fasteners. 

3. Identification Plates: Identify metal lockers with identification indicated on Drawings. 

a. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two aluminum 

rivets. 

4. Attach recess trim to recessed metal lockers with concealed clips. 

5. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners. Locate filler panels where indicated on 

Drawings. 

6. Attach sloping-top units to metal lockers, with closures at exposed ends. 



7. Attach boxed end panels with concealed fasteners to conceal exposed ends of 

nonrecessed metal lockers. 

8. Attach finished end panels with fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed ends of 

nonrecessed metal lockers. 

D. Fixed Locker Benches: Provide no fewer than two pedestals for each bench, uniformly spaced 

not more than 72 inches apart. Securely fasten tops of pedestals to undersides of bench tops, 

and anchor bases to floor. 




SECTION 111300 - LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Dock bumpers. 



B. Shop Drawings: For loading dock equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and 



A. Operation and maintenance data. 


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with loading dock 

equipment, including heights of loading docks, by field measurements before fabrication. 


2.1 DOCK BUMPERS 



1. American Floor Products Company, Inc. 

2. Beacon Industries, Inc. 

3. Rite-Hite Corporation. 

4. SPX Dock Products - Kelley. 

B. Molded-Rubber Bumpers: Fabricated from molded-rubber compound reinforced with nylon, 

rayon, or polyester cord; with Type A Shore durometer hardness of 80, plus or minus 5, when 

tested according to ASTM D 2240; of size and configuration indicated. Fabricate units with not 

less than 2 predrilled anchor holes. 

1. Configuration: Square. 



2. Thickness: 4 inches. 

C. Anchorage Devices: Hot-dip galvanized-steel bolts, nuts, washers and other anchorage devices 

as required to fasten bumpers securely in place and to suit installation type indicated. 



A. Install loading dock equipment, accessories as required for a complete installation. 

B. Dock Bumpers: Attach dock bumpers to face of loading dock in a manner that complies with 

requirements indicated for spacing, arrangement, and position relative to top of platform and 

anchorage. 

1. Bolted Attachment: Attach dock bumpers with anchor to structural steel bolts. 




SECTION 211220 – STORAGE TANKS 






A. Portable water storage tanks for containment of contaminated fire protection water 

runoff. 


A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 013300, Submittal Procedures: 

1. Catalog data indicating material and construction, dimensions, capacity, location 

of ports and vents, and specific features. 


A. Source Limitations for water storage tanks: Obtain each type of water storage tank from 

single source from single manufacturer. 

B. Testing: All tanks to include certified hydrostatic test from manufacturer. 



A. Comply with Section 012500, Substitution Procedures. 


A. Baker Corporation – Frontier Fixed Axle Tank 

2.3 PORTABLE WATER TANK 

A. General: 

1. Provide fixed axle portable water tank or combination of water tanks suitable for 

exterior locations, for containment of contaminated water from fire protection 

water runoff (minimum 42,000 gal). 

B. Construction: 

1. 1/4 “ thick ASTM A36 carbon steel floor, sides and roof 

2. 6” x 3” x ¼” STM A36 formed channel on 27” center wall frame construction 

Contract 44577 KW Annex - Rev. D 44577-CSI-SPEC-001 211220 104400 - 1


C. Valves: 

D. Axle 

3. ¼” ASTM A36 formed channels on 24” centers roof framing construction. 

1. 2 front wafer butterfly valves, cast iron body, Buna-N seat & seals, 316 stainless 

steel stem, Nylon 11 coated ductile iron disk, with plug and chain. 

2. 1 rear wafer butterfly valve, cast iron body, Buna-N seat & seals, 316 stainless 

steel stem, Nylon 11 coated ductile iron disk, with plug and chain. 

3. Relief valve with 16 oz/in 2 pressure setting, 0.4 oz/in 2 vacuum setting, Buna-N 

seal. 

4. 1 front 4” drain, flanged connection with butterfly valve. 

5. 1 rear 4” drain, flanged connection with butterfly valve. 

6. 3” topfill connection, sch. 40 pipe with cap and chain. 

1. 3-spring 22,500 lb capacity springs. 

2. Standard 22,500# axle. 

3. Air brake system. 

4. nylon tubeless tires. 

E. Manways and Stairs: 

1. Top, front, and side manway 22” I.D. min – ½” flat steel with slotted hinges 

w/Buna-N seal (thermally fused to tank). 

2. Stairway front of tank, passenger side; fold down guardrail and handrail system, 

platform at top of stairs; fold down guardrail. 

F. Accessories 

1. Level Gauge: Ball float style: 2-8” stainless steel floats. 

2.4 FACTORY FINISHING 

A. Exterior: High gloss polyurethane. 

1. Color: not specified 

B. Interior: Chemical resistant coating. 

211220 - 2 





A. Fixed axle tank shall be capable of transport on roadways when empty. 


211220 - 3 



SECTION 211313 – WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 


This CSP Section covers the requirements for the design and installation of the Modified K West Annex 

Building automatic sprinkler system, as Part of the K-West Basin Sludge Removal Project. 


Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 

and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Scope of Work: Provide design, shop drawings, project record drawings (as-built), equipment, 

fabrication, labor, transportation and supervision necessary to install, flush, test and place 

into service complete, hydraulically designed automatic wet-pipe sprinkler system. Furnish 

piping offsets, fittings, and any other accessories as required to provide a complete 

installation and to eliminate interference with other construction. Install sprinklers over and 

under ducts, piping and platforms, including the mezzanine, when such equipment can 

negatively affect or disrupt the sprinkler discharge pattern and coverage. Provide wet-pipe 

sprinkler system in all areas of the building. Except as modified herein, design and install 

the system in accordance with NFPA 13, DOE 1066-99, and DOE FPHB-HC. Design any 

portions of the sprinkler system that are not indicated on the drawings or are not specified 

herein, including locating sprinklers, piping, and equipment, and size piping and equipment. 

Pipe sizes shall be determined by hydraulic calculation. Coordinate installation with other 

disciplines. 

B. Hydraulic Design. Hydraulically design the system to discharge a minimum density of 0.2 gpm 

per square foot over the hydraulically most demanding 1,500 square feet of floor area. 

Provide hydraulic calculations in accordance with the Area/Density Method of NFPA 13. 

1. Hose Demand. Add an allowance for exterior hose streams of 250 gpm to the sprinkler 

system demand at the fire hydrant shown on the drawings closest to the point where 

the water service enters the building 

2. Basis for Calculations. Base the design of the system upon a water supply with a static 

pressure of 125 psi, and a flow of 1908 gpm at a residual pressure of 80 psi, based on 

March 2011 flow tests through the pressure-reducing valve for the raw water crossconnection. 

Water supply shall be presumed available at the point of connection to 

existing water supply between gate valves FP-GV-65 and FP-GV-104. Base hydraulic 

calculations upon the Hazen-Williams formula with a "C" value of 120 for galvanized 

or black steel piping, 140 for new cement-lined ductile-iron piping, 150 for 

underground PVC piping, and 100 for existing underground piping. The sprinkler 

system demand, with hose stream allowance, shall be at least 10%, but no less than 10 

psi, below the supply curve. 

a. Outline hydraulic calculations as in NFPA 13, except that calculations shall be 

performed by computer using software intended specifically for fire protection 



system design using the design data shown on the drawings. Software that uses 

k-factors for typical branch lines is not acceptable. Calculations shall 

substantiate that the design area used in the calculations is the most demanding 

hydraulically. 

b. Plot water supply curves and system requirements on semi-logarithmic graph paper 

so as to present a summary of the complete hydraulic calculation. Provide a 

summary sheet listing sprinklers in the design area and their respective 

hydraulic reference points, elevations, actual discharge pressures and actual 

flows. Indicate elevations of hydraulic reference points (nodes). 

Documentation shall identify each pipe individually and the nodes connected 

thereto. Indicate for each pipe the diameter, length, flow, velocity, friction 

loss, number and type fittings, total friction loss in the pipe, equivalent pipe 

length and Hazen-Williams coefficient. 

3. Sprinkler Coverage. Uniformly space sprinklers on branch lines. Provide sprinklers 

throughout 100% of the building, including under the Mezzanine of the Load-Out 

Bay. Coverage per sprinkler shall be in accordance with NFPA 13, but shall not 

exceed 130 square feet for ordinary hazard occupancies. 

C. Components: System shall consist of, but not be limited to, control valves, alarm check valve 

with trim, fire department connection with check valve, fittings, piping, sprinklers, hangers, 

bracing, Inspector's test stations, drains, waterflow alarm and other devices for a complete 

installation in accordance with codes, standards and recommended practice referenced in 

this Section. One (1) complete, wet-pipe sprinkler system shall be provided in accordance 

with referenced standards. 


Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 013300, Seller Submittals Processing Specification. 

Submittals shall meet all requirements of the DOE Fire Protection Handbook, Hanford Chapter. In particular, 

the following shall be submitted: 

A. Drawings 

1. Shop Drawings. Three copies of the Sprinkler System Drawings, no later than 21 days 

prior to the start of sprinkler system installation. The drawings shall conform to the 

requirements established for working plans as prescribed in NFPA 13 and shall meet 

the requirements of the DOE FPHB-HC. 

a. Drawings shall be produced by AutoCAD (latest edition) format. Drawing files 

shall be on CD/DVD, uncompressed. If non standard fonts are used, the font 

file must be supplied with the drawing file. Drawings shall be prepared using 

Hanford Title Blocks and shall include plan and elevation views demonstrating 

that the equipment will fit the allotted spaces with clearance for installation and 

maintenance. 

b. Shop drawings shall be full size, at 28 inches by 40 inches. Drawings shall be 

stamped and signed by the Fire Protection Specialist, described below. 

Drawings must be approved by the Hanford Fire Marshal's Office prior to 

installation. 



c. Drawings shall show, in graphic and quantitative form, the extent, location, 

relationship, and dimensions of the work to be done in sufficient detail to 

demonstrate that the design requirements have been met and to facilitate 

construction of the work. Shop drawings shall include the following: 

1) Descriptive index of drawings in the submittal with drawings listed in 

sequence by drawing number. A legend identifying device symbols, 

nomenclature, and conventions used. 

2) Floor plans drawn to a scale not less than 1/8" = 1'-0" which clearly show 

locations of sprinklers, risers, pipe hangers, seismic separation 

assemblies, sway bracing, drains, and other applicable details necessary 

to clearly describe the proposed arrangement. Indicate each type of 

fitting used and the locations of bushings, reducing couplings, and 

welded joints. 

3) Actual center-to-center dimensions between sprinklers on branch lines and 

between branch lines; from end sprinklers to adjacent walls; from walls 

to branch lines; from sprinkler feed mains, cross-mains and branch lines 

to finished floor and roof or ceiling. A detail shall show the dimension 

from the sprinkler and sprinkler deflector to the ceiling in finished areas. 

4) Longitudinal and transverse building sections showing typical branch line 

and cross-main pipe routing as well as elevation of each typical sprinkler 

above finished floor. 

5) Details of each type of riser assembly; pipe hanger and support; materials to 

which hangers and bracing are to be fastened; embedment depth for 

attachments; sway bracing for earthquake protection, and restraint of 

underground water main at point-of-entry into the building, and electrical 

devices and interconnecting wiring. 

2. As-Built Drawings. As-built record drawings shall be provided no later than 14 days after 

completion of the Final Tests. As-built record drawings shall be full size, at 28 inches 

by 40 inches, and shall be produced using AutoCAD (latest edition). Drawing files 

shall be on CD/DVD, uncompressed. If non standard fonts are used, the font file must 

be supplied with the drawing file. As-built drawings must be approved by the 

Hanford Fire Marshal’s Office and issued prior to acceptance of the system from the 

contractor. 

B. Product Data 

1. List of the Submittals. A list of the Fire Protection Related Submittals, no later than 7 

days after the approval of the Fire Protection Specialist. 

2. Materials and Equipment. Manufacturer's catalog data included with the Sprinkler 

System Drawings for all items specified herein. Highlight the data to show model, 

size, options, etc., that are intended for consideration. Data shall be adequate to 

demonstrate compliance with all contract requirements. In addition, provide a 

complete equipment list that includes equipment description, model number and 



quantity. Materials submittal shall be stamped and signed by the Fire Protection 

Specialist. 

3. Spare Parts. Spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified. 

4. Fire Protection Specialist. The name and documentation of certification of the proposed 

Fire Protection Specialists, no later than 14 days after the Notice to Proceed and prior 

to the submittal of the sprinkler system shop drawings and hydraulic calculations. The 

Fire Protection Specialist shall hold a current State of Washington Fire Sprinkler 

Level III Certificate of Competency or a licensed professional Fire Protection 

Engineer. The Fire Protection Specialist shall prepare a list of the submittals from the 

Contract Submittal Register that relate to the successful installation of the sprinkler 

systems(s). The submittals identified on this list shall be stamped and signed by the 

Fire Protection Specialist when submitted to the Hanford Fire Marshal. The Fire 

Protection Specialist shall be regularly engaged in the design and installation of the 

type and complexity of system specified in the Contract documents, and shall have 

served in a similar capacity for at least three systems that have performed in the 

manner intended for a period of not less than 6 months. 

5. Installer Qualifications. The name and documentation of certification of the proposed 

Sprinkler System Installer, concurrent with submittal of the Fire Protection Specialist 

Qualifications. The Installer shall be regularly engaged in the installation of the type 

and complexity of system specified in the Contract documents, and shall have served 

in a similar capacity for at least three systems that have performed in the manner 

intended for a period of not less than 6 months. Provide proof that installation firm 

has satisfactorily performed at least ten projects of equivalent nature and scope of the 

Projects herein; and is licensed within the USA to engage in design, fabrication and 

installation of automatic sprinkler systems for fire protection. 

C. Design Data 

1. Sway Bracing. Load calculations for sizing of sway bracing. 

2. Hydraulic Calculations. Hydraulic calculations, including a drawing showing hydraulic 

reference points and pipe segments. 

D. Test Reports 

1. Preliminary Tests 

a. Proposed procedures for Preliminary Acceptance Tests, and notification of 

proposed test date, shall be provided no later than 20 days prior to the proposed 

start of the tests. The Fire Marshal’s Office shall be provided the opportunity 

to observe the tests. 

b. Three copies of the completed Preliminary Tests Reports, no later than 7 days after 

the completion of the Preliminary Tests. The Preliminary Tests Report shall 

include both the Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground 

Piping and the Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground 

Piping. All items in the Preliminary Tests Report shall be stamped and signed 

by the Fire Protection Specialist. 



2. Final Acceptance Test 

a. Proposed procedures for Final Acceptance Test, and notification of proposed test 

date, shall be provided no later than 20 days prior to the proposed start of the 

tests. The Fire Marshal’s Office shall be provided the opportunity to observe 

the tests. Notification shall include a copy of the Contractor's Material & Test 

Certificates. 

b. Three copies of the completed Final Acceptance Tests Reports, no later than 7 days 

after the completion of the Final Acceptance Tests. All items in the Final 

Acceptance Report shall be stamped and signed by the Fire Protection 

Specialist. 

E. Certificates. Concurrent with the Final Acceptance Test Report, certification by the Fire 

Protection Specialist that the sprinkler system is installed in accordance with the contract 

requirements, including signed approval of the Preliminary and Final Acceptance Test 

Reports. 

F. Operation and Maintenance Instructions. Six manuals listing step-by-step procedures required 

for system startup, operation, shutdown, and routine maintenance, at least 20 days prior to 

field training. The manuals shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, 

list of parts and tools that should be kept in stock by the owner for routine maintenance 

including the name of a local supplier, simplified wiring and controls diagrams, 

troubleshooting guide, and recommended service organization (including address and 

telephone number) for each item of equipment. 


A. Work identified in this section shall be done under a Quality Assurance program in accordance 

with ASME NQA-1, as approved by the Owner and described in Section 014000, Quality 

Assurance and Control Requirements Specification – Fabrication, or Section 014001, 

Quality Assurance and Control Requirements Specification – Construction. 

B. The highest functional classification for the scope of this Specification section is PC-2 for items 

and services classified as safety significant. 

C. Compliance with referenced NFPA standards is mandatory. This includes advisory provisions 

listed in the appendices of such standards, as though the word "shall" had been substituted 

for the word "should" wherever it appears. In the event of a conflict between specific 

provisions of this specification and applicable NFPA standards, this specification shall 

govern. Reference to "authority having jurisdiction" shall be interpreted to mean the 

Hanford Fire Marshal. 

D. Quality levels are defined on the associated line lists, valve lists and datasheets accompanying 

this section. 

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS 

Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective 




A. Satisfy the requirements of Specification Section 017000, Execution and Closeout 

Requirements – General Construction. 

B. Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified. The data 

shall include a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of 

supply, and a list of parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced after 1 year and 

3 years of service. A list of special tools and test equipment required for maintenance and 

testing of the products supplied by the Contractor shall be included. 

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. See Section 016050, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for general delivery storage and 

handling requirements. 

B. All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be housed in a manner to preclude any 

damage from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other 

contaminants. Additionally, all pipes shall either be capped or plugged until installed. 

1.7 WORK BY OTHERS 

The Seller shall include a list of subcontractors, if required, for specialized design/analysis or fabrication 

tasks. The Seller shall provide relevant information regarding the experience, management and 

personnel. The Seller's subcontractor shall be bound by the same welding, inspection, and submittal 

requirements as the Seller. 


2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS 

Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the 

manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for 

at least 2 years prior to bid opening. 

A. Nameplates. All equipment shall have a nameplate that identifies the manufacturer's name, 

address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number. 

B. Requirements for Fire Protection Service. Materials and Equipment either shall have been 

tested by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and listed in the 2011 UL Fire Protection 

Directory and/or shall have been approved by Factory Mutual (FM) and published in the 

2011 FM Approval Guide for Fire Protection. Where the terms "listed" or "approved" 

appear in this specification, such shall mean published in the 2011 UL Fire Protection 

Directory or 2011 FM Approval Guide for Fire Protection, respectively. 

2.2 UNDERGROUND PIPING COMPONENTS 

A. Pipe. Piping from a point 6 inches above the floor to a point 5 feet outside the building wall 

shall be ductile iron with a rated working pressure of 175 psi conforming to AWWA 

C151/A21.51, with cement mortar lining conforming to AWWA C104/A21.4. Piping more 



than 5 feet outside the building walls shall comply with Section 331116, FACILITY 

WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING. 

B. Fittings and Gaskets. Fittings shall be ductile iron conforming to AWWA C110/A21.10. 

Gaskets shall be suitable in design and size for the pipe with which such gaskets are to be 

used. Gaskets for ductile iron pipe joints shall conform to AWWA C111/A21.11. 

C. Gate Valve and Indicator Post. Gate valves for underground installation shall be of the inside 

screw type with counter-clockwise rotation to open. Where indicating type valves are 

shown or required, indicating valves shall be gate valves with an approved indicator post of 

a length to permit the top of the post to be located 3 feet above finished grade. Gate valves 

and indicator posts shall be listed or approved for use in a fire protection system. 

2.3 ABOVEGROUND PIPING COMPONENTS 

A. Steel Pipe. Except as modified herein, steel pipe shall be black steel as permitted by NFPA 13 

and shall conform to applicable provisions of ASTM A 795/A 795M, ASTM A 53/A 53M, 

or ASTM A 135/A 135M. Pipe 2 inches and smaller in diameter shall have threaded 

fittings. Pipe larger than 2 inches shall have threaded or cut grooved fittings. Pipe shall be 

marked with the name of the manufacturer, kind of pipe, and ASTM designation. 

1. Steel Pipe. ASTM A 53, A795 or A135, Schedule 40, Black steel pipe, plain ends. 

2. Galvanized Steel Pipe. ASTM A53, A795 or A135, Schedule 40, black steel pipe, hotdipped 

galvanized with plain ends. "Hot-dipped" galvanized piping shall meet the 

requirements of ASTM A-123. Weight of zinc coating must not average more than 

1.8 oz per square foot and not less than 1.6 oz per square foot. Zinc coating shall be 

inside and out. 

B. Fittings for Non-Grooved Steel Pipe 

1. For Galvanized Pipe. Fittings shall be galvanized steel conforming to ASME B16.9 or 

ASME B16.11. Fittings to which sprinklers, drop nipples or riser nipples (sprigs) are 

attached shall be of threaded type. Plain-end fittings with mechanical couplings, 

fittings that use steel gripping devices to bite into the pipe and segmented welded 

fittings shall not be used. Flanges shall be galvanized. 

2. For Other Pipe Types. Plain end, hooker type, or push-on fittings or couplings shall not 

be allowed. Bushings and reducing couplings shall not be allowed. UL listed 

segmentally welded fittings are acceptable. Friction loss and flow data shall 

accompany hydraulic calculations. Provide flexible couplings to meet seismic 

requirements of NFPA 13. 

a. Cast Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4, Class 125 standard pattern, for threaded 

joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1. 

b. Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 300, standard pattern, for 

threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1. 

c. Steel Fittings: ASTM A234, seamless or welded, for welded joints. 



d. Cast Iron Threaded Flanges: ANSI B16.1, Class 250; raised ground face, bolt spot 

faced. 

e. Cast Bronze Flanges: ANSI B16.24, Class 300; raised ground face, bolt holes spot 

faced. 

C. Grooved Mechanical Joints and Fittings. Joints and fittings shall be designed for not less than 

175 psi service and shall be the product of the same manufacturer as submitted in shop 

drawing equipment review; segmented welded fittings shall not be used. Fitting and 

coupling houses shall be malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510; 

ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12. 

1. Grooved Mechanical Couplings. Couplings shall be of ductile or malleable iron housing, 

a synthetic rubber gasket of a central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, 

bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure roll-grooved pipe and fittings. 

2. Gaskets. Gaskets shall be of silicon compound and approved for dry fire protection 

systems. Gasket shall be the flush type that fills the entire cavity between the fitting 

and the pipe. Nuts and bolts shall be heat-treated steel conforming to ASTM A 183 

and shall be cadmium plated or zinc electroplated. 

D. Flanges. Flanges shall conform to NFPA 13 and ASME B16.1. Gaskets shall be non-asbestos 

compressed material in accordance with ASME B16.21, 1/16 inch thick, and full face or 

self-centering flat ring type. 

1. Bolts. Bolts shall be ASTM A 449, Type 1 and shall extend no less than three full threads 

beyond the nut with bolts tightened to the required torque. 

2. Nuts. Nuts shall be hexagon type conforming to ASME B18.2.2. 

3. Washers. Washers shall meet the requirements of ASTM F 436. Flat circular washers 

shall be provided under all bolt heads and nuts. 

E. Pipe Hangers. Hangers shall be listed or approved for use with a fire protection system, in 

accordance with NFPA 13, and shall be of a type suitable for the application, construction, 

and pipe type and size to be supported. 

F. Seismic Sway Bracing. Seismic Sway Braces shall be comprised of components listed or 

approved for use with a fire protection system, in accordance with NFPA 13, and shall be of 

a type suitable for the application, construction, and pipe type and size to be braced. 

Component selection shall be validated with seismic sway bracing calculations. 

G. Valves and Strainers. Valves shall be supervised in accordance with NFPA 13 and governing 

DOE and Hanford Site requirements. 

1. Outside Screw and Yoke (OS&Y) Gate Valves. Manually operated gate valves shall be 

OS&Y type and shall be listed or approved for use with a fire protection system. 

2. Butterfly Valves. Manually operated butterfly valves shall be of indicating type and shall 

be listed or approved for use with a fire protection system 



3. Sprinkler Control and Isolation Valves. Manually operated sprinkler control valves shall 

be outside stem and yoke (OS&Y) or indicating butterfly type and shall be listed or 

approved for use with a fire protection system. 

4. Check Valves. Check valve 2 inches and larger shall be listed in UL Bld Mat Dir or FM 

P7825a and FM P7825b. Check valves 4 inches and larger shall be of the swing type 

with flanged cast iron body and flanged inspection plate, shall have a clear waterway 

and shall meet the requirements of Manufacturers Standardization Society of the 

Valve And Fittings Industry (MSS) SP-71, Standard for Gray Iron Swing Check 

Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends, for Type 3 or 4 valves. 

H. Joining Materials 

1. Welding Materials. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel 

Code for welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of 

the pipe being welded. 

2. Gasket Materials. Thickness, materials and type of gasket shall be suitable for fluid or gas 

to be handled, and design temperatures and pressures. 

2.4 ALARM CHECK-VALVE ASSEMBLY. 

Assembly shall include an alarm check valve, standard trim piping, pressure gauges, bypass, retarding 

chamber, testing valves, alarm bypass valve, main drain, and other components as required for a fully 

operational system. 

2.5 WATERFLOW ALARM 

A. Water Motor Gong. Mechanically operated, exterior-mounted, water motor alarm assembly 

shall be provided and installed in accordance with NFPA 13. Water motor alarm assembly 

shall include a body housing, impeller or pelton wheel, drive shaft, striker assembly, gong, 

wall plate and related components necessary for complete operation. Minimum 3/4 inch 

galvanized piping shall be provided between the housing and the alarm check valve. Drain 

piping from the body housing shall be minimum 1 inch galvanized and shall be arranged to 

drain to the outside of the building. Piping shall be galvanized both on the inside and 

outside surfaces. 

2.6 ALARM INITIATING AND SUPERVISORY DEVICES 

A. Sprinkler Pressure (Waterflow) Alarm Switch. Pressure switch shall include a metal housing 

with a neoprene diaphragm, SPDT snap action switches and a 1/2 inch NPT male pipe 

thread. The switch shall have a maximum service pressure rating of 175 psi. There shall be 

two SPDT (Form C) contacts factory adjusted to operate at 4 to 8 psi. The switch shall be 

capable of being mounted downstream of the retard chamber. 

B. Valve Supervisory (Tamper) Switch. Switch shall be suitable for mounting to the type of 

control valve to be supervised open. The switch shall be tamper resistant and contain one 

set of SPDT (Form C) contacts arranged to transfer upon removal of the housing cover or 

closure of the valve of more than two rotations of the valve stem. 



2.7 PRESSURE GAUGES 

Provide listed pressure gauges designed for use with air or water. For gauge scale, dial marking subdivision 

shall be no finer than 1 percent of maximum scale reading and accurate to 3 percent or less. 

Provide minimum scale range twice the maximum working pressure (when possible). 

2.8 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION 

Fire department connection shall be projecting type with cast brass body, with matching wall escutcheon 

lettered "Auto Spkr" with a polished brass finish. The connection shall have two inlets with individual 

self-closing clappers, caps with drip drains and chains. Female inlets shall have 2-1/2 inch 

diameter American National Fire Hose Connection Screw Threads (NH) in accordance with NFPA 

1963. 

2.9 SPRINKLERS 

Sprinklers shall be used in accordance with their listed coverage limitations. Sprinklers shall not be 

installed such that they are exposed to the exterior of the building, which is subject to freezing. 

A. Type. Sprinklers shall be brass and shall have a nominal 1/2 -inch orifice, with a nominal kfactor 

of 5.6 gpm/psi 1/2 . Owing to the raw water supply, pendent and sidewall sprinklers 

shall not be used, except in conjunction with a return bend. Sprinklers with internal O-rings 

shall not be used. 

B. Coverage. Sprinklers shall be of the standard coverage type. Extended coverage sprinklers 

shall not be used. 

C. Temperature. Except where noted, sprinklers shall be of ordinary temperature classification. 

Sprinklers in high heat areas (e.g., in close proximity to unit heaters) shall have temperature 

classification in accordance with NFPA 13. 


A. Sprinkler Cabinet. Spare sprinklers shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 13 and shall be 

packed in a suitable metal or plastic cabinet. Spare sprinklers shall be representative of, and 

in proportion to, the number of each type and temperature rating of the sprinklers installed. 

At least one wrench of each type required shall be provided. 

B. Sprinkler Guard. Guard shall be a steel wire cage designed to encase the sprinkler and protect it 

from mechanical damage. Guards shall be provided on sidewall sprinklers, if such are used. 

See Section 2.9.A regarding return bend requirements for sidewall sprinklers. 

C. Identification Sign. Valve identification sign shall be minimum 6 inches wide by 2 inches high 

with enamel baked finish on minimum 18 gauge steel or 0.024 inch aluminum with red 

letters on a white background or white letters on red background. Wording of sign shall 

include, but not be limited to, "main drain," "auxiliary drain," "inspector's test," "alarm test," 

"alarm line," and similar wording as required to identify operational components. 

D. Splash Blocks. Provide concrete splash blocks for all drain discharges, approximately 12 inches 

by 24 inches by 4 inches thick. 




3.1 APPROVAL 

A. Work shall not start until system design has been approved by the Hanford Fire Marshal’s 

Office. 

B. Work shall be conducted under a permit issued by the Hanford Fire Marshal’s Office. 

C. Systems shall not be connected to the 100K Area water system until approved by the Hanford 

Fire Marshal’s Office. 


A. Prior to installation carefully inspect installed Work of other trades, whether pre-existing or part 

of this Project, and verify that such work is complete to the point where installation of 

sprinkler system may start. 

B. Notify the Subcontract Technical Representative (STR) should conditions exist, not resulting 

from Work of this Project, that prohibits the installation from conforming to referenced 

codes, regulations, standards and approved design. 

C. Install materials and equipment that are free of moisture, scale, corrosion, dirt and other foreign 

materials. 

3.3 EARTHWORK 

Earthwork shall be performed in accordance with applicable provisions of Section 31 2000 EARTH 

MOVING. 

3.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 

The installation shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of NFPA 13, NFPA 24 and publications 

referenced therein. 

3.5 INSPECTION BY FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALIST 

The Fire Protection Specialist shall inspect the sprinkler system twice during the installation to assure 

that the sprinkler system is installed in accordance with the contract requirements. The Fire Protection 

Specialist shall witness the preliminary and final tests, and shall sign the test results. The Fire Protection 

Specialist, after completion of the system inspections and a successful final test, shall certify in 

writing that the system has been installed in accordance with the contract requirements. Any discrepancy 

shall be brought to the attention of the STR in writing, no later than three working days after the 

discrepancy is discovered. 

3.6 ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION 

A. General: 

1. Install system in accordance with 



a. Referenced Codes and Standards. These include, but are not limited to, NFPA 13; 

DOE Fire Protection Handbook, Hanford Chapter; DOE Order 240.1B, DOE 

1066-99, DOE 1088-95, Washington Administrative Code (WAC) 212-80 and 

WAC 246-290. 

b. Project Drawings and Specifications. 

2. Visually examine pipe, fittings, valves, equipment and accessories to ensure they are 

clean and free of burrs, cracks and other imperfections before installation. Clean pipe 

interiors by flushing. Ensure the sprinklers were stored properly and not subjected to 

extreme temperatures. 

3. Verify dimensions in field. 

4. Drawings show only approximate building outlines and interior construction details as an 

aid in understanding the scope of Work. Investigate structural and finish conditions 

affecting the Work and arrange Work accordingly, providing such sprinklers, fittings, 

traps, draining valves, piping, and accessories as required to meet such conditions. 

Show relevant structural details on Drawings. 

5. Coordinate piping, sprinklers and associated equipment with existing ceiling or roof 

materials, lighting, ductwork, conduit, piping, suspended equipment, structural and 

other building components. 

6. Dispose of equipment removed for completion of this Project as directed by the Authority 

Having Jurisdiction. 

B. Hangers. Hangers shall be provided as required by NFPA 13. Note that the water supply has a 

static pressure in excess of 100 psi. 

C. Protection of Piping Against Earthquake Damage. Seismically protect the system piping against 

damage from earthquakes. Install the seismic protection of the system piping – including 

sway bracing and flexible couplings, as required – in accordance with DOE Standard 1066- 

99 and NFPA 13. Include the required features identified therein that are applicable to the 

specific piping system. 

D. Piping in Exposed Areas. Exposed piping shall be installed so as not diminish exit access 

widths, corridors, or equipment access. Exposed horizontal piping, including drain piping, 

shall be installed to provide maximum headroom. 

E. Upright Sprinklers. Riser nipples or "sprigs" to upright sprinklers shall contain no fittings 

between the branch line tee and the reducing coupling at the sprinkler. Riser nipples 

exceeding 30 inches in length shall be individually supported. 

F. Pipe Joints. Pipe joints shall conform to NFPA 13, except as modified herein. Not more than 

four threads shall show after joint is made up. Welded joints will be permitted, only if 

welding operations are performed as required by NFPA 13 at the Contractor's fabrication 

shop, not at the project construction site. Flanged joints shall be provided where indicated 

or required by NFPA 13. Grooved pipe and fittings shall be prepared in accordance with the 

manufacturer's latest published specification according to pipe material, wall thickness and 

size. Only cut grooves shall be allowed. Grooved couplings and fittings shall be from the 



same manufacturer. Grooved joints shall not be used in concealed locations, such as behind 

solid walls or ceilings, unless an access panel is shown on the drawings for servicing or 

adjusting the joint. 

G. Reducers. Reductions in pipe sizes shall be made with one-piece tapered reducing fittings. 

When standard fittings of the required size are not manufactured, single bushings of the face 

type will be permitted. Where used, face bushings shall be installed with the outer face flush 

with the face of the fitting opening being reduced. Bushings shall not be used in elbow 

fittings, in more than one outlet of a tee, in more than two outlets of a cross, or where the 

reduction in size is less than 1/2 inch. 

H. Pipe Penetrations. Cutting structural members for passage of pipes or for pipe-hanger 

fastenings will not be permitted. Pipes that must penetrate concrete or masonry walls or 

concrete floors shall be core-drilled and provided with pipe sleeves. Each sleeve shall be 

Schedule 40 galvanized steel, ductile iron or cast iron pipe and shall extend through its 

respective wall or floor and be cut flush with each wall surface. Sleeves shall provide 

required clearance between the pipe and the sleeve in accordance with NFPA 13. The space 

between the sleeve and the pipe shall be firmly packed with mineral wool insulation. Where 

pipes penetrate fire walls, fire partitions, or floors, pipes shall be fire stopped in accordance 

with Section 078400 FIRESTOPPING. In penetrations that are not fire-rated or not a floor 

penetration, the space between the sleeve and the pipe shall be sealed at both ends with 

plastic waterproof cement that will dry to a firm but pliable mass or with a mechanically 

adjustable segmented elastomer seal. 

I. Escutcheons. Escutcheons shall be provided for pipe penetration of ceilings and walls. 

Escutcheons shall be securely fastened to the pipe at surfaces through which piping passes. 

J. Inspector's Test Connection. Unless otherwise indicated, test connection shall consist of 1 inch 

pipe connected at the hydraulically most remote location from the riser, with a test valve and 

sight glass located approximately 5 feet above the floor. The test connection piping shall 

include a smooth bore brass outlet equivalent to the smallest orifice sprinkler used in the 

system. A painted metal identification sign shall be affixed to the valve with the words 

"Inspector's Test." The discharge orifice shall be located outside the building wall, directed 

so as not to cause damage to adjacent construction or landscaping during full flow discharge. 

K. Drains. Provide main drain piping to discharge at a safe point outside the building. Auxiliary 

drains shall be provided as indicated and as required by NFPA 13. 

L. Fire Department Connection. Fire Department Connection shall be mounted on the exterior 

wall approximately 3 feet above finished grade. The piping between the connection and the 

check valve shall be provided with an automatic drip in accordance with NFPA 13 and 

arranged to drain to the outside. Provide galvanized piping for fire department connections 

downstream of check valve 

M. Identification Signs. Signs shall be affixed to each control valve, inspector test valve, main 

drain, auxiliary drain, test valve, and similar valves as appropriate or as required by NFPA 

13. Hydraulic design data nameplates shall be permanently affixed to each sprinkler riser as 

specified in NFPA 13. 



3.7 UNDERGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION 

The fire protection water main shall be laid, and joints anchored, in accordance with NFPA 24. Minimum 

depth of cover shall be 42 inches, in accordance with the DOE Fire Protection Handbook, Hanford 

Chapter. The supply line shall terminate inside the building with a flanged piece, the bottom of 

which shall be set not less than 6 inches above the finished floor. A blind flange shall be installed 

temporarily on top of the flanged piece to prevent the entrance of foreign matter into the supply line. 

A concrete thrust block shall be provided at the elbow where the pipe turns up toward the floor. In addition, 

joints shall be anchored in accordance with NFPA 24 using pipe clamps and steel rods from the 

elbow to the flange above the floor and from the elbow to a pipe clamp in the horizontal run of pipe. 

Buried steel components shall be provided with a corrosion protective coating in accordance with 

AWWA C203. Pipe within 5 ft of the foundations shall be of ductile iron. Piping more than 5 feet 

outside the building walls shall meet the requirements of Section 331116 FACILITY WATER 

DISTRIBUTION PIPING. 

3.8 EARTHWORK 

Earthwork shall be performed in accordance with applicable provisions of Section 31 2000 EARTH 

MOVING. 

3.9 ELECTRICAL WORK 

Alarm signal wiring connected to the building fire alarm control system shall be in accordance with 

Section 28 3100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM. Wiring color code shall remain uniform 

throughout the system and shall meet the requirements of the DOE Fire Protection Handbook, Hanford 

Chapter. 

3.10 PIPE COLOR CODE MARKING 

Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 099600 SPECIAL COATINGS. 

3.11 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 

Install devices or equipment not specifically covered by these Specifications in accordance with manufacturer's 

instructions. 

3.12 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEMS 

A. Final connection of new systems to existing underground piping systems will be made by with 

materials furnished by the Subcontractor. 

B. Final connection of new systems to other existing systems above grade shall be done by the 

Subcontractor after contacting the STR who will implement the Site Fire Protection 

Impairment Procedure. Do all final connections of this type with only one outage per 

existing system. 

3.13 PRELIMINARY TESTS 

The system, including the underground water mains and the aboveground piping and system components, 

shall be tested to assure that equipment and components function as intended. The underground 

and aboveground interior piping systems and attached appurtenances subjected to system working 



pressure shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 24. Upon completion of specified 

tests, complete certificates as specified in paragraph SUBMITTALS. 

A. Underground Piping 

1. Flushing. Underground piping shall be flushed in accordance with NFPA 24. This 

includes the requirement to flush the lead-in connection to the fire protection system at 

a flow rate not less that the calculated maximum water demand rate of the system. 

2. Hydrostatic Testing. New underground piping shall be hydrostatically tested in 

accordance with NFPA 24. The allowable leakage shall be measured at the specified 

test pressure by pumping from a calibrated container. The amount of leakage at the 

joints shall not exceed 2 quarts per hour per 100 gaskets or joints, regardless of pipe 

diameter. 

B. Aboveground Piping 

1. Hydrostatic Testing. Aboveground piping shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance 

with NFPA 13 at not less than 200 psi or 50 psi in excess of maximum system 

operating pressure and shall maintain that pressure without loss for 2 hours. There 

shall be no drop in gauge pressure or visible leakage when the system is subjected to 

the hydrostatic test. The test pressure shall be read from a gauge located at the low 

elevation point of the system or portion being tested. 

2. Air Pressure Test. As specified in NFPA 13, an air pressure leakage test at 50 psi shall be 

conducted for 24 hours. There shall be no drop in gauge pressure in excess of 1.5 psi 

for the 24 hours. This air pressure test is in addition to the required hydrostatic test. 

C. Testing of Alarm Devices. Each alarm initiating device, including pressure alarm, valve 

supervisory, and electrically-operated switches, shall be tested for proper operation. Water 

motor alarm shall be tested. The connecting circuit to the building fire alarm system shall be 

inspected and tested. 

D. Main Drain Flow Test. Following flushing of the underground piping, a main drain test shall be 

made to verify the adequacy of the water supply. Static and residual pressures shall be 

recorded on the certificate specified in paragraph SUBMITTALS. In addition, a main drain 

test shall be conducted each time after a main control valve is shut and opened. 

3.14 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TEST 

Final Acceptance Test shall begin only when the Preliminary Test Report has been approved. Per the 

Submittals section, the Hanford Fire Marshal’s Office shall be provided a minimum of 20 days’ notice 

prior to the conduction of Final Acceptance Tests, and shall be provided the opportunity to observe 

these tests. The Fire Protection Specialist shall conduct the Final Acceptance Test and shall provide a 

complete demonstration of the operation of the system. This shall include operation of control valves 

and flowing of inspector's test connections to verify operation of associated waterflow alarm switches. 

After operation of control valves has been completed, the main drain test shall be repeated to assure 

that control valves are in the open position. Each system shall be completely drained after each trip 

test. The system air supply system shall be tested to verify that system pressure is restored in the specified 

time. In addition, the Fire Protection Specialist shall have available copies of as-built drawings 

and certificates of tests previously conducted. The installation shall not be considered accepted until 



identified discrepancies have been corrected and test documentation is properly completed and received. 

After the system has been tested and drained, the system shall be drained periodically for at 

least 2 weeks until it can be assured that water from the system has been removed. As per the Submittals 

section, a certificate of completion, signed and stamped by the Fire Protection Specialist, shall be 

provided with the Final Acceptance Test Report. 

3.15 OPERATIONAND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 

The Fire Protection Specialist shall provide the O&M Manual to the Hanford Fire Marshal, with a 

copy of the Final Acceptance Test Report and Certificate of Completion. 




SECTION 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Stainless Steel ball valves. 

2. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves. 


1. Division 22 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections 

only. 

2. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags 

and schedules. 


A. CWP: Cold working pressure. 

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber. 

C. SWP: Steam working pressure. 


A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. 


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single 

manufacturer. 

B. ASME Compliance: 

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 

2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 

3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. 




A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 

3. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 

4. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 

B. Use the following precautions during storage: 

1. Maintain valve end protection. 

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If 

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. 

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use 

handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. 


2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES 

A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves. 

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system 

pressures and temperatures. 

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Valve Actuator Types: 

1. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, locking lever type. 

E. Valve-End Connections: 

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 

2. Butt-Weld Joint: With beveled ends according to ASME B16.25. 

3. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1. 

F. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. 

2.2 STAINLESS STEEL BALL VALVES 

A. Three-Piece, Full-Port, Stainless Steel Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim: 






a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. 

b. Flow-Tek, A subsidiary of Bray International, Inc. 

c. Hammond Valve. 

d. Milwaukee Valve Company. 

e. NIBCO INC. 

2. Description: 

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. 

b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. 

c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 

d. Body Design: Three piece. 

e. Body Material: Stainless-Steel Type 316 ASTM A351 Gr CF8M. 

f. Ends: Threaded, or butt-weld. 

g. Seats: Reinforced PTFE or TFE. 

h. Stem: Stainless steel. 

i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. 

j. Port: Full. 

2.3 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES 

A. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc: 




a. ABZ Valve and Controls; a division of ABZ Manufacturing, Inc. 

b. Bray Controls, a division of Bray International, Inc. 

c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. 

d. Cooper Cameron Valves; a division of Cooper Cameron Corporation. 

e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. 

f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. 

g. DeZurik Water Controls. 

h. Flo Fab Inc. 

i. Hammond Valve 

j. Keystone, a Tyco flow control company. 

k. Kitz Corporation. 

l. Legend Valve. 

m. Milwaukee Valve Company. 

n. NIBCO INC. 

o. Norriseal; a Dover Corporation company. 

p. Red-White Valve Corporation. 

q. Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International, Inc. 

r. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 


a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. 

b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. 





c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated 

pressure without use of downstream flange. 

d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. 

e. Seat: EPDM. 

f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. 

g. Disc: Aluminum bronze. 

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove 

special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and 

handling. 

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made 

accessible by such operations. 

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. 

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper 

size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is 

suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. 

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION 

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, 

maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. 

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. 

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. 

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. 

3.3 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but 

before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. 

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS 

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 

1. Shutoff Service: Ball or butterfly valves. 



2. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type. 

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves 

with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted. 

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections: 

1. For Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 

2. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 

3. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged or butt-weld ends. 




SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for plumbing system piping and 

equipment: 

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 

2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 

3. Metal framing systems. 

4. Fastener systems. 

5. Equipment supports. 

B. Related Sections include the following: 

1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze 

hangers for pipe and equipment supports. 

2. Division 21 Section "Wet Pipe Sprinkler System" for pipe hangers for fire-suppression 

piping. 

3. Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and 

Equipment" for vibration isolation devices. 


A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. 

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and 

Supports." 




B. Welding certificates. 




A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 

2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code—Sheet Steel." 

3. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code--Stainless Steel." 

4. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 

B. All piping and tubing supports and components indicated on the Drawings with a (Z) are Safety 

Significant SSCs (Structure Systems or Components). 




a. Pipe support spacing; 

b. Support material type; 

c. Support catalog number; 

d. Weld filler material; and 

e. Weld type. 



A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to 

product selection: 

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 


manufacturers specified. 



2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 

"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types. 

B. Available Manufacturers: 

1. Anvil International. 

2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports. 

3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 

4. Empire Industries, Inc. 

5. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 

6. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. 

7. Grinnell Corp. 

8. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 



9. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. 

10. PHS Industries, Inc. 

11. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 

12. Tolco Inc. 

C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 

D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 

E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of 

bearing surface of piping. 

2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS 

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from 

structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts. 

2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS 

A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels 

and other components. 



2. Tolco Inc. 

3. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd. 

C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. 


2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS 

A. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened 

portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported 

loads and building materials where used. 

1. Available Manufacturers: 

a. Drillco Devices Ltd. 

b. Hilti, Inc. 

c. Powers Fasteners. 

2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS 

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel 

shapes. 




A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 

ASTM A 276/A 276M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, stainless steel. 


3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS 

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems 

and equipment. 

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in 

piping system Sections. 

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will 

not have field-applied finish. 

D. Use hangers and supports fabricated of stainless steel where attachments are in direct contact 

with stainless steel pipe or tubing. 

E. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in 

direct contact with copper tubing. 

F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in 

piping system Sections, install the following types: 

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or 

insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 

2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to 

NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required. 

3. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For 

suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8. 

4. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of 

noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3. 

5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 

6. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or 

contraction. 

7. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes, 

NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion 

support and cast-iron floor flange. 

G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system 

Sections, install the following types: 

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to 

NPS 20. 

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, 

NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps. 



H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system 


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of 

building attachments. 

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 

I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system 


1. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist 

construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. 

2. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, 

channels, or angles. 

3. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 

4. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads 

are considerable and rod sizes are large. 

5. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 

6. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to 

flange edge. 

7. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 

8. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams 

for heavy loads. 

9. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams 

for heavy loads, with link extensions. 

10. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to 

structural steel. 

11. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above 

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: 

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. 

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. 

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 

12. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 

13. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 

14. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear 

horizontal movement where headroom is limited. 

J. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not 

specified in piping system Sections. 

K. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not 


L. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete 

construction. 



3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION 

A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, 

supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building 

structure. 

B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for 

grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze 

pipe hangers. 

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or 

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual 

pipe hangers. 

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes or ASTM A 276/A276M stainless 

steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1 or 

AWS D1.6. 

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support 

together on field-assembled metal framing systems. 

D. Fastener System Installation: 

1. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely 

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and 

other accessories. 

F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. 

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping 

systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of 

expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. 

H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. 

I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional 

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger 

and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten 

inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. 

J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from 

movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. 

K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum 

pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded. 


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support 

equipment above floor. 



B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface. 

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS 

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment 

supports. 

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be 

shop welded because of shipping size limitations. 

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance 

and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 





4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours 

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 


A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve 

indicated slope of pipe. 

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. 

3.6 PAINTING 

A. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas 

of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 “Painting Sections." 

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply 

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 




SECTION 220533 - HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes heat tracing for freeze prevention of the piping within the hose chase with 

the following electric heating cables: 

1. Self-regulating, parallel resistance. 


A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and 

accessories for each type of product indicated. 

1. Schedule heating capacity, length of cable, spacing, and electrical power requirement for 

each electric heating cable required. 

B. Shop Drawings: For electric heating cable. Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to 

other work. 

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 

C. Field quality-control test reports. 

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric heating cables to include in operation and 

maintenance manuals. 

E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, 

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for 

intended use. 

Contract 44577 KW Annex – Rev. D 44577-CSI-SPEC-001 220533 - 1


1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or 

replace electric heating cable that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty 

period. 



2.1 SELF-REGULATING, PARALLEL-RESISTANCE HEATING CABLES 



B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product 

indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 

1. Thermon Manufacturing Co. 

2. Chromalox, Inc.; Wiegard Industrial Division; Emerson Electric Company. 

3. Delta-Therm Corporation. 

4. Easy Heat Inc. 

5. Nelson Heat Trace. 

6. Raychem; a division of Tyco Thermal Controls. 

7. Trasor Corp. 

C. Heating Element: Pair of parallel No. 16 nickel-plated copper bus wires embedded in 

crosslinked semiconductive core, which varies heat output in response to temperature along its 

length. Terminate with waterproof, factory-assembled nonheating leads with connectors at one 

end, and seal the opposite end watertight. Cable shall be capable of crossing over itself once 

without overheating. 

D. Cable Cover: Tinned-copper braid, and polyolefin outer jacket. 

E. Maximum Operating Temperature (Power On): 150 deg F. 

F. Maximum Exposure Temperature (Power Off): 100 deg F. 

G. Capacities and Characteristics: 

1. Maximum Heat Output: 10 W/ft. 

2. Volts: 120 V. 

3. Phase: 1 phase. 

4. Hertz: 60 Hz. 

5. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: 20 A. 

6. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: 20 A. 



2.2 CONTROLS 

A. Thermostats for Freeze Protection: 

1. Remote bulb unit with adjustable temperature range which spans from 35 to 50 deg F. 

2. Snap action; open-on-rise, single-pole switch with minimum current rating adequate for 

connected cable. 

3. Remote bulb on capillary. 

4. Corrosion-resistant, waterproof control enclosure. 


A. Cable Installation Accessories: Fiberglass tape, heat-conductive putty, cable ties, silicone end 

seals and splice kits, and installation clips all furnished by manufacturer, or as recommended in 

writing by manufacturer. 

B. Warning Tape: Continuously printed "Electrical Tracing"; vinyl, at least 3 mils thick, and with 

pressure-sensitive, permanent, waterproof, self-adhesive back. 

1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: 3/4 inch 

minimum. 



A. Examine surfaces and substrates to receive electric heating cables for compliance with 

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 

1. Ensure surfaces and pipes in contact with electric heating cables are free of burrs and 

sharp protrusions. 

2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.2 APPLICATIONS 

A. Install the following types of electric heating cable for the applications described: 

1. Temperature Maintenance for hose chase: Self-regulating, parallel-resistance heating 

cable. 


A. Install electric heating cable across expansion, construction, and control joints according to 

manufacturer's written recommendations using cable protection conduit and slack cable to allow 

movement without damage to cable. 

B. Electric Heating Cable Installation for temperature maintenance of hose chase: 



1. Install electric heating cables after insulation is installed and prior to installation of the 

hoses. 

2. Install electric heating cables according to IEEE 515.1. 

3. Install warning tape on insulation in the hose chase. 

C. Preset thermostat to 50 degrees and install thermostat in cavity provided in hose chase. 

D. Protect installed heating cables, including nonheating leads, from damage. 

3.4 CONNECTIONS 

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical 

Systems." 

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors 

and Cables." 


A. Testing: Perform tests after cable installation but before application of coverings such as 

insulation or concrete. 

1. Test cables for electrical continuity and insulation integrity before energizing. 

2. Test cables to verify rating and power input. Energize and measure voltage and current 

simultaneously. 

B. Repeat tests for continuity, insulation resistance, and input power after installing hoses in hose 

chase. 

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 




SECTION 220548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND 

EQUIPMENT 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Isolation pads. 

2. Isolation mounts. 

3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 

4. Restrained spring isolators. 

5. Housed spring mounts. 

6. Elastomeric hangers. 

7. Spring hangers. 

8. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops. 

9. Pipe riser resilient supports. 

10. Resilient pipe guides. 

11. Seismic snubbers. 

12. Restraining braces and cables. 


A. IBC: International Building Code. 

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service. 

C. ASCE 7-05: American Society of Civil Engineers Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and 

Other Structures 


A. Wind-Restraint Loading: 

SSCs susceptible to wind shall be evaluated using wind load per ASCE 7-05, and the 

parameters below. 

1. Basic Wind Speed: 91 mph. 

2. Occupancy Category: IV. 

3. Exposure Category: C. 



4. Importance Factor: 1.0 

5. The design wind pressure shall not be less than 10 lb/sq. ft. acting in either direction 

normal to the surface. 

B. Seismic-Restraint Loading: 

1. Design the functional and physical interrelationship of components and their effect on 

each other so that the failure of a mechanical component shall not cause the failure of a 

nearby life-safety, safety-significant, or safety class mechanical or electrical component. 

2. Seismic Criteria: Use the following criteria to calculate seismic design forces and relative 

seismic relative displacements in accordance with the IBC and ASCE 7: 

a. Seismic Design Category (Site Class) = D 

b. SDSH = design spectral acceleration at short periods, horizontal = 0.458g 

c. SDSV = design spectral acceleration at short periods, vertical = 0.323g 

d. Occupancy Category = IV 

e. Ip = 1.5 

f. Amplification factor and Response Modification coefficient (eg. ap, Rp) as 

tabulated in ASCE 7. 

g. RP = 0.8 Rp reduced per DOE-STD-1189, Appendix A. 

3. Provide seismic protection in accordance with the IBC, ASCE 7, and additional data 

furnished in this Section. 

4. Anchorage of all SSCs shall comply with the anchorage requirements of PRC-PRO-EN- 

097, Engineered Design and Evaluation (Natural Phenomena Hazard). 

5. Equipment Qualification: The following equipment designated with Ip greater than 1.0 

and furnished under this subcontract shall be certified by the manufacturer to withstand 

the total lateral seismic force and seismic relative displacements specified in the IBC or 

ASCE 7. Component manufacturer’s certification shall be based on shake table testing or 

experience data (i.e., historical data demonstrating acceptable seismic performance), or 

by more rigorous analysis providing for equivalent safety. Required response spectra 

shall exceed 1.1 times the in-structure spectra determined in accordance with IBC AC156 

Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Qualification by Shake-Table Testing of Nonstructural 

Components and Systems. 



1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation 

device. 

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each 

type and size of seismic-restraint component used. 

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and 

rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an evaluation service member 

of ICC-ES or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 



b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with 

requirements. 

3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads. 


C. Qualification Data: For testing agency. 

D. Field quality-control test reports. 


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to 

conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as 

defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are 

more stringent. 

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural 

Welding Code - Steel" or AWS D1.6/D1.6M, “Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel.” 

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall 

bear anchorage preapproved by ICC-ES, or preapproved by another agency acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on 

independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are 

not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including 

combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and 

sealed by a qualified professional engineer. 


2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS 



1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. 

2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 

3. California Dynamics Corporation. 

4. Isolation Technology, Inc. 

5. Kinetics Noise Control. 

6. Mason Industries. 

7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 

8. Vibration Isolation. 

9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 



B. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad 

area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that 

match requirements of supported equipment. 

1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene. 

C. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop 

restraint. 

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to 

weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inchthick, neoprene or 

rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting 

and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. 

2. Restraint: Seismic or limit-stop as required for equipment and authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the 

spring at rated load. 

4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 

5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 

6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without 

deformation or failure. 

D. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers. 

1. Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint. 

2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure. 

3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch travel up or down 

before contacting a resilient collar. 

E. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant 

elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger 

rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range. 

F. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert 

in compression. 

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a 

maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing 

isolation efficiency. 







6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced 

cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 

7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support 

spring coil. 



2.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES 





3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 



6. Loos & Co.; Cableware Division. 


8. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC. 

9. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. 

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications 

shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES or an agency 


1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of 

components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be 

subjected. 

C. Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and 

replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings. 

1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or 

female-wedge type. 

2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene. 

3. Maximum 1/4-inch air gap, and minimum 1/4-inchthick resilient cushion. 

D. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted 

steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building 

structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; 

and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces. 

E. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables with end connections made of steel 

assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and 

with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement. 

F. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped or framing channel clamped to hanger 

rod. 

G. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel 

for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with 

strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight 

times diameter. 

H. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane 

methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. 

Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless 



steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as 

tested according to ASTM E 488. 

2.3 FACTORY FINISHES 

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting. 

B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment 

before shipping. 

1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 

2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use. 

3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 

4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indicate 

capacity range. 



A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for 

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting 

performance. 

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations 

before installation. 

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application 

by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES or an agency acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings 

to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces. 

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of 

components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads 

within specified loading limits. 

3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION 

A. Equipment Restraints: 



1. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service 

member of ICC-ES or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing 

required submittals for component. 

B. Piping Restraints: 

1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127. 

2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum 

of 80 feet o.c. 

3. Brace at change of direction longer than 12 feet. 

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. 

D. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of 

ICC-ES or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals 

for component. 

E. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at 

flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. 

F. Drilled-in Anchors: 

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for 

anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or 

drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are 

encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and 

telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved 

full design strength. 

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty 

sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to 

which anchor is to be fastened. 

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to 

installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole 

and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air 

pockets in the adhesive. 

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 

6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless steel anchors for exterior 

applications. 


A. Perform tests and inspections. 

B. Tests and Inspections: 

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction. 



2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to 

restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least 

seven days' advance notice. 

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary 

load-spreading members. 

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by 

Architect. 

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 

6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 

7. Measure isolator deflection. 

8. Verify snubber minimum clearances. 

9. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory 

results are achieved. 


D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 


A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight. 

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. 

After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during 

normal operation. 

C. Adjust active height of sprint isolators. 

D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation. 




SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Equipment labels. 

2. Pipe labels. 

3. Stencils. 

4. Valve tags. 

5. Warning tags. 



B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification 

material and device. 

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed 

content for each label. 

D. Valve numbering scheme. 

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of 

surfaces where devices are to be applied. 

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. 

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. 




2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS 

A. Metal Labels for Equipment: 

1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum 

thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 

2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 

3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering 

for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the 

size of principal lettering. 

4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 

5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. 

B. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 

1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 

2. Letter Color: Black. 

3. Background Color: White. 

4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 


2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 







C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, 

Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the 

Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. 

D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch 

bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where 

equipment is indicated (P&ID and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title 

where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and 

maintenance data. 

2.2 PIPE LABELS 

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering 

indicating service, and showing flow direction. 



B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover or cover full 

circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. 

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing. 

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or 

abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate 

both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high. 

2.3 STENCILS 

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; and minimum letter 

height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational 

instructions. 

1. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal. 

2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint may 

be in pressurized spray-can form. 

3. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless 


2.4 VALVE TAGS 

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2inch 

numbers. 

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, 

and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook. 

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve 

number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or 

space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for 

identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 

2.5 WARNING TAGS 

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card 

stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 

1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches. 

2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. 

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO 

NOT OPERATE." 



4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering. 



A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification 

devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and 

encapsulants. 

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION 

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. 

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION 

A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting." 

B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe 

labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels, complying with ASME A13.1, on each 

piping system. 

1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. 

2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking. 

C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; 

machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and 

exterior exposed locations as follows: 

1. Near each valve and control device. 

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. 

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed 

piping. 

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in 

areas of congested piping and equipment. 

D. Pipe Label Color Schedule: 

1. Compressed-Air/Instrument Air Piping (IA): 

a. Background Color: Blue. 

b. Letter Color: White. 



2. Nitrogen Piping (NIT): 

a. Background Color: Yellow. 

b. Letter Color: Black. 

3. IXM Water Piping (IXM): 



4. Air Purge Piping (AIR) 



5. Process Condensate Drain Piping (CND): 


b. Letter Color: Black 

6. Fire Water Drainage Piping (FP): 

a. Background Color: Red. 


3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION 

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within 

factory-fabricated equipment unit and shutoff valves. List tagged valves in a valve schedule. 

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and 

with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs: 

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: 

a. Compressed Air/Instrument Air: 2 inches, round. 

b. Nitrogen: 2 inches, round. 

c. IXM Water: 2 inches, round. 

d. AIR: 2 inches, round. 

e. Fire Water Drainage: 2 inches, round. 

2. Valve-Tag Color: 

a. Compressed Air/Instrument Air: Natural or Blue. 

b. Nitrogen: Natural or Yellow. 

c. IXM Water: Natural or Yellow. 

d. AIR: Natural or Yellow. 



e. Fire Water Drainage: Natural or Red. 

3. Letter Color: 

a. Compressed Air/Instrument Air: White. 

b. Nitrogen: Black. 

c. IXM Water: Black. 

d. AIR: Black. 

e. Fire Water Drainage: White. 

3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION 

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where 

required. 




SECTION 221329 - SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS (FIRE WATER DRAINAGE LIFT STATION) 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. PRE-PACKAGED LIFT STATION: Provide a Compete UL Listed, Duplex Alternating, Pre- 

Packaged Sewage Lift Station. Package shall include, Fiberglass Wet Well / Valve Vault, 

submersible quick-disconnect Pumps, Controls, Piping, Valves and all other Appurtenances as 

described in the following specifications. 


1. Division 22 Section "Facility Storm Drainage Piping (Fire Water Drainage)." 


A. Product Data: For each type and size of sewage pump specified. Include certified performance 

curves with operating points plotted on curves; and rated capacities of selected models, 

furnished specialties, and accessories. 

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. 

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each sewage pump to include in emergency, operation, 

and maintenance manuals. 


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of sewage 

pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product 

Substitution Procedures." 

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, 


intended use. 


A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage. 

Contract 44577 KW Annex – Rev. E 44577-CSI-SPEC-001 221329-1


B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage. 

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling. 


A. Coordinate size and location of pits. 



A. The station manufacturer shall be required to affix an UNDERWRITER’S LABORATORIES 

(UL) LABEL attesting to the compliance of that assembled equipment under the PACKAGED 

PUMP SYSTEMS (QCZJ) UL Listing Category This label shall be inclusive of the entire 

station with enclosure so as to demonstrate compliance with the National Electrical Code 

requirements for working clearances and wiring procedures. 

B. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to 





a. PumpTech, Inc. 

b. Flygt; ITT Industries. 

2.2 SUBMERSIBLE, QUICK-DISCONNECT SEWAGE PUMPS: 

A. Factory-assembled and -tested, duplex, single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction, submersible, 

direct-connected sewage pumps complying with UL 778 and with HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3 for 

submersible sewage pumps and with SWPA's "Submersible Sewage Pumping Systems (SWPA) 

Handbook" for guide-rail supports. Include reverse-flow assembly. 


a. Flygt; ITT Industries. 

b. ABS Inc. 

2. Casing: Cast iron (ASTM A-48, Class 35B), with open inlet, legs (or guide-rail supports) 

that elevate pump to permit flow into impeller, and vertical discharge with companion 

flange for piping connection. All metal surfaces coming into contact with the pumped 

media except stainless steel components shall have protective spray coating. Housing 

design shall incorporate metal-to-metal contact between machined surfaces. Surfaces 

where watertight sealing is required shall be machined and fitted with Nitrile or Viton 

rubber O-rings. 



3. Impeller: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class No. 25 A or higher cast iron, statically and 

dynamically balanced to ISO 10816, open or semiopen, nonclog design and capable of 

handling solids; overhung, single suction, and keyed and secured to shaft. 

4. Bearings and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel, one piece with factory-sealed,grease- 

permananently lubricated ball bearings. 

5. Mechanical Seal: : Each pump shall be equipped with a tandem mechanical shaft seal 

system consisting of two totally independent seal assemblies. The seals shall operate in a 

lubricant reservoir that hydro-dynamically lubricates the lapped seal faces at a constant 

rate. The lower, primary seal unit, located between the pump and the lubricant chamber, 

shall contain one stationary industrial duty seal ring and one rotating industrial duty seal 

ring. The upper, secondary seal unit, located between the lubricant chamber and motor 

housing, shall contain one stationary industrial duty seal ring, and one rotating one 

rotating industrial duty seal ring. Each seal interface shall be held in contact by its own 

spring system 

6. Motor: The Premium Efficiency motor shall meet efficiency standards in accordance 

with IEC 60034-30, level IE3 and NEMA Premium. The motor shall be of the squirrelcage 

induction design, NEMA type B, Premium Efficiency. The copper stator windings 

shall be insulated with moisture resistant Class H insulation materials, rated for 180 o C 

(356 o F. The motor shall be designed for continuous duty. The maximum continuous 

temperature of the pumped liquid shall be 40 o C (104 o F), and intermittently up to 50 o C 

(122 o F). The service factor (as defined by the NEMA MG1 standard) shall be 1.3 in wet 

pit service and 1.15 in dry pit service. The motor shall have a voltage tolerance of +/- 

10% from nominal, and a phase to phase voltage imbalance tolerance of 1%. The motor 

shall be FM and CSA approved for use in NEC Class I, Division I, Groups C & D 

hazardous locations. The motor shall be capable of operating, completely submerged, 

partially submerged, or unsubmerged. For submerged (wet pit) applications, the motor 

shall be self cooling via the process fluid surrounding the motor. 

a. Moisture-Sensing Probe: The integrity of the mechanical seal system shall be 

continuously monitored during pump operation and standby time. An electrical 

probe shall be provided in a sensing chamber positioned between the primary and 

secondary mechanical seals for detecting the presence of water contamination 

within the chamber. The sensing chamber shall be filled with environmentally safe 

non toxic oil. A solid-state relay mounted in the pump control panel or in a 

separate enclosure shall send a low voltage, low amperage signal to the probe, 

continuously monitoring the conductivity of the liquid in the sensing chamber. If 

sufficient water enters the sensing chamber through the primary mechanical seal, 

the probe shall sense the increase in conductivity and signal the solid state relay in 

the control panel. The relay shall then energize a warning light on the control 

panel, or optionally, cause the pump shut down. This system shall provide an early 

warning of mechanical seal leakage, thereby preventing damage to the submersible 

pump, and allowing scheduled rather than emergency maintenance. 

b. Thermal Protection: Each phase of the motor shall contain a normally closed bimetallic 

temperature monitor switch imbedded in the motor windings. These 

thermal switches shall be connected in series and set to open at 140 o C +/- 5 o C 

(284 o F). 



c. Motor Housing Fluid: Air. 

7. Guide-Rail Supports: Include the following for each sewage pump: 

a. Guide Rails: Vertical pipes or structural members, made of stainless steel or other 

corrosion-resistant metal, attached to baseplate and basin sidewall or cover. 

b. Baseplate: Corrosion-resistant metal plate, attached to basin floor, supporting 

guide rails and stationary elbow. 

c. Pump Yoke: Motor-mounted or casing-mounted yokes or other attachments for 

aligning pump during connection of flanges. 

d. Movable Elbow: Pump discharge-elbow fitting with flange, seal, and positioning 

device. 

e. Stationary Elbow: Fixed discharge-elbow fitting with flange that mates to 

movable-elbow flange and support attached to baseplate. 

f. Lifting Cable: Stainless steel; attached to pump and cover at manhole. 

B. Pump Discharge Piping and Valves: All pipe and fittings shall be either cast or ductile iron 

pipe meeting ASTM A48 material specifications. Each pump discharge pipe shall be the same 

diameter as the discharge of the pump and shall remain that diameter until it exits the tank. A 

common flanged discharge line shall leave the valve box at an elevation specified by on the 

engineered drawings. Valves shall be of the non-lubricated eccentric type with an elastomer 

covering all seating surfaces. The elastomer shall be suitable for the service intended. Flanged 

valves shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI B16.1 including facing, drilling and 

flange thickness. Valve bodies shall be ASTM A-126 Class B cast iron. 

1. Valves 3" and larger shall be furnished with a welded-in overlay seat of not less than 

90% nickel in accordance with AWWA C507-73. Sprayed, plated or screwed-in seats 

are not acceptable. Plugs shall be of ASTM A-536 Grade 65-45-12 in compliance with 

AWWA C-504 Section 2.2. The plugs shall be of one-piece construction with PTFE 

thrust bearings on the upper and lower bearing journals to reduce torque and prevent dirt 

and grit from entering the bearing and seal area. 

2. Check Valves: Check valves shall be all iron body, bronze mounted, full opening swing 

type. Valve clapper shall swing completely clear of the waterway when valve is full open, 

permitting a "full flow" through the valve equal to the nominal pipe diameter. They shall 

comply with AWWA standard C-508 latest revision. Check valves shall be rated at 175- 

PSI water working pressure, 350-PSI hydrostatic test for structural soundness (2" through 

12"). Seat tightness at rated working pressure shall be in accordance with values. shown 

in AWWA standard C-500 for gate valves and fully conform to AWWA C-508. Check 

valves shall be furnished with 125# ANSI flanged ends. 

C. Controls: For each station, a duplex pump control panel shall be provide as per specification 

drawings and shall have as a minimum, main disconnect switch, standard motor starters, digital 

level control system with submersible level transducer. The panel shall be manufactured in the 

USA by a UL698A registered shop and provided with a UL 698A label for Industrial Control 

Panels Relating to Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Enclosure shall be UL Type 4X stainless 

steel, minimum dimensions with pad-lockable 3 point latch with a swing out inner door and 

include the following: 

1. A GFCI convenience receptacle shall be provided. 

2. Receptacle shall be industrial grade 



3. 120V 20A.Control panel shall have a thermostatically controlled heater / fan. 

4. Heater package shall be Hoffman DAH1002A or approved equal. 

5. Main disconnect switch shall be UL98 listed and sized to handle full load amps of the 

panel, with pad-lockable door interlocking handle. 

6. UL 508e type combination starters (for 20HP and below) each with, IEC type 

combination starter 

7. Control power transformer with primary fuse protection, 

8. An HOA selector switch, RUN indicator, HIGH TEMPERATURE indicator, SEAL 

LEAK indicator and hour meter shall be provided for each pump. All pilot devices shall 

be UL Type 4X rated, 22mm type manufactured by Square D or equal. The indicators 

shall be long life LED type, 

9. An alarm horn shall be provided and mounted on the side of the panel. Horn shall be 

Federal Signal model 350 or equal with a minimum sound level of 100 db. A silence 

pushbutton shall be located on the inner door. 

10. An alarm light shall be mounted on the top of the panel, and shall be red polycarbonate 

and UL Type 4X rated. 

11. Control relays shall be provided as shown on plan drawings and shall be blade type, with 

indicator lights. Relays shall be IDEC or approved equal. 

12. Analog 4-20mA loops shall be provided with fuse protection. 

13. Intrinsically Safe Barriers provided for all control wiring such as Submersible 

Transducers, Floats and other low voltage devises. 

14. Inputs shall be provided for each pump to include moisture in motor, motor overtemperature, 

pump starter auxiliary contact to confirm pump operation when called, 

redundant high and low float switch and HOA Auto position to confirm the pump is 

available. Outputs shall be provided for each pump run command, out-of-service 

indicator for each pump, alarm horn, alarm dome light and general fault contact 

D. Sequence of Operation; Provide H-O-A selector switch. Inputs are provided and programmed 

into the DLC for a contact of the AUTO position of the selector switch. When the H-O-A is 

place into the HAND position, the DLC will be bypassed and the pump should run. If the 

contact to the H-O-A selector switch is in the OFF position and input of the DLC is not closed, 

the DLC sets the status of that pump to Out-Of-Service. When the H-O-A is placed into the 

AUTO position, the pump is available to run as instructed by the DLC. Touching the HAND, 

OFF or AUTO buttons on the Pump Status page will select the mode of operation. Touching the 

HAND button will start the pump in manual mode. The pumps are available for automatic run 

when the AUTO selector switch input is enabled and the “soft” H-O-A is in the AUTO mode. 

1. The analog level signal is converted to tenths of feet and that value is compared to the 

start and stop set points that are entered into the system by the user. On rising level, when 

the level is equal to or greater than the lead pump start set point, the lead pump will start. 

If the level continues to rise beyond the start lag pump set point, the lag pump will start. 

If there are more than two pumps, rising level will start the additional pumps in sequence. 

On falling level, the pumps will sequence off as the level drops below the respective stop 

set points. 

2. The pump alternation mode is set by the user. Automatic, time clock and manual modes 

are available. 

3. Automatic mode—the pumps will alternate after each pumping cycle. 

Time clock—the pumps will alternate daily at the time set by the user. 

Manual—the pumps will not alternate. The lead pump is selected by the user. 



E. Capacities and Characteristics: 

1. System Capacity: 2,000 gpm 

2. Number of Pumps: Two. 

3. Each Pump: 

a. Capacity: 1,000 gpm. 

b. Solids Handling Capability: 3 inches minimum. 

c. Total Dynamic Head: 40 feet. 

d. Speed: 1,185 rpm 

e. Discharge Pipe Size: 8” NPS. 

f. Motor Horsepower: 30 hp 

g. Electrical Characteristics: 

1) Volts: 480. 

2) Phases: Three. 

3) Hertz: 60. 

h. Unit Electrical Characteristics: 

1) Full-Load Amperes: 35 Amps 

4. Alternator Control Required: Yes. 

5. Guide-Rail Supports Required: Yes. 

2.3 SEWAGE PUMP BASINS 

A. Description: Factory fabricated basin with sump, pipe connections, and separate cover. 

B. Sump: Fabricate watertight, with sidewall openings for pipe connections. 

1. Material: Fiberglass wet well and integral valve vault shall be in accordance with the 

definitions given in American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) designations 

D3753-99. The resin used shall be of a commercial grade and shall be evaluated as a 

laminate by test or determined by previous service to be acceptable for the environment. 

The resins used may contain the minimum amount of fillers or additives required to 

improve handling properties. Up to 5% by weight of thixotropic agent that will not 

interfere with visual inspection may be added to the resin for viscosity control. The 

laminate shall consist of an inner surface, an interior layer, and an exterior layer of laminate 

body. A White GelCoat shall be the finishing surface for the interior of the Wet Well / 

Valve Vault. The Wet Well / Valve Vault must be designed to withstand wall collapse 

based on the assumption of hydrostatic type loading by backfill with a density of 120 

lb./ft. 3 . The tank wall laminate must be constructed to withstand or exceed. The Wet Well 

shall incorporate an integral Hopper Bottom design that directs solids into the center of the 

wet well and into the suction of the pumps. 

2. Reinforcement: The Wet Well bottom of 8ft diameter or larger Wet Wells shall be 

constructed of .50 inch A36 steel plate minimum. 6-in I-beams shall be welded to the .50 

inch steel plate to add structural integrity and reduce the possible deflection caused from up 



thrust do to ground water. The I-beams shall protrude from under the plate in 4 places. 

Foam board is then cut to fit in between the I-beams to the outer edge of the .50 inch steel 

plate. Steel base, I-beams and foam board shall be completely encapsulated in fiberglass 

resin to prevent corrosion. Tank bottom must be constructed suitable for the service 

designated by the project engineer. Under totally water submerged conditions, the center 

deflection of any empty tank bottom must be less than 3/8 inch as not to interfere with 

bottom pump mounting requirements and rail systems. 

3. Cover: Cover shall be a minimum of 0.375 inch Aluminum Diamond Plate for all Wet 

Wells greater than 8 ft diameter. The Cover shall have an outside diameter of 1 in 

minimum over the diameter of the top flange of the fiberglass wet well / valve vault. The 

cover shall be secured to the basin with stainless steel bolts, flat washers, lock washers and 

nuts. Two rows of ¼” x ½” Butyl Tape shall be applied, one on each side of the cover bolts 

and between the basin and aluminum cover to prevent foreign materials from entering the 

wet well / valve vault. 

4. Access Hatches: Access Hatches shall be provided for entrance into the wet well and valve 

vault. The hatches shall have aluminum diamond plate tops, 316SS hardware and pad lock 

pin, lockable hinged safety grating panel and 300 psf load rating. The grating panel is 

powder coated the color “safety orange”. Hatches shall be sized appropriately to safely and 

easily remove pumps from the wet well and allow access into the valve vault. Safety 

Grating is only required on the Wet Well Hatch 

5. Other Accessories: All nuts, washers, bolts and fasteners of any type shall be constructed 

of 304 Stainless Steel, all inclusive of the entire station. Never Seize shall be applied to 

the threads of all nuts and bolts to prevent. A Stainless Steel cord hanger shall be mounted 

under the cover but with in arms reach. Three 2.5 inch glycerin filled discharge Gauges, 1 

common and 1 for each pump. Each gauge shall have an isolation valve and screen to 

prevent clogging. 

C. Capacities and Characteristics: 

1. Material: Fiberglass. 

2. Capacity: 8,000 gal . 

3. Diameter: 144 inches 

4. Depth: 120 inches 

5. Inlet No. 1: 

a. Drainage Pipe Size: 10” NPS. 

b. Bottom of Sump to Invert Elevation: 41 inches. 

c. Type: Hubbed outside. 

6. Sidewall Outlet No. 1: 

a. Discharge Pipe Size: 8” NPS. 

b. Bottom of Sump to Invert Elevation: 88 inches 

c. Type: Flanged outside. 

7. Cover: 



a. Material: Aluminum 

b. Size: to match basin 

c. Manhole Required: Yes. 

d. Vent Size: 4 inch NPS. 

2.4 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM INTERFACE 

A. Provide auxiliary contacts in pump controllers for interface to building automation system. 

Include the following: 

1. On-off status of each pump. 

2. Alarm status. 



A. Examine roughing-in for plumbing piping to verify actual locations of sanitary drainage and 

vent piping connections before sewage pump installation. 


A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 

B. Install sewage pumps according to applicable requirements in HI 1.4. 

C. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance including removal of motors, 

impellers, couplings, and accessories. 

D. Set submersible sewage pumps on basin floors. Make direct connections to sanitary drainage 

piping. 

1. Anchor guide-rail supports to basin bottoms and sidewalls or covers. Install pumps so 

pump and discharge pipe disconnecting flanges make positive seals when pumps are 

lowered into place. 

E. Install sewage pump basins and connect to drainage and vent piping. Brace interior of basins 

according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent distortion or collapse during backfill 

placement. Set basin cover and fasten to basin top flange. Install cover so top surface is flush 

with finished grade. 

F. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps. 




A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Storm Drainage 

Piping (Fire Water Drainage)." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and 

specialties. 

B. Install piping adjacent to sewage pumps to allow service and maintenance. 

C. Connect sanitary drainage and vent piping to pumps. Install discharge piping equal to or greater 

than size of pump discharge piping. Install vent piping equal to or greater than size of pump 

basin vent connection. 

1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in discharge piping. 

2. Install check and shutoff valves on discharge piping from each pump. Install unions on 

pumps having threaded pipe connections. Install valves same size as connected piping. 

D. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical 

Systems." 

E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors 

and Cables." 

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE 

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

2. Verify bearing lubrication. 

3. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper direction of rotation. 

4. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand. If pump is bound or drags, do not 

operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. 

5. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application. 

B. Start pumps without exceeding safe motor power: 

1. Start motors. 

2. Open discharge valves slowly. 

3. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors. 

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 

D. Remove and replace damaged and malfunctioning components. 

1. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation as 

required for system application. 

2. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated, or if not 

indicated, for normal operation. 

E. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, 

provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to 

two visits to Project outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 




A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to 

adjust, operate, and maintain controls and pumps. 




SECTION 221413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING (FIRE WATER DRAINAGE) 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the fire water piping for the building: 

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 

2. Special pipe fittings. 

3. Hose. 

4. Fire Water Floor drains. 

5. Ball Valves. 

6. Single-Flange Butterfly valves. 

7. Encasement for underground metal piping. 


1. Division 22 Section "Sanitary Sewerage Pumps (Fire Water Drainage Lift Station)." 


A. EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene monomer rubber. 

B. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic. 

C. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 

D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 

E. SBR: Styrene-butadiene rubber. 

F. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer. 


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum workingpressure, 

unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Fire water Piping: 10-foot head of water. 

2. Fire water, Force-Main Piping: 50 psig. 




A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, valves, and couplings. 

B. LEED Submittal: 

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, including 

printed statement of VOC content. 

C. Field quality-control inspection and test reports. 

D. Welding certificates. 


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. 

B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural 

Welding Code--Steel." 

C. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure 

Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 

D. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and 

that certification is current. 

E. ASME Compliance: 

1. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping.” 

F. Examination Requirements for ASME B31.9: 

1. Perform a visual examination in accordance with ASME B31.9 Paragraph 936.4.1 












2.2 JOINING MATERIALS 

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. 

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system 

contents. 

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless 

thickness or specific material is indicated. 

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. 

b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 150, cast-iron and steel flanges. 

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face 

or ring type, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping 

system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall 

thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. 

F. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 

1. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 

2.3 PIPING MATERIALS 

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining 

materials. 

2.4 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade A or B, Standard Weight or Schedule 40, 

galvanized. Include ends matching joining method. 

B. Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.12 black, threaded, cast-iron drainage pattern. 

C. Pressure Fittings: 

1. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106, 

Schedule 40, galvanized, seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method. 

2. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Class 150; hexagonal-stock body with ball-andsocket, 

metal-to-metal, bronze seating surface; and female threaded ends. 

3. Malleable-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150 standard pattern. 

4. Steel Flanges: ASME B16.5, Class 150, carbon steel, threaded. 

5. Wrought-Steel Butt-Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, Schedule 40. 

6. Steel Flanges: ASME B16.5, Class 150, carbon steel. 



7. Steel Couplings: Dixon valve and coupling company 400AWBPTSS stainless steel buttweld 

male coupling. 

2.5 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. 

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent 

patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe. 

B. Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer: 

1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated 

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 

2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated 

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 

2.6 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS 

A. Pressure Pipe Couplings: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve-type same size as, with pressure rating at 

least equal to, and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined. 

2.7 HOSE 


a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 

b. Dresser, Inc.; DMD Div. 

c. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. 

d. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div. 

e. JCM Industries, Inc. 

f. Romac Industries, Inc. 

g. Smith-Blair, Inc. 

h. Viking Johnson. 

2. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard. 

3. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber. 

4. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material. 

A. Water suction/discharge industrial hose; Tube EPDM hose, synthetic, high tensile textile with 

steel wire helix, SBR cover with green spiral stripe, temperature range -40 deg. F to 180 deg. F, 

150 psig water pressure. Gates Corporation Barracuda, diameters, lengths and end connections 

as shown on Drawings. 

2.8 FIRE WATER FLOOR DRAINS 

A. Round Top Heavy Duty Drain 6 inch and larger; Manufacturer: J.R. Smith Mfg. Co. 



1. Figure No. 2143T-PB, Cast iron body, heavy duty wide flange flashing collar with 15” 

round top heavy duty tractor grate, threaded outlet, polished bronze top, connection sizes 

shown on Drawings. 

B. Side outlet scupper Drain; Manufacturer: J.R. Smith Mfg. Co. 

1. Figure No. 1510T, Cast iron body, angle grate, 90 degree threaded outlet, connection 

sizes shown on Drawings. 

C. Round Top Heavy Duty Drain, less than 6-inch, Manufacturer: J.R. Smith Mfg. Co. 

1. Figure No. 2120T, Cast iron body, heavy duty flange flashing collar with 8-1/2” round 

top heavy duty tractor grate, threaded outlet, Figure No. 7221T deep seal P-trap, sizes 

shown on Drawings. 

2.9 BALL VALVES 


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:. 

1. American Valve, Inc 

2. Apollo Valve / Conbraco. 

3. AT Controls, Inc. 

4. Crane, Inc. 

5. Jamesbury, Inc. 

6. Marwin Ball Valves; a division of Richards Industries. 

7. NIBCO Inc. 

8. Flowtek, Inc. a subsidiary of Bray International Inc. 

9. SVF Flow Controls, Inc. 

B. Description; Carbon Steel Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: 

1. Standard: MSS SP-110, 

2. Pressure Rating: Class 150, 

3. Body Design: 2 piece, 

4. Body/End Cap Material: carbon-steel, 

5. Port: Conventional-port, 



6. Ball: ASTM A 351 Type CF8M stainless-steel, vented, 

7. Stem: Blowout-Proof, stainless-steel, 

8. Seals: RPTFE/FKM, 

9. Ends: FNPT, 

10. Handle: provides visual flow indication and is lockable. 


A. 200 CWP, Iron, Air Operated, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum- 

Bronze Disc: 



the following:. 

a. Bray Controls, a division of Bray International, Inc. 

b. Keystone, a Tyco Flow Control Company. 










h. Factory mounted pneumatic spring return actuator sized to operate valve with 

minimum 80 psig compressed air. Valve shall fail open on spring power. 

i. Three-way solenoid valve. Provide a remote operated solenoid valve, 24 VAC, 

valve exhausts actuator on loss of power, ASCO Redhat Catalog number 

8320G201. 

B. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc: 



the following:. 

a. Bray Controls, a division of Bray International, Inc. 

b. Keystone, a Tyco Flow Control Company. 












2.11 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING 

A. Description: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105, high-density, crosslaminated PE film of 0.004inch 

or LLDPE film of 0.008-inch minimum thickness. 

B. Form: Sheet or tube. 

C. Color: Black or natural. 


3.1 EXCAVATION 

A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS 

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Underground fire water drainage piping (gravity) NPS 6 and smaller shall be the following: 

1. Solid-wall Schedule 40 PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 

C. Underground, fire water drainage piping (gravity) NPS 8 and larger shall be the following: 

1. Solid-wall Schedule 40 PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 

D. Aboveground fire water drainage force mains NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 shall be any of the 

following: 

1. Steel pipe, pressure fittings, and threaded joints. 

E. Aboveground fire water drainage force mains NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 6 shall be the following: 

1. Steel pipe, pressure fittings, and welded or threaded joints. 

F. Underground fire water drainage force mains NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following: 




G. Underground fire water drainage force mains NPS 5 and larger shall be the following: 


3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION 

A. General - Comply with ASME B31.9, Building Services Piping Code. 

B. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in fire water drainage piping. 

C. Install underground, steel, force-main piping. Install encasement on piping according to 

ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. 

D. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe 

penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to 

make installation watertight. Install wall-penetration fitting system at each service pipe 

penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight. 

E. Make changes in direction for fire water drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and 

long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of 

standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of 

drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. 

F. Lay buried building fire water drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install 

true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of 

piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for 

use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and 

pull past each joint as completed. 

G. Install fire water drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Fire Water Drain: ½ inch per foot in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and larger. 

2. Fire Water Drain: ¼ inch per foot in direction of flow for piping NPS 2-1/2 and smaller. 

H. Install force mains at elevations indicated. 

I. Install PVC fire water drainage piping according to ASTM D 2665. 

J. Install underground PVC fire water drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321. 

K. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by 


3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION 

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements. 

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 



C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before 

assembly. 

D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut 

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore 

full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal 

threading is specified. 

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or 

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. 

E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and 

welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. 

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service 

application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. 

G. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings 

according to the following: 

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent 

cements. 

2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket 

fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and 

socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 


A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty 

Valves for Plumbing Piping." 


A. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping 

and Equipment." 

B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. 

C. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods. 

D. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum 

rod diameters: 

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 

2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 

3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 


5. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 48 inches with 7/8-inch rod. 



E. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written 

instructions. 


A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 

B. Connect interior fire water drainage piping to exterior fire water drainage piping. Use transition 

fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. 

C. Connect fire water drainage piping to fire water drainage specialties. 

D. Connect force-main piping to the following: 

1. Sump Pumps: To sump pump discharge to the connection on the storage tanks. 


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection 

must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in 

after roughing-in. 

2. Visual Examination: Arrange for visual examination of piping before testing. 

3. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to 

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. 

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, 

make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. 

D. Test fire water drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in 

absence of published procedures, as follows: 

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been 

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report 

for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced fire water piping 

until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before 

it was tested. 

3. Test Procedure: Test fire water piping on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in 

piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of 

water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level 

must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 

4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until 

satisfactory results are obtained. 

5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 



E. Hydrostatic test force-main piping in accordance with ASME B31.9, Paragraph 937.3 and as 

follows: 

1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping 

until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before 

it was tested. 

2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 1.5 times the operating pressure, 

without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and 

allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must 

be repaired. 

3. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until 


4. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 

3.9 CLEANING 

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. 

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris 

and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. 

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. 



3.10 PIPE CODES 

PIPING CODE: P-2 Fire Water Drain Piping (Gravity) 

Design Pressure 10 foot head of water 

Test Pressure 10-foot head of water 

Operating Temperature 

Inspection and Test 

Method 

Sizes 12” Pipe and smaller 

Tubing/Pipe 

Fittings 

Valves As shown on Drawings. 

Environmental Extremes: -27°F to 110°F 

Normal Operating Extremes: 30°F to 80°F (Note 1) 

Visual Examination 

Hydrostatic testing at 10 foot of head water for all tubing and piping 

Solid Wall PVC Pipe: Schedule 40 PVC, ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and 

vent piping solvent joints. 

PVC Socket fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASMT D 3311, drain, waste, 

and vent patterns and to fit schedule 40 pipe. 

Note: 

1) Based on 30°F winter and 80°F summer approximate ground temperature. 

2) Standards referenced above shall be used unless approved by buyer. 



Design Pressure 50 psig 

Test Pressure 75 psig 



Method 

PIPING CODE: P-3 Fire Water Drain Piping (Force Main) 

Sizes 8” Pipe and Smaller 

Tubing/Pipe 

Fittings 



Visual Examination 

Hydrostatic testing at 150% of Design Pressure for all tubing and piping 

Steel Pipe, ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B, black or hot-dip zinc 

coated with ends matching joining method. 

Malleable-Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, threaded, ASTM A-105, 

Class WP carbon steel. 

Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, threaded, ASTM A-105, 

Class WP carbon steel. 

Steel Flanges: ASME B16.5, Class 150, ASTM A-105 carbon steel. 

Wrought-Steel Butt-Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, Schedule 40, ASTM 

A-234, Class WPB carbon steel. 

Valves As called out in Specification Section 221413 

Note: 

1) Based on 30°F winter and 80°F summer approximate ground temperatures. 





SECTION 221513 - GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED AIR PIPING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. General Service Compressed Air Piping and specialties designated "Instrument Air Piping". 

2. General Service compressed air / instrument air piping to tanks, valves, fittings, and accessories 

within the building envelope. 

3. Pipes, Tubes, and Fittings. 

4. Thermoplastic Tubing. 

5. Stainless-Steel Braided PTFE Hose (1” and smaller). 

6. Elastomeric Flexible Hose (Larger than 1”). 


8. Check Valves. 

9. Safety Valves. 

10. Pressure Control Valves (ECRT-PCV-755, ECRT-PCV-760 through 766). 

11. Quick Couplings. 

12. Welding Materials. 

13. Fasteners. 

14. Joining Materials. 

15. Structural Materials. 

Contract 44577 KW Annex – Rev. E 44577-CSI-SPEC-001 221513 - 1


B. Equipment DescriptionThis Section includes piping and related specialties for general-service 

compressed air/instrument air systems operating at 150 psig or less. 

C. Buyer-Furnished Material: 

1. None. 

D. Related Sections 

1. Division 22, Section 221519, “General Service Packaged Air Compressors and 

Receivers.” 


A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 013300, Submittals. 

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated: 

1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 

2. Thermoplastic tubing 

3. Stainless-Steel Braided PTFE Hose (1” and smaller) 

4. Elastomeric Flexible Hose (Larger than 1”) 


6. Check valves. 

7. Safety valves 

8. Pressure Control Valves (ECRT-PCV-755, ECRT-PCV-760 through 766) (Include rated 

capacities and operating characteristics). 

9. Quick couplings. 

10. Welding Materials. 


12. Joining Materials. 


C. Fabrication Drawings: Piping Isometrics, Plans and Elevations. 



D. Piping Material Certification: Signed by Seller certifying that piping materials comply with 

ASME B31.3 requirements. 

E. Certificates of Shop Inspection and Data Report for piping: As required by ASME B31.3 and 

that the piping has been designed, manufactured and constructed in accordance with the Seller’s 

QA plan. 

F. Weld Inspection Reports 

The Seller shall prepare and submit weld Inspection reports that include the following information: 

1. Weld Map identifying weld numbers showing relative positions of pressure containing 

welds and attachment welds to pressure retaining components; do not reuse weld numbers. 

If a weld is completely replaced, assign a new number, 

2. Weld procedures utilized, 

3. Procedure qualification records (PQR) number, 

4. Acceptance criteria, 

5. Fit-up inspection (if required), 

6. Welder identification number, 

7. Filler metal heat/lot number, 

8. Base material heat number, 

9. Nondestructive examination (NDE) methods and results, 

10. Inspector Identification (signature or stamp and date), 

11. All weld repairs shall be documented in an NCR. The NCR disposition shall be approved 

by the Buyer. 

G. Field quality-control test reports. 

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For Compressed Air piping specialties to include in 

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 

I. The final data package shall include at a minimum: 

1. Completed shop travelers, 

2. Certified Material test reports for base materials and filler materials (CMTR’s), 

3. Inspection and test reports. 



4. Weld maps. 

5. Weld records, including Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) and Procedure Qualification 

Record (PQR). 

6. NDE reports. 

7. Certificate of Conformance (C of C). 

8. Closed copies of Non-Conformance Reports (NCRs) dispositioned accept–as-is, repair, 

reject or rework. 

9. Critical dimension verification for external interfaces. 

10. Bending procedures and bend qualification records. 

11. Calibration reports. 

12. Certificates of calibration. 

13. Fastener torque completion reports. 

14. Field quality-control test reports. 



with ASME NQA-1-2008, as approved by the Buyer and described in Section 014000, Quality 

Assurance and Control. 

B. The highest functional classification for the scope of this Specification section for items and 

services is classified as General Service. 

C. Quality levels are defined on the associated line lists, valve lists and datasheets accompanying 

this section. 

D. Welding/Brazing: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure 

Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications" or AWS B2.2/B2.1M, 

"Standard for Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification." 

E. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 

F. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and 


G. Examination Requirements for ASME B31.3, Pipe Welding: 



1. Perform a visual examination of the weld joint fit-up of welds (the 5% specified by 

ASME B31.3) to assure, at a minimum, that markings and certifications of base materials 

and filler materials are in accordance with specified requirements, the base metals are of 

specified thicknesses and types, materials are free from contaminants, fit-up meets the 

joint detail for the welding procedure specification, the weld purge is set up properly and 

exit gas is being analyzed, and the welder is qualified to make the weld. 

2. Perform a final visual examination of all pressure boundary welds including attachment 

welds (not just the 5% specified by ASME B31.3) in accordance with ASME B31.3, paragraph 

341.4.1 and 344.2. 

3. Liquid penetrant examine the final weld surface of all socket welds, slip on flange welds, 

branch connection welds (5% specified by ASME B31.3) and 5% of all circumferential 

butt welds (final pass) in accordance with ASME B31.3, paragraph 344.4. 

4. If a random examination reveals a defect, the requirements of ASME B31.3, paragraph 

341.3.4, Progressive Examination, apply. 

5. Perform examinations to written procedures in accordance with ASME B31.3, paragraph 

343. 

6. The acceptance criteria of ASME B31.3, paragraph 341.4.1, and Table 341.3.2 apply for 

visual examination with the exception that incomplete penetration for complete penetration 

welds is unacceptable. 

7. The acceptance criteria for liquid-penetrant examination follows: 

a. Relevant indications are those with major dimensions greater than 1/16 in. 

b. The following relevant indications are unacceptable: 

i. cracks; 

ii. linear indication (indication whose length is more than three times its width); 

iii. rounded indications with dimensions greater than 1/8 in.; 

iv. four or more rounded indications in a line separated by 1/16 in. or less edge 

to edge; and 

v. ten or more rounded indications in any 6 sq. in. of surface area with the 

major dimension of this area not to exceed 6 in. and with the area taken in the 

most unfavorable location relative to the indications being evaluated. 

8. Perform the Pressure – Leak test of the completed piping sections in accordance with 

ASME B31.3, paragraph 345. 

H. Installer Qualifications: 



1. Pressure-Seal Joining Procedure for Stainless Steel tube fitting. Qualify operators 

according to training provided by Swagelok Company. 

I. ASME Compliance: 

1. Comply with ASME B31.3, "Process Piping," Normal Service Category, for “highpressure” 

compressed-air piping. 

2. Comply with ASME B31.3, "Process Piping," Normal Service Category, for “Instrument 

Air” compressed-air piping. 

3. Comply with ASME B31.3, Normal Service Category, as applicable, for materials, products, 

and installation. 

4. Safety Valves: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. Safety 

valves shall bear the appropriate ASME label. 

5. Pressure Vessels: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. 

Pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. 

6. Flange set-up, alignment, bolt/stud installation and material requirements: comply with 

ASME PCC-1-2010. 

J. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, 

"Structural Welding Code – Steel," and Section 055000, Metal Fabrications. Perform 100% 

visual examination of final weld joints for piping supports, anchors, and all other structural 

welds shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1 and D1.6 as applicable for statically loaded 

structures. 

K. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and 

capability to conduct the piping testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 

29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to the Buyer. 

L. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, 

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to the Buyer, and marked for intended use. 

M. All items and processes are subject to review, inspection, or surveillance by the Buyer's Quality 

Assurance or Engineering Representatives at the Vendor's facility or the Vendor's subcontractor 

facility. 

N. Hold, Witness, and Verification points shall be identified in the Fabrication, Inspection and Test 

Plan. Prerequisites to verification points: Ensure that personnel have completed inspections and 

approved portions of work in accordance with specification requirements before notifying 

Buyer. 

O. Seller shall control fabrication, assembly, inspection, testing, and related activities, performed in 

shops and at worksite, in accordance with Fabrication, Inspecting and Test Plan. 




A. Refer to Section 011100, Summary of Work, for definition of general requirements that apply to 

all specification sections prepared for this Project. 

B. Specific definition applicable to this section include: 

1. Buyer: the contractor responsible for managing the design, procurement, and construction 

of the K-West Basin Modification Annex Project. 

2. Seller: Contracted fabricator, vendor, or subcontractor performing work to the contract 

drawings, data sheets, and technical specifications. 

3. Certificate of Conformance: A document signed or otherwise authenticated by an authorized 

individual certifying the degree to which items or services meet specified requirements. 

4. Certified Test Report (CTR): A written signed document, approved by qualified personnel 

that contains sufficient data and information to verify the actual properties of items 

and the actual results of all required tests. 

5. Certified Weld Inspector (CWI): Personnel performing visual examination of welds certified 

per the employers written practice in accordance with ASNT-TC-1A. 

6. High-Pressure Compressed-Air Piping: System of compressed-air piping and specialties 

operating at pressures between 100 and 125 psig, located between the system air compressor 

and the system air dryer. 

7. Instrument Air Piping: System of instrument-air piping and specialties operating at pressures 

of 125 psig or less and located downstream of the system air dryer. 

8. MSDS: Material Safety Data Sheet 

9. Performance Qualification Test (PQT): Standard performance test(s) which a Welder 

shall successfully pass in order to be qualified to weld. The requirements for these tests 

are based on a qualified Welding Procedure Specification and establish a specific range 

of essential variables the Welder is qualified for. 

10. Pressure, Leak Test: The static pressure, acting in the direction of the operating pressure 

(positive or negative), used for establishing leakage rates. This pressure usually exceeds 

the maximum operating pressure of the item being tested, but does not exceed structural 

capability pressure. 

11. Procedure Qualification Record (PQR): Written documentation of the qualification of a 

Welding Procedure Specification by examination and testing of physical weld specimens 

made using the Welding Procedure Specification 

12. Storage (Holding) Ovens: Vented and temperature controlled ovens in which welding filler 

materials are stored after opening the manufacturer-supplied container 



13. Weld Filler Material(s) (WFM): The material (metal and nonmetal) to be added when 

making a weld, braze or bond joint 

14. Weld Maps: Formal sketches, design drawings, or shop drawings that show the location 

of welds in a system, so that documentation (i.e., Certified Material Test Reports, Welder 

Identification, and Weld Examination Records) can be traced to the weld it represents. 

15. Welder Performance Qualification (WPQ): The record which documents a Welder's successful 

completion of a performance qualification test and establishes the range of variables 

the Welder is qualified for. 

16. Welding Procedure Specification (WPS): a document providing in detail the required variables 

for a specific welding application to assure repeatability by properly trained welders 

and welding operators 

17. Work Package (WP): Consists of a collection of forms, documents, procedures, work instructions, 

etc. necessary to support a certain scope of work. 

18. WQ&I: Welder Qualification and Inspection 


A. General Conditions for the General Service Compressed Air Piping system: 

1. Compressed air system: Normal operating pressure at 135 psig, maximum. 

2. Compressed air system: Normal design pressure of 150 psig. 

3. Instrument air system: Normal operating pressure at 100 psig, maximum. 

4. Instrument air system: Normal design pressure of 125 psig. 

5. Normal minimum operating temperature at 65 deg F. 

6. Normal maximum operating temperature at 80 deg F. 

7. Fluid properties are the same as clean air at 68 deg F. 

8. Piping Code: ASME B31.3, Normal Service. 

B. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that General Service 

Compressed Air Piping, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in 

Section 220548, Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. Include 


1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts 

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 

2. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of 

assembled components or on calculation. 



3. All pipe installation isometrics and vendor specific data necessary shall be supplied by 

the Seller to the Buyer for review 30 days prior to scheduled installation date. 


A. Interruption of Existing Service(s): Do not interrupt services to facilities occupied by the Buyer 

or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to 

provide temporary service according to requirements indicated: 

1. Notify Buyer no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of facility 

service(s). 

2. Do not proceed with interruption of facility service(s) without Buyer's written 

permission. 


A. Coordinate interfacing service connections with other service connections. 

1. Process systems service connections are specified in Section 011100, Summary of Work. 

2. General requirements for Instrumentation installations are specified in Section 230519, 

Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping. 

3. General requirements for Electrical power connections are specified in Section 260519, 

Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 


A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged 

with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Furnish temporary filters to be used during construction. 

2. One set of tools required for installation and maintenance. 


A. See Section 016600, Material and Equipment Storage, and Handling, for general delivery storage 

and handling requirements. 

B. Individual pipe spools that are delivered to the fabrication site shall be cleaned in accordance 

with Part 3.1.A and capped with chloride/halogen free plastic caps. 



C. Pipe spools shall be labeled with the full fill line numbers in accordance with Section 220553, 

Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. 


2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS 

A. Carbon steel Pipe and fittings: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B, black or hot-dip zinc 

coated with ends threaded according to ASME B1.20.1. 

1. Steel Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106, 

Schedule 40, galvanized seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method. 

2. Malleable-Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150 or 300, threaded, ASTM A-105, Class 

WP carbon steel. 

3. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150 or 300, threaded, ASTM A-105, Class 

WP carbon steel. 

4. Steel Flanges: ASME B16.5, Class 150 or 300, ASTM A-105 carbon steel (forgings), 

threaded. 

5. Wrought-Steel Butt-Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, Schedule 40, ASTM A-234, Class 

WPB carbon steel. 

6. Steel Flanges: ASME B16.5, Class 150 or 300, ASTM A-105, carbon steel, weld neck. 

B. Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings: Schedule 40, ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP316L or 

TP304L, unless otherwise indicated; seamless pipe and ASTM A 403/A 403M, Class S, 

seamless fittings matching pipe thickness and grade, for welded joints. Piping shall be restricted 

to 1-in. and larger. 

C. Stainless Steel Tubing and Fittings: ASTM A 269, Grade TP316L or TP304L, fully annealed 

(90 HRb or less), unless otherwise indicated; seamless tubing and ASTM A 182/A 182M 

seamless fittings matching tube thickness and grade, for welded joints. Tubing must be suitable 

for bending and surface scratches or other imperfections are not permissible. Tubing shall be 

restricted to ¾-in. and smaller. 

D. Stainless steel certified material is: 

1. L-Grade material supplied with CMTR’s. 

2. Tested with both ASTM A262 Practice A and Practice C. 

3. Tested per ASTM E312 and/or ASTM A577 and/or ASTM 578 as applicable to form. 

4. Tested actual chemical composition and physical requirements. 

5. Documented on a Manufacturer’s data report. 

E. Certified TP 316L or TP 304L stainless steel pipe: pipe fittings, tubing and tubing fitting, plate, 

rod bar, sheet and strip shall get the following tests: 



1. Chemical Composition Analysis: Perform heat analysis to determine chemical composition 

of material. Chemical composition: ASME: SA-312, SA-403, SA-182, SA-479, 

SA-240, SA-213, SA-249 except 0.030% maximum carbon content. 

2. Corrosion Testing: Test material for susceptibility to inter-granular attack per ASTM 

A262 Practice A (Oxalic Acid Etch Test). Use Table 4 to screen materials. Test samples 

shall be taken from representative samples from each size and heat of finished product. 

Prepare specimens as required, sensitize specimens by heating for 1 h at 1250 o F + 10 o F 

and quench with water. Ensure that corrosion rate for each specimen does not exceed 

0.0020 in. per month for full five 48-h periods. Ensure that corrosion rate for final specimen 

does not exceed corrosion rate of any of the previous specimens by more than 

0.0002 in. per month. 

F. Wrought Forged Stainless Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, 

nuts, washers and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: 

1. Material Group: 2.3. 

2. End Connections: Weld Neck - Butt welding. 

3. Facings: Raised face. 

2.2 THERMOPLASTIC TUBING 

A. Thermoplastic Tubing: Semi rigid high strength nylon tubing. Tubing shall meet UL94HB 

flame resistance rating. 

B. Nominal tubing Outside diameter: 

1. ¼”; average wall thickness 0.035”, minimum working pressure 425 psig. 

2. ½”; average wall thickness 0.075”, minimum working pressure 625 psig. 

C. Color: Natural 

D. Compatible with Parker Hannifin Corporation Fluid System Connectors; Prestolok metal 

fittings. 

E. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements contained in Section 

012513, Product Substitution Procedures, provide the product specified below or a comparable 

product, approved by the Buyer: 

1. Parker Hannifin Corp; Parflex Division part number NNR-4-035 and NNR-8-075 

2.3 STAINLESS-STEEL BRAIDED PTFE HOSE (1” AND SMALLER) 

A. Flex Line: Silicone-covered PTFE hose with stainless-steel wire-braid covering. 



1. Cover: Stainless steel, wire-reinforcing protective jacket. 

2. Core: Silicone-covered PTFE hose with fiber braid bonded to the core. 

3. End Connections: As Scheduled on Drawings. 

4. CWP Rating: 200 psig, minimum. 

5. Operating Temperature: 100 deg F, maximum. 

6. Leak Test per RMA IP-2 and ASTM D 380 (sections 14.2 and 15.2), test pressure shall 

be 10 to 15 psig, held for a minimum of 10 minutes. 

7. Proof Pressure Test per RMA IP-2 and ASTM D 380 (sections 14, 15 and 17), test pressure 

shall be 50% of the minimum specified burst pressure, held for a minimum of 10 

minutes. 

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements contained in Section 

012513, Product Substitution Procedures, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a 

comparable product, approved by the Buyer, by one of the following: 

1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 

2. Flexicraft (Hosecraft Industries, Inc). 

3. Hosexpress 

4. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 

5. Mercer Rubber Co. 

6. Metraflex, Inc. 

7. Proco Products, Inc. 

8. River Bend Hose Specialty 

9. Swagelok Industries, Inc 

10. Unaflex, Inc. 

11. Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan Company 

12. US Hose Corp. 

2.4 ELASTOMERIC FLEXIBLE HOSE (LARGER THAN 1”) 

A. Flex Line: Reinforced EPDM, PTFE or FEP elastomeric hose; rated for 150-psig minimum inlet 

pressure. 



1. Cover: woven, flexible, EPDM, PTFE or FEP, textile plies and helical wire reinforcing, 

smooth protective jacket (silicone or polyolefin). 

2. Core: smooth bore FEP, reinforced with multi-layer rubber, spiral wound polyester cords 

and a double helix wire. 



5. Operating Temperature: 100 deg F, maximum 





minutes. 






3. Hosexpress 





8. Pureflex, Inc. 

9. River Bend Hose Specialty. 

10. Swagelok Industries, Inc. 






A. Description; Carbon Steel Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: 

1. Standard: MSS SP-72 and ASME B 16.34, 



4. Body/End Cap Material: carbon-steel, 

5. Port: full-port, 

6. Ball: stainless-steel, 

7. Stem: stainless-steel, 

8. Seals: RPTFE/FKM, 



B. Description: Air Operated Carbon Steel Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: 




4. Body /End Cap Material: carbon-steel, 




8. Seals: RPTFE/TFM, 


10. Actuator: Electro-pneumatic, fail close, explosion proof, valve position indication with 

separate on/off confirms, select to open valves with minimum 80 psig air pressure to actuator. 

C. Description; Stainless Steel Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: 

1. Standard: MSS SP-72, or MSS SP-110 and ASME B 16.34, 





4. Body/End Cap Material: stainless-steel, ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M, 




8. Seals: UHMWPE/RPTFE/TFM, 



D. Description: Air Operated Stainless Steel Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: 

1. Standard: MSS SP-72 or MSS SP-110, and ASME B 16.34, 


3. Body/End Cap Design: 3 piece, 

4. Body Material: stainless-steel, ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M, 







separate on/off confirms, select to open valves with minimum 80 psig air pressure to actuator. 












7. NIBCO Inc. 



10. Watts Company. 

2.6 CHECK VALVES 

A. Check Valves: In-line pattern, brass or bronze. 

1. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum, 

2. Seat Material: Buna-N, 

3. Spring Material: Type 316 Stainless Steel, 

4. Operation: Spring loaded, 

5. Ends: Manufacturer-installed. 

B. Check Valves: In-line pattern, Stainless Steel. 


2. Seat Material: Buna-N, 

3. Spring Material: Type 316 Stainless Steel, 



C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements contained in Section 



1. Check-All. 

2. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group. 

3. DFT, Inc. 



4. Milwaukee Valve Company. 

2.7 SAFETY VALVES 

A. Safety Valves: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," 

construction; National Board certified, labeled, and factory sealed; constructed of stainless steel 

or bronze body with poppet-type safety valve for compressed-air service. 

1. Fluid: Compressed air gas 

2. Specific gravity: 1.0 

3. Operating pressure: 110 psig 

4. Set Pressure: 125 psig. 

5. Allowable overpressure: 10 percent. 

6. Relieving capacity: 253.5 scfm 

7. Built-up Back pressure: 0 psig. 




1. Conbraco Industries, Inc. 

2. Crosby Valve, a Tyco Flow Control company 

3. Kunkle, Inc 

4. Spence Engineering Company, Inc. 

5. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 

2.8 PRESSURE CONTROL VALVES (ECRT-PCV-755, ECRT-PCV-760 through 766) 

A. Air-Line Pressure Regulators: Diaphragm or pilot operated, stainless steel body, direct acting, 

spring-loaded manual pressure-setting adjustment, rated for 145-psig minimum inlet pressure, 

unless otherwise indicated and 150 deg F maximum temperature. Integral pressure gauge. 

1. Inlet pressure: 110 psig. 

2. Set Pressure: 

a. ECRT-PCV-755: 5 psig. 



b. ECRT-PCV-760 and 766: 80 psig. 

c. ECRT-PCV-765: 85 psig. 

d. ECRT-PCV-762, 763, and 764: 90 psig. 

e. ECRT-PCV-761: 110 psig. 

3. Port size: 

a. ECRT-PCV-755: 3/8” FNPT. 

b. ECRT-PCV-763 and 766: ½” FNPT. 

c. ECRT-PCV-761, 762, 763, 764, and 765: 1” FNPT. 




1. Ingersoll Rand. 

2. Nitra Pneumatics 

3. Parker Hannifin Company 


2.9 QUICK COUPLINGS 

A. General Requirements for Quick Couplings: Assembly with locking-mechanism feature for 

quick connection and disconnection of compressed-air hose. 

B. Automatic-Shutoff Quick Couplings: Straight-through brass body with O-ring or gasket seal 

and stainless-steel or nickel-plated-steel operating parts. 

1. Body (Socket) End: With O-ring or gasket seal, without valve, and with tube 

compression fitting inlet for attaching hose or with integral hose. 

2. Stem (Plug) End: With tube compression fitting for attaching hose or integral with hose. 

3. Seal: Fluorocarbon FKM 

C. Valve-less Quick Couplings: Straight-through brass body with stainless-steel or nickel-platedsteel 

operating parts. 

1. Socket End: With O-ring or gasket seal, without valve, and with barbed inlet for 

attaching hose. 

2. Plug End: With barbed outlet for attaching hose. 




D. Cam and Groove Quick Couplings: Straight-through stainless steel body with stainless-steel or 

nickel-plated-steel operating parts. 




3. Seal: PTFE Encapsulated Fluorocarbon. 




1. OPW Engineered System Company (Autolok series), 

2. Parker Hannifin Corp.; Fluid Connectors Group; Quick Coupling Div, 

3. Staubli International AG (HCB28 series), 


2.10 WELDING MATERIALS 

A. Except where specifically accepted otherwise, welding materials shall be selected so that the 

deposited weld metal is similar in chemical composition and not significantly harder or stronger 

than the base material (e.g., stainless steel L-grade base metal shall be welded with L-grade filler 

metal). Lot tests (charpy V-Notch and Bend) temperatures shall be at or below the design 

metal temperature. 

B. Stainless-steel welding material shall meet the requirements of AWS D1.6/D1.6M, stainless 

steel E308/ER308 or E309/ER309 electrodes 

C. Austenitic stainless steel (A-No. 8) welding materials for pressure boundary and load bearing 

welds shall contain a minimum delta ferrite content of five percent. Compliance with the ferrite 

requirements may be based upon the certified chemical analysis and the ferrite gage complying 

with AWS A4.2. Alternately, for Shield Metal Arc Welding and solid wire filler material manufactured 

in the USA. 

D. Carbon steel pipe welding material shall meet the requirements of AWS D10.12/D10.12M for 

welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being 

welded. 

E. Carbon steel structural welding material shall meet the requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M, 

Carbon Steel E70XX electrodes 



F. Certified Material Test Reports shall be provided for all weld filler materials. For all filler metal, 

a typical test report in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Section II, Part C, 

is required. 

G. For dissimilar welds, such as carbon or low alloy steels to austenitic stainless steels, and different 

grades of stainless steel, such as 304L pipe to 316L valve the welding procedure application 

list shall specify the filler material type. 

H. The storage, baking, and drying of all welding consumables (i.e., covered electrodes, flux cored 

electrodes, and fluxes) shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Segregation of carbon 

steel, low alloys, and alloy consumables is required during storage, baking, holding, and handling 

(including portable ovens). 

2.11 FASTENERS 

A. Graded fasteners shall be carefully controlled as defined in the Section 014000, Quality 


B. Fasteners shall be inspected to verify compliance with the requirements listed on the design 

drawings or procurement specifications. 

C. Stainless-steel bolts, cap screws, and studs shall be per ASTM A193/A 193M, Grade B8 (Class 

2), and nuts shall be heavy hex nuts per ASTM A194/A 194M, Grade 8, 8S (Nitrinic 60) or 8SA 

(Nitronic 60). Washers for stainless steel bolting shall be as recommended in ASME PCC-1- 

2010, Appendix M. Bolts, cap screws, studs and nuts shall be grade marked. 

D. Carbon-steel bolting shall be: 

1. Bolts General Applications: ASTM A 307, Grade A or B. 

2. Nuts General Applications: ASTM A 563, Grade A, heavy hex. 

3. Bolts Structural Connections: ASTM A 325. 

4. Nuts Structural Connections: ASTM A 563, Grade DH, heavy hex. 

5. Bolts for piping flanges: ASTM A 193, grade B7-Heavy Hex (HH) and having hex nuts 

in accordance with ASTM A 194, Grade 2H-HH. Studs are the recommended fasteners 

for connecting flanges in piping systems. 

6. Structural Steel Washers: ASTM F 436. 

7. Flange Bolting Washers: ASME PCC-1-2010, Appendix M. 

8. Bolts, studs, cap screws and nuts shall be grade marked. 

E. All graded fasteners shall conform to ASME B18.2.1/ B18.2.2 or SAE J429 and SAE J995. 



F. Seller shall select fasteners where they are not specifically called out in this Specification using 

the following guidance: 

1. Stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers shall be used when the mating parts are stainless 

steel, 

2. Carbon-steel bolts, nuts, and washers shall be used where mating parts are not stainless 

steel, and 

3. Anti-galling compound (e.g., Loctite Anti-Seize ® ) shall be applied where stainless steel 

bolts are used, except if Nitronic 60 materials are used. 

G. All fasteners used for structural and pressure boundary applications shall be provided with 

CMTRs. All remaining fasteners shall be provided with a manufacture’s Certificate of 

Conformance. 


A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for compressed air and thermal conditions of 

compressed air piping system contents. 

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless 


a. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 150, for carbon steel or stainless steel 

flanges. 

b. Garlock "BLUE-GARD" 3000 series, 1/8-inch thick compressed gaskets with 

dimensions conforming to ASME B16.21 Table 1-5. 

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel for carbon steel flanges or stainless steel 

for stainless steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Threaded Pipe Joint Tape: PTFE (Red type Teflon tape on all joints ½" diameter or greater). 

D. Threaded Stainless Steel Joint Anti-Seize Compound: Loctite N-5000 or N-7000 High Purity 

Anti-Seize or Buyer reviewed substitute. 

2.13 STRUCTURAL MATERIALS 

A. Carbon steel shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 992/A 992M. 

B. Structural tubing shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B (fy = 46 ksi). 

C. Steel pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Type E or S, Grade 

B, or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Grade B, standard weight, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80. 



D. Concrete expansion anchors shall be any industry standard wedge-type expansion anchor having 

capacities published by the ICC-ES and approved for resistance to seismic loading. 

E. All exposed carbon steel shall be coated in accordance with Section 055000, Metal Fabrications. 

Prepare, prime, and top coat structural steel in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 

The final coat shall be light gray. All coatings shall be applied in such a manner 

as to produce a uniform smoothness. Special attention shall be paid to crevices, weld lines, 

carriers, and edges to obtain the required thickness. 



A. Fabrication, Inspection and Testing Plan 

Fabrication, inspection and testing shall be performed in accordance with contract requirements, applicable 

articles of this specification and drawings, and in accordance with an approved Fabrication, 

Inspection and Test Plan. The Fabrication, Inspection and Test plan shall include the following: 

1. Traceability to Buyer Contract number. 

2. Description of items to fabricate/test/inspect. 

3. Sequential fabrication/process steps. 

4. Sequential points for inspection and tests to be performed during processing. 

5. Methods/procedures to be used for performance of inspection, test, and/or fabrication including: 

a. Method used to control material, 

b. Method used to control filler materials, 

c. Method used to verify the dimensional accuracy of the fabrication, 

d. Method used to segregate tools used on fabrication of stainless steel from tools used 

on carbon steel, 

e. Weld procedures used for production welding. 

6. Characteristic or attribute to be evaluated and acceptance criteria. 

7. Report form to use. 

8. Specific codes/standards requirements as specified by procurement documents. 



9. Sampling plan for final characteristics (e.g. Quality Level, Lot size, inspection level, 

etc.). 

10. Fabrication procedures to use to perform the work. 

11. Hydrostatic and Pneumatic Test Procedures. 

12. The Buyer may perform oversight of fabrication and inspections to verify compliance to 

requirements. Vendor shall notify the Buyer for verifications required in the Statement of 

Work and/or as identified in the fabrication inspection and test plan. 

B. Cleaning of piping: If manufacturer cleaned and capped fittings or piping are not available or if 

pre-cleaned fittings or tubing must be re-cleaned because of exposure, have supplier or separate 

agency acceptable to the Buyer. 

1. Clean piping and fittings, valves, gages, and other components of oil, grease, and other 

readily oxidizable materials. 

2. Wash piping spools and components in hot, alkaline-cleaner-water solution of sodium 

carbonate or trisodium phosphate in proportion of 1 lb (0.453 kg) of chemical to 3 gal. 

(11.3 L) of water. 

3. Scrub to ensure complete cleaning. 

4. Rinse with clean, hot water to remove cleaning solution. 

5. Prior to fit-up and welding, piping shall be visually checked for cleanliness. If examination 

reveals rust, loose mill scale, or foreign matter, pipes shall be blown out with dry, 

oil-free air or nitrogen before placing in position. If foreign material appears to be lodged 

in the pipe, it shall be removed by running fish tape, cable, or chain through the pipe. 

6. After NDE is complete and before connecting system into existing systems, clean piping 

internal surfaces mechanically or by water flushing. 

7. Flush piping with potable water until effluent is clean and contains no visible particulate 

matter. Flushing pressure shall not exceed the design pressure specified in pipe class. 

Flushing water supply shall have sufficient capacity to produce a flow velocity of 4 to 6 

ft/s in largest pipe size, with pipe full. Provide flow measurement in flushing water 

supply line to be used as basis for verification of velocities in piping system. 

8. Cleaning materials for stainless steel shall meet the requirements of Section 3.1.C. 

9. Cleaning materials shall be controlled and documented in accordance with the Seller's fabrication, 

inspection and test plan as approved by the Buyer. 

10. Provide documented evidence that water flushing or mechanical cleaning has been accomplished 

as specified in this section. 

11. After cleaning and water flushing, remove all water and blowout lines with clean oil free 

air and cap the lines with chloride free plastic caps or reconnect to the system. 



C. Stainless Steel Fabrication 

1. Clearly mark mechanical cleaning tools for use only on stainless steel. 

2. Tools marked for stainless steel shall be used on stainless steel only. Tools previously 

used on carbon steel shall not be used on stainless steel. 

3. Grinding wheels, files, and wire brushes shall be new or previously used only on stainless 

steel. 

4. Wire brushes used on austenitic stainless steel shall be made of stainless steel and marked 

and controlled for use on stainless steel only. Grinding wheels shall be resin bonded aluminum 

oxide. Rotary files shall be faced with tungsten carbide. 

5. Temporary carbon steel clamps, supports, braces, or fixtures used during fabrication shall 

not be welded directly to, or come in direct contact with, any stainless steel surface. Galvanized 

steel clamps are not permitted. 

6. Contact materials including marking materials and pens, temperature indicating crayons, 

adhesive backed tape, cutting fluids, lubricants and cleaning fluids may be used only under 

the following limits: 


a. The total halogen content shall not exceed 200 parts per million (PPM). 

b. The total sulfur content shall not exceed 400 PPM. 

c. No intentionally added low melting point metals such as lead, zinc, copper, tin, antimony 

or mercury. 

d. Weld anti-spatter compounds shall not contain chlorine, fluorine, sulfur, mercury or 

other low melting point metals. 

e. Material and residue shall be completely removed when no longer required. Cleaning 

materials may be non-halogenated solvents or potable water containing no more than 

50 PPM chlorides. Contact materials shall be controlled and documented in accordance 

with the Contractors inspection and test plan as approved by the Buyer. 

f. Materials shall be certified by Certificate of Conformance for stainless steel use. 

A. General - Comply with ASME B31.3, Process Piping Code. 

B. Maintain material traceability through fabrication for materials requiring Certified Material Test 

Reports (CMTRs). 

C. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of General 

Service Compressed Air Piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe 



and calculate friction loss, expansion, air-compressor sizing, and other design considerations. 

Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. 

D. Install piping as indicated at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are 

prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain 

gradient. 

E. Pipes shall be designed with provisions for draining as shown on the drawings. Slope piping and 

provide drain valves at low points. Self draining configurations shall be employed to the extent 

practical. 

F. Mismatched bore diameter connections shall be prepared in accordance with ASME B31.3 

Figure 328.4.3(a). The trimmed bore shall not be less than the thickness of the thinner walled 

pipe. Misaligned pipe limitation shall be in accordance with the code. However bore trimming 

to correct piping misalignment is not permitted. 

G. Weld piping and attachments to pressure retaining components in accordance with ASME 

B31.3, Process Piping Code. 

H. Perform weld NDE in accordance with ASME B31.3, Process Piping Code, For Normal 

Service, and sub-section 1.4.G of this Specification section. 

I. Install piping to maintain headroom and neither interfere with use of space nor take more space 

than necessary. 

J. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected 

equipment. 

K. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance. 

L. Install nipples, unions, and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher 

than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. 

M. Follow the recommendations in ASME PCC-1-2010 for flange fit-up, bolt torques and bolt 

torque sequence. 

N. Make joints in threaded piping systems with joint lubricant specified. Apply lubricant to male 

threads only. 

O. Fabricate and install valve actuators and valve stem extensions in accordance with the drawings 

and manufacturer's instructions. Install piping to permit valve servicing. 

P. Install piping free of sags and bends. 

Q. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. 



R. Once fabrication has started, plug or cap ends of piping when installation is not in progress. 

Cap or plug openings in fabricated pipe spool assemblies until installation in piping system. 

S. Remove temporary attachments by machining or grinding. Restore surfaces of base metal to 

original condition. Perform Liquid Penetrant Examination to verify that no cracks exist. 

T. Pressure-Leak test piping system in accordance with ASME B31.3 Process Piping Code, 

paragraph 345.5 and sub-section 3.8.C of this section. 

U. Sleeve and caulk pipes penetrating facility walls. Provide UL/FM approved throughpenetration 

firestop system when penetrating fire-rated barriers (i.e., walls, floors, etc.). 

3.3 COLD BENDING OF PIPE OR TUBE 

A. Fabricate pipe or tube bends in accordance with TPA-CBS-98. 

B. Fabricator shall submit a detailed procedure for bending, specifying method used, inspection, 

wall thickness measurement, and documentation. 

C. The pipe or tube material to be cold bent shall comply with the specific piping class requirements. 

For production bending, the fabricator may select the next higher schedule to offset anticipated 

thinning as approved by the Buyer. Bending is restricted to bends having a minimum 

center-line bend radius of 3 times the pipe nominal outside diameter. 

D. Lubricants used for bending operations must be free of halogens, sulfur, and low-melting-point 

metals. 

E. Qualification Testing 

1. Before any production bending is done, the following bend qualification testing shall be 

done by the Fabricator as required by Purchase Order. 

2. Stainless Steel — Following cold bending, samples shall be taken from Intrado and Extrado 

for Stress-Corrosion Testing in accordance with ASTM G 123. 

3. Before any testing is to commence, the Fabricator shall present a detailed test procedure 

to the Buyer for review and approval. 


A. Install shutoff valve at each connection to the Main KW facility. 

B. Provide access where valves and other equipment are not exposed. 

C. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. 



D. Install the valve actuator and valve stem extensions in accordance with the drawings and 

manufacturer’s instructions. 

E. Install check valves to maintain correct direction of flow as indicated on the system P&IDs. 

F. Install pressure regulators on piping where reduced pressure is required. 

G. Install pressure relief valve and full-size discharge piping to designated drains. 


A. Comply with requirements in Section 220548, Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing 

Piping and Equipment, for seismic-restraint devices. 

B. Comply with requirements in Section 220529, Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and 

Equipment, for pipe hanger and support devices. 

C. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 

D. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: 

1. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel, clevis hangers. 

2. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable, roller hangers. 

E. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe 

rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. Comply with requirements in Section 220529, Hangers 

and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment, for trapeze hangers. 

F. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling. 

G. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum 

rods. 

H. Install hangers with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 

1. NPS 1/4: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 

2. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 



5. NPS 1-1/4: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 



6. NPS 1-1/2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod. 

7. NPS 2: 11 feet with 3/8-inch rod. 

I. Install supports for vertical piping every 10 feet. 

3.6 FASTENERS 

A. Graded fasteners shall be carefully controlled as defined in Section 014000, Quality Assurance 

and Control, as applicable. 

B. Seller shall establish the bolt torque requirements for all bolted structural connections in accordance 

with Section 055000, Metal Fabrications. 

C. Flange bolt torque values shall be per gasket manufacturer recommendation not to exceed 75% 

of bolt allowable yield strength as defined in the applicable ASTM standard and using appropriate 

bolt torque patterns as shown in ASME PCC-1-2010, Appendix F. 

3.7 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION 

A. Install identifying labels and devices for piping, valves, and specialties. Label piping system in 

accordance with Section 220553, Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. 


A. Testing Agency: Buyer will engage qualified testing agency to perform field tests and 

inspections of piping and prepare test reports. 

B. Perform field tests and inspections of piping and prepare test reports. 

C. Tests and Inspections: 

1. Piping Testing Coordination: Perform tests, inspections, verifications, and certification 

of piping systems concurrently with tests, inspections, and certification of interfacing 

systems. 

2. Inspect Pressure or flow regulators for proper operation. 

3. Preparation: Perform the following Installer tests: 

a. Initial blow down. 

b. Initial pressure test. 

c. Standing pressure test for positive pressure piping. 



4. Piping Pressure-Leak Tests: Test new and modified parts of existing piping. Cap and fill 

piping with oil-free, dry nitrogen to pressure of 110% above system design pressure. 

Isolate test source and let stand for four hours to equalize temperature. Refill system, if 

required, to test pressure; hold for two hours with no drop in pressure. Utilize a bubble 

forming solution for indication of any possible leaks. 

a. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 

5. System Verification; perform the following tests and inspections: 

a. Valve test. 

b. Final tie-in test. 

c. Operational pressure test. 

d. Verify correct labeling of equipment and components. 

6. Testing Certification: Certify that specified tests, inspections, and procedures have been 

performed and certify report results. Include the following: 

a. Inspections performed. 

b. Procedures, materials, and gases used. 

c. Test methods used. 

d. Results of tests. 

D. Remove and replace components that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified 

above. 


A. The General Service Compressed Air Piping system shall undergo an integrated system leak 

test. Contractor shall prepare and submit an integrated system leak test. 



3.10 APPLICABLE PIPE CODES 

PIPING CODE: I-9 Instrument Air Tubing & Piping 

Design Pressure 125 psig for Instrument Air 

Test Pressure 137 psig for Instrument Air 



Method 



Welded Joints: 5% In-Process Visual Weld Inspection and 100% Final Pass 

Visual Weld Inspection 

5% Liquid Penetrant Examination of Final Weld Pass 

Pneumatic testing at 110% of Design Pressure for all tubing and piping 

Sizes 3/4" Tubing and Smaller 1” Pipe and Larger 

Tubing/Pipe 

Fittings 

Stainless Steel Tubing, ASTM A 

269, Grade TP304L or TP316L, 

fully annealed (90 HRb or less) 

seamless tubing. Minimum wall 

thickness 0.035” for ½” OD and 

smaller, 0.065” for greater than ½” 

OD. Tubing must be suitable for 

bending and surface scratches or 

other imperfections are not permissible. 

Welded Joints: ASTM A 182/A 

182M seamless fittings matching 

tube thickness and grade 

Mechanical Joints: Type 304L or 

316L SST Flareless type, "Swagelok", 

"Parker" or approved equal. 

Staubli HCB28 series, size and 

type as specified on the fabrication 

drawings. 

Stainless Steel Pipe, Schedule 40, 

ASTM A 312/ A312M, Grade TP304L 

or TP316L, seamless 

ASTM A 403/A 403M, Class S 304L, 

wall thickness and grade to match 

pipe. 

Valves Stainless steel, Type 316, per ASME B16.34 or as shown on Drawings. 

Note: 

1) Based on 65°F winter and 80°F summer inside HVAC design temperatures. 

2) Standards referenced above shall be used unless approved by the Buyer. 







Method 

PIPING CODE: C-9 Compressed Air Tubing & Piping 



Welded Joints: 5% In-Process Visual Weld Inspection and 100% Final Pass 

Visual Weld Inspection 

5% Liquid Penetrant Examination of Final Weld Pass 


Sizes 3/4" Tubing and Smaller 1” Pipe and Larger 

Tubing/Pipe 

Fittings 

Steel Tubing, ASTM A 

269, Grade TP304L or TP316L, 

fully annealed (90 HRb or less) 

seamless tubing. Minimum wall 

thickness 0.035” for ½” OD and 

smaller, 0.065” for greater than ½” 

OD. Tubing must be suitable for 

bending and surface scratches or 

other imperfections are not 

permissible. 



tube thickness and grade 

Mechanical Joints: Type 304L or 

316L SST Flareless type, 

"Swagelok", "Parker" or approved 

equal. 

Steel Pipe, ASTM A 53/A 53M, 

Type S, Grade B, black or hot-dip zinc 

coated with ends threaded according to 

ASME B1.20.1. 

Malleable-Iron Fittings: ASME 

B16.3, Class 150 or 300, threaded, 

ASTM A-105, Class WP carbon steel. 

Malleable-Iron Unions: 

ASME B16.39, Class 150 or 300, 

threaded, ASTM A-105, Class WP 

carbon steel. 

Steel Flanges: ASME B16.5, 

Class 150 or 300, ASTM A-105 

carbon steel. 

Wrought-Steel Butt-Welding Fittings: 

ASME B16.9, Schedule 40, ASTM A- 

234, Class WPB carbon steel. 

Valves Class WPB Carbon Steel, per ASME B16.34 or as shown on Drawings. 

Note: 





Design Pressure 

PIPING CODE H-1: Hoses 

100 psig (excluding Nitrogen Purge high pressure cylinder pigtails) 

3000 psig at Nitrogen Purge high pressure cylinder pigtails 

Test Pressure 50% of the minimum specified burst pressure 



Method 

Sizes 1/4" NPS and larger 



Proof Pressure Test per RMA IP-2 and ASTM D 380 

Hose RMA IP-2, Hose Handbook, ASTM D 380 

Fittings 

Autolok TM quick couplings, made by the OPW Company, 300 Series SST, 

Threaded or Welded as specified on fabrication drawings. Size and type as 

specified on the fabrication drawings. 

Campbell Chemjoint TM size and type as specified on the fabrication 

drawings. 

River Bend Hose Fittings, size and type as specified on the fabrication 

drawings. 

Staubli HCB28 series, size and type as specified on the fabrication drawings. 

Swagelok, size and type as specified on the fabrication drawings. 

Note: 

1) Based on 50°F minimum basin water temperature and 80°F summer inside HVAC design temperatures. 


3) AUTOLOK is a registered trademark of Delaware Capital Formation, Inc., Wilmington, Delaware. 

4) Chemjoint is a registered trademark of Campbell Fittings, Inc., Boyertown Pennsylvania. 




SECTION 221519 - GENERAL-SERVICE PACKAGED AIR COMPRESSORS AND RECEIVERS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Oil-flooded, rotary-screw air compressors. 

2. Inlet-air filters. 

3. Air-cooled, compressed-air after coolers. 

4. Desiccant compressed-air dryers. 

5. Air Receiver Tanks. 

6. Computer interface cabinet. 



B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating 

characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 

1. Complete performance data shall accompany proposal and shall include capacity in 

ACFM at the compressor inlet and at delivery pressure of 120 PSIG and at maximum 

pressure capability, brake horsepower at full load conditions, rotor speed, cooling air 

flow, and all other pertinent data. 

2. Completed Data Sheets in accordance with ISA20. 

3. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate 

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 


5. Completed MSDSs for all lubricants and chemicals. 

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For compressed-air equipment, accessories, and 

components, from manufacturers. 



2. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based 

and their installation requirements. 



D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For compressed-air equipment to include off normal, normal 

operation, and maintenance manuals. 





B. The highest functional classification for the scope of this Specification section is classified as 

General Service. 

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, 


D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label air compressor coolant tank, air receivers and air dryer 

towers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1. 

Submit ASME U1 Data reports for each vessel. 

E. The assembled units and optional equipment shall be factory tested prior to shipment. 





1. Actual Air: Air supplied or delivered from air compressors. Flow rate is compressed air 

measured in acfm. 

2. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 

50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits. 

3. Standard Air: Free air at 68 deg F and 1 atmosphere (14.696 psia) before compression or 

expansion and measured in scfm. 



5. Seller: Contracted fabricator, Seller, or subcontractor performing work to the contract 


6. Certificate of Conformance: A document signed or otherwise authenticated by an 

authorized individual certifying the degree to which items or services meet specified 

requirements. 



A. Delegated Design: Design compressed-air equipment mounting, including comprehensive 

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and 

design criteria indicated. 



B. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that Air Compressor, 

accessories and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 220548, Vibration 

and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. Include the following: 




A. Facility conditions 

1. Air compressor equipment is to be located indoors in a temperature controlled industrial 

type location. 

2. Facility ambient conditions are 65 to 80 °F. 

3. Facility elevation is 660 ft above mean sea level. 

B. Interruption of Existing Service(s): Do not interrupt services to facilities occupied by the Buyer 

or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to 

provide temporary service according to requirements indicated: 


service(s). 


permission. 


A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 

B. Coordinate interfacing service connections with other service connections. 

1. Compressed air piping systems service connections are specified in Section 011100, 

Summary of Work and Section 221513, General Service Compressed Air Piping. 

2. Electrical power connections are specified in Section 260519, Low-Voltage Electrical 

Power Conductors and Cables. 




1. Air-Compressor, Inlet-Air-Filter Elements: Equal to 100 percent of amount installed, but 

no fewer than one units. 

2. Lubricants for compressor: Equal to 100 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 

one units 






B. Individual compressed air components that are delivered to the fabrication site shall be cleaned 

in accordance with Part 3.1.A and capped with chloride/halogen free plastic caps. 

C. Compressed air components shall be labeled with the full fill line numbers in accordance with 

Section 220553, Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. 

1.11 WARRANTY 


replace components of air compressor or air dryer equipment that fails in materials or 

workmanship within specified period. 

1. Compressor or Air Dryer Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial 

Completion. 


2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PACKAGED AIR COMPRESSOR, RECEIVER TANKS 

AND DESICCANT DRYER 

A. General Description Compressor Skid: Factory-assembled, -wired, -piped, and -tested; electricmotor-driven; 

air-cooled; continuous-duty single stage lubricated rotary screw air compressor, 

oil separator, water separator and compressor mounted wet air receiver tank that delivers air of 

quality equal to intake air. 

B. General Description Heated Purge Desiccant Dryer: Factory-assembled, -wired, -piped, and - 

tested; electric-motor-driven blower with heater; that deliver air of quality equal to or less than 

-40 deg F dew point air. 

C. General Description Air Receiver: Steel tank constructed according to ASME Boiler and 

Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. 

1. Pressure Rating: At least as high as highest discharge pressure of connected compressor, 

and bearing appropriate code symbols. 

2. Interior Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating. 

3. Accessories: Include safety valve, pressure gage, electric automatic drain and manual 

isolation valve. 

D. General Description Mounting Frames: Fabricate mounting and attachment to compressor skid, 

receiver and desiccant dryer skid with reinforcement strong enough to resist packaged 

equipment movement during a seismic event when base is anchored to building structure. 

E. General Description Electrical Termination Panels: Comply with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508 



F. General Description Control Panels: Automatic control station with load control and protection 

functions. Comply with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508. 

1. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 12 control panel unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Motor Controllers: Full-voltage, combination magnetic type with undervoltage release 

feature and motor-circuit-protector-type disconnecting means and short-circuit protective 

device. 

3. Control Voltage: 120-V ac or less, using integral control power transformer. 

4. Motor Overload Protection: Overload relay in each phase. 

5. Starting Devices: Hand-off-automatic selector switch in cover of control panel, plus pilot 

device for automatic control. 

6. Instrumentation: Include discharge-air pressure gage, air-filter maintenance indicator, 

hour meter, compressor discharge-air and coolant temperature gages, and control 

transformer. 

7. Alarm Signal Device: For connection to alarm system to indicate compressor trouble. 

2.2 OIL-FLOODED, ROTARY-SCREW AIR COMPRESSORS 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 

following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work 

include, but are not limited to, the following: 


012513, Product Substitution Procedures, provide product indicated on Drawings or 

comparable product by one of the following: 

1. Ingersoll-Rand; Air Solutions Group. 

2. Quincy Compressor; an EnPro Industries Company. 

3. Rogers Machinery Company. 

4. Sullair Corporation. 

C. Air Compressor. 

1. Compressor Assembly: Single stage, oil-flooded, rotary-screw type with lubricated 

helical screws and lubricated gear box. 

2. Standard-Air Capacity of Each Air Compressor: 156 scfm minimum free air or 160 acfm 

at 660 ft elevation and 68 °F. 

3. Discharge-Air Pressure: 135 psig, maximum, 125 psig nominal. 

4. Intake-Air Temperature: 68 deg F normal, 95 deg F maximum summer time. 

5. The compressor shall have a high efficiency axial inlet. The compressor shall have 

tapered roller bearings on the male and female rotor discharge and suction end to contain 

axial and radial thrusts. The driven shaft shall be sealed by a triple lip seal arrangement 

for long life. 

6. Inlet Air Filter: Description: Combination inlet-air filter-silencer, suitable for remote 

installation, for each air compressor. Dry type, with maintenance indicator and cleanable 

replaceable filter element with silencer tubes or other method of sound reduction. Match 

capacity of air compressor, with filter having collection efficiency of 99 percent retention 

of particles larger than 10 micrometers. 

7. Coupling: Nonlubricated, flexible type and shall include an OSHA type coupling guard. 

8. Cooling/Lubrication System: Unit-mounted, air-cooled exchanger package pre-piped to 

unit; with air pressure circulation system with coolant stop valve, full-flow 



cooling/lubrication filter, and thermal bypass valve. The lubricant filter shall have a 25 

micron rating (maximum) and shall be a screw-on type with a differential pressure 

indicator. 

9. The compressor unit shall incorporate an air cooled lubricant cooler of sufficient size to 

insure that the lubricant temperature from the compressor shall not exceed 190 deg F with 

105 deg F ambient at full load. A thermostatic valve shall be included to insure that the 

discharge lubricant temperature does not fall below 170 degrees F. on cold days. 

10. The compressor shall incorporate a synthetic lubricant to prolong the bearing life and 

extend the lubricant life to at least 8,000 hours under normal operating conditions. 

11. Air/Lubrication Receiver and Separation System: The unit shall be equipped with a 

combination air receiver/lubricant reservoir assembly, rated at 235 PSIG. This assembly 

is the first step in air/lubrication separation. It shall incorporate a means of observing the 

lubricant level while the compressor is running, and an ASME coded safety relief valve 

of adequate size set at 235 PSIG. Additionally, a lubricant separator with a spin-on 

element and service indicator shall be located in the discharge air line for ease in 

servicing. 

12. Each air compressor shall be equipped with an internal air cooled after cooler and 

moisture separator with automatic drain trap. The after cooler shall cool the compressed 

air to within about 15-20 degrees F. of the ambient air temperature. Air cooler shall be 

Electric-motor-driven, fan-operation, finned-tube unit; rated at 250 psig and leak tested at 

350-psig minimum air pressure; in capacities indicated. 

13. The compressor assembly shall be mounted on a fabricated steel base. 

14. The assembly shall include a sound attenuating enclosure with easily removable side 

panels for maximum serviceability. 

15. Motor (Each Air Compressor): 

a. Horsepower: 40 maximum with a 1.25 maximum service factor. 

b. Speed: {Seller selected} rpm. 

c. Horizontal, ball bearing, drip proof, C-face, of standard manufacture NEMA 

design "B" with class "F" insulation. 

d. The motor shall be direct coupled to the compressor for permanent alignment and 

incorporate a dry type coupling for minimum maintenance. 

e. Efficiency shall meet minimum EPACT requirement. 

16. Main Compressor Unit Electrical Characteristics: 

a. Volts: 480. 

b. Phase(s): Three. 

c. Hertz: 60 Hz. 

d. Full-Load Amperes: Seller selected . 

e. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: Seller selected. 

f. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: Seller selected. 


a. Volts: 120 Vac for HP < 1 or 480 Vac for HP > 1. 

b. Phase(s): Single Phase for 120 VAC or Three Phase for 480 Vac. 


d. Full-Load Amperes: Determined by Seller. 

e. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: Determined by Seller. 

f. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: Determined by Seller. 

18. Capacity Control: Capacity modulation between zero and 100 percent air delivery, with 

operating pressures between 50 and 100 psig. Include necessary control to hold constant 

pressure. When air demand is zero, unload compressor by using pressure switch and 

blowdown valve. 



19. Adequate safety devices and fault indicator shall be incorporated to shut down the 

compressor and require manual reset in the event of: 

a. Loss of Air Cooling 

b. High Lubricant Temperature 

c. High Air Temperature 

d. Low Lubricant Level 

e. Low Lubricant Pressure 

f. Temporary Loss of Power 

20. Air Compressor Assembly Instrumentation shall contain the following: 

a. Hour Meter 

b. Air Usage Indicator Calibrated in Percent of Load 

c. Lubricant Temperature Gauge (Discharge From Compressor) 

d. Air Pressure Gauges. 

e. Air Filter Condition Indication 

f. Lubricant Filter Condition Indication 

g. Separator Element Condition Indicator 

h. Lubricant Reservoir Level Gauge 

21. Wet air receiver tank: 200 gallon, 200-psig rated horizontal steel tank with ASME safety 

valve, minimum pressure valve, blowdown valve, and suitable for supporting air 

compressor package. 

22. The compressor unit shall include all items not mentioned above that are normally supplied 

on a standard unit to assure proper operation of the unit. This shall include, but not be 

limited to, interconnecting piping and wiring, initial lubricant supply, steel base with all 

equipment mounted. All electrical components shall comply with the NEC. 

2.3 DRY AIR RECEIVERS 

A. Description: 

1. ASME Section VIII, Div. 1 coded pressure vessel. 

2. Arrangement: Vertical, 36-in. diameter by 124-in. tall. 

3. Capacity: 500 gal. 

4. Pressure Rating: 165 psig minimum. 

5. Safety Relief Valve Setting: 150 psig. 

6. Pressure gauge, 0-200 PSIG, with 4" face. 

7. Two 2-in FNPT ports. 

8. One 3-in FNPT port. 

9. 1-in. FNPT drain port. 

10. 1/2-in. FNPT top port. 

11. 1-1/2-in. FNPT port. 

12. Drain: Automatic electric valve with ½” manual isolation valve. 

13. Interior Finish: unpainted. 

14. Exterior finish: steel primer. 

15. Two each lifting lugs welded to top head. 

16. Standard bottom skirt and floor mount clip assembly (4 each) 

17. Auxiliary parts shipped loose. 

18. Assembly drawing and ASME Code data report. 



2.4 DESICCANT COMPRESSED-AIR DRYERS 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements contained in Section 

012513 Product Substitution Procedures, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable 

product by one of the following: 

1. Hankison International. 

2. Ingersoll-Rand; Air Solutions Group. 

3. SPX Air Treatment. 

4. Wilkerson Operations; Pneumatic Division. 

5. Zeks Compressed Air Solutions (Model No. 250ZBA-UL). 

B. Description: Twin-tower unit with heated blower purge system, mufflers, and capability to 

deliver 125-psig, air at -40 deg F dew point. Include dew point controlled purge, step-down 

transformers, disconnect switches, inlet and outlet pressure gages, thermometers, automatic 

controls, coalescing pre-filter, particulate after filter and single prefilter at blower. 

C. Capacities and Characteristics: 

1. Standard-Air Capacity of Each Compressed-Air Dryer: 156 scfm free air, minimum, 

matched to air compressor flow rating. 

2. Pressure: 100 psig minimum, 125 psig, maximum. 

3. Entering-Air Temperature: Determined by Seller. 

4. Leaving-Air Temperature: Determined by Seller. 

5. Leaving-Air Dew Point Temperature: -40 deg F. 

6. Ambient-Air Temperature: 95 deg F maximum summer time. 

7. Maximum Air-Pressure Drop: Determined by Seller. 

8. Inlet Filter: Determined by Seller. 

9. Outlet Filter: Determined by Seller. 

10. Dryer tower shall be carbon steel, ASME stamped and coded. Towers shall have two legs 

constructed from carbon steel "U" channel, securely welded to vessel body for dryer 

support. 

11. To maintain lowest possible pressure drop, dryer shall have inlet and outlet connections 

of high performance full port ball valves, for valves 2” and smaller. 

12. Tower shall be equipped with stainless steel desiccant supports and stainless steel air 

diffusion screens. Each dryer tower shall be provided with separate fill and drain ports. 

13. A safety relief valve shall be included on each tower. 

14. Desiccant regeneration shall be accomplished by a blower that forces atmospheric air 

through an external heater and then though the wet desiccant bed of the tower being 

regenerated (off-line). Water vapor collected in the wet desiccant bed is desorbed and 

enters the hot purge air stream. The hot, wet, purge air stream is then carried out of the 

dryer and vented to atmosphere. 

15. All piping shall be carbon steel, schedule 40 designation in accordance with ASME 

B31.9. All fittings and interconnecting piping shall be flanged for ease of assembly and 

disassembly. All piping, fittings, flanges and valves shall be carbon steel and shall 

comply with ASME B31.9. 

16. Flanged components shall conform to the ASME B 16.5. 

17. Threaded components shall conform to the National Pipe Thread (NPT) standards. 

18. Control air lines shall be 1/4" nylon tubing. The use of nylon tubing shall be limited to 

control air lines and sample air lines. Tubing shall be connected by the use of push-in 

fittings only. 



19. All components that use pilot air for operation shall be protected by an in-line .01 micron 

filter. Air supply shall be both clean and dry. 

20. To facilitate service and troubleshooting of dryer control system, a pilot air shutoff valve 

shall be included. This shall allow for servicing of control system while dryer remain online 

in drying service. 

21. Drying flow shall be downwards through the desiccant bed, regenerating flow upwards 

(counter current flow). 

22. Wet inlet flow shall be diverted through the dryer towers by the use of full flow, high 

performance, non-lubricated valves. 

23. Dry outlet air flow shall be routed downstream by the use of a check valve manifold to 

prevent backflow through dryer. 

24. Pneumatic actuator shall be sized to provide positive sealing valve actuation. Operator 

can check ball valve position when unit is in operation. Operator shall be able to service 

actuator and control circuit while dryer remains on-line in drying service. 

25. System shall be located near the top of the dryer to facilitate adjustment and observation. 

26. The off-line (regenerating) tower shall be gradually returned to line pressure prior to 

tower switching. 

27. Tower switch over must occur at full line pressure for the purpose of reducing desiccant 

dusting and premature aging of downstream filters. 

28. A pressure gauge on each tower shall act as a visual indicator that tower switching is 

occurring. 

29. The purge air valves shall be fitted with exhaust silencers to minimize noise level during 

depressurization and purging. 

30. Dryer shall be filled with 2 - 5 millimeter and 4 – 8 millimeter, Activated Alumina. 

31. Desiccant shall be rated for wet air service and shall not fracture in the presence of liquid 

water. 

32. Desiccant beds shall be sized to maintain both low flow velocities and maximum contact 

time between wet airstream and drying desiccant. 

33. The dryer shall be equipped with a dual stage coalescing pre filter at the dryer inlet a 

particulate filter at the blower and particulate filter at the dryer exit, each sized for the 

rated flow of the dryer or blower. The coalescing filter shall contain an automatic 

condensate drain. The filters shall be factory mounted and piped to the dryer assembly, 

complete with a 3-valve bypass for servicing the unit. 

34. All controls shall be housed in a single NEMA 4 control enclosure (unless stated 

otherwise) and shall include heater controls and transformers as required. 

35. Drying system shall be shipped completely assembled and tested so that only single entry 

electrical connection is necessary for the unit's electrical system. 

36. Dryer sequencing shall be performed through the use of a programmable logic controller. 

Controller shall provide manual stepping function to facilitate dryer sequencing and 

troubleshooting. 

37. Drying system shall be provided with schematic panel six (6) LED indicators to indicate 

right and left tower drying, and right and left tower regenerating, power on, alarm, heater 

on as a minimum. 

38. Tower and purge air pressure gauges and tower temperature gauges shall be locally 

mounted. 

39. Dryer shall be equipped with an alarm to indicate valve switching failure. This alarm 

shall provide continuous monitoring of dryer sequencing functions to ensure proper dryer 

operation. Should an out-of-tolerance condition occur, a locally mounted alarm light shall 

be activated to signal the need for system service and the Controller’s program shall be 

halted. 



40. Heater elements mounted externally shall not come into direct contact with desiccant bed. 

This design minimizes thermal shock, scorching and premature aging of desiccant caused 

by internally mounted heater elements. 

41. Heater shall be sized for complete regeneration air requirement. To maximize heater 

element service life, the heater shall be operated by a solid state relay with a set 

temperature of 375 deg F. Heater watt density shall not exceed 23 watts per square inch. 

The heater shall be Incoloy sheathed and insulated. 

42. Externally mounted heater design shall reduce the potential for a compressed air line fire 

common to internal heater-type designs. Heater assembly shall include direct monitoring 

of the heater housing. A thermocouple shall measure the internal heater housing 

temperature and shut-down the heater upon High Heater Temperature condition. 

Interlock shall be included to prevent heater from re-energizing without being manually 

reset. 

43. A temperature gauge mounted on each dryer tower shall act as a visual indicator that 

tower regeneration is occurring. 

44. All electrical equipment and components shall conform to the latest edition of the 

National Electrical Code (NEC) and the National Electrical Manufacturers Association 

(NEMA). 

45. Drying system shall be designed so that single entry, 480V/3PH/60HZ electrical power 

can be brought into control enclosure. 


a. Volts: 480 Vac. 

b. Phase(s): Three. 


d. Full-Load Amperes: Determined by Seller. 

e. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: Determined by Seller. 

f. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: Determined by Seller. 

2.5 COMPUTER INTERFACE CABINET 

A. Description: 

1. Wall mounting. 

2. Welded steel with white enamel finish. 

3. Gasketed door. 

4. Grounding device. 

5. Factory-installed, signal circuit boards. 

6. Power transformer. 

7. Circuit breaker. 

8. Wiring terminal board. 

9. Internal wiring capable of interfacing 5 alarm signals. 

2.6 MOTORS 

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and 

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section 230513 "Common Motor 

Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 



1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load 

will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. 

2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical 

devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections. 

2.7 FASTENERS 





C. All graded fasteners shall conform to ASME B18.2.1/ B18.2.2 or SAE J429 and SAE J995. 


A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for compressed gas and thermal conditions of low or 

high pressure Nitrogen piping system contents (as applicable). 




flanges. 










capacities published by the ICC-ES and approved for resistance to seismic loading. 



The final coat shall be light gray. All coatings shall be applied in such a man- 



ner as to produce a uniform smoothness. Special attention shall be paid to crevices, weld lines, 

carriers, and edges to obtain the required thickness. 



A. Before air compressor, air dryer or air receiver installation, examine roughing-in for equipment 

support, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, piping, and electrical connections to verify actual 

locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting air compressor equipment performance, 

maintenance, and operations. 

1. Air compressor equipment locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine 

exact locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections. 



A. Equipment Mounting: Install air compressor package and air dryer skid on concrete substrate 

using elastomeric pads and anchor bolting. Install air receiver tanks directly to concrete 

substrate with anchor bolting. Comply with requirements specified in Section 220548, Vibration 

and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. 

1. Minimum Deflection: 1/4 inch (as applicable when using vibration dampening pads). 

2. For supported equipment, install anchor bolts that anchor into the structural concrete 

floor. 

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, 

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 

B. Arrange equipment so controls and devices are accessible for servicing. 

C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. 

D. Install the following devices on compressed-air equipment: 

1. Filters, Thermometers, Pressure Gages, and Safety Valves: Install manufacturers 

supplied equipment, shipped separately, on compressed-air system equipment. 

2. Automatic Drain Valves: Install on after coolers, receivers, and dryers. Discharge 

condensate over nearest floor drain using elastomeric hoses. 


A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221513, "General Service 

Compressed Air Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and 

specialties. 



B. Install piping adjacent to compressed air equipment to allow service and maintenance. 


A. Identify general-service air compressors and components. Comply with requirements for 

identification specified in Section 220553, "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 




2. Check for lubricating oil in lubricated-type equipment. 

3. Check belt drives (if applicable) for proper tension. 

4. Verify that air-compressor inlet filters and piping are clear. 

5. Check for equipment vibration-control supports and flexible pipe connectors and verify 

that equipment is properly attached to substrate. 

6. Check safety valves for correct settings. Ensure that settings are higher than aircompressor 

discharge pressure but not higher than rating of system components. 

7. Check for proper seismic restraints (if applicable). 

8. Drain condensate from air compressor wet receiver, air dryer and receiver tanks. 

9. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm 

proper motor rotation and unit operation. 

10. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 


A. Engage factory-authorized service representative to train Buyer's maintenance personnel to 

adjust, operate, and maintain the air compressor, after coolers, air dryers, air receivers and 

associated equipment. 




SECTION 226313 - NITROGEN GAS PIPING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Nitrogen Gas Piping and specialties designated "Nitrogen Gas Piping". 

2. Nitrogen Gas Piping to containers, casks, valves, fittings, and accessories within the 

building envelope. 



5. Stainless-steel braided PTFE Hose (1” and smaller) 

6. Stainless-steel flexible hose. 

7. Elastomeric flexible hose (larger than 1”) 

8. Ball valves. 


10. Needle valves. 

11. Safety valves (ECRT-PSV-601 and ECRT-PSV-611) 

12. Pressure control valves. 

13. Flow orifices (ECRT-FO-601 and ECRT-FO-602) 


15. Compressed gas manifold. 

16. Compressed gas cylinder safety caps. 



17. Compressed gas cylinder storage racks. 

18. Welding materials. 


20. Joining materials. 

21. Associated Datasheets are as follows: 

Document No. Title 

ECRT-INSTR-DS-140 FI-760-601 

ECRT-INSTR-DS-145 FS-750-651 

ECRT-INSTR-DS-147 PI-760-606 

ECRT-INSTR-DS-152 FI-760-602 

ECRT-INSTR-DS-160 ECRT-PCV-603 

ECRT-INSTR-DS-xxx ECRT-SOV-602 

B. Equipment DescriptionThis Section includes piping and related specialties for low pressure nitrogen 

gas systems operating at 80 psig or less and high pressure nitrogen gas systems operating 

at 2265 psig or less. 


1. Bulk gas storage tanks. 

2. Interface equipment for the STS Container and cask fill and vent ports. 




1. Pipes, Tubes and fittings. 

2. Structural materials. 

3. Stainless-steel braided PTFE hose (1” and smaller) 

4. Stainless-steel flexible hose. 






8. Needle valves. 

9. Safety valves (ECRT-PSV-601 and ECRT-PSV-611). 


11. Flow orifices (ECRT-FO-601 and ECRT-FO-602). 


13. Compressed gas manifold. 

14. Compressed gas cylinder safety caps. 

15. Compressed gas cylinder storage racks. 







E. Certificates of Shop Inspection and Data Report for piping: As required by ASME B31.3 and that 

the piping has been designed, manufactured and constructed in accordance with the Seller’s QA 

plan. 


















by the Buyer. 


H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For Nitrogen Gas piping specialties to include in emergency, 






4. Weld maps. 


Record (PQR). 













15. Commercial Grade Item (CGI) dedication packages (if required by the Statement of 

Work). 






Safety Significant. 

C. Quality levels are defined on the associated line lists, valve lists and datasheets accompanying this 

section. 


Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications" or AWS B2.2/B2.1M, "Standard 

for Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification." 













341.4.1 and 344.2. 









343. 







i. cracks; 




to edge; and 





ASME B31.3, paragraph 345 or K345, as applicable. 





1. Comply with ASME B31.3, "Process Piping," Normal Service category for low-pressure 

compressed nitrogen piping and High Pressure category for high pressure nitrogen 

piping. 

2. Comply with ASME B31.3, as applicable, for materials, products, and installation. 

3. Safety Valves (if required): ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, 

Division 1. Safety valves shall bear the appropriate ASME label. 

4. Pressure Vessels (if required): ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, 

Division 1. Pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. 






"Structural Welding Code - Steel." 

K. All piping, tubing and components indicated on the Drawings with a (Z) are Safety Significant 

SSCs (Structure Systems or Components). 





b. Pipe wall thickness/schedule per ASTM; 

c. Pipe wall material type per ASTM; 

d. Support material type; 

e. Support catalog number; 

f. Weld filler material; and 

g. Weld type. 

L. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and 



M. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, 


N. All items and processes are subject to review, inspection, or surveillance by the Buyer's Quality 


facility. 

O. Hold, Witness, and Verification points shall be identified in the Fabrication, Inspection and Test 


approved portions of work in accordance with specification requirements before notifying Buyer. 

P. Seller shall control fabrication, assembly, inspection, testing, and related activities, performed in 



A. Refer to Section 011100, Summary of Work, for definition of general requirements that apply to all 

specification sections prepared for this Project. 















6. High-Pressure Nitrogen Gas Piping: System of compressed nitrogen piping and specialties 

operating at pressures between 80 and 2265 psig. 

7. Low-Pressure Nitrogen Gas Piping: System of compressed nitrogen piping and specialties 

operating at pressures of 80 psig or less. 
































A. General Design Requirements and Conditions for the High Pressure Nitrogen Gas Piping System: 

1. Normal operating pressure at 2265 psig, maximum. 

2. Normal design pressure of 2500 psig. 

3. Normal operating temperature at 68 deg F. 

4. Normal design temperature at -29 to 100 deg F. 

5. Normal operating flow rate at 15 scfm, maximum. 

6. Fluid properties are the same as pure nitrogen at 68 deg F. 

7. Piping Code Low pressure system: ASME B31.3, High Pressure Service. 

B. General Design Requirements and Conditions for the Low Pressure Nitrogen Gas Piping System: 




4. Normal design temperature at 100 deg F. 


6. Fluid properties are the same as pure nitrogen at 68 deg F. 

7. Piping Code Low pressure system: ASME B31.3, Normal Service. 

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that Nitrogen Gas Piping, 

accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 220548, Vibration 

and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. Include the following: 







3. All pipe installation isometrics and vendor specific data necessary for pipe stress analysis 

(including flange leakage analysis data) shall be supplied by the Seller to the Buyer for 

review prior to installation. 



1. Equipment that is to be located indoors will be in a temperature controlled industrial type 

location. 

2. Facility interior ambient conditions are 65 to 80 °F. 

3. Facility exterior ambient conditions are -27 to 110 °F. 


B. Interruption of Existing Service(s): Do not interrupt services to facilities occupied by the Buyer or 

others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide 

temporary service according to requirements indicated: 


service(s). 


permission. 




2. Electrical power connections (if required) are specified in Section 260519, Low-Voltage 

Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 


A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with 

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 







B. Individual pipe spools that are delivered to the fabrication site shall be cleaned in accordance with 

Part 3.1.A and capped with chloride/halogen free plastic caps. 

C. Pipe spools shall be labeled with the full line numbers in accordance with Section 220553, Identification 

for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. 



A. Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings: Schedule 40, ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP316L or TP304L, 

unless otherwise indicated; seamless pipe and ASTM A 403/A 403M, Class S, seamless fittings 

matching pipe thickness and grade, for welded joints. See pipe codes in subsection 3.10. 

B. Stainless Steel Tubing and Fittings: ASTM A 269, Grade TP316L, fully annealed (90 HRb or 

less), unless otherwise indicated; seamless tubing and ASTM A 182/A 182M or ASTM A 276 

seamless fittings matching tube thickness and grade, for welded joints. Tubing must be suitable 

for bending and surface scratches or other imperfections are not permissible. Mechanical Joints: 

304L or 316L SST Flareless type, “Crawford”, "Swagelok", "Parker" or approved equal in 

accordance with ASTM A 182/A 182M A 276 or SA 479. Tubing shall be restricted to ¾-in. and 

smaller. See pipe codes in subsection 3.10. 

C. Stainless steel certified material is: 

1. L-Grade material supplied with CMTR’s 





D. Certified TP 316L or TP304L stainless steel pipe: pipe fittings, tubing and tubing fitting, plate, rod 

bar, sheet and strip shall get the following tests: 







Prepare specimens as required, sensitize specimens by heating for 1 h at 1250 °F + 10 o F 


0.0020 in. per month for full five 48-h periods. Ensure that corrosion rate for final spe- 



cimen does not exceed corrosion rate of any of the previous specimens by more than 


E. Wrought Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and 

gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: 







C. Steel pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Type E or S, Grade B, 

or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Grade B, standard weight, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80. 


capacities published by the ICC-ES and approved for resistance to wind and seismic loading. 



The final coat shall be light gray. All coatings shall be applied in such a manner as to produce 

a uniform smoothness. Special attention shall be paid to crevices, weld lines, carriers, and 

edges to obtain the required thickness. 












minutes. 








3. Hosexpress 










2.4 STAINLESS-STEEL FLEXIBLE HOSE 

A. Flex Line: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wire-braid covering and ends 

welded to inner tubing. See pipe codes in subsection 3.10. 

1. Body: Stainless-steel corrugations with woven, flexible, stainless steel, wire-reinforcing 

protective jacket. 


3. CWP Rating: 200 psig, minimum (low pressure system), 3000 psig, minimum (high 

pressure system). 






minutes. 



7. Air Liquide IG series. 

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements contained in Section 012513, 

Product Substitution Procedures, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable 

product, approved by the Buyer, by one of the following: 

1. Air Liquide. 




pressure. See pipe codes in subsection 3.10. 


and fire protective jacket. 










minutes. 






3. Hose Master (Grainger Industrial) 

4. Hosexpress 











13. Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan Company. 



A. Description; Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: 




4. Body Material: stainless-steel, Type 316 




8. Seals: UHMWPE/RTFE/TFM, 

9. Ends: threaded, tube fitting, flanged or weld ends. 












7. NIBCO Inc. 

8. Flowtek, Inc. 




2.7 CHECK VALVES 

A. Check Valves: In-line pattern, stainless steel. 







1. Air Liquide, Inc. 

2. Advanced Specialty Gas Equipment (ASGE). 

3. Check-All. 

4. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group. 

5. DFT, Inc. 

6. Flow-Tek. 

7. Hammond Valve. 

8. Milwaukee Valve Company. 


10. NIBCO, Inc 




2.8 NEEDLE VALVES 

A. Needle Valves: In-line pattern, stainless steel. 

1. Standard: MSS SP-99, SP-132 



4. Body Material: stainless-steel, Type 316, 

5. Stem design: Regulating stem, Vee or Soft seat (PCTFE), 


7. Stem Packing: PTFE/UHMWPE/PFA, 

8. Ends: threaded, tube fitting, flanged or weld ends, 




1. Autoclave Engineers, Inc., 

2. Hy-Lok, Inc., 

3. Ideal Valve, Inc., 

4. Norshok, Inc., 

5. Parker Hannifin, Inc, 

6. S. D. Industries, Inc, 

7. Swagelok Industries, Inc, 

8. Tylok, Inc. 

2.9 SAFETY VALVES (ECRT-PSV-601 and ECRT-PSV-611) 

A. Safety Valves: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," 

construction; National Board certified, labeled, and factory sealed; constructed of stainless steel or 

bronze body with poppet-type safety valve for compressed-gas service. 

1. Fluid: Nitrogen gas 

2. Specific gravity: 0.967 



3. Operating Pressure: 65 psig. 

4. Set Pressure: 80 psig. 

5. Allowable overpressure: 10 percent. 

6. Relieving capacity: 

a. ECRT-PSV-601: 15 scfm 

b. ECRT-PSV-611: 1.5 scfm 

7. Built-up Back pressure: 0 psig. 




1. Kunkle, Inc 

2. Spence Engineering Company, Inc. 


4. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 

2.10 PRESSURE CONTROL VALVES 

A. Pressure Regulators: Diaphragm or pilot operated, stainless steel body, direct acting, springloaded 

manual pressure-setting adjustment, rated for 2500-psig minimum inlet pressure, unless 

otherwise indicated and 150 deg F maximum temperature. 

1. Capable of controlling delivered gas pressure within 0.5 psig for each 10-psig inlet pressure. 

2. Complete with inlet and downstream pressure gauges. 




1. Fisher Control, Inc. 

2. Hoke. 

3. Matheson Tri-Gas, Inc. 

4. Parker Hannifin Company. 




2.11 FLOW ORIFICES (ECRT-FO-601 and ECRT-FO-602) 

A. Flow Orifices: One piece construction of solid metal, ½” MNPT x ½” FNPT with machined 

orifice. Type 304 Stainless steel. Design basis, O’keefe Controls Type H adapter. 

B. Orifice Size: 

1. ECRT-FO-601; 0.125” diameter orifice. 

2. ECRT-FO-602; 0.037” diameter orifice. 

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements contained in Section 012513, 



1. O’Keefe Controls Co. 

2. Swagelok industries, Inc. 


A. General Requirements for Quick Couplings: Assembly with locking-mechanism feature for quick 

connection and disconnection of compressed-air hose. 

B. Automatic-Shutoff Quick Couplings: Straight-through brass body with O-ring or gasket seal and 

stainless-steel or nickel-plated-steel operating parts. 



















E. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements contained in Section 012513, 







2.13 COMPRESSED GAS MANIFOLD 

A. Four station gas manifold for K size gas cylinders. 

1. Standard: ASME B31.3, High Pressure category. 

2. 5/8 inch OD, 0.065 inch wall, Type 316L stainless steel tubing and socket TIG weld 

assembled. 

3. Threaded fittings to match standard station valves. 

4. NDE per ASME B31.3, and section 1.4.G. 







2.14 COMPRESSED GAS CYLINDER SAFETY CAPS 

A. Safety Caps for K size gas cylinders. 

1. Code: OSHA lockout/tagout regulation 29 CFR 1910.147 



2. Product ID: ASGE SG-6220 (fine thread) or -6621 (coarse thread) or Buyer reviewed 

substitute. 





2. Advanced Specialty Gas Equipment (ASGE) 

3. Brady (Grainger Supply, Inc.) 

2.15 COMPRESSED GAS CYLINDER STORAGE RACKS 

A. Four position rack for K size gas cylinders. 

1. Product ID: STRS Model No. 1742 or Buyer approved substitute. 






3. Safe-T-Rack Systems, Inc (STRS). 


A. Except where specifically accepted otherwise, welding materials shall be selected so that the deposited 

weld metal is similar in chemical composition and not significantly harder or stronger than 

the base material (e.g., stainless steel L-grade base metal shall be welded with L-grade filler metal). 

Lot tests (charpy V-Notch and Bend) temperatures shall be at or below the design metal temperature. 

B. Stainless-steel welding material shall meet the requirements of AWS D1.6/D1.6M, stainless steel 

E308/ER308 or E309/ER309 electrodes 





in the USA, CMTR is required for all filler materials. 

D. Carbon steel-welding material shall meet the requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Carbon Steel 

E70XX electrodes 



E. For dissimilar welds, such as carbon or low alloy steels to austenitic stainless steels, and different 

grades of stainless steel, such as 304L pipe to 316L valve the welding procedure application list 

shall specify the filler material type. 

F. For all filler metal, a typical test report in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Section 

II, Part C, is required. 

G. The storage, baking, and drying of all welding consumables (i.e., covered electrodes, flux cored 

electrodes, and fluxes) shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Segregation of carbon steel, 

low alloys, and alloy consumables is required during storage, baking, holding, and handling (including 

portable ovens). 


A. Graded fasteners shall be carefully controlled as defined in the Section 014000, Quality Assurance 

and Control. 



C. Stainless-steel bolts, cap screws, and studs shall be per ASTM A193/A 193M, Grade B8 (Class 2), 

and nuts shall be heavy hex nuts per ASTM A194/A 194M, Grade 8, 8S (Nitrinic 60) or 8SA 




















steel, 


steel, and 





Conformance. 


A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for compressed gas and thermal conditions of low or high 

pressure Nitrogen piping system contents (as applicable). 




flanges. 



B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel for carbon steel flanges or stainless steel for 

stainless steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated. 






A. Fabrication, Inspection and Testing Plan: Fabrication, inspection and testing shall be performed in 

accordance with contract requirements, applicable articles of this specification and drawings, and 

in accordance with an approved Fabrication, Inspection and Test Plan. The Fabrication, Inspection 

and Test plan shall include the following: 











d. Method used to segregate tools used on fabrication of stainless steel from tools 

used on carbon steel, 






etc.). 


11. Pneumatic Test Procedures. 







































steel. 












c. No intentionally added low melting point metals such as lead, zinc, copper, tin, 

antimony or mercury. 

d. Weld anti-spatter compounds shall not contain chlorine, fluorine, sulfur, mercury 

or other low melting point metals. 



e. Material and residue shall be completely removed when no longer required. 

Cleaning materials may be non-halogenated solvents or potable water containing 

no more than 50 PPM chlorides. Contact materials shall be controlled and 

documented in accordance with the Contractors inspection and test plan as 

approved by the Buyer. 

7. Materials shall be certified by Certificate of Conformance for stainless steel use. 


A. General - Comply with ASME B31.3, Process Piping Code, for Normal Service. 

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of Nitrogen 

Gas Piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction 

loss, expansion and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to 

layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. 

C. Install piping as indicated at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are 


gradient. (Slope piping and provide drain valves at low points.) 

D. Mismatched bore diameter connections shall be prepared in accordance with ASME B31.3 Figure 

328.4.3(a). The trimmed bore shall not be less than the thickness of the thinner walled pipe. 

Misaligned pipe limitation shall be in accordance with the code. However bore trimming to 

correct piping misalignment is not permitted. 

E. Weld piping and attachments to pressure retaining components in accordance with ASME B31.3, 

Process Piping Code, for Normal Service. 

F. Perform weld NDE in accordance with ASME B31.3, Process Piping Code, For Normal Service 

or High Pressure Service, as applicable, and sub-section 1.4.G of this section. 

G. Maintain material traceability through fabrication for materials requiring CMTRs. 

H. Install piping to maintain headroom and neither interfere with use of space nor take more space 


I. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected 

equipment. 

J. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance. 

K. Install nipples, unions, and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than 

system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. 



L. Follow the recommendations in ASME PCC-1-2010 for flange fit-up, bolt torques and bolt torque 

sequence. 

M. Make joints in threaded piping systems with joint lubricant specified. Apply lubricant to male 

threads only. 

N. Install piping to permit valve servicing. 

O. Install piping free of sags and bends. 

P. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. 

Q. Once fabrication has started, plug or cap ends of piping when installation is not in progress. Cap 

or plug openings in fabricated pipe spool assemblies until installation in piping system. 

R. Pressure-Leak test Normal Service Category piping system in accordance with ASME B31.3 

Process Piping Code, paragraph 345 and sub-section 3.8.C of this section. 

S. Pressure-Leak test High Pressure Service Category piping system in accordance with ASME 

B31.3 Process Piping Code, paragraph K345 and sub-section 3.8.C of this section. 

T. Sleeve and caulk pipes penetrating facility walls. Provide UL/FM approved through-penetration 

firestop system when penetrating fire- rated barriers (i.e., walls, floors, etc.). 







thinning as approved by the Buyer. Bending is restricted to bends having a minimum center-line 

bend radius of 3 times the pipe nominal outside diameter. 


metals. 











A. Install shutoff valve at each connection to the Main KW facility. 

B. Provide access where valves and other equipment are not exposed. 

C. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. 

D. Install the valve actuator and valve stem extensions in accordance with the drawings and 


E. Install check valves to maintain correct direction of flow as indicated on the system P&IDs. 

F. Install pressure regulators on piping where reduced pressure is required. 

G. Install pressure relief valve and full-size discharge piping to designated drains. 










E. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. 

Support pipe rolls on trapeze. Comply with requirements in Section 220529, Hangers and 

Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment, for trapeze hangers. 

F. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling. 



G. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum 

rods. 

H. Install hangers with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 








I. Install supports for vertical piping every 10 feet. 

3.6 FASTENERS 





C. Flange bolt torque values shall be per gasket manufacturer recommendation not to exceed 75% of 

bolt allowable yield strength as defined in the applicable ASTM standard and using appropriate 






A. Testing Agency: Buyer will engage qualified testing agency to perform field tests and inspections 

of piping and prepare test reports. 







systems. 





c. Cross-connection test. 

d. Piping purge test. 

e. Standing pressure test for positive pressure piping. 









b. Master and area alarm tests. 

c. Piping purge test. 

d. Piping particulate test. 

e. Piping purity test. 

f. Final tie-in test. 

g. Operational pressure test. 

h. Verify correct labeling of equipment and components. 








above. 


A. Engage factory-authorized service representative to train Buyer's maintenance personnel to adjust, 

operate, and maintain the Nitrogen Gas Piping system. 




Design Pressure 

Test Pressure 



Method 

PIPING CODE: S-5 Nitrogen (Inert Gas) Tubing and Piping 

2500 psig (Bottle Rack), 100 psig (Distribution Piping Downstream of Pressure 

Regulators) 

2750 psig (Bottle Rack), 110 psig (Distribution Piping Downstream of Pressure 

Regulators) 

Environmental Extremes: -27°F to 110°F for outside applications 

Normal Operating Extremes: 65°F to 80°F for inside applications (Note 1) 

Welded Joints: In-Process Visual Weld Inspection 

Pneumatic testing at 110% of Design Pressure for all Normal Service tubing 

and piping. For High Pressure tubing and piping, the leak tests shall be in 

accordance with ASME B31.3, paragraph K345 

Sizes 1" and smaller Larger than 1” 

Tubing/Pipe 

Fittings 

Tubing: ASTM A 269, TP 304L or 

316L fully annealed (not to exceed 

90 HRb or 200 HV), seamless SST. 

Minimum wall thickness 0.049”. 

Tubing must be suitable for bending 

or flaring and surface scratches or 

other imperfections are not permissible 

Pipe: ASTM A 312, Grade TP 

304L/316L, seamless, Schedule 40S, 

ASME B31.3, Process Piping Category: 

“High Pressure” or "Normal 

Fluid Service" as applicable 

As required 



tube thickness and grade. ASTM A 

403, Class WP-S 304L, for piping, 

butt welding in accordance with 

ASME B16.9, wall thickness to 

match pipe. Corrosion allowance = 

0.03-in. 

Bends: Formed pipe bends having 

minimum center-line bend radius of 

Pipe: ASTM A 312, Grade TP 

304L/316L, seamless, Schedule 40S 

ASME B31.3, Process Piping Category: 

“High Pressure” or "Normal 

Fluid Service" as applicable 

As required. 



tube thickness and grade. ASTM A 

403, Class WP-S 304L, for piping, 

butt welding in accordance with 

ASME B16.9, wall thickness to 

match pipe. Corrosion allowance = 

0.03-in. 



Valves 

3 x pipe nominal outside diameter. 

Mechanical Joints: 304L or 316L 

SST Flareless type, “Crawford”, 

"Swagelok", "Parker" or approved 

equal in accordance with ASTM A 

182/A 182M A 276 or SA 479. 

ASME B16.34, stainless steel body, stainless steel ball with fractional 

tube ends, UHMWPE seats. Manual locking handle. 

Note: 

1) Based on 65 °F winter and 80 °F summer inside HVAC design temperatures. 







Environmental Extremes: -27°F to 110°F for outside applications 



Fittings 

Autolok TM quick couplings, made by the OPW Company, 300 Series SST, 

Threaded or Welded as specified on fabrication drawings. Size and type as 

specified on the fabrication drawings. 

Campbell Chemjoint TM size and type as specified on the fabrication drawings. 

River Bend Hose Fittings, size and type as specified on the fabrication drawings. 



Note: 







PIPING CODE H-2: Flex Hoses 

Design Pressure 3000 psig (Nitrogen Purge high pressure cylinder pigtails) 




Hose Swagelok FM Series 

Fittings 

Environmental Extremes: -27°F to 110°F (Note1) 

Swagelok, size and type as specified on the design drawings. 

Note: 

1) Based on KW Basin Modified Annex Design Specification, PRC-STP-00329, Rev 3. 

2) Items referenced above shall be used unless approved by buyer. 

3) SWAGELOK is a registered trademark of Swagelok Company, Inc., Solon, Ohio 




SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, 

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 

600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment 

manufacturer for field installation. 


A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the 

following: 

1. Motor controllers. 

2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 

3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 

4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. 


2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS 

A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in 

HVAC equipment schedules or Sections. 

B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated. 

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS 

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above 

sea level. 

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads 

at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, 

and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 



2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS 

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. 

B. Efficiency: Premium-efficiency, as defined in NEMA MG 1. 

C. Service Factor: 1.10. 

D. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage. 

E. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. 

F. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating. 

G. Insulation: Class F. 

H. Code Letter Designation: 

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 

2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. 

I. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor 

frame sizes smaller than 324T. 

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features 

coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. 

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and 

tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by 

pulse-width modulated inverters. 

2. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 

3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 

4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected 

motors. 

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS 

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and 

requirements of specific motor application: 

1. Permanent-split capacitor. 

2. Split phase. 

3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 

4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. 

B. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and 

thrust loading. 



C. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type. 

D. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor 

when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor 

insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns 

to normal range. 

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) 




SECTION 230519 - METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Thermometers. 

2. Pressure Gauges. 

3. Test plugs. 


A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated: 

1. Thermometers. 

2. Pressure gauges. 

3. Test ports. 

B. Product Certificates: For each type of thermometer and gauge, signed by product manufacturer. 


2.1 METAL-CASE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS 



1. Palmer - Wahl Instruments Inc. 

2. Trerice, H. O. Co. 

3. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 

4. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. 



B. Case: Die-cast aluminum 7 inches long. 

C. Tube: Red or blue reading, organic-liquid filled, with magnifying lens. 

D. Tube Background: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale 

markings. 

E. Window: Acrylic. 

F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with 

locking device. 

G. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for thermowell installation and of length to suit 

installation. 

H. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 

1.5 percent of range. 

I. Range: 0°F to 160°F. 

2.2 DUCT-TYPE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS 



1. Miljoco Corp. 




B. Case: Die-cast aluminum, 7 inches long. 

C. Tube: Red or blue reading, organic filled, with magnifying lens. 

D. Tube Background: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale 

markings. 

E. Window: Acrylic. 

F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with 

locking device. 

G. Stem: Metal, for installation in mounting bracket and of length to suit installation. 

H. Mounting Bracket: Flanged fitting for attachment to duct and made to hold thermometer stem. 

I. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 

1.5 percent of range. 

J. Range: -40°F to 110°F. 



2.3 THERMOWELLS 



1. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div. 

2. Miljoco Corp. 




B. Manufacturers: Same as manufacturer of thermometer being used. 




1. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. 

2. KOBOLD Instruments, Inc. 

3. Marsh Bellofram. 

4. REO TEMP Instrument Corporation. 




8. WIKA Instrument Corporation. 

9. Winters Instruments. 

B. Direct-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gauges: Indicating-dial type complying with 

ASME B40.100. 

1. Case: Field Liquid-fillable type, Type 304 Stainless steel, 4-inch diameter. 

2. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4, bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is 

indicated. 

4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 

5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. 

6. Pointer: Black metal. 

7. Window: Laminated safety Glass. 

8. Ring: Stainless steel. 

9. Accuracy: Grade 1A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale. 

10. Pressure Range: 0 psig to 100 psig of pressure or as shown on Drawings. 

C. Pressure-Gauge Fittings: 

1. Valves: NPS 1/4 brass or stainless-steel needle type. 



2.5 TEST PLUGS 



1. Flow Design, Inc. 

2. MG Piping Products Co. 

3. National Meter, Inc. 

4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. 

5. Sisco Manufacturing Co. 


7. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 

B. Description: Corrosion-resistant brass or stainless-steel body with core inserts and gasketed and 

threaded cap, with extended stem for units to be installed in insulated piping. 

C. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F. 

D. Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing rubber valves. 

1. Insert material for air or water service at minus 30 to plus 200 deg F shall be Neoprene. 

E. Test Kit: Furnish one test kit containing one pressure gauge and adaptor, one thermometer, and 

carrying case. Pressure gauge, adapter probes, and thermometer sensing elements shall be of 

diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping. 

1. Pressure Gauge: Small bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inch- diameter dial and 

probe. Dial range shall be 0 to 200 psig. 

2. High-Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch-diameter 

dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be 0 to 220 deg F. 

3. Carrying case shall have formed instrument padding. 


3.1 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS 

A. Install liquid-in-glass thermometers in the following locations: 

1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone. 

2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler and chiller. 

3. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up central systems. 

4. Inlet and outlet of each thermal storage tank. 

5. Outside-air, return-air, and mixed-air ducts. 

B. Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers: 

1. Hydronic Water: 0 to 160 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions. 

2. Air Ducts: Minus 40 to plus 110 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions. 



3.2 GAUGE APPLICATIONS 

A. Install liquid fillable-case-type pressure gauges for discharge of each pressure-reducing valve. 

B. Install liquid fillable-case-type pressure gauge at heat pump chiller. 

C. Install liquid fillable-case-type pressure gauges at each pump. 

3.3 INSTALLATIONS 

A. Install direct-mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions. 

B. Install remote-mounting dial thermometers on panel, with tubing connecting panel and 

thermometer bulb supported to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length. 

C. Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees 

where thermometers are indicated. 

D. Duct Thermometer Support Flanges: Install in wall of duct where duct thermometers are 

indicated. Attach to duct with screws. 

E. Install direct-mounting pressure gauges in piping tees with pressure gauge located on pipe at 

most readable position. 

F. Install needle-valve fitting in piping for each pressure gauge for fluids. 

G. Install test plugs in tees in piping. 

H. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable indicators in accessible locations. 


A. Install meters and gauges adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance 

for meters, gauges, machines, and equipment. 


A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after installation. 

B. Adjust faces of meters and gauges to proper angle for best visibility. 




SECTION 230523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Bronze ball valves. 

2. Iron Single-flange butterfly valves. 


1. Division 23 HVAC piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only. 

2. Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and 

schedules. 


A. CWP: Cold working pressure. 

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber. 

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber. 

D. NRS: Nonrising stem. 

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke. 

F. RS: Rising stem. 

G. SWP: Steam working pressure. 


A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. 

1. Bronze ball valves. 

2. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves. 




A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single 

manufacturer. 

B. ASME Compliance: 

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 

2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 

3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. 


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 

3. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 

4. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 

B. Use the following precautions during storage: 

1. Maintain valve end protection. 

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If 

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. 

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use 

handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. 


2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES 

A. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves. 

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system 

pressures and temperatures. 

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Valve Actuator Types: 

1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger. 

2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. 

3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, locking lever type. 

4. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of size 

and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article. 

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features: 



1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and 

protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or 

disturbing insulation. 

2. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck. 

F. Valve-End Connections: 

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 

2. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 

3. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1. 

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. 

2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES 

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: 




a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 

b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. 

c. DynaQuip Controls. 

d. Flow-Tek, Inc.; a subsidiary of Bray International, Inc. 

e. Hammond Valve. 

f. Jamesbury; a subsidiary of Metso Automation. 

g. Jomar International, LTD. 

h. Kitz Corporation. 

i. Legend Valve. 

j. Marwin Valve; a division of Richards Industries. 

k. Milwaukee Valve Company. 

l. NIBCO INC. 

m. Red-White Valve Corporation. 

n. RuB Inc. 



b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. 

c. CWP Rating: 600 psig . 

d. Body Design: Two piece. 

e. Body Material: Bronze. 

f. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. 

g. Seats: Reinforced PTFE or TFE. 

h. Stem: Silicone Bronze. 

i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 

j. Port: Full. 




A. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc: 




a. ABZ Valve and Controls; a division of ABZ Manufacturing, Inc. 

b. Bray Controls; a division of Bray International. 

c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. 

d. Cooper Cameron Valves; a division of Cooper Cameron Corp. 

e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. 

f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. 

g. DeZurik Water Controls. 

h. Hammond Valve. 

i. Kitz Corporation. 

j. Milwaukee Valve Company. 

k. NIBCO INC. 

l. Norriseal; a Dover Corporation company. 

m. Red-White Valve Corporation. 

n. Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International. 

o. Tyco Valves & Controls; a unit of Tyco Flow Control. 

p. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 












A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove 

special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and 

handling. 

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made 

accessible by such operations. 

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. 



D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper 

size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is 

suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. 

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 


A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, 

maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. 

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. 

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. 

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. 


A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but 

before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. 

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS 

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 

1. Shutoff Service: Ball, or butterfly valves. 

2. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type. 

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves 

with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted. 

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections: 

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valveend 

option is indicated in valve schedules below. 

2. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 

3. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end 

option is indicated in valve schedules below. 

3.5 HYDRONIC-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE 

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 

1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 

2. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, brass with brass trim. 

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 



1. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, 

aluminum bronze disc. 




SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and 

equipment: 


2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 

3. Metal framing systems. 

4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 

5. Fastener systems. 

6. Equipment supports. 


1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze 

hangers for pipe and equipment supports. 

2. Division 21 Section "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System" for pipe hangers for fire-protection 

piping. 

3. Division 23 Section " Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" 

for vibration isolation devices. 

4. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports. 


A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. 

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and 

Supports." 




2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 





A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 

2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 

3. AWS D1.6, “Structural Welding Code—Stainless steel.” 

4. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 

B. All duct and pipe supports and components indicated on the Drawings with a (Z) are Safety 

Significant SSCs (Structure Systems or Components). 




a. Duct or pipe support spacing; 

b. Support material type; 

c. Support catalog number; 

d. Weld filler material; and 

e. Weld type. 










2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 

"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types. 


1. Anvil International. 

2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports. 


4. Empire Industries, Inc. 

5. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 

6. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. 



7. Grinnell Corp. 

8. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 

9. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. 

10. PHS Industries, Inc. 

11. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 

12. Tolco Inc. 

C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 


E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of 

bearing surface of piping. 

2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS 

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from 

structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts. 

2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS 

A. Available Manufacturers: 


2. Tolco Inc. 

3. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd. 

B. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. 

C. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 

2.5 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS 

A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal 

shield. 



2. Pipe Shields, Inc. 

3. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc. 

4. Value Engineered Products, Inc. 

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hydronic Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I 

calcium silicate with vapor barrier. 

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. 

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. 



F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient 

air temperature. 

2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS 

A. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened 

portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported 

loads and building materials where used. 


a. Drillco Devices, Ltd. 

b. Hilti, Inc. 

c. Powers Fasteners. 


A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel 

shapes. 


A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and 

nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 


3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS 

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems 

and equipment. 

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in 

piping system Sections. 

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will 

not have field-applied finish. 

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in 

direct contact with copper tubing. 

E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. 



F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in 

piping system Sections, install the following types: 

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or 

insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of 

pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 

3. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to 

NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required. 

4. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of 


5. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For 

suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8. 

6. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of 


7. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 

8. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or 

contraction. 

9. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes, 

NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion 

support and cast-iron floor flange. 

G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system 


1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to 

NPS 20. 

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, 

NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps. 

H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system 


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of 

building attachments. 

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 

I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system 


1. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist 

construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. 

2. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, 

channels, or angles. 

3. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 

4. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads 

are considerable and rod sizes are large. 

5. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 



6. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to 

flange edge. 

7. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 

8. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams 

for heavy loads. 

9. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams 

for heavy loads, with link extensions. 

10. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to 

structural steel. 

11. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above 

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: 

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. 

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. 

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 

12. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel beams. 

13. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 

14. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear 

horizontal movement where headroom is limited. 

J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system 


1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with 

insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer 

to prevent crushing insulation. 

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. 

K. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not 


L. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not 


M. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete 

construction. 


A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, 

supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building 

structure. 

B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for 

grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze 

pipe hangers. 



1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or 

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual 

pipe hangers. 

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. 

Weld steel according to AWS D1.1. 

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support 

together on field-assembled metal framing systems. 

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. 

E. Fastener System Installation: 

1. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely 

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and 

other accessories. 

G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. 

H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping 

systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of 

expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. 

I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. 

J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional 

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger 

and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten 

inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. 

K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from 

movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. 

L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum 

pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building 

services piping) are not exceeded. 

M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. 

a. Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. 

b. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and 

ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is 

indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields 

shall span an arc of 180 degrees. 

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: 

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. 

5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 



6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support 

equipment above floor. 

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface. 

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS 

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment 

supports. 

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be 

shop welded because of shipping size limitations. 

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance 

and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 





4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours 

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 


A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve 

indicated slope of pipe. 

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. 


A. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas 

of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. 






SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND 

EQUIPMENT 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Isolation pads. 

2. Isolation mounts. 

3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 

4. Housed spring mounts. 

5. Elastomeric hangers. 

6. Spring hangers. 

7. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops. 

8. Restraining braces and cables. 


A. IBC: International Building Code. 


C. ASCE 7-05: American Society of Civil Engineers Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and 

Other Structures 


A. Wind-Restraint Loading: 

SSCs susceptible to wind shall be evaluated using wind load per ASCE 7-05, and the 

parameters below. 



















e. Ip = 1.5 

f. Amplification factor and Response Modification coefficient (eg. ap, Rp) as 

tabulated in ASCE 7. 

















1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation 

device. 




rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an evaluation service member 

of ICC-ES or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 


requirements. 

3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads. 










B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are 


C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural 

Welding Code - Steel" or AWS D1.6/D1.6M, “Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel.” 

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall 

bear anchorage preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on 

independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are 

not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including 

combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and 

sealed by a qualified professional engineer. 


2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS 



1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. 



4. Isolation Technology, Inc. 



7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 

8. Vibration Isolation. 

9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 

B. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad 

area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that 

match requirements of supported equipment. 

1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene. 



C. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant 

elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger 

rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range. 

D. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert 

in compression. 

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a 

maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing 

isolation efficiency. 







6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced 

cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 

7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support 

spring coil. 









6. Loos & Co.; Cableware Division. 





shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES or an agency 




subjected. 

C. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted 






D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables with end connections made of steel 

assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and 

with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement. 

E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped or framing channel clamped to hanger 

rod. 

F. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel 

for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with 

strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight 

times diameter. 

G. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane 







B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment 

before shipping. 

1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 

2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use. 

3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 



A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic- and wind-control 

devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions 

affecting performance. 





A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application 

by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES or an agency acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction. 








3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION 

A. Equipment Restraints: 

1. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service 

member of ICC-ES or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing 

required submittals for component. 

B. Piping Restraints: 

1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127. 



3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet. 


D. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of 

ICC-ES or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals 

for component. 

E. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at 


F. Drilled-in Anchors: 
















6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior 

applications. 






1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to 


2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to 

restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least 

seven days' advance notice. 

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary 

load-spreading members. 

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by 

Engineer. 

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 

6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 

7. Measure isolator deflection. 

8. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory 

results are achieved. 




A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight. 




C. Adjust active height of spring isolators. 





SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 





1.2 SUMMARY 




3. Duct labels. 

4. Stencils. 


6. Warning tags. 





3. Duct labels. 

4. Stencils. 


6. Warning tags 

B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification 

material and device. 

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed 

content for each label. 

D. Valve numbering scheme. 

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of 




B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. 

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. 


2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS 

A. Metal Labels for Equipment: 

1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum 

thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 


2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 





4. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain or Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping 

screws. 


B. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 

1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 

2. Letter Color: Black. 

3. Background Color: White. 

4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 


2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 







C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, 

Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (P&ID and schedules), plus the Specification 

Section number and title where equipment is specified. 

D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch 

bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where 

equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number 

and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and 

maintenance data. 



2.2 PIPE LABELS 

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering 


B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover or cover full 

circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. 

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing. 

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or 

abbreviations as used on Drawings and an arrow indicating flow direction. 

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate 

both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 


2.3 DUCT LABELS 

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Duct Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering 


B. Self-Adhesive Duct Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing. 

C. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or 

abbreviations as used on Drawings and an arrow indicating flow direction. 

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both 

directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction. 


2.4 STENCILS 

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter 

height of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and 

door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions. 

1. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal. 

2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint may 

be in pressurized spray-can form. 

3. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless 


2.5 VALVE TAGS 

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2inch 

numbers. 



1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, 

and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook. 

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve 

number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or 

space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for 

identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 

2.6 WARNING TAGS 

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card 

stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 

1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches. 

2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. 

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO 

NOT OPERATE." 

4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering. 



A. Clean piping, duct, and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of 

identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, 

paints, and encapsulants. 

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION 

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. 

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION 

A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting." 

B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe 

labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels, complying with ASME A13.1, on each 

piping system. 

1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. 

2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking. 



C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; 

machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and 

exterior exposed locations as follows: 

1. Near each valve and control device. 

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. 

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed 

piping. 

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in 

areas of congested piping and equipment. 

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. 

D. Pipe Label Color Schedule: 

1. Hydronic-Water Piping (GLS/GLR): 

a. Background Color: Green. 


2. Condensate-Drain Piping (coil drain) (CND): 

a. Background Color: Green. 


3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION 

A. Install plastic-laminated or self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the 

following color codes: 

1. Blue: For supply ducts. 

2. Blue: For outside- and return- ducts. 

3. Purple: Process area exhaust ducts. 

B. Stenciled Duct Label Option: Stenciled labels, showing service and flow direction, may be 

provided instead of plastic-laminated duct labels, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 

inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of 

required identification. 

C. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 

50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system. 

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION 

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems. List tagged valves in a valve 

schedule. 



B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and 

with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs: 

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: 

a. Hydronic Water: 2 inches, round. 

b. Condensate drain: 2 inches, round 

2. Valve-Tag Color: 

a. Hydronic Water: Natural or Yellow. 

b. Condensate Drain: Natural or Yellow 

3. Letter Color: 

a. Hydronic Water: Black. 

b. Condensate Drain: Black. 

3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION 

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where 

required. 




SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following: 

1. Air Systems: 

a. Constant-volume air systems. 

2. Hydronic Piping Systems: 

a. Constant-flow systems. 

b. Variable-flow systems. 

c. Primary-secondary systems. 

3. HVAC equipment quantitative-performance settings. 

4. Space pressurization testing and adjusting. 

5. Vibration measuring. 

6. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 

7. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section. 


A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce 

fan speed or adjust a damper. 

B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and 

terminals, according to indicated quantities. 

C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and 

ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors, 

and other pollutants. 

D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high 

air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn 

from a person's skin than is normally dissipated. 

E. NC: Noise criteria. 



F. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable 

results. 

G. RC: Room criteria. 

H. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order. 

I. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a 

closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump. 

J. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side. 

K. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause 

reduced capacities in all or part of a system. 

L. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a 

fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was 

performance tested. 

M. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. 

N. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the 

distribution system. 

O. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment. 

P. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and 

reporting TAB procedures. 


A. LEED Submittals: 

1. Air Balance Report for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation of work performed for 

ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." 

2. TAB Report for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation of work performed for 

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing." 

B. Qualification Data: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 6 copies of 

evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified 

in "Quality Assurance" Article. 

C. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, 

submit 6 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3. 

D. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 90 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 6 

copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" 

Article. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project. 

E. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on 

approved forms certified by TAB firm. 



F. Warranties specified in this Section. 


A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by AABC, NEBB, or TABB. 

B. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Architect's representatives on approval of TAB 

strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the 

participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service 

representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Provide seven days' 

advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location. 

1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following: 

a. Submittal distribution requirements. 

b. The Contract Documents examination report. 

c. TAB plan. 

d. Work schedule and Project-site access requirements. 

e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. 

f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow. 

C. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the 

following: 

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB 

reports. 

2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified 

and referenced in this Specification. 

D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and 

Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems." Or NEBB's "Procedural 

Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems. 

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC's "National Standards 

for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems or NEBB's 

"Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," 

Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification." 

F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently 

if required by instrument manufacturer. 

1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the 

name of party performing instrument calibration. 

G. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2 - "Air 

Balancing." 

H. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1- 

2004, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing." 




A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial 

Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's 

operations. 


A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, 

HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to 

support and assist TAB activities. 

B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and 

times. 

C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been 

satisfactorily completed. 

1.8 WARRANTY 

A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC's "National Standards 

for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" forms stating 

that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails 

to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions: 

1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract 

Documents. 

2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation 

limits. 

B. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB or TABB forms stating that NEBB or TABB 

will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply 

with the Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the following provisions: 

1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract 

Documents. 

2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation 

limits. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 



A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover 

conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. 



1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of 

Contract. 

2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flowcontrol 

devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required 

by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing 

devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and 

equipment operation. 

B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment. 

C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 01 Section "Project Record 

Documents." 

D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions 

for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and 

assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. 

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data 

to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or 

unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system 

effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under 

conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the 

factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, 

"Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," 

Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions. 

F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, 

cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed. 

G. Examine system and equipment test reports. 

H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, 

such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and 

fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are 

accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment 

operation. 

I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and 

balancing. 

J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, 

belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. 

K. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations. 

L. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. 

M. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. 

N. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls. 



O. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following: 

1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller. 

2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller. 

3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully 

closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in mixing boxes. 

4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-way 

mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected. 

5. Thermostats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls. 

6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. 

7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents. 

8. Controller set points are set at indicated values. 

9. Interlocked systems are operating. 

10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values. 

P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe 

and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from 

indicated values. 


A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. 

B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following: 

1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 

2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 

3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 

4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 

5. Balance and fire dampers are open. 

6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 

7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and 

access to balancing devices is provided. 

8. Doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. 

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING 

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained 

in ASHRAE 111 and this Section. 

1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." 

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the 

minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and 

balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. 

Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project. 



C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent 

identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speedcontrol 

levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. 

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units. 

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS 

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and 

recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with 

required fan volumes. 

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts. 

C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements. 

D. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air hood and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air 

dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. 

E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. 

F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. 

G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. 

H. Check for airflow blockages. 

I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. 

J. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components. 

K. Check for proper sealing of air duct system. 

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS 

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by 

fan manufacturer. 

1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows: 

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and 

upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. 

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. 

c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as 

possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct 

restrictions. 

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum 

that houses the fan. 



2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, 

rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment. 

a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel 

must change filters. 

3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat 

recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions. 

4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static 

pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with 

calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend 

corrective action to align design and actual conditions. 

5. Obtain approval from Engineer for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than 

indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical 

connections to accommodate fan-speed changes. 

6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment 

manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor 

amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full 

heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required 

brake horsepower. 

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated 

airflows within specified tolerances. 

1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust 

volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. 

a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube 

traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate 

the total airflow for that zone. 

2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to 

adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. 

C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments. 

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written 

instructions and calculating factors. 

D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified 

tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors 

and the dampers at air terminals. 

1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated 

quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the 


2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 



3.6 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS 

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end 

of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct 

variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent. 

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts. 

C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the 

general preparation procedures specified above: 

1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 

2. Check expansion tank liquid level. 

3. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at indicated flow. 

4. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at 

fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal 

valves are kept open. 

5. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 

6. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so 

motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 

7. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated. 

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS 

A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive-displacement 

pumps: 

1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read 

pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for 

differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow 

and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. 

2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the 

pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve 

until indicated water flow is achieved. 

3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the 

system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake 

horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual 

amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage. 

4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design. 

B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings. 

C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance. 

1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop 

relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device. 

D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 

percent greater than indicated flow. 



E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows: 

1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow. 

2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over 

indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated 

flow. 

3. Record settings and mark balancing devices. 

F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump 

heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature. 

G. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing. 

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS 

A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at 

maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic 

systems. 

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR PRIMARY-SECONDARY-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS 

A. Balance the primary system crossover flow first, then balance the secondary system. 

3.10 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS 

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 

1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers. 

2. Motor horsepower rating. 

3. Motor rpm. 

4. Efficiency rating. 

5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 

7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating. 

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying 

from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper 

operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, 

and nameplate data. 

3.11 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT PUMP CHILLERS 

A. Balance water flow through each evaporator to within specified tolerances of indicated flow 

with all pumps operating. Do not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended 

by the chiller manufacturer. Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating 

at design conditions: 

1. Evaporator-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow. 



2. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments 

furnished by chiller manufacturer. 

3. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling. 

4. If air-cooled chillers, verify condenser-fan rotation and record fan and motor data 

including number of fans and entering- and leaving-air temperatures. 

3.12 PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS 

A. If hydronic, measure entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water flow. 

3.13 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS 

A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil: 

1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature. 

2. Water flow rate. 

3. Water pressure drop. 

4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 

5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. 

6. Airflow. 

7. Air pressure drop. 

3.14 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS 

A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic 

temperature-control system. 

B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive 

eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature 

settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied. 

C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures. 

3.15 PROCEDURES FOR SPACE PRESSURIZATION MEASUREMENTS AND 

ADJUSTMENTS 

A. Before testing for space pressurization, observe the space to verify the integrity of the space 

boundaries. Verify that windows and doors are closed and applicable safing, gaskets, and 

sealants are installed. Report deficiencies and postpone testing until after the reported 

deficiencies are corrected. 

B. Measure, adjust, and record the pressurization of each room, each zone, and each building by 

adjusting the supply, return, and exhaust airflows to achieve the indicated conditions. 

C. Measure space pressure differential where pressure is used as the design criteria, and measure 

airflow differential where differential airflow is used as the design criteria for space 

pressurization. 



1. For pressure measurements, measure and record the pressure difference between the 

intended spaces at the door with all doors in the space closed. Record the high-pressure 

side, low-pressure side, and pressure difference between each adjacent space. 

2. For applications with cascading levels of space pressurization, begin in the most critical 

space and work to the least critical space. 

3. Test room pressurization first, then zones, and finish with building pressurization. 

D. To achieve indicated pressurization, set the supply airflow to the indicated conditions and adjust 

the exhaust and return airflow to achieve the indicated pressure or airflow difference. 

E. For spaces with pressurization being monitored and controlled automatically, observe and adjust 

the controls to achieve the desired set point. 

1. Compare the values of the measurements taken to the measured values of the control 

system instruments and report findings. 

2. Check the repeatability of the controls by successive tests designed to temporarily alter 

the ability to achieve space pressurization. Test overpressurization and 

underpressurization, and observe and report on the system's ability to revert to the set 

point. 

3. For spaces served by variable-air-volume supply and exhaust systems, measure space 

pressurization at indicated airflow and minimum airflow conditions. 

F. In spaces that employ multiple modes of operation, such as normal mode and emergency mode 

or occupied mode and unoccupied mode, measure, adjust, and record data for each operating 

mode. 

G. Record indicated conditions and corresponding initial and final measurements. Report 

deficiencies. 

3.16 PROCEDURES FOR VIBRATION MEASUREMENTS 

A. Use a vibration meter meeting the following criteria: 

1. Solid-state circuitry with a piezoelectric accelerometer. 

2. Velocity range of 0.1 to 10 inches per second. 

3. Displacement range of 1 to 100 mils. 

4. Frequency range of at least 0 to 1000 Hz. 

5. Capable of filtering unwanted frequencies. 

B. Calibrate the vibration meter before each day of testing. 

1. Use a calibrator provided with the vibration meter. 

2. Follow vibration meter and calibrator manufacturer's calibration procedures. 

C. Perform vibration measurements when other building and outdoor vibration sources are at a 

minimum level and will not influence measurements of equipment being tested. 

1. Turn off equipment in the building that might interfere with testing. 

2. Clear the space of people. 



D. Perform vibration measurements after air and water balancing and equipment testing is 

complete. 

E. Clean equipment surfaces in contact with the vibration transducer. 

F. Position the vibration transducer according to manufacturer's written instructions and to avoid 

interference with the operation of the equipment being tested. 

G. Measure and record vibration on rotating equipment over 3 hp. 

H. Measure and record equipment vibration, bearing vibration, equipment base vibration, and 

building structure vibration. Record velocity and displacement readings in the horizontal, 

vertical, and axial planes. 

1. Pumps: 

a. Pump Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. 

b. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. 

c. Pump Base: Top and side. 

d. Building: Floor. 

e. Piping: To and from the pump after flexible connections. 

2. Fans and HVAC Equipment with Fans: 

a. Fan Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. 


c. Equipment Casing: Top and side. 

d. Equipment Base: Top and side. 

e. Building: Floor. 

f. Ductwork: To and from equipment after flexible connections. 

g. Piping: To and from equipment after flexible connections. 

3. Chillers and HVAC Equipment with Compressors: 

a. Compressor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. 


c. Equipment Casing: Top and side. 

d. Equipment Base: Top and side. 

e. Building: Floor. 

f. Piping: To and from equipment after flexible connections. 

I. For equipment with vibration isolation, take floor measurements with the vibration isolation 

blocked solid to the floor and with the vibration isolation floating. Calculate and report the 

differences. 

J. Inspect, measure, and record vibration isolation. 

1. Verify that vibration isolation is installed in the required locations. 

2. Verify that installation is level and plumb. 

3. Verify that isolators are properly anchored. 



4. For spring isolators, measure the compressed spring height, the spring OD, and the travelto-solid 

distance. 

5. Measure the operating clearance between each inertia base and the floor or concrete base 

below. Verify that there is unobstructed clearance between the bottom of the inertia base 

and the floor. 

3.17 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION 

A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned. 

B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect 

control functions. 

C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements. 

D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers). 

E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators. 

F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and 

correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input 

changes. 

G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers. 

H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems. 

I. Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations. 

J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates 

on a grounded or nongrounded power supply. 

K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations. 

3.18 TOLERANCES 

A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent. 

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent. 

3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent. 

4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent. 

3.19 REPORTING 

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as 

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' 

balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to 

facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to 



HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and 

balancing devices. 

B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, 

procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems 

found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each 

building floor for systems serving multiple floors. 

3.20 FINAL REPORT 

A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in 

three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems. 

B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and 

balancing engineer. 

1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. 

C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following: 

1. Pump curves. 

2. Fan curves. 

3. Manufacturers' test data. 

4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 

5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings 

and Product Data. 

D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the 

final report, as applicable: 

1. Title page. 

2. Name and address of TAB firm. 

3. Project name. 

4. Project location. 

5. Architect's name and address. 

6. Engineer's name and address. 

7. Contractor's name and address. 

8. Report date. 

9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report. 

10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. 

Number each page in the report. 

11. Summary of contents including the following: 

a. Indicated versus final performance. 

b. Notable characteristics of systems. 

c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract 

Documents. 

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 



14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated 

values. 

15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: 

a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. 

b. Conditions of filters. 

c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. 

d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. 

e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. 

f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. 

g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. 

h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. 

E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present 

each system with single-line diagram and include the following: 

1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 

2. Water and steam flow rates. 

3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 

4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 

5. Terminal units. 

6. Balancing stations. 

7. Position of balancing devices. 

F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following: 

1. Unit Data: Include the following: 

a. Unit identification. 

b. Location. 

c. Make and type. 

d. Model number and unit size. 

e. Manufacturer's serial number. 

f. Unit arrangement and class. 

g. Discharge arrangement. 

h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. 

i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches. 

j. Number of belts, make, and size. 

k. Number of filters, type, and size. 

2. Motor Data: 

a. Make and frame type and size. 

b. Horsepower and rpm. 

c. Volts, phase, and hertz. 

d. Full-load amperage and service factor. 

e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. 

f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches. 

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): 



a. Total airflow rate in cfm. 

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. 

c. Fan rpm. 

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. 

e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg. 

f. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. 

g. Outside airflow in cfm. 

h. Return airflow in cfm. 

i. Outside-air damper position. 

j. Return-air damper position. 

G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: 

1. Coil Data: 

a. System identification. 

b. Location. 

c. Coil type. 

d. Number of rows. 

e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c. 

f. Make and model number. 

g. Face area in sq. ft. 

h. Tube size in NPS. 

i. Tube and fin materials. 

j. Circuiting arrangement. 


a. Airflow rate in cfm. 

b. Average face velocity in fpm. 

c. Air pressure drop in inches wg. 

d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. 

e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. 

f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. 

g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. 

h. Water flow rate in gpm. 

i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. 

j. Entering-water temperature in deg F. 

k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. 

l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. 

m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig. 

n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F. 

H. Fan Test Reports: For supply and exhaust fans, include the following: 

1. Fan Data: 

a. System identification. 

b. Location. 

c. Make and type. 



d. Model number and size. 

e. Manufacturer's serial number. 

f. Arrangement and class. 

g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. 

h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches. 

2. Motor Data: 

a. Make and frame type and size. 

b. Horsepower and rpm. 

c. Volts, phase, and hertz. 

d. Full-load amperage and service factor. 

e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. 

f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches. 

g. Number of belts, make, and size. 


a. Total airflow rate in cfm. 

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. 

c. Fan rpm. 

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. 

e. Suction static pressure in inches wg. 

I. Round and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the 

duct cross-section and record the following: 

1. Report Data: 

a. System and air-handling unit number. 

b. Location and zone. 

c. Traverse air temperature in deg F. 

d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. 

e. Duct size in inches. 

f. Duct area in sq. ft. 

g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm. 

h. Indicated velocity in fpm. 

i. Actual airflow rate in cfm. 

j. Actual average velocity in fpm. 

k. Barometric pressure in psig. 

J. Packaged Heat Pump Chiller Reports: 

1. Unit Data: 


b. Make and model number. 

c. Manufacturer's serial number. 

d. Refrigerant type and capacity in gal. 

e. Starter type and size. 

f. Starter thermal protection size. 



g. Compressor make and model number. 

h. Compressor manufacturer's serial number. 

2. Air-Cooled Condenser Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): 

a. Refrigerant pressure in psig. 

b. Refrigerant temperature in deg F. 

c. Entering- and leaving-air temperature in deg F. 

3. Evaporator Test Reports (Indicated and Actual Values): 

a. Refrigerant pressure in psig. 

b. Refrigerant temperature in deg F. 

c. Entering-water temperature in deg F. 

d. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. 

e. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig. 

f. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. 

4. Compressor Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): 

a. Suction pressure in psig. 

b. Suction temperature in deg F. 

c. Discharge pressure in psig. 

d. Discharge temperature in deg F. 

e. Oil pressure in psig. 

f. Oil temperature in deg F. 

g. Voltage at each connection. 

h. Amperage for each phase. 

i. Kilowatt input. 

j. Crankcase heater kilowatt. 

k. Chilled-water control set point in deg F. 

l. Refrigerant low-pressure-cutoff set point in psig. 

m. Refrigerant high-pressure-cutoff set point in psig. 

5. Refrigerant Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): 

a. Oil level. 

b. Refrigerant level. 

c. Relief valve setting in psig. 

d. Unloader set points in psig. 

e. Percentage of cylinders unloaded. 

f. Bearing temperatures in deg F. 

g. Vane position. 

h. Low-temperature-cutoff set point in deg F. 

K. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and 


1. Unit Data: 




b. Location. 

c. Service. 

d. Make and size. 

e. Model and serial numbers. 

f. Water flow rate in gpm. 

g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. 

h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig. 

i. Pump rpm. 

j. Impeller diameter in inches. 

k. Motor make and frame size. 

l. Motor horsepower and rpm. 

m. Voltage at each connection. 

n. Amperage for each phase. 

o. Full-load amperage and service factor. 

p. Seal type. 


a. Static head in feet of head or psig. 

b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig. 

c. Actual impeller size in inches. 

d. Full-open flow rate in gpm. 

e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig. 

f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig. 

g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig. 

h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig. 

i. Final water flow rate in gpm. 

j. Voltage at each connection. 

k. Amperage for each phase. 

L. Boiler Test Reports: 

1. Unit Data: 


b. Location. 

c. Service. 

d. Make and type. 

e. Model and serial numbers. 

f. Input in kW. 

g. Number of passes. 

h. Voltage at each connection. 

i. Amperage for each phase. 


a. Operating pressure in psig. 

b. Operating temperature in deg F. 

c. Entering-water temperature in deg F. 

d. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. 

e. Number of safety valves and sizes in NPS. 



f. Safety valve settings in psig. 

g. High-limit setting in psig. 

h. Operating-control setting. 

i. Voltage at each connection. 

j. Amperage for each phase. 

M. Vibration Measurement Reports: 

1. Date and time of test. 

2. Vibration meter manufacturer, model number, and serial number. 

3. Equipment designation, location, equipment, speed, motor speed, and motor horsepower. 

4. Diagram of equipment showing the vibration measurement locations. 

5. Measurement readings for each measurement location. 

6. Calculate isolator efficiency using measurements taken. 

7. Description of predominant vibration source. 

N. Instrument Calibration Reports: 

1. Report Data: 

3.21 INSPECTIONS 

A. Initial Inspection: 

a. Instrument type and make. 

b. Serial number. 

c. Application. 

d. Dates of use. 

e. Dates of calibration. 

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check 

measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance 

readings documented in the Final Report. 

2. Randomly check the following for each system: 

B. Final Inspection: 

a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. 

b. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the 

reading to the set point. 

c. Measure space pressure of Sludge loadout bay. 

d. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. 

e. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report. 

1. After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that testing 

and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a 

final inspection be made by Owner. 

2. TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of 

Owner. 



3. Owner shall randomly select measurements documented in the final report to be 

rechecked. The rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements 

recorded, or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour 

business day. 

4. If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the 

final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as 

"FAILED." 

5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total 

measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be 

considered incomplete and shall be rejected. 

6. TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report 

and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final report. 

7. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner shall 

contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and balancing in 

accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the 

final payment. 

3.22 ADDITIONAL TESTS 

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that 

balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. 




SECTION 230700 - HVAC INSULATION 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Insulation Materials: 

a. Flexible elastomeric. 

b. Mineral fiber. 

2. Fire-rated insulation systems. 

3. Insulating cements. 

4. Adhesives. 

5. Mastics. 

6. Lagging adhesives. 

7. Sealants. 

8. Factory-applied jackets. 

9. Field-applied jackets. 

10. Tapes. 

11. Securements. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and 

jackets (both factory and field applied, if any). 

1. Insulation Materials: 

a. Flexible elastomeric. 

b. Mineral fiber. 

2. Fire-rated insulation systems. 

3. Insulating cements. 

4. Adhesives. 

5. Mastics. 

6. Lagging adhesives. 

7. Sealants. 

8. Factory-applied jackets. 

9. Field-applied jackets. 

10. Tapes. 

11. Securements. 




1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement 

of VOC content. 

C. Shop Drawings: 

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of 

insulation and hanger. 

2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each 

type of insulation. 

3. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access 

panels. 

4. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 

5. Detail application at linkages of control devices. 

6. Detail field application for each equipment type. 


E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation 

materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include 

dates of tests and test methods employed. 

F. Field quality-control reports. 


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-testresponse 

characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, 

by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label 

insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with 

appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed 

index of 50 or less. 

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed 

index of 150 or less. 


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate 

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 


A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in 

Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 



B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct 

Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation 

application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain 

clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and 

for space required for maintenance. 

1.7 SCHEDULING 

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after 

installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have 

satisfactory test results. 

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of 

construction. 


2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS 

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be 

applied. 

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. 

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less 

than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. 

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable 

according to ASTM C 795. 

E. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with 

ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. 



a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. 

b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. 

c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180. 

F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. 

Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSP 

jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 



a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap. 

b. Johns Manville; Microlite. 



c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap. 

d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. 

e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap. 

G. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. 

Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide 

insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. For equipment applications, provide insulation with 

factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied 

Jackets" Article. 



a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board. 

b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX. 

c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas. 

d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board. 

e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board. 

f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series. 

H. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 



a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. 

b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. 

c. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation. 

d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K. 

e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. 

2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. 

Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factoryapplied 

jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 

I. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting 

resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, 

Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal 

density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h 

x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied 

Jackets" Article. 



a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. 

b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. 

c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. 

d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex. 

e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation. 



2.2 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS 

A. Fire-Rated Blanket: High-temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that is 

tested and certified to provide a 2-hour fire rating by a NRTL acceptable to authority having 

jurisdiction. 



a. CertainTeed Corp.; FlameChek. 

b. Johns Manville; Firetemp Wrap. 

c. Nelson Firestop Products; Nelson FSB Flameshield Blanket. 

d. Thermal Ceramics; FireMaster Duct Wrap. 

e. 3M; Fire Barrier Wrap Products. 

f. Unifrax Corporation; FyreWrap. 

g. Vesuvius; PYROSCAT FP FASTR Duct Wrap. 

2.3 INSULATING CEMENTS 

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195. 



a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I. 

b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik. 

B. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with 

ASTM C 449/C 449M. 



2.4 ADHESIVES 

a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote. 

b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote. 

c. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot. 

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding 

insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I. 



a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. 

b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive. 

c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75. 



d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive. 

2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when 

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 



a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. 

b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. 

c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. 

d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. 

e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. 



D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for 

bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 





c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. 





2.5 MASTICS 

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with 

MIL-C-19565C, Type II. 

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient 

services. 





c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50. 





f. Vimasco Corporation; 749. 

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film 

thickness. 

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 

4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 

5. Color: White. 

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services. 





c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-05/15. 



f. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5. 

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness. 


4. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight. 


2.6 LAGGING ADHESIVES 

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with 

insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 





c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130. 

d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 11-30. 

e. Vimasco Corporation; 136. 

2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fireresistant 

lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation. 



2.7 SEALANTS 

A. Joint Sealants: 

B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 





a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8. 


c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. 

d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. 

e. Vimasco Corporation; 750. 

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 

3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 


5. Color: Aluminum. 

6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when 


C. ASJ Flashing Sealants: 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements available products that may be 



2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 

3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 



6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when 


2.8 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS 

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When 

factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; 

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a 

removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; 

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 

4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; 

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 



1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and 

Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. 



2.9 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS 

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing. 

C. Metal Jacket: 

2.10 TAPES 



a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems. 

b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit. 

c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate. 

2. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M. 

a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing or factory cut and rolled to size. 

b. Material, finish, and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 

c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene 

and kraft paper. 

d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 2.5-mil- thick Polysurlyn. 

e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers: 

1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 

2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius 

elbows. 

3) Tee covers. 

4) Flange and union covers. 

5) End caps. 

6) Beveled collars. 

7) Valve covers. 

8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not 

available. 

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, 

complying with ASTM C 1136. 



a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. 

b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. 

c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. 

d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ. 

2. Width: 3 inches. 

3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 



4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 

5. Elongation: 2 percent. 

6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 

7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. 

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; 

complying with ASTM C 1136. 



a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. 

b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111. 

c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK. 

d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ. 

2. Width: 3 inches. 

3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 

4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 

5. Elongation: 2 percent. 

6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 

7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. 

8. 

2.11 SECUREMENTS 

A. Bands: 



a. Childers Products; Bands. 

b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands. 

c. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands. 

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 

inch wide with wing or closed seal. 

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for 

capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation 

indicated. 



1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. 

2) GEMCO; CD. 

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD. 



4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS. 

2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully 

annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth 

of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer. 



1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. 

2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin. 

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head. 

4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP. 

3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to 

projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in 

position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following 

requirements: 



1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series T. 

2) GEMCO; Perforated Base. 

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle. 

b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches 

square. 

c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inchdiameter 

shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. 

d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated 

capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without 

damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 

4. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inchthick, 

stainless-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in 

place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. 



1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150. 

2) GEMCO; R-150. 

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150. 

4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips. 

b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to 

ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. 

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel. 



D. Wire: 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) soft-annealed, stainless steel. 






a. C & F Wire. 

b. Childers Products. 

c. PABCO Metals Corporation. 

d. RPR Products, Inc. 

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other 

conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of 

defects. 

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 



A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will 

adversely affect insulation application. 

B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with 

stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water. 

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; 

free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including 

fittings, valves, and specialties. 

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required 

for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system 

schedules. 

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install 

accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or 

dry state. 

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. 

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. 



F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. 

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. 

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with 

adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. 

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, 

supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor 

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper 

and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to 

insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation 

material manufacturer. 

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over 

jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. 

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet 

and dry film thicknesses. 

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation 

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of 

strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with 

longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. 

Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c. 

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to 

maintain vapor seal. 

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at 

ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings. 

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal 

thickness. 

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking 

due to thermal movement. 

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. 

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar 

to butt joints. 



P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 

1. Vibration-control devices. 

2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 

3. Nameplates and data plates. 

4. Manholes. 

5. Handholes. 

6. Cleanouts. 

3.4 PENETRATIONS 

A. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation 

continuously through wall penetrations. 

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface 

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, 

install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal 

joint with joint sealant. 

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at 

least 2 inches. 

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. 

B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): 

Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. 

C. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation 

continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire 

damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper 

sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches. 

1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" firestopping 

and fire-resistive joint sealers. 

3.5 EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION 

A. Mineral Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation 

with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers. 

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, 

for 50 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces. 

2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including 

contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end 

joints. 

3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles. 

4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on sides 

of tanks and vessels as follows: 

a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels. 



b. Select insulation hangers and adhesives that are compatible with service 

temperature and with substrate. 

c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from insulation end 

joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions. 

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. 

e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks 

and vessels. 

f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers. 

g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with 

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation 

facing. 

5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band 

material compatible with insulation materials. 

6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and 

where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing 

insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut 

with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around 

equipment approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two 

circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around 

outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the 

wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along 

the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network 

for securing insulation with tie wire or bands. 

7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches. 

8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes, 

handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection. 

9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and 

nameplates. 

10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends, 

joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation. 

B. Insulation Installation on Pumps: 

1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box 

joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt 

flanges on 6-inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch- diameter fasteners with 

wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism. 

2. Fabricate boxes from aluminum, at least 0.050 inch thick. 

3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations. 

Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier. 

3.6 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION 

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more 

specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. 

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 



1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with 

continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from 

same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly 

against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular 

surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is 

uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same 

material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt 

each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with 

adhesive. 

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same 

material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe 

insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe 

diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, 

valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with 

insulating cement. 

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same 

material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe 

insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe 

diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating 

cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and 

replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable 

insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor 

barrier. 

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. 

Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe 

insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. 

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a 

mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for 

above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the 

mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. 

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric 

and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and 

unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation 

facing using PVC tape. 

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." 

Match size and color of pipe labels. 

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, 

test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, 

and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the 

connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing 

sealant. 

3.7 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION 

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 



1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten 

bands without deforming insulation materials. 

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions 

with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with 

outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple 

longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation 

material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. 

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the 

thickness of pipe insulation. 

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of 

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. 

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when 

available. 

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections 

of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation 

materials with wire or bands. 

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when 

available. 

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to 

valve body. 

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without 

disturbing insulation. 

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 

E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation 

pins. 

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, 

for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 

2. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitordischarge-weld 

pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as 

follows: 

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal 

centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 

inches o.c. 



b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each 

way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold 

insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. 

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. 

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. 

e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. 

f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with 

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation 

facing. 

3. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous 

unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with 

insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure 

laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. 

Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier 

mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. 

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vaporbarrier 

seal. 

4. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. 

At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. 

5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section 

for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually 

mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 

6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of 

stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. 

3.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION 

A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 

2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 

3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 

4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at 

end joints. 

5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation 

with vapor-barrier mastic. 

B. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end 

joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof 

sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 

inches o.c. and at end joints. 



3.9 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION 

A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and 

supports to maintain a continuous fire rating. 

B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct. 

C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems are 

specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 


A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of 

insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. 

B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual 

inspection of the completed Work. 

C. Do not field paint stainless-steel jackets. 

3.11 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL 

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation: 

1. Indoor, concealed supply, return, and outdoor air. 

2. Indoor, exposed supply, return, and outdoor air. 

B. Items Not Insulated: 

1. Flexible connectors. 

2. Vibration-control devices. 

3. Factory-insulated access panels and doors. 

3.12 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE 

A. Concealed, rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall be the following: 

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. 

B. Concealed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following: 

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. 

C. Exposed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following: 


D. Exposed, rectangular, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be the following: 


E. Exposed, rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall be the following: 




F. Exposed, supply-air plenum insulation shall be the following: 


G. Exposed, exhaust-air insulation shall be the following: 

1. Fire-Rrated Insulation System: Min 2 hr fire rating, insulate ductwork for 10 ft on both 

sides of fire rated wall penetrations. 

3.13 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE 

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for 

a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. 

B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated. 

C. Hydronic-water pump insulation shall be the following: 

1. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1-1/2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. 

D. Hydronic-water expansion/compression tank insulation shall be the following: 

1. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 1- inches thick. 

E. Hydronic-water air-separator insulation shall be the following: 

1. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 1- inches thick. 

3.14 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL 

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for 

each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, 

selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. 

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 

1. Underground piping. 

3.15 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE 

A. Condensate (coil drains) and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F : 

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: 

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 3/4 inch thick. 

B. Hydronic Water, above 40 Deg F: 

1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: 

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1 inch thick. 

2. NPS 1-1/2 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following: 

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1-1/2 inch thick. 

C. Hot Service Drains: 




a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I or II: 1 inch thick. 

D. Hot Service Vents: 


a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I or II: 1 inch thick. 

3.16 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE 

A. Hydronic Water: 


a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 3 inches thick. 

3.17 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE 

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the 

field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. 

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. 

C. Ducts and Plenums, Concealed: None. 

D. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed: None. 

E. Piping, Concealed: None. 

F. Piping, Exposed below 8 ft above the finished floor, except flexible elastomeric insulation: 

Stainless Steel, Type 304 Smooth 2B Finish: 0.016 inch thick. 

3.18 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE 

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the 

field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. 

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. 

C. Piping, Exposed: 

1. Stainless Steel, Type 304, Stucco Embossed with Z-Shaped Locking Seam: 0.016 inch 

thick. 




SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control 

components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls. 


1. Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping" for measuring equipment that 

relates to this Section. 

2. Division 23 Section "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for requirements that 

relate to this Section. 


A. DDC: Direct digital control. 

B. I/O: Input/output. 

C. MS/TP: Master slave/token passing. 

D. PC: Personal computer. 

E. PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative. 

F. RTD: Resistance temperature detector. 

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE 

A. Comply with the following performance requirements: 

1. Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data 

within 10 seconds. 

2. Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data 

within 8 seconds. 

3. Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator command of 

a binary object and device reaction. 



4. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control units or 

workstation within six seconds. 

5. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 45 seconds. Multiple 

workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other. 

6. Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds, 

but selected consistent with mechanical process under control. 

7. Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan 

and update process values and outputs at least once per second. 

8. Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain measured 

variables within tolerances as follows: 


a. Water Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. 

b. Space Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. 

c. Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. 

d. Outside Air Temperature: Plus or minus 2 deg F. 

e. Temperature Differential: Plus or minus 0.25 deg F. 

f. Airflow (Measuring Stations): Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale. 

g. Air Pressure (Space): Plus or minus 0.01-inch wg. 

h. Electrical: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading. 

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate 

dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for 

materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated. 

1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, 

manufacturer, and model number. Include technical data for operator workstation 

equipment, interface equipment, control units, transducers/transmitters, sensors, 

actuators, valves, relays/switches, control panels, and operator interface equipment. 

2. Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software, operator 

interface, color graphics, and other third-party applications. 

3. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device, 

manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence 

of operation including schematic diagram. 

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required 


connection. 

1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. 

2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control 

devices. 


4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 

5. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics. 

6. Schedule of valves including flow characteristics. 

7. DDC System Hardware: 

a. Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers. 



b. Schematic diagrams and floor plans for field sensors and control hardware. 

c. Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring, showing trunk 

data conductors and wiring between operator workstation and control unit 

locations. 

8. Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, data 

(connected and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, and operator notations. 

9. Controlled Systems: 

a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled and 

control elements graphically shown, with wiring. 

b. Scaled drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements including 

bases and special construction. 

c. Written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram. 

d. Points list. 

C. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system 

component complies with ASHRAE 135. 

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each color required, of each type of thermostat or sensor 

cover with factory-applied color finishes. 

E. Samples for Verification: For each color required, of each type of thermostat or sensor cover. 

F. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following: 

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 

2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data 

files. 

3. Device address list. 

4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 

5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems. 

G. Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future systems revisions 

or monitoring and control revisions. 

H. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. 

I. Field quality-control test reports. 

J. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in 

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 

Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 

1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device and 

compressed-air station. 

2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and 

devices. 

3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. 

4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration 

tolerances. 



5. Calibration records and list of set points. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative 

who is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this Project. 



intended use. 

C. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components. 


A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to 

be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment 

manufacturer. 

B. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion. 


A. Coordinate location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with plans and room 

details before installation. 

B. Coordinate equipment with Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" to achieve 

compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system. 

C. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operator 

workstation. 

D. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 Section "Panelboards" to achieve compatibility with 

starter coils and annunciation devices. 

E. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 Section "Enclosed Controllers" to achieve compatibility 

with motor starters and annunciation devices. 

F. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 Section "Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers" to 

achieve compatibility with motor starters and annunciation devices. 




1. Maintenance Materials: One thermostat adjusting key. 










2.2 CONTROL SYSTEM 


1. Alerton Inc. 

2. Automated Logic Corporation. 

3. Johnson Controls, Inc.; Controls Group. 

4. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. 

B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface 

equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers 

operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to 

control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via 

dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device 

depicted by point-and-click graphics. 

C. Control system shall include the following: 

1. Fire alarm system specified in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm." 

2.3 DDC EQUIPMENT 

A. Operator Workstation: One PC-based laptop computer with minimum configuration as follows: 

1. Motherboard: With 3 integrated USB 2.0 ports, 1 HDMI port, integrated network 

connector 10/100 LAN (Ethernet), integrated audio, bios, and hardware monitoring. 

2. Processor: Intel Core I3 380M (2.53 GHz). 

3. Random-Access Memory: 1 GB. 

4. Display: 15.6 inch wide HD (720p) 

5. Hard-Disk Drive: minimum 160 GB. 

6. Optical Drive: 8 x CD/DVD Burner. 

7. Operating System: Microsoft Windows XP Professional with high-speed Internet access. 

a. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Workstation shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and 

communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol. 

8. Application Software: 

a. I/O capability from operator station. 



b. System security for each operator via software password and access levels. 

c. Automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures. 

d. Database creation and support. 

e. Automatic and manual database save and restore. 

f. Dynamic color graphic displays with up to 10 screen displays at once. 

g. Custom graphics generation and graphics library of HVAC equipment and 

symbols. 

h. Alarm processing, messages, and reactions. 

i. Trend logs retrievable in spreadsheets and database programs. 

j. Alarm and event processing. 

k. Object and property status and control. 

l. Automatic restart of field equipment on restoration of power. 

m. Data collection, reports, and logs. Include standard reports for the following: 

1) Current values of all objects. 

2) Current alarm summary. 

3) Disabled objects. 

4) Alarm lockout objects. 

5) Logs. 

n. Custom report development. 

o. Utility and weather reports. 

p. Workstation application editors for controllers and schedules. 

q. Maintenance management. 

9. Custom Application Software: 

a. English language oriented. 

b. Full-screen character editor/programming environment. 

c. Allow development of independently executing program modules with 

debugging/simulation capability. 

d. Support conditional statements. 

e. Support floating-point arithmetic with mathematic functions. 

f. Contains predefined time variables. 

B. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, randomaccess 

memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and 

backup power source. 

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from 

other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to 

operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. 

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions 


a. Global communications. 

b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. 

c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. 

d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing. 

e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and 

controlled environment. 



3. Standard Application Programs: 

a. Electric Control Programs: Demand limiting, duty cycling, automatic time 

scheduling, start/stop time optimization, night setback/setup, on-off control with 

differential sequencing, staggered start, antishort cycling, PID control, DDC with 

fine tuning, and trend logging. 

b. HVAC Control Programs: Optimal run time, supply-air reset, and enthalpy 

switchover. 

c. Chiller Control Programs: Control function of chilled-water reset, and equipment 

sequencing. 

d. Programming Application Features: Include trend point; alarm processing and 

messaging; weekly, monthly, and annual scheduling; energy calculations; run-time 

totalization; and security access. 

e. Remote communications. 

f. Maintenance management. 

g. Units of Measure: Inch-pound and SI (metric). 

4. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or 

diagnostic terminal unit. 

5. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and 


6. LonWorks Compliance: Control units shall use LonTalk protocol and communicate 

using EIA/CEA 709.1 datalink/physical layer protocol. 

C. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable, 

nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source. 

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or 

upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. 

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions 


a. Global communications. 

b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. 

c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. 

3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or 

diagnostic terminal unit. 

4. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and 


D. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect 

points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers. 

1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power. 

2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second. 

3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA), 

or resistance signals. 

4. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for normally 

open or normally closed operation with three-position (on-off-auto) override switches and 

status lights. 



5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current 

(4 to 20 mA) with status lights, two-position (auto-manual) switch, and manually 

adjustable potentiometer. 

6. Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-point, 

floating-type electronic actuators. 

7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs. 

E. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection; 

limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output 

current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following: 

1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak. 

2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50 

percent load changes. 

3. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent 

overload for at least 3 seconds without failure. 

F. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for 

workstations or controllers with the following: 

1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V. 

2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds. 

3. Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB. 

4. Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz. 

2.4 UNITARY CONTROLLERS 

A. Unitized, capable of stand-alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating 

system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O capacity for the 

application. 

1. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, 

and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable; 

memory with bios; and 72-hour battery backup. 

2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to share 

real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Perform 

scheduling with real-time clock. Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system 

and report failures. 

3. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Communicate using read (execute and initiate) and write 

(execute and initiate) property services defined in ASHRAE 135. Reside on network 

using MS/TP datalink/physical layer protocol and have service communication port for 

connection to diagnostic terminal unit. 

4. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F. 

2.5 ANALOG CONTROLLERS 

A. Step Controllers: 6- or 10-stage type, with heavy-duty switching rated to handle loads and 

operated by electric motor. 



B. Electric, Outdoor-Reset Controllers: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning 

action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale range minus 10 to plus 70 

deg F, and single- or double-pole contacts. 

C. Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone-bridge-amplifier type, in steel enclosure with provision for 

remote-resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers, including proportional 

band and authority. 

1. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible control 

readjustment potentiometer. 

D. Fan-Speed Controllers: Solid-state model providing field-adjustable proportional control of 

motor speed from maximum to minimum of 55 percent and on-off action below minimum fan 

speed. Controller shall briefly apply full voltage, when motor is started, to rapidly bring motor 

up to minimum speed. Equip with filtered circuit to eliminate radio interference. 

2.6 ELECTRONIC SENSORS 

A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as 

required. 

B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters: 


a. BEC Controls Corporation. 

b. Ebtron, Inc. 

c. Heat-Timer Corporation. 

d. I.T.M. Instruments Inc. 

e. MAMAC Systems, Inc. 

f. RDF Corporation. 

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.36 deg F at calibration point. 

3. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. 

4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by 

temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft. 

5. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless-steel socket with minimum insertion 

length of 2-1/2 inches. 

6. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. 

a. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed. 

b. Set-Point Indication: Concealed. 

c. Thermometer: Exposed. 

d. Color: White. 

e. Orientation: Vertical. 

7. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. 

C. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers: 





b. General Eastern Instruments. 

c. MAMAC Systems, Inc. 

d. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp. 

e. TCS/Basys Controls. 

f. Vaisala. 

g. Yokogawa Corp. 

2. Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected 

input, and temperature compensated. 

a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent. 

b. Output: 4 to 20 mA. 

c. Building Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 0.25-inch wg. 

d. Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 5-inch wg. 

3. Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; 

minimum 150-psig operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA. 

4. Water Differential-Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, 

suitable for service; minimum 150-psig operating pressure and tested to 300-psig; linear 

output 4 to 20 mA. 

5. Differential-Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot-duty rating and with 

suitable scale range and differential. 

6. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range suitable for 

system; linear output 4 to 20 mA. 

D. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. 

1. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed. 

2. Set-Point Indication: Exposed. 

3. Thermometer: Red-reading glass. 

4. Color: White 

5. Orientation: Vertical. 

E. Room sensor accessories include the following: 

1. Insulating Bases: For sensors located on exterior walls. 

2. Guards: Locking; heavy-duty, transparent plastic; mounted on separate base. 

3. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws. 

2.7 STATUS SENSORS 

A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable 

range of 0- to 5-inch wg. 

B. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable 

pressure-differential range of 8 to 60 psig, piped across pump. 



C. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or splitcore 

transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated 

motor current. 

D. Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600-V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single-loop, self-powered 

transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full-scale accuracy. 

E. Power Monitor: 3-phase type with disconnect/shorting switch assembly, listed voltage and 

current transformers, with pulse kilowatt hour output and 4- to 20-mA kW output, with 

maximum 2 percent error at 1.0 power factor and 2.5 percent error at 0.5 power factor. 

F. Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match 

current and system output requirements. 

G. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 

10-V dc, feedback signal. 

H. Water-Flow Switches: Bellows-actuated snap-acting type with pilot-duty rating, stainless-steel 

or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in NEMA 250, Type 1 

enclosure. 



b. I.T.M. Instruments Inc. 

2.8 FLOW MEASURING STATIONS 

A. Duct Airflow Station: Multiport, self-averaging pitot tube station. 


a. Air Monitor Corporation Volu-probe/VS. 

2. Casing: 14 ga Galvanized-steel frame, 6-inches deep with connecting flanges. 

3. Sensing Manifold: Multiple total and static pressure sensors located along the exterior 

and internally connected to their respective averaging manifolds. Copper manifold with 

offset type static pressure and chamfered impact type for total pressure measurement 

positioned on equal area basis. 

B. Stack Airflow Station: Stainless steel pitot Airflow Traverse Probe. 


a. Air Monitor Corporation Volu-probe/1SS 

2. Mounting: Externally mounted using a 4” Class 150 raised face flange. 

3. Sensing Manifold: Multiple total and static pressure sensors located along the exterior 

and internally connected to their respective averaging manifolds. Stainless manifold with 

offset type static pressure and chamfered impact type for total pressure measurement 

positioned on equal area basis. 



C. Airflow station flow transmitter: 


a. Air Monitor Corporation Veltron DPT 

2. Transmitter shall be capable of receiving flow signals from an airflow station or probe 

array, and produce an output linear and proportional to static or velocity pressure. 

3. Output: 4-20 mA, linear to flow (requires square root function) 

4. Enclosure: NEMA Type 4X enclosure with standard industrial process connections. 

5. Transmitter shall be FM or CSA approved 

2.9 THERMOSTATS 


1. Erie Controls. 

2. Danfoss Inc.; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Div. 

3. Heat-Timer Corporation. 

4. Sauter Controls Corporation. 

5. tekmar Control Systems, Inc. 

6. Theben AG - Lumilite Control Technology, Inc. 

B. Combination Thermostat and Fan Switches: Line-voltage thermostat with push-button or leveroperated 

fan switch. 

1. Label switches "FAN ON-OFF” 

2. Mount on single electric switch box. 

C. Electric, solid-state, microcomputer-based room thermostat with remote sensor. 

1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling. 

2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point. 

3. Set up for four separate temperatures per day. 

4. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31 days. 

5. Short-cycle protection. 

6. Programming based on every day of week. 

7. Selection features include degree F or degree C display, 12- or 24-hour clock, keyboard 

disable, remote sensor, and fan on-auto. 

8. Battery replacement without program loss. 

9. Thermostat display features include the following: 

a. Time of day. 

b. Actual room temperature. 

c. Programmed temperature. 

d. Programmed time. 

e. Duration of timed override. 



f. Day of week. 

g. System mode indications include "heating," "off," "fan auto," and "fan on." 

D. Low-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24-V, bimetal-operated, open contact or 

bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch or equivalent solid-state type, with adjustable or fixed 

anticipation heater, concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set-point range, and 2 deg F 

maximum differential. 

E. Line-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: Bimetal-actuated, open contact or bellows-actuated, 

enclosed, snap-switch or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator; listed for electrical 

rating; with concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set-point range, and 2 deg F 

maximum differential. 

1. Electric Heating Thermostats: Equip with off position on dial wired to break ungrounded 

conductors. 

2. Selector Switch: Integral, manual on-off-auto. 

F. Remote-Bulb Thermostats: On-off or modulating type, liquid filled to compensate for changes 

in ambient temperature; with copper capillary and bulb, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb. 

2. Bulbs in air ducts with flanges and shields. 

3. Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single- or multiple-unit elements, 

extended to cover full width of duct or unit; adequately supported. 

4. Scale settings and differential settings are clearly visible and adjustable from front of 

instrument. 

5. On-Off Thermostat: With precision snap switches and with electrical ratings required by 

application. 

6. Modulating Thermostats: Construct so complete potentiometer coil and wiper assembly 

is removable for inspection or replacement without disturbing calibration of instrument. 

G. Immersion Thermostat: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action with 

adjustable throttling range and adjustable set point. 

H. Airstream Thermostats: Two-pipe, fully proportional, single-temperature type; with adjustable 

set point in middle of range, adjustable throttling range, plug-in test fitting or permanent 

pressure gage, remote bulb, bimetal rod and tube, or averaging element. 

2.10 ACTUATORS 

A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating 

action or two-position action. 

1. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for 

HVAC Equipment." 

2. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed 

and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in 

housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary 

switches, or feedback potentiometer. 



3. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running torque of 

150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf. 

4. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running and 

breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf . 

5. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque 

of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf. 

6. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and 

breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf. 

B. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at 

rated torque. 


a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc. 

2. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential 

pressure. 

3. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows: 

a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. 

b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. 

c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft of damper. 

d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. 

e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500 

fpm: Increase running torque by 1.5. 

f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000 

fpm: Increase running torque by 2.0. 

4. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle. 

5. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry. 

6. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual 

gear release on nonspring-return actuators. 

7. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24-V ac. 

8. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc. 

9. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback 

signal. 

10. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F. 

11. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F. 

12. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed. 

2.11 CONTROL VALVES 


1. Belimo 

2. Danfoss Inc.; Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Div. 

3. Erie Controls. 

4. Hayward Industrial Products, Inc. 



5. Magnatrol Valve Corporation. 

6. Neles-Jamesbury. 

7. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Skinner Valve Division. 

8. Pneuline Controls. 

9. Sauter Controls Corporation. 

B. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on 

maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Hydronic system ball valves shall have the following characteristics: 

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Forged brass, nickel plated body, rated for minimum 400 psig, 

stainless steel ball, stainless steel stem, PTFE seats, Tefzel characterizing disk, 2 EPDM 

lubricated O-ring packing, Female NPT ends. 

2. Sizing: 4-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate or the following: 

a. Two Position: Line size. 

b. Two-Way Modulating: Either the value specified above or twice the load pressure 

drop, whichever is more. 

3. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; threeway 

valves shall have linear characteristics. 

4. Close-Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide 

minimum close-off pressure rating of 150 percent of total system (pump) head for twoway 

valves. 

D. Butterfly Valves: 200-psig , 150-psig maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron 

or ASTM A 536 ductile-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, fieldreplaceable 

EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals. 

1. Body Style: Lug. 

2. Disc Type: Aluminum bronze. 

3. Sizing: 1-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate. 

2.12 DAMPERS 


1. Air Balance Inc. 

2. Don Park Inc.; Autodamp Div. 

3. Ruskin 

4. TAMCO (T. A. Morrison & Co. Inc.). 

5. United Enertech Corp. 

6. Vent Products Company, Inc. 

B. Dampers: AMCA-rated, opposed-blade design; 0.108-inch- minimum thick, galvanized-steel or 

0.125-inch- minimum thick, extruded-aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper 

blades shall not be less than 0.064-inchthick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 

inches and length of 48 inches. 



1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with 

oil-impregnated sintered bronze blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated 

steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust 

bearings at each end of every blade. 

2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 

3. Edge Seals, Low-Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable 

rubber blade seals and spring-loaded stainless-steel side seals, rated for leakage at less 

than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg when damper 

is held by torque of 50 in. x lbf; when tested according to AMCA 500D. 



A. Verify that power supply is available to control units and operator workstation. 

B. Verify that pneumatic piping and duct-, pipe-, and equipment-mounted devices are installed 

before proceeding with installation. 


A. Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features of 

programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation. 

B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified. 

C. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room 

details before installation. Install devices 54 inches above the floor. 

1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern. 

D. Install guards on thermostats. 

E. Install automatic dampers according to Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." 

F. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor 

temperatures. 

G. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 Section 

"Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 

H. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23 

Section "Hydronic Piping." 

3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION 

A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for 

Electrical Systems." 



B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power 

Conductors and Cables." 

1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are 

exposed. 

2. Install exposed cable in raceway. 

3. Install concealed cable in raceway. 

4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where 

several cables follow a common path. 

5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against 

abrasion. Tie and support conductors. 

6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control 

system, except local individual room control cables. 

7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration 

of piping and equipment. 

C. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. 

Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers. 

D. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is 

in hand position. 


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to 

inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including 

connections. Report results in writing. 

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm 

proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest. 

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 

3. Test calibration of electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating 

operation with compatible signal generator. 

4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control 

set points are as required. 

5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence 

of operation. Adjust PID actions. 

6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. 

7. Test software and hardware interlocks. 

C. DDC Verification: 

1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks. 

2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility. 

3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth, 

and other applicable considerations. 

4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support. 

5. Check installation of air supply for each instrument. 



6. Check flow instruments. Inspect tag number and line and bore size, and verify that inlet 

side is identified and that meters are installed correctly. 

7. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and selfcontained 

pressure regulators. 

8. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements. 

9. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction. 

10. Check air-operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that proper 

blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided. 

11. Check DDC system as follows: 

a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if 

applicable. 

b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and 

approved tagging system. 

c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided. 

d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges. 

D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures. 


A. Calibrating and Adjusting: 

1. Calibrate instruments. 

2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog 

instrument. 

3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and 

instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument 

being calibrated. 

4. Control System Inputs and Outputs: 

a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. 

b. Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent output. 

c. Check digital inputs using jumper wire. 

d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking. 

e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a 

precision-resistant source. 

5. Flow: 

a. Set differential pressure flow transmitters for 0 and 100 percent values with 3-point 

calibration accomplished at 50, 90, and 100 percent of span. 

b. Manually operate flow switches to verify that they make or break contact. 

6. Pressure: 

a. Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. 

b. Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable differential 

set at minimum. 



7. Temperature: 

a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span 

using a precision-resistance source. 

b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts. 

8. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers without positioners, following the 

manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent open and 

closed. 

9. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers with positioners, following manufacturer's 

recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and 100 percent closed. 

10. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system. 

11. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of 

instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures. 

B. Adjust initial temperature set points. 

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, 


three visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 



adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. 




SECTION 230993 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment. 


1. Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" for control equipment and 

devices and for submittal requirements. 


A. DDC: Direct digital control. 

1.4 ECRT-EF-501 and ECRT-EF-502 

A. Run Conditions - Interlocked: Exhaust fan ECRT-EF-501 or ECRT-EF-502 shall operate 

continuously. 

B. Control - Building Exhaust Air Flow: 

1. The exhaust fan shall run when commanded on. 

2. The controller shall measure building exhaust air flow and modulate the exhaust fan VFD 

speed to maintain a building exhaust air flow setpoint of 4,100 cfm (adj.). The exhaust 

fan VFD speed shall not drop below 20% (adj.). 

C. Exhaust Fan Lead/Standby Operation: 

1. The two exhaust fans shall operate in a lead/standby fashion. 

a. The lead exhaust fan shall run continuously. 

b. On high differential pressure across operating HEPA filter train the lead exhaust 

fan shall be commanded off and the standby exhaust fan commanded on. 

c. On low differential pressure across operating HEPA filter train the lead exhaust fan 

shall be commanded off and the standby exhaust fan commanded on. 

d. On failure of the lead exhaust fan, the standby exhaust fan shall be commanded on; 

the lead exhaust fan shall be commanded off. 

D. The designated lead exhaust fan shall rotate upon one of the following conditions (user 

selectable): 

1. manually through a software switch 



2. if fan runtime (adj.) is exceeded 

3. daily 

4. weekly 

5. monthly 

E. Fire Alarm Signal 

1. The operating exhaust fan shall shut down and generate an alarm upon receiving a signal 

from the fire alarm control panel. The standby exhaust fan shall not be commanded to 

start. The fire alarm signal shall override all other signals and shut down the fans. 

F. ECRT-HEPA-501 Filter Differential Pressure Monitor: 

1. The controller shall monitor the differential pressure across the first stage HEPA filter. 

2. Alarms shall be provided as follows: 

a. HEPA Filter failure: Final filter differential pressure falls below a user definable 

limit (adj.). 

b. HEPA Filter Change Required: Final filter differential pressure exceeds a user 

definable limit (adj.). 

G. ECRT-HEPA-502 Filter Differential Pressure Monitor: 

1. The controller shall monitor the differential pressure across the first stage HEPA filter. 


a. HEPA Filter failure: Final filter differential pressure falls below a user definable 

limit (adj.). 

b. HEPA Filter Change Required: Final filter differential pressure exceeds a user 


H. Alarms shall be provided as follows: 

1. High Building exhaust air flow: If the building exhaust air flow is 25% (adj.) greater than 

setpoint. 

2. Low Building exhaust air flow: If the building exhaust air flow is 25% (adj.) less than 

setpoint. 

3. Exhaust Fan VFD Fault. 

I. Fan Status: 

1. The controller shall monitor the fan status. 


a. Fan Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off. 

b. Fan in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on. 

c. Fan Runtime Exceeded: Fan status runtime exceeds a user definable limit (adj.). 

Hardware Points Software Points 

Point Name AI AO BI BO AV BV Sched Trend Alarm 

Show On 

Graphic 

Building Exhaust Air Flow × × × 

Fan VFD Speed × × × 

Fan VFD Fault × × × 

Fan Status × × × 

Fan Start/Stop × × × 





Fire Alarm Control Panel Signal x x 

Building Exhaust Air Flow Setpoint 

Show On 

Graphic 

× × × 

High Building Exhaust Air Flow × 

Low Building Exhaust Air Flow × 

Fan Failure × 

Fan in Hand × 

Fan Runtime Exceeded × 

ECRT-HEPA-501 High DP x 

ECRT-HEPA-501 Low DP x 

ECRT-HEPA-502 High DP x 

ECRT-HEPA-501 Low DP x 

Totals 1 1 3 1 1 0 0 5 11 6 

1.5 ECRT-AHU-501 

Total Hardware ( 6 ) Total Software ( 13 ) 

A. Run Conditions - Continuous: 

1. The unit shall be interlocked with ECRT-EF-501 and ECRT-EF-502 and shall not 

operate if both exhaust fans are inoperable, and shall maintain: 

a. A 80°F (adj.) cooling setpoint 

b. A 65°F (adj.) heating setpoint. 

B. Control - Building Supply Air Flow: 

1. The supply fan shall run when commanded on. 

2. The controller shall measure building sludge loading bay supply air flow and modulate 

the supply fan VFD speed to maintain an offset air flow between the Exhaust Air Flow 

and the Supply Air Flow, offset setpoint of 1,135 cfm (adj.) (4,100 cfm exhaust flow – 

2,965 cfm Sludge Loading bay supply flow). The supply fan VFD speed shall not drop 

below 20% (adj.). 

C. Alarms shall be provided as follows: 

1. High Building supply air flow: If the building supply air flow is 25% (adj.) greater than 

setpoint. 

2. Low Building supply air flow: If the building supply air flow is 25% (adj.) less than 

setpoint. 

3. High Zone Temp: If the zone temperature is greater than the cooling setpoint by a user 

definable amount (adj.). 

4. Low Zone Temp: If the zone temperature is less than the heating setpoint by a user 




D. Zone Setpoint Adjust: 

1. The occupant shall be able to adjust the zone temperature heating and cooling setpoints at 

the zone sensor. 

E. Supply Air Smoke Detection: 

1. The unit shall shut down and generate an alarm upon receiving a supply air smoke 

detector status. 

F. Fire Alarm Signal: 

1. The unit shall shut down and generate an alarm upon receiving a signal from the fire 

alarm control panel. The fire alarm signal shall override all other signals and shut down 

the unit. 

G. Supply Fan: 

1. The supply fan shall run anytime the unit is commanded to run, unless shutdown on 

safeties. 


a. Supply Fan Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off. 

b. Supply Fan in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on. 

c. Supply Fan Runtime Exceeded: Status runtime exceeds a user definable limit 

(adj.). 

d. Supply Fan VFD fault 

H. Cooling Coil Valve: 

1. The controller shall measure the zone temperature and modulate the cooling coil valve to 

maintain its cooling setpoint. 

2. The cooling shall be enabled whenever: 

a. Outside air temperature is greater than 55°F (adj.). 

b. AND the zone temperature is above cooling setpoint. 

c. AND the supply fan status is on. 

d. AND the heating is not active. 

I. Heating Coil Valve (the same valve as the cooling coil valve): 

1. The controller shall measure the zone temperature and modulate the heating coil valve to 

maintain its heating setpoint. 

2. The heating shall be enabled whenever: 

a. Outside air temperature is less than 50°F (adj.). 

b. AND the zone temperature is below heating setpoint. 

c. AND the supply fan status is on. 

d. AND the cooling is not active. 

J. Mixed Air Dampers: 

1. The mixed air dampers shall open to provide minimum outside air ventilation anytime the 

unit is occupied. The mixed air dampers shall close 5 sec (adj.) after the supply fan stops, 

the outside air bypass damper shall open if either ECRT-EF-501 or ECRT-EF-502 are 

operating. 

2. If Optimal Start Up is available, the outside air damper shall close and the return air 

damper shall open. 

3. Minimum Outside Air Ventilation - Fixed Percentage: 

The outside air dampers shall maintain a minimum position (adj.). 



K. Outside Air Bypass Damper 

1. The Outside Air Bypass Damper is normally closed. Upon failure of the Supply fan or 

loss of normal power, loss of supply duct pressure or supply duct flow, the Outside Air 

Bypass Damper shall open, and the mixed air dampers close. 

L. Prefilter Differential Pressure Monitor: 

1. The controller shall monitor the differential pressure across the prefilter. 


a. Prefilter Change Required: Prefilter differential pressure exceeds a user definable 

limit (adj.). 

M. Final Filter Differential Pressure Monitor: 

1. The controller shall monitor the differential pressure across the final filter. 


a. Final Filter failure: Final filter differential pressure falls below a user definable 

limit (adj.). 

b. Final Filter Change Required: Final filter differential pressure exceeds a user 


N. Return Air Temperature: 

1. The controller shall monitor the return air temperature. 


a. High Return Air Temp: If the return air temperature is greater than 90°F (adj.). 

b. Low Return Air Temp: If the return air temperature is less than 45°F (adj.). 

O. Supply Air Temperature: 

1. The controller shall monitor the supply air temperature. 


a. High Supply Air Temp: If the supply air temperature is greater than 120°F (adj.). 

b. Low Supply Air Temp: If the supply air temperature is less than 45°F (adj.). 

P. Environmental Index: 

1. When the zone is occupied, the controller will monitor the deviation of the zone 

temperature from the heating or cooling setpoint and calculate a 0 - 100% Environmental 

Index which gives an indication of how well the zone is maintaining comfort. The 

controller will also calculate the percentage of time since occupancy began that the 

Environmental Index is 70% or higher. Optionally, a weighting factor can be configured 

to adjust the contribution of the zone to the rollup average index based upon the floor 

area of the zone, importance of the zone, or other static criteria. 



Show On 

Graphic 

Zone Temp × × × 

Zone Setpoint Adjust × × 

Prefilter Differential Pressure × × 

Final Filter Differential Pressure × × 

Return Air Temp × × × 





Show On 

Graphic 

Supply Air Temp × × × 

Cooling/heating Valve × × × 

Fan VFD Speed × × × 

Fan VFD Fault × × × 

Fire Alarm Control Panel signal x x 

Building Sludge Loading Bay 

Supply Air Flow Setpoint 

Building Sludge Loading Bay 

Supply Air Flow 

High Building Sludge Loading Bay 


Low Building Sludge Loading Bay 


× × × 

× × × 

Supply Air Smoke Detector × × × × 

Supply Fan Status × × × 

Supply Fan Start/Stop × × × 

Mixed Air Dampers × × 

Environmental Index × × × 

Percent of Time Satisfied × × × 

Heating Setpoint × × 

Cooling Setpoint × × 

High Zone Temp × × 

Low Zone Temp × × 

Supply Fan Failure × 

Supply Fan in Hand × 

Supply Fan Runtime Exceeded × 

Prefilter Change Required × × 

Final Filter Change Required × × 

High Return Air Temp × × 

Low Return Air Temp × × 

High Supply Air Temp × × 

Low Supply Air Temp × × 

Totals 7 2 4 2 3 0 0 16 16 27 


Contract 44577 KW Annex - Rev. D 44577-CSI-SPEC-001 230993 - 6 

× 

× 

× 

×



A. Run Conditions - Scheduled: 

1. The unit shall run according to a user definable time schedule in the following modes: 

2. Occupied Mode: The unit shall maintain 


B. Alarms shall be provided as follows: 



2. Low Zone Temp: If the zone temperature is less than the cooling setpoint by a user 


C. Zone Setpoint Adjust: 

1. The occupant shall be able to adjust the zone temperature cooling setpoint at the zone 

sensor. 

D. Fan: 

1. The fan shall run anytime the unit is commanded to run, unless shutdown on safeties. 

E. Cooling Coil Valve: 

1. The controller shall measure the zone temperature and modulate the cooling coil valve to 

maintain its cooling setpoint. 




c. AND the fan is on. 

F. Filter Differential Pressure Monitor: 



a. Filter Change Required: final filter differential pressure exceeds a user definable 

limit (adj.). 

G. Fan Status: 






H. Environmental Index: 











Point Name AI AO BI BO AV BV Sched Trend Alarm Show On Graphic 



Filter Differential Pressure × × × 

Cooling Valve × × × 

Zone Override × × × 

Fan Status × × 


Environmental Index × × 

Percent of Time Satisfied × × 

Schedule × 


High Zone Temp × 

Low Zone Temp × 

Filter Change Required × 




Totals 3 1 2 1 2 0 1 8 6 8 

1.7 ECRT-HTR-501 




a. Occupied Mode: The unit shall maintain a heating setpoint of 65°F (adj.). 


a. Low Zone Temp: If the zone temperature is less than the heating setpoint by a user 


B. Zone Setpoint Adjust: 



C. Fan: 

1. The fan shall run anytime the zone temperature drops below heating setpoint, unless 

shutdown on safeties. 

D. Heating Coil Valve: 



1. The controller shall measure the zone temperature and open the heating coil valve to 

maintain its heating setpoint. 





E. Environmental Index: 













Heating Valve × × × 



Schedule × 



Totals 2 0 0 2 2 0 1 6 1 5 


















D. Fan: 


E. Coil Valve: 

1. The controller shall measure the zone temperature and modulate the coil valve to 

maintain its heating or cooling setpoint. 












a. Filter Change Required: Final filter differential pressure exceeds a user definable 

limit (adj.). 




















Coil Valve × × × 










Schedule × 









Totals 3 1 2 1 2 0 1 9 6 9 
















D. Fan: 


E. Coil Valve: 

1. The controller shall measure the zone temperature and modulate the coil valve to 

maintain its heating or cooling setpoint. 














a. Filter Change Required: Final filter differential pressure exceeds a user definable 

limit (adj.). 




















Coil Valve × × × 






Schedule × 













1.10 ECRT-HP-501 

Totals 3 1 2 1 2 0 1 9 6 9 


A. Chiller Heat Pump - Run Conditions: 

1. The chiller shall be enabled to run whenever it is commanded to be enabled by the chiller 

manager program. The chiller shall run subject to its own internal safeties and controls. 

2. The controls contractor shall coordinate with the chiller manufacturer to disable the 

chiller whenever the ambient temperature drops below or rises above the manufacturer’s 

written recommended operating temperatures. The heat pump water pump shall be 

interlocked to turn off when the chiller is commanded off. 

B. Heat Pump Water Pump (ECRT-P-502): 

1. The heat pump water pump shall run anytime the heat pump chiller is called to run. 

2. The heat pump water pump shall start prior to the heat pump chiller being enabled and 

shall stop only after the heat pump chiller is disabled. The heat pump water pump shall 

therefore have: 

a. A user adjustable delay on start. 

b. AND a user adjustable delay on stop. 

3. The delay times shall be set appropriately to allow for orderly hydronic water system 

start-up, shutdown and sequencing. 


a. Heat Pump Water Pump Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off. 

b. Heat Pump Water Pump Running in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on. 

c. Heat Pump Water Pump Runtime Exceeded: Status runtime exceeds a user 

definable limit. 

C. Heat Pump Chiller: 

1. The heat pump chiller shall be enabled a user adjustable time after pump statuses are 

proven on. The heat pump chiller shall therefore have a user adjustable delay on start. 

2. The delay time shall be set appropriately to allow for orderly hydronic water system startup, 

shutdown and sequencing. 

3. The heat pump chiller shall run subject to its own internal safeties and controls. 


a. Heat Pump Chiller Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off. 

b. Heat Pump Chiller Running in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on. 



c. Heat Pump Chiller Runtime Exceeded: Status runtime exceeds a user definable 

limit. 

D. Heat Pump Chiller Chilled Water Supply Setpoint: 

1. The heat pump chiller shall maintain a chilled water supply temperature setpoint of 45°F 

(Adj.) as determined by its own internal controls (provided by others). 

E. Heat Pump Chiller Heating Water Supply Setpoint: 

1. The heat pump chiller shall maintain a heating water supply temperature setpoint of 

120°F (Adj.) as determined by its own internal controls (provided by others). 

F. Heat Pump Chiller Water Supply changeover Setpoint: 

1. The heat pump chiller shall changeover to the cooling mode whenever: 


b. AND any zone temperature is above cooling setpoint. 

2. The heat pump chiller shall changeover to the heating mode whenever: 


b. AND any zone temperature is below heating setpoint. 

G. Heat Pump Chilled Water Temperature Monitoring: 

1. The following temperatures shall be monitored: 

a. Heat Pump Chiller water supply. 

b. Heat Pump Chiller water return. 

H. Alarms shall be provided as follows: 

1. High Chilled Water Supply Temp: If the chilled water supply temperature is greater than 

55°F (adj.). 

2. Low Chilled Water Supply Temp: If the chilled water supply temperature is less than 

38°F (adj.). 

3. High Heating Water Supply Temp: If the heating water supply temperature is greater than 

140°F (adj.). 

4. Low Heating Water Supply Temp: If the heating water supply temperature is less than 

100°F (adj.). 



Heat Pump Chiller Water Return 

Temp 

Heat Pump Chiller Water Supply 

Temp 

Show On 

Graphic 

× × × 

× × × 

Heat Pump Water Pump Status × × × 

Heat Pump Chiller Status × × × 

Heat Pump Water Pump Start/Stop × × 

Heat Pump Chiller Enable × × 





Heat Pump Water Pump Failure × 

Heat Pump Water Pump Running 

in Hand 

Heat Pump Water Pump Runtime 

Exceeded 

Heat Pump Chiller Failure × 

Heat Pump Chiller Running in 

Hand 

Heat Pump Chiller Runtime Exceeded 

High Chilled Water Supply Temp × 

Low Chilled Water Supply Temp × 

High Heating Water Supply Temp × 

Low Heating Water Supply Temp × 

1.11 ECRT-BLR-501 

Show On 

Graphic 

Totals 2 0 2 2 0 0 0 4 10 6 


A. Boiler System Run Conditions: 

1. The boiler system shall be enabled to run whenever: 

a. The heating water supply temperature is less than 115°F 

b. A definable number of zone temperatures are below the heating setpoint. 

c. AND outside air temperature is less than 40°F (adj.). 

2. To prevent short cycling, the boiler system shall run for and be off for minimum 

adjustable times (both user definable), unless shutdown on safeties or outside air 

conditions. 

3. The boiler shall run subject to its own internal safeties and controls. 

B. Boiler Safeties: 

1. The following safeties shall be monitored: 

a. Boiler alarm. 

b. Low Water Level. 

C. Alarms shall be provided as follows: 

1. Boiler alarm. 

2. Low Water Level alarm. 

D. Circulation Pump (ECRT-P-503): 

1. The circulation pump shall run anytime the boiler is called to run and shall have a user 

definable (adj.) delay on stop. 


× 

× 

× 

×



a. Circulation Pump Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off. 

b. Circulation Pump Running in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on. 

c. Circulation Pump Runtime Exceeded: Status runtime exceeds a user definable 

limit. 

E. Boiler Enable: 

1. The boiler shall be enabled when the boiler system is commanded on. The boiler shall be 

enabled after circulation pump status is proven on and shall run subject to its own internal 

safeties and controls. 

F. Alarms shall be provided as follows: 

1. Boiler Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off. 

2. Boiler Running in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on. 

3. Boiler Runtime Exceeded: Status runtime exceeds a user definable limit. 

G. Hot Water Supply Temperature Setpoint: 

1. The boiler shall maintain a hot water supply temperature setpoint, 120°F (Adj.) as 

determined by its own internal controls (provided by others). 

H. Primary Hot Water Temperature Monitoring: 

1. The following temperatures shall be monitored: 

a. Primary hot water supply. 

b. Primary hot water return. 

I. Alarms shall be provided as follows: 

1. High Primary Hot Water Supply Temp: If greater than 140°F (adj.). 

2. Low Primary Hot Water Supply Temp: If less than 100°F (adj.). 



Show On 

Graphic 

Primary Hot Water Return Temp × × × 

Primary Hot Water Supply Temp × × × 

Boiler Alarm Status × × × × 

Low Water Level × × × × 

Circulation Pump Status × × × 

Boiler Status × × × 

Circulation Pump Start/Stop × × × 

Boiler Enable × × 

Outside Air Temp × × 

Circulation Pump Failure × 

Circulation Pump Running in 

Hand 

Circulation Pump Runtime Ex- × 


×


ceeded 



Boiler Failure × 

Boiler Running in Hand × 

Boiler Runtime Exceeded × 

High Primary Hot Water Supply 

Temp 

Low Primary Hot Water Supply 

Temp 

1.12 ECRT-P-501 

Show On 

Graphic 

Totals 2 0 4 2 1 0 0 7 10 9 


A. Hydronic Water Pump System - Run Conditions: 

1. The Hydronic water pump shall be enabled whenever: 

a. A definable number of glycol water coils need cooling or heating. 

b. AND the outside air temperature is greater than 55°F (adj.) or less than 50°F (adj.). 

2. To prevent short cycling, the hydronic water pump system shall run for and be off for 

minimum adjustable times (both user definable). 

B. Hydronic Water Pump: 

1. The hydronic water pump shall run anytime it is requested to run. 

C. The hydronic water pump shall have: 

1. A user adjustable delay on start. 

2. AND a user adjustable delay on stop. 

3. The delay times shall be set appropriately to allow for orderly hydronic water system 

start-up, shutdown and sequencing. 

D. Alarms shall be provided as follows: 

1. Hydronic Water Pump Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off. 

2. Hydronic Water Pump Running in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on. 

3. Hydronic Water Pump Runtime Exceeded: Status runtime exceeds a user definable limit. 

4. Hydronic Water Pump VFD Fault. 

E. Hydronic Water Pressure Control: 

1. The controller shall measure hydronic water pressure and modulate the hydronic water 

pump VFD to maintain its chilled water pressure setpoint. The following setpoints 

are recommended values. All setpoints shall be field adjusted during the commissioning 

period to meet the requirements of actual field conditions. 

2. The controller shall modulate hydronic water pump speed to maintain a hydronic water 

pressure of 30 lbf/in 2 (adj.). The VFD minimum speed shall not drop below 20% (adj.). 



× 

×


a. High Hydronic Water Pressure: If the hydronic water pressure is 25% (adj.) greater 

than setpoint. 

b. Low Hydronic Water Pressure: If the hydronic water pressure is 25% (adj.) less 

than setpoint. 



Show On 

Graphic 

Hydronic Water Pressure × × × 

Hydronic Water Pump VFD 

Speed 

× × × 

Hydronic Water Pump Status × × × 

Hydronic Water Pump VFD Fault × × × 

Hydronic Water Pump Start/Stop × × × 

Hydronic Water Pressure Setpoint × × × 

Hydronic Water Pump Failure × 

Hydronic Water Pump Running in 

Hand 

Hydronic Water Pump Runtime 

Exceeded 

High Hydronic Water Pressure × 

Low Hydronic Water Pressure × 

Totals 1 1 2 1 1 0 0 5 6 6 


1.13 Variable Frequency Drive Interface (typical of 4) 

A. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Interface Monitor: 

1. Current VFD status and operating conditions shall be monitored through its 

communications interface port. The interface shall monitor and trend the points as shown 

on the Points List. 



Motor Speed RPM × × × 

Motor Frequency Hertz × × × 

Motor Current Amps × × × 

Motor Runtime × × 

VFD Status × × × 

In Fault Condition × × × × 


× 

×




In Bypass × × × × 

Totals 0 0 0 0 4 3 0 6 2 7 

1.14 Point Summary 



Equipment Name Qty AI AO BI BO AV BV Sched Trend Alarm 

ECRT-EF-501 and 

ECRT-EF-502 

ECRT-AHU-501 

(Typical of 1) 

ECRT-AHU-502 


ECRT-HTR-501 


ECRT-AHU-503 


ECRT-AHU-504 


ECRT-HP-501 


ECRT-BLR-501 


ECRT-P-501 


Show On 

Graphic 

Each 1 1 3 1 1 0 0 5 11 6 

Total 

(x2) 

2 2 6 2 2 0 0 10 18 12 

Each 7 2 4 2 3 0 0 16 16 27 

Total 

(x1) 

7 2 4 2 3 0 0 16 16 27 

Each 3 1 2 1 2 0 1 8 6 8 

Total 

(x1) 

3 1 2 1 2 0 1 8 6 8 

Each 2 0 0 2 2 0 1 6 1 5 

Total 

(x1) 

2 0 0 2 2 0 1 6 1 5 

Each 3 1 2 1 2 0 1 9 6 9 

Total 

(x1) 

3 1 2 1 2 0 1 9 6 9 

Each 3 1 2 1 2 0 1 9 6 9 

Total 

(x1) 

3 1 2 1 2 0 1 9 6 9 

Each 2 0 2 2 0 0 0 4 10 6 

Total 

(x1) 

2 0 2 2 0 0 0 4 10 6 

Each 2 0 4 2 1 0 0 7 10 9 

Total 

(x1) 

2 0 5 2 1 0 0 7 10 9 

Each 1 1 2 1 1 0 0 5 6 6 

Total 

(x1) 

1 1 2 1 1 0 0 5 6 6 

Variable Frequency Drive Each 0 0 0 0 4 3 0 6 2 7 




Equipment Name Qty AI AO BI BO AV BV Sched Trend Alarm 

Interface 


Total 

(x4) 

Show On 

Graphic 

0 0 0 0 16 12 0 24 8 28 

Project Totals 25 8 23 14 31 12 4 98 84 110 


PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) 




SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and 

specialties for the following: 

1. Hydronic piping. 

2. Below grade hydronic piping. 

3. Air-vent piping. 

4. Condensate (coil drain) piping. 

5. Safety-valve-inlet and -outlet piping. 

6. Air control devices. 

7. Buffer Tank. 

8. Hydronic specialties. 


1. Division 23 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic 

piping. 


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following 

minimum working pressure and temperature: 

1. Hydronic Piping: 125 psig working pressure at 200 deg F. 

2. Air-Vent Piping: 200 deg F. 

3. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system to 

which it is attached. 


A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 

1. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for 

calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves. 

2. Below grade piping. 

3. Air control devices. 



4. Buffer Tank. 

5. Chemical treatment. 

6. Hydronic specialties. 


C. Qualification Data: For Installer. 

D. Field quality-control test and inspection reports. 

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-duty 

valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 

F. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at 

Project site. 


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, 


B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel 

Code: Section IX. 

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 

2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes 

involved and that certification is current. 

C. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, 

products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME 

label. Fabricate and stamp buffer tanks, air separators, and expansion tanks to comply with 

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 01. 

D. Examination Requirements for ASME B31.9: 

1. Perform a visual examination in accordance with ASME B31.9 Paragraph 936.4.1 


A. Water-Treatment Chemicals: Furnish enough chemicals for initial system startup and for 

preventive maintenance for one year from date of Substantial Completion. 

B. Differential Pressure Meter: For each type of balancing valve and automatic flow control valve, 

include flowmeter, probes, hoses, flow charts, and carrying case. 




2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS PIPE SIZES NPS 1-1/2 AND SMALLER 

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L. 

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. 

C. Copper or Bronze Pressure-Seal Fittings: 




a. Stadler-Viega. 

2. Housing: Copper. 

3. O-Rings and Pipe Stops: EPDM. 

4. Tools: Manufacturer's special tools. 

5. Minimum 200-psig working-pressure rating at 250 deg F. 

D. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. 

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as 

indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. 

B. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3 

"Piping Applications" Article. 

C. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3 

"Piping Applications" Article. 

D. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe. 

E. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, 

nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: 


2. End Connections: Butt welding. 


F. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in 

which they are installed. 

G. Below grade hydronic piping shall be pre-insulated, prefabricated-pipe type, composed of 

integral sealed units of polyester resin/fiberglass reinforced outer jacket, polyurethane foam 

insulation and black steel carrier pipe such as: Perma-Pipe Poly-Therm. 



1. Outer Jacket: Filament wound, polyester resin/fiberglass reinforcement composite 

directly applied on the insulating foam. The manufacturer shall have the option to 

filament wind fiberglass directly onto the polyurethane foam or inject foam into a 

fiberglass outer casing. The minimum thickness of the jacket shall be 0.055 inches. 

2. Carrier Pipe: ASTM A53/A 53M, Grade B, Schedule 40, black steel pipe, wrought steel 

fittings and forged-steel flanges and welded and flanged joints. 

3. Insulation: Polyurethane foam completely filling annular space between carrier pipe and 

outer jacket to a minimum thickness of 1". In-place density shall be 1.9 to 2.1 0.16 

BTU/(hr.) (sq. ft.)°F./in.) at 73° F., and a closed cell content of 90% to 95%. Exposed 

insulation at unit ends shall be sealed with factory-applied end seal 


A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system 

contents. 



a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. 

b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges. 

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper 

with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. 

D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate 

for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. 

E. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working 

temperatures and pressures. 

2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS 

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper-alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solderjoint, 

plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials. 

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. 

C. Dielectric Unions: 




a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. 

b. Central Plastics Company. 



c. Hart Industries International, Inc. 

d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 

e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; AquaSpec Commercial Products Division. 

2. Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 200 

deg F. 

2.5 VALVES 

A. Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section 

"General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping." 

B. Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements 

specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC." 

C. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves: 




a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 

b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. 

c. Griswold Controls. 

d. Taco. 

2. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi. 

3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 

4. Plug: Resin. 

5. Seat: PTFE. 

6. End Connections: Threaded or socket. 

7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 

8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 

9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 

10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. 

D. Cast-Iron or Steel, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves: 




a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 

b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. 

c. Griswold Controls. 

d. Taco. 

e. Tour & Andersson; available through Victaulic Company of America. 

2. Body: Cast-iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or 

venturi. 



3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 

4. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. 

5. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. 

6. Seat: PTFE. 

7. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. 

8. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 

9. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 

10. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 


2.6 AIR CONTROL DEVICES 



1. Amtrol, Inc. 

2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 

3. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. 

4. Taco. 

B. Manual Air Vents: 

1. Body: Bronze. 

2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 

3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 

4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 

5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8. 

6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 


C. Automatic Air Vents: 

1. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 

2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 

3. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float. 

4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 

5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4. 



D. Expansion Tanks as Scheduled on Drawings: 

E. Tangential-Type Air Separators: 

1. Tank: Welded steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 125-psig minimum working 

pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature. 

2. Air Collector Tube: Perforated stainless steel, constructed to direct released air into 

expansion tank. 

3. Tangential Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded for NPS 2-1/2 and smaller; flanged 

connections for NPS 3 and larger. 



4. Blowdown Connection: Threaded. 

5. Size: Match system flow capacity. 

2.7 BUFFER TANK 



1. Lochinvar Corporation. 

2. Taco. 

B. Tank: Welded steel; vertical construction; ASME constructed and labeled for 125-psig 

minimum working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature. Tank shall be 

constructed with a built in baffle to ensure adequate mixing of the fluids inside the tank. Tank 

shall include anchor clips to attach tank to concrete pad. 

C. Tank shall be furnished with two 2-1/2” flanged connections in the lower portion of the tank, a 

¾” plugged air vent tapping, 1” relief valve tapping, and a 1” drain tapping. 

D. Tank shall be factory equipped with a spray foam insulation with a minimum R-12 rating with a 

UV resistant coating. 

E. Tank sizes, configuration, and accessories shall be as Scheduled on Drawings. 

2.8 CHEMICAL TREATMENT 

A. Propylene Glycol: Industrial grade with corrosion inhibitors and environmental-stabilizer 

additives for mixing with water in systems indicated to contain antifreeze or glycol solutions. 

2.9 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 

A. Y-Pattern Strainers: 

1. Body: NPS 2 and smaller, ASTM B 584 or B 62 bronze with threaded cover and bottom 

drain connection. NPS 2-1/2 and larger, ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted 

cover and bottom drain connection. 

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and 

larger. 

3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and 20-mesh type 304 stainless steel screen. 


B. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: 

1. Body: NPT 1-1/2” and smaller, single sphere, Kevlar –reinforced EPDM rubber body. 

NPT 2” and larger Double sphere, kevlar-reinforced EPDM rubber body. 

2. End Connections: Steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges 

for sizes 2” and larger, for sizes 1-1/2” and smaller, brass threaded union or flange 

fittings, or sweat ends for copper tubing. 

3. Performance: Capable of misalignment. 







A. Hydronic piping, aboveground, NPS 1-1/2 and smaller, shall be any of the following: 

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed or pressureseal 

joints. 

2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; and threaded joints. 

B. Hydronic piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and larger, shall be the following: 

1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges 

and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints. 

C. Hydronic piping installed below grade shall be the following: 

1. Below grade hydronic piping shall be pre-insulated, prefabricated-pipe type, composed of 

integral sealed units of polyester resin/fiberglass reinforced outer jacket, polyurethane 

foam insulation and black steel carrier pipe. 

2. End Seals and Sealing Rings: High temperature heat resistant. Furnish watertight seals 

by the jacket and carrier pipe manufacturer suitable for services and pressure of the 

system. Surfaces shall be smooth and free of voids. 

3. Fittings: Fittings shall be factory fabricated and pre-insulated with polyurethane foam 

insulation. Insulation shall be protected with an FRP jacket of same thickness and quality 

as that of straight units of pre-insulated pipe. Miters on FRP jacket at fittings shall be as 

strong as pipe outer jacket. 

4. Expansion Elbows and Loops: Prefabricated elbows, expansion loops and tees shall be 

furnished where indicated on Drawings. Pre-insulated fittings that must provide 

compensation for pipe expansion or contraction shall be installed in a suitably sized 

jacket and insulated with flexible polyurethane foam insulation. Straight units adjoining 

expansion fittings shall also be insulated with flexible polyurethane foam insulation to 

compensate for lateral pipe movement. Expansion loops and elbows shall be properly 

designed in accordance with stress limits indicated by ANSI B31.1 Code for Pressure 

Piping. 

5. Anchors: Prefabricated plate anchors shall be furnished where indicated on Drawings 

and shall consist of a steel plate welded to carrier pipe and sealed to outer jacket. Steel 

plate shall be 3/8" thick for 10" and smaller conduits. 

6. field Joints: Field joints between prefabricated units shall be installed in the following 

manner: 



a. Split or full round FRP sleeve must be slid over end of unit before connection of 

carrier pipe. Connect carrier pipe and hydrostatically test as specified. 

b. Center FRP sleeves over joint area and hold in position with fiberglass tape, mix 

polyurethane foam components and pour into cavity according to instructions 

provided by manufacturer. 

c. Trim cured polyurethane foam flush with jacket sleeve. Center heat-actuated 

shrink blanket over jacket sleeve and jacket of adjoining units to provide double 

layer protection. Using a soft orange flame from a propane torch, work flame from 

center toward one end, moving rapidly back and forth and around shrink blanket. 

Air pockets must be removed and worked out from under shrink blanket. At field 

joints with expansion provisions, wrap pipe with flexible polyurethane foam 

insulation and hold in place with tape and complete joint in same manner per prior 

instructions. 

7. Backfill: A 4-in. layer of sand or fine gravel shall be placed and tamped in the trench to 

provide a uniform bedding for the pipe. The entire trench shall be evenly backfilled with 

a similar material as the bedding in 6-in. compacted layers to a minimum height of 6-in. 

above the top of the insulated piping system. The remaining trench shall be evenly and 

continuously backfilled in uniform layers with suitable excavated soil. 

D. Air-Vent Piping: 

1. Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic 

piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's written instructions. 

2. Outlet: Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints. 

E. Condensate (coil drain) piping, aboveground, NPS 1-1/2 and smaller, shall be the following: 

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed or pressureseal 

joints. 

F. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping for Hot-Water Piping: Same materials and joining 

methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed with metal-toplastic 

transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's 

written instructions. 

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS 

A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection 

to each piece of equipment. 

B. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal. 

C. Install triple-duty valves at each pump discharge as required to control flow direction. 

D. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and 

Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to 

the outdoors; and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with 



ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation 

requirements. 

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS 

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping 

systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and 

calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping 

as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. 

B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms 

and service areas. 

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right 

angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated 

otherwise. 

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. 

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. 

F. Install piping at indicated slopes. 

G. Install piping free of sags and bends. 

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. 

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation. 

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating 

pressure. 

K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing 

of valves. 

L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple 

with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. 

M. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to 

the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe. 

N. Install valves according to Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping." 

O. Install unions in piping, NPS 1-1/2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of 

equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 

P. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as 

indicated. 



Q. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. 

Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. 

Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2. 

R. Identify piping as specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and 

Equipment." 

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 

A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and 

Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with the following requirements for 

maximum spacing of supports. 

B. Seismic restraints are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for 

HVAC Piping and Equipment." 

C. Install the following pipe attachments: 

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 

2. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, 

supported on a trapeze. 

3. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with 

copper pipe. 

D. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 

2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 

3. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 





E. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and 

minimum rod sizes: 

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 





F. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals. 

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION 

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections 

specifying piping systems. 



B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before 

assembly. 

D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" 

Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. 

E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut 

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore 

full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal 

threading is specified. 

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or 

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. 

F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes 

and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. 

G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service 

application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. 

H. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure. Leave insertion 

marks on pipe after assembly. 

3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION 

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required 

for system air venting. 

B. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only. 

Manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting. 

C. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward 

slope toward tank. 

D. Install tangential air separator in pump suction. Install blowdown piping with gate or full-port 

ball valve; extend full size to nearest floor drain. 

E. Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure tank 

is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements. 

3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS 

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment 

connections. 

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment. 



C. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according 

to Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." 

3.8 CHEMICAL TREATMENT 

A. Fill systems indicated to have antifreeze or glycol solutions with the following concentrations: 

1. Hydronic Piping: Minimum 40 percent propylene glycol. 


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 

2. Visually examine piping and joints in accordance with ASME B31.9 Paragraph 936.4.1 

prior to testing. 

3. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test 

pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 

4. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace 

strainer screens. 

5. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be 

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged 

joints to isolate equipment. 

6. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to 

protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test. 

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: 

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to 

freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be 

used. 

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use 

drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid. 

3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 

4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the 

system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any 

vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to 

pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum 

yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building 

Services Piping." 

5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, 

joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing 

components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 

6. Prepare written report of testing. 

C. Perform the following before operating the system: 

1. Open manual valves fully. 



2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 

3. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating 

freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 

4. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 

5. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers, 

cooling towers, to specified values. 

6. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings. 

D. Backfill: 

1. A 4-inch layer of sand or fine gravel shall be placed and tamped in the trench to provide a 

uniform bedding for the pipe. 

2. Immediately after piping is installed in trench, a partial backfill shall be provided in 

middle of each unit leaving joints exposed for inspection before hydrostatic tests. After 

all thrust blocks are installed, a hydrostatic test shall be performed. 

3. After hydrostatic testing, final backfill of selected earth shall be hand-packed and handtamped 

to 6" minimum over top of jacket. Remainder of backfill shall be free of large 

boulders, rocks over 6" in diameter, frozen earth, or foreign matter. Do not furnish 

wheeled or tracked vehicles for tamping of backfill. 

E. Cleanup 

1. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose off of the Project site. 



3.10 PIPE CODES 

PIPING CODE: P-1 Hydronic and Condensate (coil drain) Piping 





Method 


Normal Operating Extremes: 45°F to 120°F 

Visual Inspection 


Sizes 1-1/2” and Smaller 2” Pipe and Larger 

Tubing/Pipe 

Fittings 

Valves 

Copper Tubing, ASTM B 88, Type 

L, Drawn-Temper copper tubing. 

Brazed or pressure joint 

connections. 


Type S, Grade B, black or hot-dip 

zinc coated with ends threaded 

according to ASME B1.20.1. 

Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME 

B 16.22 or Copper or Bronze 

Pressure-Seal fittings. 

Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME 

B16.22. 



ASTM A-105, Class WP carbon 

steel. 


ASME B16.39, Class 150 or 300, 


carbon steel. 


Type S, Grade B, black or hot-dip zinc 

coated with butt-weld ends according 

to ASME B1.20.1. 



ASTM A-105, Class WP carbon steel. 


ASME B16.39, Class 150 or 300, 


carbon steel. 

Steel Flanges: ASME B16.5, 

Class 150 or 300, ASTM A-105 

carbon steel. 

Wrought-Steel Butt-Welding Fittings: 

ASME B16.9, Schedule 40, ASTM A- 

234, Class WPB carbon steel. 

In accordance with Specification Section 230523 General-Duty Valves for 

HVAC Piping. 

Note: 





SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Close-coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps. 


A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber. 

B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer. 


A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating 

characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of 

product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves. 

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and 



A. Source Limitations: Obtain hydronic pumps through one source from a single manufacturer. 

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of hydronic 

pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product 




intended use. 

D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps. 




A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces 

and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe 

openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs. 

B. Store pumps in dry location. 

C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage. 

D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter. 

E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions. 








2.2 CLOSE-COUPLED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 


1. Armstrong Pumps Inc. 

2. Aurora Pump; Division of Pentair Pump Group. 

3. Bell & Gossett; Div. of ITT Industries. 

4. Burks Pumps; Div. of Crane Pumps & Systems. 

5. PACO Pumps. 

6. Taco, Inc. 

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, close-coupled, inline 

pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor 

shafts mounted horizontally or vertically. Rate pump for 175-psig minimum working pressure 

and a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F. 

C. Pump Construction: 

1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage 

tappings at inlet and outlet, and threaded companion-flange connections. 

2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, 

and secured with a locking cap screw. Trim impeller to match specified performance. 

3. Pump Shaft: Steel, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve. 



4. Mechanical Seal: Carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless-steel 

spring, and Buna-N bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor 

and seal. 

5. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings. 

D. Motor: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings, unless otherwise indicated; and 

rigidly mounted to pump casing. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common 

Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 

E. Capacities and Characteristics as Scheduled on Drawings: 

2.3 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS 

A. Triple-Duty Valve: Straight pattern, 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body, pump-discharge 

fitting; with drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features. Brass 

gage ports with integral check valve, and orifice for flow measurement. 



A. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before 

pump installation. 


3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with HI 1.4. 

B. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers, 

couplings, and accessories. 

C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and 

weight of pumps is not supported by piping. 

D. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers of sufficient size to support pump 

weight. Vibration isolation devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic 

Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Fabricate brackets or supports as required. Hanger 

and support materials are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC 

Piping and Equipment." 


A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate 

general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 



B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. 

C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps. 

D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles. 

E. Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of pumps. 

F. Install Y-type strainer and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps. 

G. Install single gage with multiple input selector valve. 

H. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical 

Systems." 

I. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors 

and Cables." 




2. Check piping connections for tightness. 

3. Clean strainers on suction piping. 

4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting: 

a. Verify bearing lubrication. 

b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is 

free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate 

until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. 

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction. 

5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for 

operation. 

6. Start motor. 

7. Open discharge valve slowly. 



adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps. 




B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. 

C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps. 

D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles. 

E. Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of pumps. 

F. Install Y-type strainer and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps. 

G. Install single gage with multiple input selector valve. 

H. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical 

Systems." 

I. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors 

and Cables." 




2. Check piping connections for tightness. 

3. Clean strainers on suction piping. 

4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting: 

a. Verify bearing lubrication. 

b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is 

free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate 

until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. 

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction. 

5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for 

operation. 

6. Start motor. 

7. Open discharge valve slowly. 



adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration 

and Training." 

END OF SECTION 23 2123 



SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 

2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings. 

3. Sheet metal materials. 

4. Sealants and gaskets. 

5. Hangers and supports. 

6. Seismic-restraint devices. 


1. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, 

and balancing requirements for metal ducts. 

2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, ductmounting 

access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint 

construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC 

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; SMACNA’s Round Industrial Duct 

Construction Standards; SMACNA’s Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards; and 

performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article. 

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints shall withstand the 

effects of gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in 

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible", “Round Industrial 

Duct Construction Standards”, “Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards”, and 

ASCE/SEI 7. Loads shall be in accordance with Division 23, Section, “Vibration and Seismic 

Controls for HVAC, Piping and Equipment”. 

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in 

ASHRAE 62.1-2004. 




A. Product Data: For each type of the following products: 

1. Sealants and gaskets. 

2. Seismic-restraint devices. 

B. LEED Submittals: 

1. Product Data for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation indicating that duct systems comply 

with ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment." 

2. Product Data for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation indicating that duct systems comply 

with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and 

Insulation." 

3. Leakage Test Report for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation of work performed for 

compliance with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6.4.4.2.2 - "Duct Leakage Tests." 

4. Duct-Cleaning Test Report for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation of work performed for 

compliance with ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.4 - "Ventilation System Start-Up." 

5. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement 

of VOC content. 

C. Shop Drawings: 

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, 

and attachments to other work. 

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 

3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, and static-pressure classes. 

4. Elevation of top of ducts. 

5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 

6. Fittings. 

7. Reinforcement and spacing. 

8. Seam and joint construction. 

9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 

10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 

11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and 

panels. 

12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, seismic 

restraints, and vibration isolation. 

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: 

1. Sheet metal thicknesses. 

2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 

3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 

4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports. 

E. Inspection and test procedures required by ASME N511 and ASME AG-1 Section SA and TA 

for process area exhaust ductwork. 

F. Inspection and Test Reports required by ASME AG-1 Section SA and TA for process area 

exhaust ductwork. 



G. Inspection and Test Reports required by ASME N511 for process area exhaust system. 

H. Certified Material Test Reports. 

I. Certificates of Conformance. 

J. Welding certificates. 

K. Field quality-control reports. 


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 

2. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel," for stainless supports. 

3. AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. 

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems 

and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up." 

C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, 

Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." 

D. Manufacture, inspect, test and ship process area exhaust ductwork under a quality assurance 

program meeting the requirements of ASME AG-1, Article SA-8000. 

1.6 INSPECTIONS AND TESTS 

A. Inspect and test the process area exhaust ductwork installation in accordance with the 

requirements of ASME AG-1, Article SA-5000, “Inspection and Testing” and Article TA-4300, 

“Duct, Housing, and Frame Acceptance Tests”. 

B. In-service test the process area exhaust system in accordance with the requirements of ASME 

N511. 

C. In-place leak testing of the final installed HEPA filters in the process area exhaust system in 

accordance with ASME N511 and ASME AG-1. 


A. Packaging, shipping, receiving, storage, and handling of the process area exhaust ductwork shall 

be in accordance with the requirements of ASME AG-1, Article SA-7000. 

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Do not install duct sealant when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant 

manufacturers. 



B. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealant. 


2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS (SUPPLY, RETURN, 

OUTSIDE AIR DUCT) 

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction 

Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on 3-inches w.g. static-pressure class, sealing 

classification A. 

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct 

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for staticpressure 

class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and 

other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct 

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular 

Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport 

intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - 

Metal and Flexible." 

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types 

and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and 

Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable 

sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in 

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 

2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS (SUPPLY, RETURN, AND OUTSIDE 

AIR DUCTS) 

A. General Fabrication Requirements: (Supply, return, and outside air ducts) Comply with 

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, 

Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on 3-inches w.g. static-pressure class, Sealing classification A. 

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct 

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for 

static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, 

and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and 

Flexible." 

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct 

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct and Fittings," 

for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support 

intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and 

Flexible." 



D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct 

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and 

Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials 

involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct 

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 

2.3 DUCTWORK FABRICATION - EXHAUST DUCTWORK 

A. Fabricate process area exhaust ductwork and supports in accordance with ASME AG-1, Article 

SA, Service Level C, and Table SA-C-1300, SMACNA Round Industrial Duct Construction 

Standards, Class 1, and SMACNA Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards, Class 1. 

Pressure Classification negative 20-in water gauge, including maintenance load. Fabricate 

seismic bracing in accordance with Division 23, Section “Vibration and Seismic Controls for 

HVAC, Piping and Equipment”. 

B. Construct bends, and elbows with minimum radius 1-1/2 times centerline duct width. Where 

not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide single thickness turning vanes 

constructed and installed in accordance with SMACNA Standards. 

C. Provide, at minimum, rectangular 45 degree entry fittings for rectangular ducts and 45 degree 

wye takeoffs for round ducts, unless shown otherwise on drawings. 

D. Duct sizes noted are inside clear dimensions. 

E. Increase duct size gradually, not exceeding 15 degree divergence wherever possible. Do not 

exceed 30-degree divergence upstream of equipment. Do not exceed 45-degree convergence 

downstream of equipment. 

2.4 SHEET METAL MATERIALS 

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction 

Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct 

construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, 

seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. 

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: (Supply, Return, and Outside Air ductwork) Comply with 

ASTM A 653/A 653M. 

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 

2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. 

C. Stainless-Steel Sheets: (Exhaust system ductwork) Comply with ASTM A 240/A 240M or 

A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 304L, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, 

annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B. Submit material test reports. 

D. Factory- or Shop-Applied Antimicrobial Coating: 

1. Apply to the surface of sheet metal that will form the interior surface of the duct. An 

untreated clear coating shall be applied to the exterior surface. 



2. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the 

EPA for use in HVAC systems. 

3. Coating containing the antimicrobial compound shall have a hardness of 2H, minimum, 

when tested according to ASTM D 3363. 

4. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum 

smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. 

5. Shop-Applied Coating Color: White. 

6. Antimicrobial coating on sheet metal is not required for duct containing liner treated with 

antimicrobial coating. 

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; 

galvanized. ASTM A 276/A 276M steel plates, shapes, and bars; Type 304 or 304L stainless 

steel. 

F. Flanges: (exhaust ductwork) Flanges shall be fabricated of minimum 1/4-in.-thick stainlesssteel 

plate or angle, round flanges shall match the dimensions specified in SMACNA Round 

Industrial Duct Construction Standards, Class 1. Rectangular flanges shall be fabricated in 

accordance with SMACNA Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards, Class 1. Plate, 

shapes or bars shall be Type 304 or 304L-series stainless-steel meeting the requirements of 

ASTM A 276/A 276M. Flange material shall match the duct material. Submit material test 

reports. 

G. Flange Gaskets: (exhaust ductwork) 1/8” thick, ASTM D1056, Grade 2C3 or 2C4, Neoprene, 

or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. Flange bolt torques shall be identified on 

the shop drawings and in accordance with gasket manufacturer’s recommendations. 

H. Fasteners: (exhaust ductwork): Stainless-steel bolts, cap screws, and washers shall be used on 

all stainless-steel materials. Bolts, cap screws, and washers shall meet the requirements of 

ASTM A 193/A 193M, Grade B8. Nuts shall be heavy hex nuts meeting the requirements of 

ASTM A 194/A 194M, Grade 8. Bolts and cap screws shall be grade marked. Submit material 

test reports or Certificate of Conformance. 

I. Anti-galling compound: Loctite® 8013 or 8009 shall be applied where stainless-steel bolts are 

used. 

J. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch 

minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 

2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS 

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and 

gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index 

of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. 

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System: 

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified 

acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight 

seal. 

2. Tape Width: 3 inches. 



3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 

4. Water resistant. 

5. Mold and mildew resistant. 

6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 

7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 

8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel. 

10. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when 


C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 

1. Application Method: Brush on. 

2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 

3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 

4. Water resistant. 

5. Mold and mildew resistant. 

6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 

7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 

8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless 

steel, or aluminum sheets. 

10. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when 


11. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive or negative. 

12. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 

13. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless 

steel, or aluminum sheets. 

2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 

A. Hanger Rods: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts. 

B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal 

and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, 

"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." 

C. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. 

D. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492. 

E. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and 

bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. 

F. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible 

with duct materials. 

G. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 



2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates unless shown 

otherwise. 





2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 

3. Hilti Corp. 


5. TOLCO; a brand of NIBCO INC. 

6. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd. 


shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of the ICC Evaluation Service. 



subjected. 

C. Channel Support System: Shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel 

channels rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces and with accessories for attachment 

to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end. Include matching 

components and corrosion-resistant coating. 

D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603, galvanized or ASTM A 492, stainless-steel cables with end 

connections made of cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed 

for restraining cable service; and with an automatic-locking and clamping device or doublecable 

clips. 

E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle or framing channel clamped to hanger rod. 

F. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor 

bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. 


3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION 

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct 

system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and 

calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. 

Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and 

Coordination Drawings. 

B. During construction, install temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open 

ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. 



C. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. 

D. Install supply, return, and outside air ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction 

Standards - Metal and Flexible". 

E. Install and support process area exhaust ductwork in accordance with ASME AG-1, Article SA, 

Service Level C, and SMACNA Round and Rectangular Duct Construction Standards, Class 1. 

F. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths. 

G. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. 

H. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for 

branch connections. 

I. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and 

perpendicular to building lines. 

J. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent 

enclosure elements of building. 

K. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. 

L. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and 

enclosures. 

M. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to 

view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal 

flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 

inches. 

N. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers or 

fire smoke dampers as indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct 

Accessories" for fire and fire smoke dampers. 

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK 

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. 

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use 

two-part tape sealing system. 

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. 

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, 

hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. 

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these 

requirements. 



3.3 DUCT SEALING 

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct 

Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and 

Flexible." 


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," 

Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports." 

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction 

materials to which hangers are being attached. 

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and 

Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum 

Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports 

within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. 

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. 

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, 

bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 10 

feet. 

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, 

and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 

3.5 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION 

A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic 

forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint 

Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems." 



2. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet. 

B. Select seismic-restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and 

seismic loads. 


D. Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators. 

E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of 

the ICC Evaluation Service. 

F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints to 

structure, to flanges of beams, to upper truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete members. 



G. Drilling for and Setting Anchors: 


anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcement or embedded items during drilling. 

Notify the Engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during 

drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications 

conduit, and gas lines. 







5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior applications and stainless-steel anchors for 

applications exposed to weather. 


A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section 

"Air Duct Accessories." 

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for 

branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 



B. Leakage Tests: (Supply, Return, and Outside Air Ducts) 

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report 

for each test. 

2. Test the following systems: 

a. Supply Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg or Higher: Test 100 percent of 

total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. 

b. Return Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg or Higher: Test 100 percent of 

total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. 

c. Outdoor Air Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg or Higher: Test 100 percent 

of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. 

3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing 

and for compliance with test requirements. 

4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation. 

5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section 

being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system 

design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. 

6. Give seven days' advance notice for testing. 

C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests: 



1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present. 

2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness according 

to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC 

Systems." 

a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media 

shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm. 

D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 

E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 

3.8 TESTING AND INSPECTION - EXHAUST DUCTWORK 

A. Perform acceptance tests on the process area exhaust ductwork in accordance with ASME AG- 

1, Table TA-4310. 

B. Visual Inspection: Inspect ductwork, supports, and housings in accordance with ASME AG-1 

Section SA-5200 and TA-4320. Submit a visual inspection report. 

C. HEPA filter Frame Inspection: Inspect HEPA filter frames in accordance with ASME AG-1 

Section FG-5000. Submit HEPA filter frame inspection reports. 

D. Structural Capability Tests: Perform a Structural capability test of the ductwork in accordance 

with ASME AG-1 Section SA-5400 and Section TA-4331 at pressures indicated in the “Duct 

Pressure Classification”. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct tests that will be witnessed by the 

BUYER prior to delivery to the work site. Also, a test of the completed exhaust system shall be 

conducted by the CONTRACTOR following installation of the ducting covered in this 

performance specification. Submit structural capability test procedure and report for the both 

tests. 

E. Leakage Tests: Comply with ASME AG-1 Section SA-5300 and Table SA-B-1310, Class I, 

ESF systems and Section TA-4332. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct tests that will be 

witnessed by the BUYER prior to delivery to the work site. Also, a test of the complete exhaust 

system shall be conducted by the CONTRACTOR following installation of the ducting covered 

in this performance specification. Submit leakage test procedures and report for the both tests. 

F. Test the following systems: 

G. Exhaust Ducts: Test all duct sections prior to delivery. 

H. Process Exhaust system: Test all duct sections, including HEPA filter housings up to the inlet 

of the exhaust fans after installation. 

I. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to Leak test pressure of system or section being tested. 

Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. 

J. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. Prepare and 

submit test and inspection reports. 



K. Integrated System Test. Prepare and submit a written procedure for the integrated system test 

for approval. The Integrated System Test shall be in accordance with ASME N511 and ASME 

AG-1, Section TA-4900 “Integrated System Tests”, perform tests on the fans in accordance 

with Section TA-4910, dampers in accordance with Section TA-4920, and HEPA filter housings 

in accordance with TA-4940. Submit the test results in accordance with Section TA-6300 

“Documentation”. 

L. At the conclusion of the Integrated System Test, final prefilters, and HEPA filters shall be 

installed in the housings and the HEPA Filter bank In-Place leak test procedure shall be 

performed. Prepare and submit a written procedure for the In-Place Leak testing in Accordance 

with ASME N511 and ASME AG-1 Appendix TA-VI. Perform the test in accordance with 

ASME N511 and ASME AG-1 Article TA-VI-4000, submit the test results in accordance with 

ASME AG-1 Section TA-6300 “Documentation”. 

3.9 DUCT CLEANING 

A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. 

B. Use service openings for entry and inspection. 

1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if 

required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch 

insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with 

Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors. 

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 

3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process. 

C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control: 

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 

percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles. 

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from 

HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points 

of entry into building. 

D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 

2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply 

and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive 

assemblies. 

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, 

condensate drain pans, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 

4. Coils and related components. 

5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and 

mechanical equipment rooms. 

6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 

7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems. 

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 



1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants 

from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect 

vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under 

negative pressure. 

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without 

damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. 

4. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. 

Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and 

straighten fins. 

5. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. 

6. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if 

fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written 

instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris. 

3.10 START UP 

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and 

Balancing for HVAC." 

3.11 DUCT SCHEDULE 

A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows: 

1. Exhaust Ducts: stainless steel type 304 or 304L. 

B. Supply Ducts: 

1. Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch w.g. 

2. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. 

3. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. 

4. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 12. 

C. Return Ducts: 

1. Pressure Class: Negative 3-inch w.g. 




D. Exhaust Ducts: 

1. Fabrication pressure classification 20 inches w.g., negative pressure, Class 1. 

2. Normal operating pressure 10 inches w.g., negative pressure. 

3. Leak Test pressure 12.5 inches w.g., negative pressure. 

4. Structural Capability Test pressure 15 inches w.g., negative pressure. 

5. Seal duct seams and joints in accordance to the duct pressure classification as described 

in AG-1, Article SA-4300. All joints and seams shall be welded construction with 

flanged joints and gaskets and flanged joints and gaskets at connections to flanged 

equipment and dampers. 



E. Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts: 

1. Pressure Class: Negative 3-inch w.g. 




F. Intermediate Reinforcement: 

1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel. 

2. Stainless-Steel Ducts: 

a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material. 

b. Not Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material. 

G. Elbow Configuration: 

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - 

Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows." 

a. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct 

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane 

Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 

2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal 

and Flexible," Figure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows." 

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with 

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3- 

1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have 

proportionately fewer segments. 

1) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5. 

H. Branch Configuration: 

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - 

Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-6, "Branch Connections." 

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. 

b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in. 

2. Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and 

Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees." 

Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. 


a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. 

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. 

c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral. 



SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Manual volume dampers. 

2. Control dampers. 

3. Fire dampers. 

4. Combination fire and smoke dampers. 

5. Counterbalanced Backdraft dampers 

6. Flange connectors. 

7. Turning vanes. 

8. Duct-mounted access doors. 


10. Duct accessory hardware. 


1. Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" for duct-mounted fire and smoke 

detectors. 



1. Manual volume dampers. 

2. Control dampers. 

3. Fire dampers. 

4. Combination fire and smoke dampers 

5. Counterbalanced Backdraft dampers. 

6. Flange connectors. 

7. Turning vanes. 

8. Duct-mounted access doors. 


10. Duct accessory hardware 


1. Product Data for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation indicating that units comply with 

ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment." 



C. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and 


1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. 

Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field 

assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following: 

a. Fire-damper and combination fire smoke damper installations, including sleeves; 

and duct-mounted access doors and remote damper operators. 

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and 


E. Test and Inspection Reports: Submit ASME AG-1 Inspection reports, Leak test reports, 

Structural Capability test reports, and seat and frame leakage test reports. 


A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with 

NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." 

B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating. 




1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed. 


A. Store materials in a dry area indoors, protected from damage and in accordance with 


B. Package and ship ASME AG-1 dampers per the requirements of ASME AG-1 Article DA-7000 

and in accordance with ASME NQA-1, Protection Level B. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for 

acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise 

indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, 

discolorations, and other imperfections. 



B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 

2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized. 

C. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, and having a No. 2B 

finish. 

D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: 

1. Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; 

compatible materials carbon steel bars and shapes meeting the requirements of ASTM 

A36, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123, G90 coating, or galvanized sheet steel 

meeting the requirements of ASTM A 653/A 653M G90 coating. 

2. Stainless-steel reinforcement where installed on stainless-steel; Stainless steel bars and 

shapes meeting the requirements of ASTM A276 Type 304 or 304L, and sheet meeting 

the requirements of ASTM A 240/A 240M or A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 304L. 

E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch 

minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 

2.2 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS 

A. Low-Leakage, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 




a. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 

b. McGill AirFlow LLC. 

c. Nailor Industries Inc. 

d. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. 

e. Ruskin Company. 

f. Trox USA Inc. 

2. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified 

Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage. 

3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 

4. Frames: 

a. Channel shaped. 

b. Galvanized-steel channels, 0.064 inch thick. 

c. Mitered and welded corners. 

d. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 

5. Blades: 

a. Multiple or single blade. 

b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. 



c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. 

d. Galvanized, roll-formed steel, 0.064 inch thick. 

6. Blade Axles: Stainless steel or Nonferrous metal. 

7. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze or Molded synthetic. 

8. Blade Seals: Neoprene. 

9. Jamb Seals: Cambered stainless steel. 

10. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. 

11. Accessories: 

a. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without 

vibration. 

2.3 MANUAL VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS (EXHAUST SYSTEM) 



1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 

2. Flanders-CSC 

3. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 

4. Ruskin Company. 

B. Dampers shall meet the requirements of ASME AG-1 Section DA “Dampers and Louvers”. 

Frame Leakage class (zero leakage) and blade leakage class II (moderate leakage) rating in 

accordance with ASME AG-1 Appendix DA-I, with linkage outside the airstream and bearing 

AMCA’s Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage. 

C. Dampers shall be designed for a minimum pressure of minus 20-in w.g. 

D. Frames: Steel Channel, material shall be stainless steel Type 304 or 304L and be listed in 

ASME AG-1 Table DA-3110. 

E. Blades: Fabricated of the same material as the frame, minimum ¼-in. thick. 

F. Bearings: Grease lubricated ball bearings mounted outboard of the damper frame. 

G. Shaft: Continuous, stainless steel. 

H. Shaft seals: external adjustable double packing gland shaft seal. 

I. Provide with lockable hand quadrant. 

J. Visual Inspection. 

1. Perform a Visual Inspection in accordance with ASME AG-1 Section DA-5200 and 

Section TA-4220. Submit Visual Inspection procedures and reports. 

K. Structural Capability Test: 



1. Perform a Structural Capability test of each completed damper assembly to minus 15.0 

in. w.g in accordance with ASME AG-1 Section DA-5500, Section TA-4231, and Section 

TA-4232 on the completed damper frame and blade prior to the final pressure decay leak 

test. Submit certifications of the Structural Capability test. 

L. Pressure Decay Leak Test: 

1. Factory leak test each completed damper assembly to minus 12.5 in. w.g. in accordance 

with ASME AG-1 Section DA-5130, Section DA-5141, Section TA-4233, Section TA- 

4234, and Section TA-4235. Frame leak test acceptance criteria, damper shall be leakage 

class (zero leakage) and seat leakage acceptance criteria shall be Leakage Class II at 

design pressure in accordance with ASME AG-1 Appendix DA-I. Rectify and retest any 

deficiency and work affected by such deficiency. 

M. Submit Seat leakage, frame leakage, and pressure drop ratings in accordance with ASME AG-1 

Section DA-4130. 

N. Submit documentation required by ASME AG-1 subsection DA-4212.2 

O. Submit certifications of materials in accordance with ASME AG-1 Section DA-3300. 

2.4 CONTROL DAMPERS 





3. McGill AirFlow LLC. 

4. METALAIRE, Inc. 

5. Nailor Industries Inc. 


B. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal 

for both air performance and air leakage. 

C. Frames: 

1. Hat Channel shaped. 

2. Galvanized-steel channels, 0.064 inch thick. 

3. Mitered and welded corners. 

D. Blades: 

1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches. 

2. Parallel blade design. 

3. Galvanized steel. 

4. 0.064 inch thick. 

5. Blade Edging: PVC coated polyester locked into blade edge. 

6. Jamb Seals: Flexible metal compression type. 



E. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch-diameter; stainless steel or nonferrous metal; blade-linkage hardware of 

zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings. 


F. Bearings: 

1. Molded synthetic. 

G. Motor Operator: 

1. Provide factory installed electric actuators as scheduled on Drawings. 

2.5 FIRE DAMPERS 






4. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. 


B. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL. 

C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm velocity. 

D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours. 

E. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream except where indicated and when located 

behind grille where blades may be inside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inchthick 

galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners. 

F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel. 

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch thick, as indicated, and of length to suit 

application. 

2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of 

perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must 

comply with sleeve requirements. 

G. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated. 

H. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inchthick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of 

interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inchthick, galvanized-steel blade connectors. 

I. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring. 

J. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links. 



2.6 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS 






B. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 and UL 555S by an NRTL. 

C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm velocity. 

D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours. 

E. Heat-Responsive Device: Electric resettable link and switch package, factory installed, rated. 

F. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection. 

G. Frame: Multiple-blade type; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inchthick galvanized steel; 

with mitered and interlocking corners. 

H. Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking, 0.034-inchthick, galvanized sheet steel. In 

place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inchthick, galvanized-steel blade 

connectors. 

I. Leakage: Class I. 

J. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions. 

K. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inchthick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit 

wall or floor application with factory-furnished silicone calking. 

L. Damper Motors: two-position action. 

M. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and 

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor 





devices and connections specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control 

for HVAC." 

3. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear 

trains. 

4. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated. 

Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or 

adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating 

of 150 in. x lbf. 

5. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz. 



N. Accessories: 

1. Auxiliary switches for position indication. 

2. Momentary test switch remote mounted. 

2.7 COUNTERBALANCED BACKDRAFT DAMPERS 






B. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal 

for both air performance and air leakage. 

C. Frames: 

1. 8 inches by 2 inch flange channel. 

2. Type 304 Stainless-steel channels, min 14 ga (0.075 inch thick). 

3. Mitered and welded corners. 

4. Bolt Holes both flanges 

D. Blades: 

1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 7 inches. 

2. Parallel blade design. 

3. Type 304 Stainless steel. 

4. 16 ga (0.059 inch thick). 

5. Blade Edging: EPDM mechanically attached blade edge. 

6. Jamb Seals: Fitted with EPDM seal located directly behind blade edge. 

E. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch-diameter; stainless steel or nonferrous metal; blade-linkage hardware of 

zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings. 


F. Counterbalance located out of airstream. 

G. Bearings: 

1. Ball bearings pressed into frame. 

H. Performance Data: 

1. Maximum System Pressure: 10 inches w.g. 

2. Maximum System Velocity: 3,000 feet per minute. 

3. Leakage with Seals: Based on pressure differential of 1 inch w.g. 

a. Percent of Maximum Flow: 0.57. 

b. Leakage 17 cfm/ft 2 . 



2.8 FLANGE CONNECTORS (SUPPLY AND RETURN SYSTEM) 




2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc. 

3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. 

B. Description: Add-On or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, 

gaskets, and components. 

C. Material: Galvanized steel. 

D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork. 

2.9 TURNING VANES 




2. Duro Dyne Inc. 

3. METALAIRE, Inc. 

4. SEMCO Incorporated. 


B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support 

with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. 

C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal 

and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 

D. Vane Construction: Single wall. 

2.10 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS 




2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 


4. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 




8. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. 

9. Ventfabrics, Inc. 




B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct 

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," 

and 2-11, "Access Panels - Round Duct." 

1. Door: 

a. Double wall, rectangular. 

b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct 

pressure class. 

c. Vision panel. 

d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. 

e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. 

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 

3. Number of Hinges and Locks: 

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. 

b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. 

2.11 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS (SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCT) 




2. Duro Dyne Inc. 

3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 


B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics. 

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. 

D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3 inches wide attached to 2 

strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inchthick, galvanized sheet steel. 

E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 

1. Minimum Weight: 30 oz./sq. yd. 

2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 

3. Service Temperature: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F. 

2.12 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE 

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap 

and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to 

suit duct-insulation thickness. 



B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline 

and grease. 



A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct 

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts. 

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in 

galvanized-steel and stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel 

C. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend 

from larger ducts. 

D. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. 

E. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. 

F. Install fire dampers according to UL listing. 

G. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining 

accessories and equipment at the following locations: 

1. Adjacent to and close enough to fire dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access 

doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief 

access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from 

dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers. 

2. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing. 

3. Upstream from turning vanes. 

4. Control devices requiring inspection. 

5. Elsewhere as indicated. 

H. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. 

I. Access Door Sizes and as shown on Drawings: 

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 

2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 

3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 

J. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and 

Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door. 

K. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. 

L. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with 

loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps. 



M. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. 


A. Tests and Inspections: 

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 

2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be 

performed. 

3. Operate fire dampers and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of 

movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed. 

4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. 




SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Ceiling Diffusers. 

2. Drum louvers. 

3. Adjustable bar grilles. 

4. Fixed face grilles. 


1. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volumecontrol 

dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following: 

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and 

performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings. 


2.1 CEILING DIFFUSERS 

A. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers S-5: 


indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 

a. A-J Manufacturing Co., Inc. 

b. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company. 

c. Hart & Cooley Inc. 

d. Krueger. 

e. METALAIRE, Inc. 

f. Nailor Industries Inc. 

g. Price Industries. 

h. Titus. 

i. Tuttle & Bailey. 



2. Material: Steel. 

3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 

4. Face Size: 12 by 12 inches. 

5. Face Style: Four cone. 

6. Mounting: Surface. 

7. Pattern: Fixed. 

8. Dampers: Radial opposed blade. 

2.2 HIGH-CAPACITY DIFFUSERS 

A. Drum Louver S-1: 



a. Air Research Diffuser Products, Inc. 



d. Krueger. 




h. Titus. 


2. Airflow Principle: Extended distance for high airflow rates. 

3. Material: Aluminum, heavy gage extruded. 

4. Finish: White baked acrylic. 

5. Border: 1-1/4-inch width with countersunk screw holes. 

6. Gasket between drum and border. 

7. Body: Drum shaped; adjustable vertically. 

8. Blades: Individually adjustable horizontally. 

9. Mounting: Surface to duct. 


a. Opposed-blade steel damper. 

b. Duct-mounting collars with countersunk screw holes. 

2.3 REGISTERS AND GRILLES 

A. Adjustable Bar Grille S-2, S-3, and S-4: 






d. Krueger. 






h. Titus. 


2. Material: Steel 

3. Finish: Baked enamel, white 

4. Face Blade Arrangement: Horizontal spaced 3/4 inch apart. 

5. Core Construction: Integral. 

6. Rear-Blade Arrangement: Vertical spaced 3/4 inch apart. 

7. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide. 

8. Mounting: Countersunk screw. 

9. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade. 

B. Fixed Face Grille R-1, R-2, R-3, and R-4: 






d. Krueger. 




h. Titus. 


2. Material: Steel 

3. Finish: Baked enamel, white 

4. Face Blade Arrangement: Fixed 0° deflection Horizontal spaced 3/4 inch apart. 




8. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade. 

C. Fixed Face Grille E-1 and E-2: 






d. Krueger. 




h. Titus. 


2. Material: Stainless Steel 



3. Finish: #3 Satin 

4. Face Blade Arrangement: Fixed 45° deflection Horizontal spaced 1/2 inch apart. 




8. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade 


A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, 

"Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." 



A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with 

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of 

equipment. 



A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb. 

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, 

and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design 

requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make 

final locations where indicated, as much as practical. Where architectural features or other 

items conflict with installation, notify Engineer for a determination of final location. 

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and 

maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 


A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, 

before starting air balancing. 




SECTION 234100 - PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes factory-fabricated air-filter devices and media used to remove particulate 

matter from air for HVAC applications. 


A. Product Data: Include dimensions; operating characteristics; required clearances and access; 

rated flow capacity, including initial and final pressure drop at rated airflow; efficiency and test 

method; fire classification; furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated. 


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air filters 

and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product 


B. Comply with ARI 850. 

C. Comply with ASHRAE 52.2 for method of testing and rating air-filter units. 

D. Comply with NFPA 70 for installing electrical components. 

E. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. 





1. Air Filters: 

a. AAF International. 



b. Farr Co. 

c. Flanders Filters, Inc. 

2.2 DISPOSABLE PANEL FILTERS 

A. Description: Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel-type, disposable air filters. 

B. Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive and anti-microbial agent. 

C. Frame: Cardboard frame. 

D. UL Class 2. 

E. Sizes and efficiency as Scheduled on Drawings 

2.3 EXTENDED-SURFACE, DISPOSABLE PANEL FILTERS 

A. Description: Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface filters. 

B. Media: Fibrous material formed into deep-V-shaped pleats with anti-microbial agent and held 

by self-supporting wire grid. 

C. Media and Media-Grid Frame: Nonflammable cardboard. 


E. Sizes and efficiency as Scheduled on Drawings. 

2.4 EXTENDED-SURFACE DISPOSABLE PANEL FILTERS (HEPA PREFILTERS) 

A. Description: Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface filters. 

B. Media: Fibrous material formed into deep-V-shaped pleats with anti-microbial agent and held 

by corrugated aluminum separators. 

C. Media and Media-Grid Frame: Nonflammable galvanized steel headers and sides. 


E. Sizes, 24” x 24” x 6” deep, Minimum MERV 13 (average dust spot efficiency 80 percent), 6 

filters required. 



A. Install filter frames according to manufacturer's written instructions. 



B. Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter 

holding frames to substrate. 

C. Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air. 

D. Coordinate filter installations with duct and air-handling unit installations. 


A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling and airdistribution 

systems, clean filter housings and install new filter media. 




SECTION 235100 - BREECHINGS AND STACKS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Single-wall free standing exhaust stack. 

B. Contractor not responsible for Buyer Furnished Equipment, which includes the following: 

1. Stack Instrumentation. 



1. KW Annex Exhaust Stack. 

2. Connectors. 

B. Shop Drawings: For stack. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other 

work. 

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required 

clearances, components, hangers, and location and size of each field connection. 

2. Exhaust Stack drawings shall be signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer 

responsible for their design. 

C. Welding certificates. 

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL 


with ASME-NQA-1, as approved by the Owner and described in Section 014000, Quality 


B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural 

Welding Code--Stainless Steel," for the stack base and AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal 

Welding Code," for shop welding of joints and seams in breechings and stack. 





A. Alternate products may be accepted; follow Section 012513, Product Substitution Procedures. 

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EXHAUST STACK 

A. The building exhaust stack is freestanding and without access ladder and platform. See 

Drawings for elevation, diameter, sample port locations and breech information. 

B. Fabricate stack, stack breaching, and stack base from Type 304 or 304L stainless steel sheet or 

plate, meeting the requirements of ASTM A 240/ A 240M. 

1. Equal to or Less Than 16 Inches in Diameter: 0.125 inch. 

2. Larger Than 16 inches in Diameter: 0.1875 inch. 

C. Fabricate stack reinforcement and flanged connections from stainless steel bars, and shapes 

Type 304 or 304L, meeting the requirements of ASTM A 276. 

D. Fasteners for the primary stack connections shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 193, nuts 

shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 194, washers shall be 300 series stainless steel. 

E. Stack shall have a false bottom for the collection of rain water. False bottom can be flat plate or 

elliptical head type with a low point drain. Drain pipe will be routed so that it is accessible from 

the outside of the stack structure. Drain connection will be 1 inch schedule 40 NPT threaded 

with pipe material compatible with stack. 

F. Nozzles shall be Type 304 or 304L minimum schedule 10S pipe meeting the requirements of 

ASTM A 312 with Class 150 slip-on flanges meeting the requirements of ASTM A 182/A 

182M. 

G. Design, fabricate, and inspect stack in accordance with SMACNA “Guide for Steel Stack 

Construction” and ASME STS-1. Where there are conflicts, ASME STS-1 shall govern. 

1. Seismic and wind loading: In accordance with Section 230548, Section Vibration and 

Seismic Controls for HVAC, Piping, and Equipment. 



A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements. 


A. After completing fabrication, remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris. 



B. Clean external surfaces to remove welding slag and mill film. 

C. Provide temporary sheet metal covers at ends of breechings, and stack sections during 

transportation and storage. 




SECTION 235213 - ELECTRIC BOILERS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes packaged, factory-fabricated and -assembled electric boilers, trim, and 

accessories for generating hot water. 


A. Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and 

accessories. 

B. Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, 

details, and attachments to other work. 




C. Source quality-control test reports. 


E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For boilers, components, and accessories to include in 


F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 

G. Other Informational Submittals: 

1. ASME Stamp Certification and Report: Submit "A," "S," or "PP" stamp certificate of 

authorization, as required by authorities having jurisdiction, and document hydrostatic 

testing of piping external to boiler. 

2. Startup service reports. 






intended use. 

B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure 

Vessel Code. 

C. NFPA Compliance: Design and fabricate boilers to comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical 

Code," Article 424, Paragraphs G and H. 

D. UL Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with UL 834, "Heating, Water Supply, and Power 

Boilers--Electric." Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to 


1.5 WARRANTY 


replace pressure vessels of boilers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified 


1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. 



A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product 


1. Acme Engineering Prod. Inc. 

2. Bryan Steam, LLC. 

3. Cleaver-Brooks; div. of Aqua-Chem, Inc. 

4. Fulton Boiler Works, Inc. 

5. Lattner Boiler Manufacturing. 

6. Lochinvar Corporation. 

7. Patterson-Kelley. 

8. Precision Boilers. 

9. PVI Industries, LLC. 

10. RECO USA. 

11. Reimers Electra Steam, Inc. 

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS 

A. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -tested electric boilers with trim and controls 

necessary to generate hot water. 



B. Pressure Vessel: Carbon-steel pressure vessel mounted on structural-steel base. 

C. Nozzles: Threaded for water inlet and outlet and heating element inserts; threaded connections 

for trim and controls. 

D. Insulation: Minimum 4-inchthick, glass-fiber insulation. 

E. Jacket: Galvanized sheet metal casing with baked-enamel or powder-coated protective finish 

and removable panels with snap-in or interlocking closures for access to pressure vessel. 

F. Lifting Lugs: Welded to pressure vessel, extending above jacket. 

G. Heating Elements: Incoloy-sheathed, replaceable electric-resistance element, rated 20 kW 

maximum, with maximum 50 W/sq. in. over heat-transfer length. 

H. Mounting base to secure boiler to concrete floor. 

2.3 TRIM 

A. Include devices sized to comply with ANSI B31.9, Building Services Piping." 

B. Aquastat Controllers: Operating auto-reset high limit. 

C. Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated. 

D. Pressure and Temperature Gage: Minimum 3-1/2-inch- diameter, combination water-pressure 

and -temperature gage. Gages shall have operating-pressure and -temperature ranges so normal 

operating range is about 50 percent of full range. 

E. Boiler Air Vent: Manual. 

F. Dip-tube in water outlet. 

G. Drain Valve: Minimum NPS 3/4 hose-end ball valve sized per requirements of authorities 

having jurisdiction. 

2.4 CONTROLS 

A. Boiler operating controls shall include the following devices and features: 

1. Control transformer. 

2. Step controller. 

3. Recycling relay returns controller to off position after power failure. 

4. Multistage thermostat. 

5. Control circuit switch. 

6. Visual indication for each step. 

7. Supply-voltage indicator. 

8. Set-Point Adjust: Set points shall be adjustable. 

9. Operating Level Control: Factory wired and mounted to cycle feedwater pump(s) for 

makeup water control. 



10. Sequence of Operation: Electric, factory-fabricated and field-installed panel to control 

element sequence controller to maintain supply-water temperature. Set supply-water 

temperature at 120 deg F. 

B. Safety Controls: To maintain safe operating conditions, safety controls limit boiler operation. 

1. High Cutoff: Manual reset stops boiler if operating conditions rise above set point or 

maximum boiler design temperature. 

2. Low-Water Cutoff Switch: Electronic probe shall prevent boiler operation on low water. 

Cutoff switch shall be manual-reset type. 

3. Audible Alarm: Factory mounted on control panel with silence switch; shall sound alarm 

for above conditions. 

C. Building Management System Interface: Factory install hardware and software to enable 

building management system to monitor, control, and display boiler status and alarms. 

1. Hardwired Points: 

a. Monitoring: On/off status, common trouble alarm. 

b. Control: On/off operation, hot water supply temperature set-point adjustment. 

2.5 ELECTRICAL POWER 

A. Single-Point Field Power Connection: Factory-installed and -wired switches, transformers, and 

electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-point field power connection to boiler. 

1. Field power interface shall be to nonfused disconnect switch. 

2. Interlock with door to de-energize power with door open. 

B. Electrical Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure with hinged door and key-locking handle. 

C. Comply with NFPA 70. 

1. Electrical Circuits: 48 A, maximum. 

D. Connectors: Mechanical lugs bolted to copper bus bars or distribution blocks with pressure 

connectors. 

E. Fuses: NEMA FU 1, Class J or K5; 60 A, maximum. 

F. Contactors: 3-pole magnetic contactors, listed for 500,000 cycles at full load. 

G. Factory-wired internal control devices and heating elements. 

1. Wiring shall be numbered and color coded to match the wiring diagram. 

2.6 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS AND AS SCHEDULED ON DRAWINGS 

A. Heating Medium: Hot water, 40% propylene glycol. 



B. Design Pressure Rating: 160 psig. 

C. Safety Relief Valve Setting: 100 psig. 

D. Entering-Water Temperature: 105 deg F. 

E. Leaving-Water Temperature: 120 deg F. 

F. Design Water Flow Rate: 58 gpm. 

G. Design Pressure Drop: 5.0 ft water column. 

H. Output Capacity: 120 kW. 

I. Electrical Characteristics: 

1. kilowatts: 120 

2. Volts: 480 V. 

3. Phase: Three. 

4. Hertz: 60. 


A. Test and inspect factory-assembled boilers, before shipping, according to ASME Boiler and 

Pressure Vessel Code. 

B. Hydrostatic Test: Factory test assembled boiler including hydrostatic test. 

C. Allow Owner access to source quality-control testing of boilers. Notify Engineer 14 days in 

advance of testing. 



A. Before boiler installation, examine roughing-in for anchor-bolt sizes and locations, and piping 

and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting boiler 

performance, maintenance, and operations. 

1. Final boiler locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations 

before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections. 

B. Examine mechanical spaces, including required space for element removal, for suitable 

conditions where boilers will be installed. 




3.2 BOILER INSTALLATION 

A. Install boilers level on concrete floor. 

B. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted. 


A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate 

general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 

B. Install piping adjacent to boiler to allow service and maintenance. 

C. Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or 

flange at each connection. 

D. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain. 

E. Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at least 

full size of connection. Provide an isolation valve if required. 

F. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical 

Systems." 

G. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors 

and Cables." 


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to 

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and 

to assist in testing. 


1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

2. Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and 

equipment. 

a. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low-limit safety set 

points of water level and water temperature. 

b. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. 




D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, 


two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 

E. Performance Tests: 

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect component assemblies and 

equipment installations, including connections, and to conduct performance testing. 

2. Boilers shall comply with performance requirements indicated, as determined by field 

performance tests. Adjust, modify, or replace equipment in order to comply. 

3. Perform field performance tests to determine the capacity of boilers. 

4. Repeat tests until results comply with requirements indicated. 

5. Provide analysis equipment required to determine performance. 

6. Provide temporary equipment and system modifications necessary to dissipate the heat 

produced during tests if building systems are not adequate. 

7. Notify Engineer in advance of test dates. 

8. Document test results in a report and submit to Engineer. 



adjust, operate, and maintain boilers. 




SECTION 236423 - SCROLL HEAT PUMP CHILLERS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Packaged, air-cooled, electric-motor-driven, scroll heat pump chillers. 


A. COP: Coefficient of performance. The ratio of the rate of heat removal to the rate of energy 

input using consistent units for any given set of rating conditions. 

B. EER: Energy-efficiency ratio. The ratio of the cooling capacity given in terms of Btu/h to the 

total power input given in terms of watts at any given set of rating conditions. 

C. IPLV: Integrated part-load value. A single number part-load efficiency figure of merit 

calculated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and referenced to ARI standard rating 

conditions. 

D. kW/Ton: The ratio of total power input of the chiller in kilowatts to the net refrigerating 

capacity in tons at any given set of rating conditions. 

E. NPLV: Nonstandard part-load value. A single number part-load efficiency figure of merit 

calculated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and intended for operating conditions other 

than the ARI standard rating conditions. 


A. Seismic Performance: Scroll heat pump chillers shall withstand the effects of earthquake 

motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7. 




A. Product Data: Include refrigerant, rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished 

specialties, and accessories. 



1. Performance at ARI standard conditions and at conditions indicated. 

2. Performance at ARI standard unloading conditions. 

3. Minimum evaporator flow rate. 

4. Refrigerant capacity of heat pump chiller. 

5. Oil capacity of heat pump chiller. 

6. Fluid capacity of evaporator. 

7. Characteristics of safety relief valves. 

8. Minimum entering condenser air temperature in the cooling mode. 

9. Maximum entering condenser air temperature in the cooling mode. 

10. Minimum entering condenser air temperature in the heating mode. 

11. Maximum entering condenser air temperature in the heating mode. 

12. Heating and Cooling performance at varying capacity with constant design entering 

condenser-air temperature. Repeat performance at varying capacity for different entering 

condenser-air temperatures from design to minimum in 10 deg F increments. 


1. Product Data for Credit EA 4: Documentation required by Credit EA 4 indicating that 

equipment and refrigerants comply. 

C. Shop Drawings: Complete set of manufacturer's prints of heat pump chiller assemblies, control 

panels, sections and elevations, and unit isolation. Include the following: 

1. Assembled unit dimensions. 

2. Weight and load distribution. 

3. Required clearances for maintenance and operation. 

4. Size and location of piping and wiring connections. 


D. Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article. 

E. Source quality-control test reports. 

F. Startup service reports. 

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each heat pump chiller to include in emergency, 


H. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 


A. ARI Certification: Certify chiller according to ARI 590 certification program. 

B. ARI Rating: Rate heat pump chiller performance according to requirements in ARI 550/590, 

"Water Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle." 

C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, 

Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning." 



D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and stamp heat pump chiller heat exchangers to comply with 

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 

E. Comply with NFPA 70. 


A. Ship heat pump chillers from the factory fully charged with refrigerant and filled with oil. 

B. Package heat pump chiller for export shipping. 



1.9 WARRANTY 


replace components of heat pump chillers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified 

period. 

1. Compressor Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 


2.1 PACKAGED AIR-COOLED HEAT PUMP CHILLERS 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product 


1. Motivair MHP-A-3000. 

B. Description: Factory-assembled and run-tested heat pump chiller complete with base and 

frame, condenser casing, compressors, compressor motors and motor controllers, evaporator, 

condenser coils, condenser fans and motors, electrical power, controls, and accessories. 

C. Cabinet: 

1. Base: Galvanized-steel base extending the perimeter of heat pump chiller. Secure frame, 

compressors, and evaporator to base to provide a single-piece unit. 

2. Frame: Rigid galvanized-steel frame secured to base and designed to support cabinet, 

condenser, control panel, and other chiller components not directly supported from base. 

3. Casing: Galvanized steel. 

4. Finish: Coat base, frame, and casing with a corrosion-resistant coating capable of 

withstanding a 500-hour salt-spray test according to ASTM B 117. 

D. Compressors: 



1. Description: Positive-displacement, scroll, direct drive with hermetically sealed casing. 

2. Minimum three compressors. 

3. Each compressor provided with suction and discharge service valves, crankcase oil 

heater, and suction strainer. 

4. Operating Speed: Nominal 3600 rpm for 60-Hz applications. 

5. Capacity Control: On-off compressor cycling. 

6. Oil Lubrication System: Sight glass, filling connection, filter with magnetic plug, and 

initial oil charge. 

7. Vibration Isolation: Mount individual compressors on vibration isolators. 

E. Compressor Motors: 

1. Hermetically sealed and cooled by refrigerant suction gas. 

2. High-torque, two-pole induction type with inherent thermal-overload protection on each 

phase. 

F. Compressor Motor Controllers: 

1. Across the Line: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, nonreversing. 

G. Refrigeration: 

1. Refrigerant: R-410a. Classified as Safety Group A1 according to ASHRAE 34. 

2. Refrigerant Compatibility: Parts exposed to refrigerants shall be fully compatible with 

refrigerants, and pressure components shall be rated for refrigerant pressures. 

3. Refrigerant Circuit: Each circuit shall include a thermal-expansion valve, refrigerant 

charging connections, a hot-gas muffler, compressor suction and discharge shutoff 

valves, a liquid-line shutoff valve, a replaceable-core two way filter-dryer, a sight glass 

with moisture indicator, a liquid-line solenoid valve, and an insulated suction line. 

4. Refrigerant Isolation: Factory install positive shutoff isolation valves in the compressor 

discharge line and the refrigerant liquid-line to allow the isolation and storage of the 

refrigerant charge in the chiller condenser. 

5. Anti-freeze unit heater for heat pump operation protection. 

6. Four way refrigerant reversing valve. 

H. Evaporator: 

1. Brazed-plate design, as indicated. 

2. Brazed Plate: 

a. Direct-expansion, single-pass, brazed-plate design. 

b. Type 316 stainless-steel construction. 

c. Code Compliance: Tested and stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure 

Vessel Code. 

d. Fluid Nozzles: Terminate with mechanical-coupling end connections for 

connection to field piping. 

3. Heater: Factory-installed and -wired electric heater with integral controls designed to 

protect the evaporator to minus 20 deg F. 



I. Air-Cooled Condenser: 

1. Plate-fin coil with integral subcooling on each circuit, rated at 450 psig. 

a. Construct coils of copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum fins. 

2. Fans: Direct-drive, variable speed, propeller type with statically and dynamically 

balanced fan blades, arranged for vertical air discharge. 

3. Fan Motors: Totally enclosed nonventilating (TENV) or totally enclosed air over 

(TEAO) enclosure, with permanently lubricated bearings, and having built-in 

overcurrent- and thermal-overload protection. 

4. Fan Guards: Steel safety guards with corrosion-resistant coating. 

J. Electrical Power: 

1. Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor controllers, transformers, and other 

electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-point field power connection to heat 

pump chiller. 

2. House in a unit-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure with hinged access door with 

lock and key or padlock and key. 

3. Wiring shall be numbered and color-coded to match wiring diagram. 

4. Field power interface shall be to NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, nonfused disconnect switch. 

5. Provide branch power circuit to each motor and to controls with one of the following 

disconnecting means: 

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, fusible switch with rejection-type fuse clips rated for 

fuses. Select and size fuses to provide Type 2 protection according to IEC 60947- 

4-1. 

b. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, nonfusible switch. 

c. NEMA AB 1, motor-circuit protector (circuit breaker) with field-adjustable, shortcircuit 

trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes. 

6. Provide each motor with overcurrent protection. 

7. Overload relay sized according to UL 1995, or an integral component of heat pump 

chiller control microprocessor. 

8. Phase-Failure and Undervoltage: Solid-state sensing with adjustable settings. 

9. Provide power factor correction capacitors to correct power factor to 0.95 at full load. 

10. Transformer: Unit-mounted transformer with primary and secondary fuses and sized 

with enough capacity to operate electrical load plus spare capacity. 

a. Power unit-mounted controls where indicated. 

b. Power unit-mounted, ground fault interrupt (GFI) duplex receptacle. 

11. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays. 

12. Indicate the following for heat pump chiller electrical power supply: 

a. Current, phase to phase, for all three phases. 

b. Voltage, phase to phase and phase to neutral for all three phases. 

c. Three-phase real power (kilowatts). 

d. Three-phase reactive power (kilovolt amperes reactive). 

e. Power factor. 



K. Controls: 

f. Running log of total power versus time (kilowatt hours). 

g. Fault log, with time and date of each. 

1. Stand-alone, microprocessor or programmable logic controller (PLC) based. 

2. Enclosure: Share enclosure with electrical power devices or provide a separate enclosure 

of matching construction. 

3. Operator Interface: Keypad or pressure-sensitive touch screen. Multiple-character, 

backlit, liquid-crystal display or light-emitting diodes. Display the following: 

a. Date and time. 

b. Operating or alarm status. 

c. General alarm relay. 

d. Low water temperature alarm. 

e. High/low refrigerant pressure alarm. 

f. Anti-freeze alarm. 

g. Low water flow alarm. 

h. PLC malfunction alarm. 

i. Compressor overload alarm. 

j. Outside-air temperature if required for chilled and heating-water reset. 

k. Temperature and pressure of operating set points. 

l. Entering and leaving temperatures of chilled and heating water. 

m. Refrigerant pressures in evaporator and condenser. 

n. Saturation temperature in evaporator and condenser. 

o. No cooling or heating load conditions. 

p. Elapsed time meter (compressor run status). 

q. Pump status. 

r. Antirecycling timer status. 

s. Percent of maximum motor amperage. 

t. Current-limit set point. 

u. Number of compressor starts. 

4. Control Functions: 

a. Manual or automatic startup and shutdown time schedule. 

b. Entering and leaving chilled-water temperatures, control set points, and motor load 

limit. Chilled or heating-water leaving temperature shall be reset based on outsideair 

temperature. 

c. Current limit and demand limit. 

d. External heat pump chiller emergency stop. 

e. Antirecycling timer. 

f. Automatic lead-lag switching. 

5. Manual-Reset Safety Controls: The following conditions shall shut down heat pump 

chiller and require manual reset: 

a. Low evaporator pressure or high condenser pressure. 

b. Low chilled-water temperature. 

c. Refrigerant high pressure. 

d. High or low oil pressure. 



e. High oil temperature. 

f. Loss of chilled-water flow. 

g. Control device failure. 

6. Building Automation System Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to 

enable building automation system to monitor, control, and display heat pump chiller 

status and alarms. Provide a Modbus communication interface. 

L. Insulation: 

a. Hardwired Points: 

1) Monitoring: On/off status, common trouble alarm. 

2) Control: On/off operation, chilled and heating-water discharge temperature 

set-point adjustment. 

1. Material: Closed-cell, flexible elastomeric, thermal insulation complying with 

ASTM C 534, Type I, for tubular materials and Type II, for sheet materials. 

2. Thickness: 3/4 inch . 

3. Factory-applied insulation over cold surfaces of heat pump chiller components. 

a. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and applied to 100 

percent of insulation contact surface. Seal seams and joints. 

4. Apply protective coating to exposed surfaces of insulation. 

M. Accessories: 

1. Factory-furnished, chilled-water flow switches for field installation. 

2. Individual compressor suction and discharge pressure gages with shutoff valves for each 

refrigeration circuit. 

3. Factory-furnished neoprene isolators for field installation. 

N. Capacities and Characteristics: and as scheduled on Drawings. 

1. Low Ambient Operation: Heat pump Chiller designed for operation in the heat pump 

mode to 15 deg F. 

2. High Ambient Operation: Heat pump Chiller designed for operation to 115 deg F. 

3. Evaporator Configuration: Integral to heat pump chiller. 

4. Evaporator Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 

5. Evaporator Fluid Type: 40% Propylene glycol Water solution. 

6. Evaporator Fouling Factor: 0.0001 sq. ft. x h x deg F/Btu. 

7. Site Altitude: 635 ft. 

8. Number of Refrigeration Circuits: One. 

9. Controls Power Connection: Fed through integral transformer. 


A. Perform functional test of heat pump chillers before shipping. 



B. Factory performance test heat pump chillers, before shipping, according to ARI 550/590, 

"Water Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle." 

1. Allow Owner access to place where heat pump chillers are being tested. Notify buyer 14 

days in advance of testing. 

C. Factory test and inspect evaporator according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: 

Section VIII, Division 1. Stamp with ASME label. 



A. Before heat pump chiller installation, examine roughing-in for equipment support, anchor-bolt 

sizes and locations, piping, and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other 

conditions affecting heat pump chiller performance, maintenance, and operations. 

1. Heat pump chiller locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact 

locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections. 


3.2 HEAT PUMP CHILLER INSTALLATION 

A. Install heat pump chillers on support structure indicated. 

B. Equipment Mounting: Install heat pump chiller on concrete bases using elastomeric pads. 

Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Comply with 

requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and 

Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 




C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. 

D. Charge heat pump chiller with refrigerant if not factory charged and fill with oil if not factory 

installed. 

E. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed. 


A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping" Drawings indicate general 

arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 

B. Install piping adjacent to chiller to allow service and maintenance. 



C. Evaporator Fluid Connections: Connect to evaporator inlet with shutoff valve, flexible 

connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to evaporator outlet with 

shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with 

pressure gage, and drain connection with valve. Make connections to heat pump chiller with a 

union, flange, or mechanical coupling. 

D. Connect each drain connection with a union and drain pipe and extend pipe, full size of 

connection, to floor drain. Provide a shutoff valve at each connection if required. 



B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical 

connections for proper assemblies, installations, and connections. 

C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and 

perform the following: 

1. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and heat pump chiller has been leak tested. 

2. Verify that pumps are installed and functional. 

3. Verify that thermometers and gages are installed. 

4. Operate heat pump chiller for run-in period. 

5. Check bearing lubrication and oil levels. 

6. Verify proper motor rotation. 

7. Verify and record performance of chilled- water flow and low-temperature interlocks. 

8. Verify and record performance of heat pump chiller protection devices. 

9. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and 

equipment. 

D. Prepare a written startup report that records results of tests and inspections. 



adjust, operate, and maintain heat pump chillers. 




SECTION 237313 - MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Constant-air-volume, single-zone air-handling units. 

2. Constant-air-volume, single-zone fan coil units. 


A. Structural Performance: Casing panels shall be self-supporting and capable of withstanding 133 

percent of internal static pressures indicated, without panel joints exceeding a deflection of 

L/240 where "L" is the unsupported span length within completed casings. 

B. Seismic Performance: Air-handling units shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions 

determined according to seismic compliance standards of the IBC sections 1621.3.3 and 

1707.7.2. 




A. Product Data: For each air-handling unit and fan coil unit indicated. 

1. Unit dimensions and weight. 

2. Cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories. 

3. Fans: 

a. Certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 

b. Certified fan-sound power ratings. 

c. Fan construction and accessories. 

d. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories. 

4. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated. 

5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 




1. Product Data for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation indicating that units comply with 

ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment." 

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For air-handling units, accessories, and components, from 

manufacturer. 







D. Source quality-control reports. 


F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-handling units to include in emergency, operation, 

and maintenance manuals. 




B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of airhandling 

units and components. 

C. ARI Certification: Air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested according to 

ARI 430, "Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and labeled by ARI. 

D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems 

and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." 

E. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1- 

2004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning." 

F. Comply with NFPA 70. 

G. Air handling units shall be cETLus safety listed that conforms to UL Standard 1995. 








1. Gaskets: One set for each access door. 

2. Fan Belts: One set for each air-handling unit fan. 


2.1 MANUFACTURERS (ECRT-AHU-501) 




1. Carrier Corporation; a member of the United Technologies Corporation Family. 

2. McQuay International as the basis of design 

3. Miller-Pickering 

4. Temtrol 

5. Trane; American Standard Inc. 

2.2 UNIT CASINGS 

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: 

1. Forming: Form walls, roofs, and floors with at least two breaks at each joint, minimum 

2” thick double wall assembly. 

2. Casing Joints: Sheet metal screws or pop rivets. 

3. Sealing: Seal all joints with water-resistant sealant. 

4. The inner and outer panels shall be fabricated of G90 Galvanized-Steel Casings minimum 

18 gauge. 

5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with 

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004. 

6. Fabricate unit with 16 gauge channel posts with panels secured with mechanical 

fasteners. 

7. All panels, access doors, and shipping sections shall be sealed with permanently applied 

bulb-type gasket. 

B. Casing Insulation and Adhesive: 

1. Materials: Minimum R-13, injected foam insulation or ASTM C 1071, Type II. 

Insulation shall carry a 25/50 rating for flame spread/smoke developed per ASTM E-84, 

UL723, and NFPA-90. 

2. Location and Application: Encased between outside and inside casing. 

C. Inspection and Access Panels and Access Doors: 



1. Panel and Door Fabrication: Formed and reinforced, double-wall and insulated panels of 

same materials and thicknesses as casing. 

2. Inspection and Access Panels: 

a. Fasteners: Two or more camlock type for panel lift-out operation. Arrangement 

shall allow panels to be opened against air-pressure differential. 

b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames. 

c. Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-handling unit's 

internal components. 

3. Access Doors: 

a. Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless-steel piano hinge and 

two wedge-lever-type latches, operable from inside and outside. Arrange doors to 

be opened against air-pressure differential. 


4. Locations and Applications: 

a. Fan Section: Doors. 

b. Access Section: Doors. 

c. Coil Section: Inspection and access panel. 

d. Damper Section: Doors. 

e. Filter Section: Door large enough to allow periodic removal and installation of 

filters. 

f. Mixing Section: Doors. 

D. Condensate Drain Pans: 

1. Fabricated with one percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from 

cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and from 

humidifiers and to direct water toward drain connection. 

a. Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with 

ASHRAE 62.1-2004. 

b. Depth: A minimum of 2 inches deep. 

2. Formed sections. 

3. Single-wall, microbial resistant coated galvanized-steel sheet. 

4. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow. 

Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan. 

a. Minimum Connection Size: NPS 1-1/4. 

E. Air-Handling-Unit Mounting Frame: Full perimeter base rail formed of galvanized-steel 

channel, or structural channel supports, designed for low deflection, welded with integral lifting 

lugs, minimum 6” high. 

1. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate mounting base and attachment to airhandling 

unit sections, accessories, and components with reinforcement strong enough to 

withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic 



Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" when air-handling unit frame is anchored to 

building structure. 

2.3 FAN, DRIVE, AND MOTOR SECTION 

A. Fan and Drive Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous 

operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower. 

1. Shafts: Designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor 

horsepower, and with field-adjustable alignment. 

a. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective 

coating of lubricating oil. 

b. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's 

speed range. 

B. Plenum Fan Housings: Steel frame and panel; fabricated without fan scroll and volute housing. 

C. Airfoil, Centrifugal Fan Wheels: Smooth-curved inlet flange, backplate, and hollow die-formed 

airfoil-shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange and backplate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub 

riveted to backplate and fastened to shaft with set screws. 

D. Fan Shaft Bearings: 

1. Grease-Lubricated Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, ball or roller bearings 

with adapter mount and two-piece, cast-iron housing with grease lines extended to 

outside unit. 

E. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning, and with 1.2 

service factor based on fan motor. 

1. Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at 

factory. 

2. Motor Pulleys: Fixed pitch. Select pulley size so pitch adjustment is at the middle of 

adjustment range at fan design conditions. 

3. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; in matched sets for multiple-belt drives. 

F. Internal Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control: Fans shall be factory mounted with 

manufacturer's standard restrained vibration isolation mounting devices having a minimum 

static deflection of 2 inches. 

G. Motor: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and 

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section 230513 "Common Motor 


1. NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1. 







4. Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on exterior of unit. 

H. Variable Frequency Controllers: 

1. Description: NEMA ICS 2, IGBT, PWM, VFC; listed and labeled as a complete unit and 

arranged to provide variable speed of an NEMA MG 1, Design B, 3-phase induction 

motor by adjusting output voltage and frequency. 

2. Output Rating: 3-phase; 6 to 66 Hz, with torque constant as speed changes. 

3. Unit Operating Requirements: 

a. Input ac voltage tolerance of 380 to 500 V, plus or minus 10 percent. 

b. Input frequency tolerance of 50/60 Hz, plus or minus 6 percent. 

c. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load. 

d. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent. 

e. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; 2.0 times the 

base load current for 3 seconds. 

f. Starting Torque: 100 percent of rated torque or as indicated. 

g. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent. 

4. Isolated control interface to allow controller to follow control signal over an 11:1 speed 

range. 

5. Internal Adjustability Capabilities: 

a. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm. 

b. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm. 

c. Acceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds. 

d. Deceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds. 

e. Current Limit: 50 to a minimum of 110 percent of maximum rating. 

6. Self-Protection and Reliability Features: 

a. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors. 

b. Undervoltage and overvoltage trips; inverter overtemperature, overload, and 

overcurrent trips. 

c. Adjustable motor overload relays capable of NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 performance. 

d. Notch filter to prevent operation of the controller-motor-load combination at a 

natural frequency of the combination. 

e. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips. 

f. Loss-of-phase protection. 

g. Reverse-phase protection. 

h. Short-circuit protection. 

i. Motor overtemperature fault. 

7. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempts three restarts after controller fault or on return of 

power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction. 

Bidirectional autospeed search shall be capable of starting into rotating loads spinning in 

either direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without damage to 

controller, motor, or load. 

8. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power 

interruption until motor has stopped. 



9. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times 

the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds. 

10. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based 

on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at 

slow speeds. 

11. Door-mounted LED status lights shall indicate the following conditions: 

a. Power on. 

b. Run. 

c. Overvoltage. 

d. Line fault. 

e. Overcurrent. 

f. External fault. 

12. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Start-stop and auto-manual selector switches with 

manual-speed-control potentiometer and elapsed time meter. 

13. Meters or digital readout devices and selector switch, mounted flush in controller door 

and connected to indicate the following controller parameters: 

a. Output frequency (Hertz). 

b. Motor speed (rpm). 

c. Motor status (running, stop, fault). 

d. Motor current (amperes). 

e. Motor torque (percent). 

f. Fault or alarming status (code). 

g. Proportional-integral-derivative (PID) feedback signal (percent). 

h. DC-link voltage (volts direct current). 

i. Set-point frequency (Hertz). 

j. Motor output voltage (volts). 

14. Control Signal Interface: 

a. Electric Input Signal Interface: A minimum of 2 analog inputs (0 to 10 V or 0/4- 

20 mA) and 6 programmable digital inputs. 

b. Remote signal inputs capable of accepting any of the following speed-setting input 

signals from the control system: 

1) 0 to 10-V dc. 

2) 0-20 or 4-20 mA. 

3) Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs. 

4) Fixed frequencies using digital inputs. 

5) RS485. 

6) Keypad display for local hand operation. 

c. Output signal interface with a minimum of 1 analog output signal (0/4-20 mA), 

which can be programmed to any of the following: 

1) Output frequency (Hertz). 

2) Output current (load). 

3) DC-link voltage (volts direct current). 

4) Motor torque (percent). 



5) Motor speed (rpm). 

6) Set-point frequency (Hertz). 

d. Remote indication interface with a minimum of 2 dry circuit relay outputs (120-V 

ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following: 

1) Motor running. 

2) Set-point speed reached. 

3) Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent). 

4) High- or low-speed limits reached. 

15. Communications: RS485 interface allows VFC to be used with an external system within 

a multidrop LAN configuration. Interface shall allow all parameter settings of VFC to be 

programmed via BMS control. Provide capability for VFC to retain these settings within 

the nonvolatile memory. 

16. Integral Disconnecting Means: NEMA KS 1, nonfusible switch with lockable handle. 


2.4 COIL SECTION 

a. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure unless otherwise 

indicated. 

b. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavyduty 

type. 

c. Standard Displays: 

1) Output frequency (Hertz). 

2) Set-point frequency (Hertz). 

3) Motor current (amperes). 

4) DC-link voltage (volts direct current). 



7) Motor output voltage (volts). 

A. General Requirements for Coil Section: 

1. Comply with ARI 410. 

2. Fabricate coil section to allow removal and replacement of coil for maintenance and to 

allow in-place access for service and maintenance of coil(s). 

3. Coils shall not act as structural component of unit. 

4. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate coil section, internal mounting frame and 

attachment to coils, and other coil section components with reinforcement strong enough 

to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic 

Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" when coil-mounting frame and air-handlingunit 

mounting frame are anchored to building structure. 

2.5 AIR FILTRATION SECTION 

A. General Requirements for Air Filtration Section: 



1. Comply with NFPA 90A. 

2. Provide minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency 

reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. 

3. Provide filter holding frames arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors 

on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lifted out from access 

plenum. 

B. Disposable Panel Filters: 

1. Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type. 


3. Initial Resistance: 0.27 inches wg. 

4. Recommended Final Resistance: 1.0 inches wg. 

5. Merv (ASHRAE 52.2): 7. 

C. Extended-Surface, Disposable Panel Filters: 

1. Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface type. 




5. Merv (ASHRAE 52.2): 14. 

D. Filter Gage: 

1. 3-inch-diameter, diaphragm-actuated dial in glass filled nylon case. 

2. Vent valves. 

3. Black figures on white background. 

4. Front recalibration adjustment. 

5. 5 percent of full-scale accuracy. 

6. Range: 0- to 5.0-inch wg. 

7. Accessories: Static-pressure tips with integral compression fittings, 1/4-inch plastic 

tubing, and 2- or 3-way vent valves. 

8. Dwyer Series 2-5000 Minihelic II Differential Pressure Gage. 

2.6 DAMPERS 

A. General Requirements for Dampers: Leakage rate, according to AMCA 500, "Laboratory 

Methods for Testing Dampers for Rating," shall not exceed 2 percent of air quantity at 2000fpm 

face velocity through damper and 4-inch wg pressure differential. 

B. Damper Operators: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and 

Control for HVAC." 

C. Outdoor- and Return-Air Dampers: Low-leakage, double-skin, airfoil-blade, galvanized-steel 

dampers with compressible jamb seals and extruded-vinyl blade edge seals in opposed-blade 

arrangement with cadmium-plated steel operating rods rotating in sintered bronze or nylon 

bearings mounted in a single galvanized-steel frame, and with operating rods connected with a 

common linkage. Leakage rate shall not exceed 5 cfm/sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and 9 cfm/sq. ft. at 4inch 

wg. 



2.7 FAN COIL UNITS (ECRT-AHU-502, ECRT-AHU-503, ECRT-AHU-504) 




1. Enviro-Tec by Johnson Controls, as basis of design. 

2. Trane; American Standard Inc. 

2.8 UNIT CASINGS 

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: 

1. Forming: Form walls, roofs, and floors with at least two breaks at each joint.. 

2. Casing Joints: Sheet metal screws or pop rivets. 

3. Sealing: Seal all joints with water-resistant sealant. 

4. The outer panels shall be fabricated of G90 Galvanized-Steel Casings minimum 18 

gauge. 

5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with 

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004. 

6. Casing shall include 9/16” diameter hanger rod holes in top and bottom panels for 

“through-bolt” suspension installation. Spring type unit mounting vibration isolators 

shall be provided by the unit manufacturer. 

B. Casing Insulation: 

1. Materials: Minimum 1-inch thick foil faced insulation board rated for a maximum air 

velocity of 5000 fpm. Insulation shall carry a 25/50 rating for flame spread/smoke 

developed per ASTM E-84, UL723, and NFPA-90. Units shall have a minimum 1” duct 

collar on discharge and return. 

C. Inspection and Access Panels: 

1. Panel Fabrication: Formed and reinforced, fully insulated panels of same materials and 

thicknesses as casing. 

2. Inspection and Access Panels: 

a. Hinged with lift and turn type fasteners on at least two sides for panel lift-out 

operation. Arrangement shall allow panels to be opened against air-pressure 

differential. 


c. Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-handling unit's 

internal components. 

D. Condensate Drain Pans: 

1. Fabricated with one percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from 

cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and from 

humidifiers and to direct water toward drain connection. 



a. Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with 

ASHRAE 62.1-2004. 

b. Depth: A minimum of 2 inches deep. 

2. Formed sections. 

3. Single-wall, microbial resistant coated galvanized-steel sheet. 

4. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow. 

Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan. 

a. Minimum Connection Size: NPS 3/4. 

2.9 FAN, DRIVE, AND MOTOR SECTION 

A. Fan and Drive Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous 

operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower. 

1. Shafts: Designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor 

horsepower, and with field-adjustable alignment. 

a. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective 

coating of lubricating oil. 

b. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's 

speed range. 

B. Double Inlet Fan Housings: Steel frame and panel; fabricated with fan scroll and volute 

housing. 

C. Forward curved, Centrifugal Fan Wheels: Smooth-curved inlet flange, backplate, and forward 

curved blades continuously welded at backplate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to backplate 

and fastened to shaft with set screws. 

D. Fan Shaft Bearings: 

1. Permanently-Lubricated Bearings: Resilient mounted cartridge type permanently 

lubricated ball bearings with a minimum design life L50 of 100,000 hours. 

E. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning, and with 1.2 

service factor based on fan motor. 

1. Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at 

factory. 

2. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley size so pitch adjustment is at the middle 

of adjustment range at fan design conditions. 

3. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; in matched sets for multiple-belt drives. 

F. Motor: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and 

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor 


1. NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1. 







4. Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on exterior of unit for single point power 

connection. 

2.10 COIL SECTION 

A. General Requirements for Coil Section: 

1. Comply with ARI 410. 

2. Fabricate coil section to allow removal and replacement of coil for maintenance and to 

allow in-place access for service and maintenance of coil(s). 

3. Coils shall not act as structural component of unit. 

4. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate coil section, internal mounting frame and 

attachment to coils, and other coil section components with reinforcement strong enough 

to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section 230548 "Vibration and 

Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" when coil-mounting frame and airhandling-unit 

mounting frame are anchored to building structure. 

2.11 AIR FILTRATION SECTION 

A. General Requirements for Air Filtration Section: 

1. Comply with NFPA 90A. 

2. Provide a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. 

3. Provide filter holding frames arranged for flat orientation, with access doors on the drive 

side of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side. 

B. Disposable Panel Filters: 

1. Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type. 




5. Merv (ASHRAE 52.2): 7. 

C. Extended-Surface, Disposable Panel Filters: 

1. Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface type. 




5. Merv (ASHRAE 52.2): 14. 

D. Filter Gage: 

1. 3-inch-diameter, diaphragm-actuated dial in glass filled nylon case. 



2. Vent valves. 

3. Black figures on white background. 

4. Front recalibration adjustment. 

5. 5 percent of full-scale accuracy. 

6. Range: 0- to 5.0-inch wg. 

7. Accessories: Static-pressure tips with integral compression fittings, 1/4-inch plastic 

tubing, and 2- or 3-way vent valves. 

8. Dwyer Series 2-5000 Minihelic II Differential Pressure Gage. 

2.12 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS AS SCHEDULED ON DRAWINGS 


A. Fan Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan 

Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant 

Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Fans shall bear AMCA-certified sound ratings seal. 

B. Fan Performance Rating: Factory test fan performance for airflow, pressure, power, air density, 

rotation speed, and efficiency. Rate performance according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory 

Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." 

C. Water Coils: Factory tested to 300 psig according to ARI 410 and ASHRAE 33. 



A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit installation. 

Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 

C. Examine roughing-in for hydronic, and condensate drainage piping systems and electrical 

services to verify actual locations of connections before installation. 

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Equipment Mounting: Install air-handling unit on concrete floor without vibration isolation 

devices. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete floor. Comply with requirements for 

concrete bases specified in Division 03 Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Comply with 

requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23 Section 230548 "Vibration 

and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 






B. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural-steel support frame using threaded steel rods 

and spring hangers. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in 

Division 23 Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and 

Equipment." 

C. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and 

maintenance. 

D. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace 

temporary filters used during construction and testing, with new, clean filters. 

E. Install filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gages 

on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Provide filter gages on filter 

banks, installed with separate static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. 


A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings 

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 

B. Install piping adjacent to air-handling unit to allow service and maintenance. 

C. Connect piping to air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors. 

D. Connect condensate drain pans using ASTM B 88, Type M copper tubing. Extend to nearest 

equipment or floor drain or condensate tank. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and 

install cleanouts at changes in direction. 

E. Hydronic-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section 232113 

"Hydronic Piping." Install strainer, shutoff valve, flexible connection and union or flange at 

each coil supply connection. Install flexible connection, control valve, balancing valve and 

union or flange at each coil return connection. 

F. Connect duct to air-handling units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements in 

Division 23 Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." 


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, 

test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. 







1. Leak Test: After installation, fill coils with water, and test coils and connections for 

leaks. 

2. Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm 

proper motor rotation and unit operation. 

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and 

equipment. 

C. Air-handling unit or components will be considered defective if unit or components do not pass 

tests and inspections. 





2. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 

3. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to 

piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload 

protection is installed in motors, controllers, and switches. 

4. Verify proper motor rotation direction, free fan wheel rotation, and smooth bearing 

operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards. 

5. Verify that bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts are lubricated with factoryrecommended 

lubricants. 

6. Verify that outdoor- and return-air mixing dampers open and close, and maintain 

minimum outdoor-air setting. 

7. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation. 

8. Install new, clean filters. 

9. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire dampers in connected duct 

systems are in fully open position. 

B. Starting procedures for air-handling units include the following: 

1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust 

fan to indicated rpm. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design 

conditions. 

2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage. 

3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan 

performance. 


A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 

B. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 

for HVAC" for air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing. 




A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling unit and 

air-distribution systems and after completing startup service, clean air-handling units internally 

to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Clean fan wheels, cabinets, dampers, 

coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean filters. 



adjust, operate, and maintain air-handling units. 




SECTION 260513 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes cables, terminations, and accessories for medium-voltage electrical 

distribution systems. 


A. NETA ATS: Acceptance Testing Specification. 


A. Product Data: For each type of cable indicated. Include terminations for cables and cable 

accessories. 

B. Qualification Data: For Installer. 

C. Material Certificates: For each cable and accessory type, signed by manufacturers. 



A. Installer: Engage a trained and certified installer to install and terminate medium-voltage cable. 

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to 

conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing 

Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 

29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

C. Source Limitations: Obtain cables and accessories through one source from a single 

manufacturer. 



intended use. 

Contract 44577 KW Annex – Rev. D 44577-CSI-SPEC-001 260513-1


E. Comply with IEEE C2 and NFPA 70. 


A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied 

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after 

arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 

1. Notify Hanford Electrical Utilities Group no fewer than seven days in advance of 

proposed interruption of electric service. 

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Hanford Electrical Utility 

Group written permission. 





1. Cables: 

2.2 CABLES 

a. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 

b. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 

c. Kerite Co. (The); Hubbell Incorporated. 

d. Okonite Company (The). 

e. Southwire Company. 

2. Terminating Products and Accessories: 

a. Engineered Products Company. 

b. G&W Electric Company. 

c. MPHusky. 

d. Raychem Corp.; Telephone Energy and Industrial Division; Tyco International 

Ltd. 

e. RTE Components; Cooper Power Systems, Inc. 

f. Scott Fetzer Co. (The); Adalet. 

g. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 

A. Cable Type: MV105. 

B. Comply with UL 1072, AEIC CS 8 

C. Conductor: Copper. 

D. Conductor Stranding: Concentric lay, Class B. 



E. Strand Filling: Conductor interstices are filled with impermeable compound. 

F. Conductor Insulation: Ethylene-propylene rubber. 

1. Voltage Rating: 15 kV. 

2. Insulation Thickness: 133 percent insulation level. 

G. Three-Conductor Cable Assembly: Three insulated, shielded conductors cabled together with 

ground conductors. 

1. Circuit Identification: Color-coded tape (black, red, blue) under the metallic shielding. 

H. Cable Jacket: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene, CPE. 

2.3 SOLID TERMINATIONS 

A. Multiconductor Cable Sheath Seals: Type recommended by seal manufacturer for type of cable 

and installation conditions, including orientation. 

1. Compound-filled, cast-metal body, metal-clad cable terminator for metal-clad cable with 

external plastic jacket. 

2. Heat-shrink sheath seal kit with phase- and ground-conductor rejacketing tubes, cableend 

sealing boot, and sealing plugs for unused ground-wire openings in boot. 

B. Nonshielded-Cable Terminations: Kit with compression-type connector. Include siliconerubber 

tape, cold-shrink-rubber sleeve, or heat-shrink plastic-sleeve moisture seal for end of 

insulation whether or not supplied with kits. 

2.4 SEPARABLE INSULATED CONNECTORS 

A. Description: Modular system, complying with IEEE 386, with disconnecting, single-pole, cable 

terminators and with matching, stationary, plug-in, dead-front terminals designed for cable 

voltage and for sealing against moisture. 

B. Load-Break Cable Terminators: Elbow-type units with 200-A load make/break and continuouscurrent 

rating; coordinated with insulation diameter, conductor size, and material of cable being 

terminated. Include test point on terminator body that is capacitance coupled. 

C. Dead-Break Cable Terminators: Elbow-type unit with 600-A continuous-current rating; 

designed for de-energized disconnecting and connecting; coordinated with insulation diameter, 

conductor size, and material of cable being terminated. Include test point on terminator body 

that is capacitance coupled. 

D. Dead-Front Terminal Junctions: Modular bracket-mounted groups of dead-front stationary 

terminals that mate and match with above cable terminators. Two-, three-, or four-terminal 

units as indicated, with fully rated, insulated, watertight conductor connection between 

terminals and complete with grounding lug, manufacturer's standard accessory stands, stainlesssteel 

mounting brackets, and attaching hardware. 

1. Protective Cap: Insulating, electrostatic-shielding, water-sealing cap with drain wire. 



2. Portable Feed-Through Accessory: Two-terminal, dead-front junction arranged for 

removable mounting on accessory stand of stationary terminal junction. 

3. Grounding Kit: Jumpered elbows, portable feed-through accessory units, protective caps, 

test rods suitable for concurrently grounding three phases of feeders, and carrying case. 

4. Standoff Insulator: Portable, single dead-front terminal for removable mounting on 

accessory stand of stationary terminal junction. Insulators suitable for fully insulated 

isolation of energized cable-elbow terminator. 

E. Tool Set: Shotgun hot stick with energized terminal indicator, fault-indicator test tool, and 

carrying case. 


A. Test and inspect cables before shipping. 

B. Test strand-filled cables for water-penetration resistance according to ICEA T-31-610, using a 

test pressure of 5 psig. 



A. Install cables according to IEEE 576. 

B. Pull Conductors: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and 

sidewall pressure values. 

1. Where necessary, use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant that will not 

deteriorate conductor or insulation. 

2. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave cable grips that 

will not damage cables and raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to 

cable. 

C. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members and 

follow surface contours where possible. 

D. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Common Work Results for Electrical." 

E. Install "buried-cable" warning tape 12 inches above cables. 

F. Install terminations at ends of conductors and seal multiconductor cable ends with standard kits. 

G. Install separable insulated-connector components as follows: 

1. Protective Cap: At each terminal junction, with one on each terminal to which no feeder 

is indicated to be connected. 

2. Portable Feed-Through Accessory: Three. 

3. Standoff Insulator: Three. 



H. Identify cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 


A. Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests 

and inspections and prepare test reports: 

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS. 

Certify compliance with test parameters. 

2. After installing medium-voltage cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, 

test for compliance with requirements. 

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 




SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 

2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 

3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables. 


1. Division 26 Section "Medium-Voltage Cables" for single-conductor and multiconductor 

cables, cable splices, and terminations for electrical distribution systems with 2001 to 

35,000 V. 

2. Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cabling used for voice 

and data circuits. 


A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 



B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. 









1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational 

Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering 

Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. 



intended use. 



A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they 

are constructed. 


2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 



1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 

2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 

3. General Cable Corporation. 

4. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 

5. Southwire Company. 

6. Belden Company. 

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70. 

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN. 

D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for nonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type NM 

with ground wire. 

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES 



1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 

2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 

3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 

4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 

5. Tyco Electronics Corp. 



B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, 

and class for application and service indicated. 

2.3 SLEEVES FOR CABLES 

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain 

ends. 

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, 

with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch 

thickness as indicated and of length to suit application. 

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping 


2.4 SLEEVE SEALS 



1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 

2. Calpico, Inc. 

3. Metraflex Co. 

4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 

B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between 

sleeve and cable. 

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. 

Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable. 

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length 

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing 

element. 


3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS 

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. 

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and 

larger. 



3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND 

WIRING METHODS 

A. Service Entrance: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway. 

B. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN- 

THWN, single conductors in raceway. 

C. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single 

conductors in raceway. 

D. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: 

Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. 

E. Branch Circuits from the Output of Variable Frequency Drives: Type TC VFD cable in 

raceway. 

F. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 

A. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used 

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended 

maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. 

B. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will 

not damage cables or raceway. 

C. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and 

follow surface contours where possible. 

D. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 

E. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification 

for Electrical Systems." 


A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening 

values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in 

UL 486A and UL 486B. 

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent 

or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors. 

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack. 



3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS 

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping 


B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed 

openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. 

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 

D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness: 

1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, 

thickness shall be 0.052 inch. 

2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides 

equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch. 

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies 

unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor 

or wall. 

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces. 

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. 

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve 

seal is to be installed. 

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete. 

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve 

and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to 

Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, 

and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to 

Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing 

units applied in coordination with roofing work. 

M. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical 

sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for 

installing mechanical sleeve seals. 

N. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size 

sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing 

mechanical sleeve seals. 



3.6 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION 

A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations. 

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and 

size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular 

space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing 

elements to expand and make watertight seal. 

3.7 FIRESTOPPING 

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore 

original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration 

Firestopping." 


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare 

test reports. 

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 


1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA 

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 

2. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final 

Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWG 

and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable 

scanner. 

a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of 

each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. 

b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or 

to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for 

device. 

c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices 

checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies 

detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 

D. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 

1. Test procedures used. 

2. Test results that comply with requirements. 

3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve 

compliance with requirements. 

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 






SECTION 260523 - CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. UTP cabling. 

2. Low-voltage control cabling. 

3. Control-circuit conductors. 

4. Identification products. 


A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or 

for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits. 

B. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 



B. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector. 



A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to 

ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of 

applicable testing agency. 

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 






2.1 PATHWAYS 

A. Cable Trays: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Cable Trays for Electrical 

Systems." 

B. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for 


1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep. 

2.2 UTP CABLE 



1. Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division. 

2. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. 

3. CommScope, Inc. 

4. Draka USA. 

5. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. 

6. KRONE Incorporated. 

B. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP. 

1. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying 

with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: 

a. Multipurpose: Type MP or Type MPG. 

b. Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262. 

2.3 UTP CABLE HARDWARE 



1. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc. 

2. Hubbell Premise Wiring. 

3. KRONE Incorporated. 

4. Leviton Voice & Data Division. 

5. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc. 

6. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies. 

7. Panduit Corp. 

8. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd. 

B. UTP Cable Connecting Hardware: IDC type, using modules designed for punch-down caps or 

tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of the same category or higher. 



2.4 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE 

A. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG. 

1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors. 

2. PVC insulation. 

3. Unshielded. 

4. PVC jacket. 

5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581. 

B. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. 

1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors. 

2. PVC insulation. 

3. Unshielded. 

4. PVC jacket. 

5. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262. 

2.5 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS 

A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway, complying with 

UL 83. 

B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway; power-limited 

tray cable, in cable tray, complying with UL 83. 

C. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or Type TF, 

complying with UL 83. 

2.6 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS 



1. Brady Corporation. 

2. HellermannTyton. 

3. Kroy LLC. 


B. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating 

adhesives, and inks used by label printers. 

C. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 




3.1 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS 

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" 

for installation of conduits and wireways. 

B. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible. 

3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 

A. Comply with NECA 1. 

B. General Requirements for Cabling: 

1. Terminate all conductors unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Make terminations 

only at indicated outlets and terminals. 

2. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 

inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, 

and terminals. 

3. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable 

between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged 

during installation and replace it with new cable. 

4. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat 

lamps shall not be used for heating. 

C. UTP Cable Installation: 

1. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain 

cable geometry. 

D. Installation of Control-Circuit Conductors: 

1. Install wiring in raceways. Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section 

"Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." 

3.3 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS 

A. Minimum Conductor Sizes: 

1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No 14 AWG. 

2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG. 

3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits, No 12 AWG. 


A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 



3.5 GROUNDING 

A. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Division 26 Section 

"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 


A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for 





1. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, and labeling 

of all components. 

2. Test cabling for DC loop resistance and shorts. 

C. Document data for each measurement. 

D. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 

E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 




SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment, plus the 

following special applications: 

1. Underground distribution grounding. 



B. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding 

features specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following: 

1. Test wells. 

2. Ground rods. 

3. Ground rings. 

4. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. 

5. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment. 

C. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor. 


E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include the following in emergency, 

operation, and maintenance manuals: 

1. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at ground rings 

based on NFPA 70B. 

a. Tests shall be to determine if ground resistance or impedance values remain within 

specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if they do 

not. 

b. Include recommended testing intervals. 









Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. 



intended use. 

C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 


2.1 CONDUCTORS 

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by 

applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Bare Copper Conductors: 

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 

2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 

4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 

5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 

6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1- 

5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 

7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with 

copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 

C. Grounding Bus: Rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 2 inches in cross section, unless 

otherwise indicated; with insulators. 

2.2 CONNECTORS 

A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of 

conductors and other items connected. 

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, 

with at least two bolts. 

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. 



C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for 

materials being joined and installation conditions. 

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES 

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel 3/4 inch by10 feet by 5/8 inches in diameter. 



A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for 

No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. 

1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade. 

2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches above duct bank when indicated as 

part of duct-bank installation. 

C. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service 

equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 

1. Install bus on insulated spacers 1 inch, minimum, from wall 6 inches above finished 

floor, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top 

of doorway, down to specified height above floor, and connect to horizontal bus. 

D. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise 

indicated. 

3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 

4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 

3.2 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS 

A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements. 

B. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install ground rods and ground ring around the pad 

as shown on the Drawings. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal 

items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding 

electrodes. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ring and for 

taps to equipment grounding terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 6 inches from the 

foundation. 



3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING 

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. 

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those 

required by NFPA 70: 

1. Feeders and branch circuits. 

2. Lighting circuits. 

3. Receptacle circuits. 

4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 

5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 

6. Flexible raceway runs. 

7. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment 

grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and 

power-distribution units. 

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to ductmounted 

electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, heaters, dampers, and other duct 

electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic 

piping. 

D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated 

equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond 

conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. 

E. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other 

communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in 

raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring 

closet, and central equipment location. 

1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding 

conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bus. 

2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. 


A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise 

indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may 

be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. 

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless 


1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as 

otherwise indicated in the drawings. Make connections without exposing steel or 

damaging coating, if any. 

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, 

except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 



1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate 

any adjacent parts. 

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so 

vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type 

connection is required, use a bolted clamp. 

D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, 

from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service 

entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, 

using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using 

one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, 

connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor 

conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water 

meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment 

shutoff valve. 

E. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of 

associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond 

across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. 

F. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70, using 

bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG. 

1. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor 

bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building grounding grid 

or to grounding electrode external to concrete. 


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following 

field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been 

energized, test for compliance with requirements. 

2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance 

level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal and at individual 

ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. 

a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of 

precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural 

drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of 

reducing natural ground resistance. 

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. 

3. Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground rod 

assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, 



and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and 

their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena 

that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. 

B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 5 ohms. 

2. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms. 

C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect 

promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. 




SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 

2. Construction requirements for concrete bases. 


1. Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls For Electrical Systems" for 

products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria. 


A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. 

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. 

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. 


A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive 

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and 

design criteria indicated. 

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported 

systems and its contents. 

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported 

equipment and connected systems and components. 

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads 

calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the 

applied force. 





1. Trapeze hangers. 

2. Steel slotted support systems. 

3. Nonmetallic slotted support systems. 



A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural 

Welding Code - Steel." 

B. Comply with NFPA 70. 


A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, 

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. 

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items 

are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Specialties." 


2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS 

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field 

assembly. 




a. Allied Tube & Conduit. 

b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 

c. ERICO International Corporation. 

d. GS Metals Corp. 

e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 

f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. 

g. Wesanco, Inc. 

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to 

MFMA-4. 

3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. 



B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. 

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed 

for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. 

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of 

threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or 

cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces 

as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. 

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, 

shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or 

their supports to building surfaces include the following: 

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement 

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for 

supported loads and building materials where used. 

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not 

limited to, the following: 

1) Hilti Inc. 

2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 

3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 

4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in 

hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate 

for supported loads and building materials in which used. 

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not 

limited to, the following: 

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 

2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 

3) Hilti Inc. 

4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 

5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS 

Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for 

attached structural element. 

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with 

ASTM A 325. 

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 



2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES 

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions 

of supported equipment. 

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel 

shapes and plates. 



A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical 

equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. 

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for 

EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in 

diameter. 

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support 

system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding 

specified design load limits. 

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps 

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1- 

1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above 

suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this 

Article. 

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, conduit may be 

supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. 

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength 

will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. 

Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported 

components plus 200 lb. 

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten 

electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods 

unless otherwise indicated by code: 

1. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 

2. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock 

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or 



greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 

4 inches thick. 

3. To Steel: Spring-tension clamps. 

4. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 

5. To Insulated Metal Wall Panels: TEK #12 self drilling screws with bonded sealing 

washer. 

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing 

bars. 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS 

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for sitefabricated 

metal supports. 

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation 

to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. 

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 


A. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup 

painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous 

metal. 






SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. 


1. Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for 

exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction. 


A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. 

B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing. 

C. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 

D. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. 

E. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. 

F. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 

G. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 

H. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover 

enclosures, and cabinets. 

B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, 

details, and attachments to other work. 



C. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items 

are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 

1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports. 

2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups with 

common supports. 

D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosures and 

cabinets and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, will withstand 

seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical 

Systems." Include the following: 



a. The term "withstand" means "the cabinet or enclosure will remain in place without 

separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified. 





E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency. 

F. Source quality-control test reports. 




intended use. 



2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING 




2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 

3. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 

4. Maverick Tube Corporation. 

5. O Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. 



C. IMC: ANSI C80.6. 

D. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated IMC. 

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 

2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum. 

E. EMT: ANSI C80.3. 

F. FMC: Zinc-coated steel or aluminum. 

G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. 

H. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: 

NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and 

environment in which installed. 

1. Fittings for EMT: Set-screw or compression type. 

2. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch, with 

overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. 

I. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, 

and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and 

enhance their conductivity. 

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING 




2. Arnco Corporation. 

3. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 

4. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 

5. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 

B. ENT: NEMA TC 13. 

C. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. 

E. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B. 

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS 



1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 



2. Hoffman. 

3. Square D; Schneider Electric. 

B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type12, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, holddown 

straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for 

complete system. 

D. Wireway Covers: Screw Cover type. 

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 

2.4 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS 



1. Hoffman. 

2. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 

B. Description: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on 

cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners. 

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, holddown 

straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for 

complete system. 

2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS 

A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. 




a. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 

b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 

c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division. 

2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS 



1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 

2. Hoffman. 

3. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division. 



4. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. 

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed 

cover. 

D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2. 

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. 

F. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed 

cover. 

G. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 12, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, 


1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 

H. Cabinets: 

1. NEMA 250, Type 12, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable 

front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 

3. Key latch to match panelboards. 

4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 

2.7 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS 

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain 

ends. 

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, 

with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch 

thickness as indicated and of length to suit application. 

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping 



3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION 

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit. 



2. Concealed Conduit, Above ground: EMT 

3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried. 

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, 

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 

5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 4. 

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 

2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 

3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, 

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet 

locations. 

4. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC. 

5. Raceways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Communications Cable: EMT. 

6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 12, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, in damp or 

wet locations. 

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size. 

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless 


2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that 

material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing 

conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer. 

E. Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete. 


A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 

except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter. 

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. 

Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. 

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. 

D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical 

Systems." 

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. 

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for 

communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. 

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise 

indicated. 



H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main 

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab 

support. 

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion 

fittings. 

3. Change from ENT to rigid steel conduit or IMC before rising above the floor. 

I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply 

listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound 


J. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings 

to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. 

K. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not 

less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. 

L. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic and 

nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows: 

1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. 

2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. 

3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway 

unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes 

or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these 

requirements. 

M. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with 

listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a 

blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway 

sealing fittings at the following points: 

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated 

spaces. 

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. 

N. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for lighting 

fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers 

and motors. 

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 

O. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, 

and install box flush with surface of wall. 

P. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. 

Q. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. 



3.3 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS 

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping 


B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed 

openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. 

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 

D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness: 

1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 

16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. 

2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or 

more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch. 

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies 

unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor 

or wall. 

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. 

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. 

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway unless 

sleeve seal is to be installed. 

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry. 

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve 

and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to 

Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation. 

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, 

and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply 

with Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type 

flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. 

M. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical 

sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve 

for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 

N. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size 

sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway and sleeve for installing 

mechanical sleeve seals. 



3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION 

A. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations. 

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material 

and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in 

annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause 

sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 


A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore 

original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements 

are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 


A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are 

without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by 

manufacturer. 

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by 

manufacturer. 




SECTION 260536 - CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes aluminum cable trays and accessories. 


A. Product Data: Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray 

indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray. 

1. Show fabrication and installation details of cable tray, including plans, elevations, and 

sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate 

components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice-plate 

connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings. 



A. Source Limitations: Obtain cable tray components through one source from a single 

manufacturer. 



intended use. 



A. Aluminum cable tray may be stored outside without cover, but shall be loosely stacked, elevated 

off the ground, and ventilated to prevent staining during storage. 







1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 

2. Cope, T. J., Inc.; a subsidiary of Allied Tube & Conduit. 

2.2 MATERIALS AND FINISHES 

A. Cable Trays, Fittings, and Accessories: Aluminum, complying with NEMA VE 1, Aluminum 

Association's Alloy 6063-T6 for rails, rungs, and cable trays, and Alloy 5052-H32 or 

Alloy 6061-T6 for fabricated parts; with chromium-zinc, ASTM F 1136, splice-plate fasteners, 

bolts, and screws. 

B. Sizes and Configurations: Refer to the Cable Tray Schedule on Drawings for specific 

requirements for types, materials, sizes, and configurations. 

1. Center-hanger supports may be used only when specifically indicated. 

2.3 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES 

A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and 

finishes as cable tray. 

B. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as cable tray. 

C. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray 

manufacturer. 

2.4 WARNING SIGNS 

A. Lettering: 1-1/2-inch-high, black letters on yellow background with legend "WARNING! NOT 

TO BE USED AS SUPPORT FOR LADDERS OR PERSONNEL." 

B. Materials and fastening are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical 

Systems." 




3.1 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with recommendations in NEMA VE 2. Install as a complete system, including all 

necessary fasteners, hold-down clips, splice-plate support systems, barrier strips, hinged 

horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, and crosses. 

B. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays. 

C. Fasten cable tray supports to building structure and install seismic restraints. 

1. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and to 

comply with seismic-restraint details according to Division 26 Section "Vibration and 

Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." 

2. Construct supports from channel members, threaded rods, and other appurtenances 

furnished by cable tray manufacturer. Arrange supports in trapeze or wall-bracket form 

as required by application. 

3. Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading. 

4. Manufacture center-hung support, designed for 60 percent versus 40 percent eccentric 

loading condition, with a safety factor of 3. 

5. Locate and install supports according to NEMA VE 1. 

D. Make changes in direction and elevation using standard fittings. 

E. Make cable tray connections using standard fittings. 

F. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 07 Section "Penetration 

Firestopping." 

G. Sleeves for Future Cables: Install capped sleeves for future cables through firestop-sealed cable 

tray penetrations of fire and smoke barriers. 

H. Workspace: Install cable trays with enough space to permit access for installing cables. 

I. Install barriers to separate cables of different systems: communication and control. 

J. After installation of cable trays is completed, install warning signs in visible locations on or 

near cable trays. 

3.2 CABLE INSTALLATION 

A. Install cables only when cable tray installation has been completed and inspected. 

B. Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties as recommended by 

NEMA VE 2. Tighten clamps only enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable 

jacket. Install cable ties with a tool that includes an automatic pressure-limiting device. 

C. On vertical runs, fasten cables to tray every 18 inches. Install intermediate supports when cable 

weight exceeds the load-carrying capacity of the tray rungs. 




A. Ground cable trays according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor with cable tray, in addition to those required 

by NFPA 70. 


A. After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for 

compliance with requirements. Perform the following field quality-control survey: 

1. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in 

cable tray, vibration, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause 

or have caused damage. 

2. Verify that there is no intrusion of such items as pipe, hangers, or other equipment that 

could damage cables. 

3. Remove deposits of dust, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any 

blockage of tray ventilation. 

4. Check for missing or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace with 

specified hardware. 

5. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that 

all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable tray. 

B. Report results in writing. 


A. Protect installed cable trays. 

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable tray 

manufacturer. 

2. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to protect exposed cables from 

falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable 

tray can be constructed of wood or metal materials until the risk of damage is over. 




SECTION 260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Conduit, ducts, and duct accessories for direct-buried duct banks, and in single duct runs. 

2. Handholes and boxes. 

1.3 DEFINITION 

A. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 



1. Duct-bank materials, including separators and miscellaneous components. 

2. Ducts and conduits and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends, fittings, and 

solvent cement. 

3. Accessories for handholes and boxes. 

4. Warning tape. 

5. Warning planks. 

B. Source quality-control test reports. 


A. Comply with ANSI C2. 



A. Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent 

bending, warping, and deforming. 




A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities 

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only 

after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 

1. Notify Electrical Utilities no fewer than 5 days in advance of proposed interruption of 

electrical service. 

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Electrical Utilities written 

permission. 


A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, handholes, and boxes with final arrangement of 

other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field. 

B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into handholes and boxes with final 

locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks as determined by coordination with other utilities, 

underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations from those 

indicated as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to handholes and 

utility vault. 


2.1 CONDUIT 

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized. Comply with ANSI C80.1. 

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC and Type EPC-80-PVC, UL 651, with matching 

fittings by same manufacturer as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B. 

2.2 NONMETALLIC DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES 



1. ARNCO Corp. 

2. Beck Manufacturing. 

3. Cantex, Inc. 

4. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 

5. Condux International, Inc. 

6. ElecSys, Inc. 

B. Underground Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 6 & 8, Type DB-60-PVC and Type DB-120- 

PVC, ASTM F 512, with matching fittings by the same manufacturer as the duct, complying 

with NEMA TC 9. 

C. Duct Accessories: 



1. Duct Separators: Factory-fabricated rigid PVC interlocking spacers, sized for type and 

sizes of ducts with which used, and selected to provide minimum duct spacings indicated 

while supporting ducts during concreting or backfilling. 

2. Warning Tape: Underground-line warning tape specified in Division 26 Section 

"Identification for Electrical Systems." 

3. Concrete Warning Planks: Nominal 12 by 24 by 3 inches in size, manufactured from 

6000-psi concrete. 

a. Color: Red dye added to concrete during batching. 

b. Mark each plank with "ELECTRIC" in 2-inch-high, 3/8-inch-deep letters. 

2.3 HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE 

A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77. 

1. Color: Green. 

2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom, unless 


3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural 

load rating consistent with enclosure. 

4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 

5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "TELEPHONE." 

6. Duct Entrance Provisions: Duct-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for 

secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 

7. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long and larger shall have factory-installed 

inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons. 

B. Polymer Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and 

aggregate, bound together with a polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a 

combination of the two. 




a. Armorcast Products Company. 

b. Carson Industries LLC. 

c. CDR Systems Corporation. 

d. NewBasis. 

C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Frame and Cover: Sheet-molded, 

fiberglass-reinforced, polyester resin enclosure joined to polymer concrete top ring or frame. 




a. Armorcast Products Company. 

b. Carson Industries LLC. 

c. Christy Concrete Products. 



d. Synertech Moulded Products, Inc.; a division of Oldcastle Precast. 

D. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with covers 

of fiberglass. 





a. Carson Industries LLC. 

b. Christy Concrete Products. 

c. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc. 

3.1 UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION 

A. Ducts for Electrical Cables over 600 V: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete-encased 

duct bank, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in directburied 

duct bank, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Ducts for Electrical Branch Circuits: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in direct-buried duct 

bank, unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Underground Ducts for Telephone, Communications, or Data Circuits: RNC, NEMA 

Type EPC-40-PVC, in direct-buried duct bank, unless otherwise indicated. 

3.2 UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURE APPLICATION 

A. Handholes and Boxes for 600 V and Less, Including Telephone, Communications, and Data 

Wiring: 

1. Units Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester 

resin, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-lbf vertical loading. 

3.3 EARTHWORK 

A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Division 31 Section "Earth Moving," but do not use 

heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment. 

3.4 DUCT INSTALLATION 

A. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 away from buildings and equipment. 



B. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use 

manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches, both horizontally and 

vertically, at other locations, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to 

manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in 

same plane. 

D. Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at 

least 10 feet outside the building wall without reducing duct line slope away from the building, 

and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to-conduit transition. 

E. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare 

ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig hydrostatic 

pressure. 

F. Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf- test nylon cord in ducts, including spares. 

G. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: 

1. Support ducts on duct separators coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor 

temperature. 

2. Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less 

than 4 spacers per 20 feet of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent 

displacement during backfill and yet permit linear duct movement due to expansion and 

contraction as temperature changes. Stagger spacers approximately 6 inches between 

tiers. 

3. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct bank. Prepare 

trench bottoms as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipes less than 6 

inches in nominal diameter. 

4. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 

5. After installing first tier of ducts, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point and work 

toward end of duct run, leaving ducts at end of run free to move with expansion and 

contraction as temperature changes during this process. Repeat procedure after placing 

each tier. After placing last tier, hand-place backfill to 4 inches over ducts and hand 

tamp. Firmly tamp backfill around ducts to provide maximum supporting strength. Use 

hand tamper only. After placing controlled backfill over final tier, make final duct 

connections at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified 

in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 

6. Install ducts with a minimum of 3 inches between ducts for like services and 6 inches 

between power and signal ducts. 

7. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches below finished grade, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

8. Set elevation of bottom of duct bank below the frost line. 

9. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building 

entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts 

throughout the length of the elbow. 

10. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and 

at building entrances through the floor. 



a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase 

coupling with 3 inches of concrete. 

b. For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit 

horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. 

Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 

11. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried 

ducts and duct banks, placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and 

along the centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional plank for each 12-inch increment 

of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches. Space additional planks 12 inches apart, 

horizontally. 

3.5 INSTALLATION OF HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE 

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with 

connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Use box 

extension if required to match depths of ducts, and seal joint between box and extension as 

recommended by the manufacturer. 

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 

1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. 

C. Elevation: In paved areas and trafficways, set so cover surface will be flush with finished 

grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch above finished grade. 

D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below the frost line, 30 inches below grade. 

E. Field-cut openings for ducts and conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written 

instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for 

terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. 


A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding 

and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 


A. Perform the following tests: 

1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation 

of underground ducts and utility structures. 

2. Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and test for outof-round 

duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are 

indicated, remove obstructions and retest. 

B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance. 




A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts. 

Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout 

ducts. 




SECTION 260548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Channel support systems. 

2. Restraint cables. 

3. Hanger rod stiffeners. 

4. Anchorage bushings and washers. 


1. Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly used 

electrical supports and installation requirements. 


A. The IBC: International Building Code. 



A. Wind-Restraint Loading: SSCs susceptible to wind shall be evaluated using wind load per 

ASCE 7-05, and the parameters below: 



















e. Ip = 1.5 

f. Amplification factor and Response Modification coefficient (eg. ap, Rp) as tabulated 

in ASCE 7. 




















rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to 



requirements. 

B. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with 

other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints. 

C. Welding certificates. 


A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are 




B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural 

Welding Code - Steel." 

C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load analysis and shall bear 

anchorage preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities 

having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent 

testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, 

submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear 

and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified 

professional engineer. 

D. Comply with NFPA 70. 






2. Hilti Inc. 

3. Loos & Co.; Seismic Earthquake Division. 




B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and application 

requirements shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction. 



subjected. 

C. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted 




D. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted 

connections to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods. 

E. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid 

equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchors and studs. 

F. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene 

elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and 

size of attachment devices. 



G. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant 

neoprene, with a flat washer face. 

H. Mechanical Anchor: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for 

interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors with strength 

required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times 

diameter. 

I. Adhesive Anchor: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane 









A. Examine areas and equipment to receive seismic-control devices for compliance with 

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 





A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps 

approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 






3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION 

A. Equipment and Hanger Restraints: 



1. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance 

between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch. 

2. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component. 

B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide 

resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall. 

C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at 


D. Drilled-in Anchors: 
















6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior 

applications. 

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION 

A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways 

where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different 

structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to 

a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment. 


A. Adjust isolators after isolated equipment is at operating weight. 




C. Adjust active height of spring isolators. 







SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Identification for raceway and metal-clad cable. 

2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable. 

3. Underground-line warning tape. 

4. Warning labels and signs. 

5. Instruction signs. 

6. Equipment identification labels. 

7. Miscellaneous identification products. 


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. 

B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system 

components used in identification signs and labels. 

C. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting 

provisions, and graphic features of identification products. 


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2. 


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 


A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in 

the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation 

and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. 

Use consistent designations throughout Project. 



B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of 


C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. 

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. 


2.1 RACEWAY AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS 

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of 

color field for each raceway and cable size. 

B. Color for Printed Legend: 

1. Power Circuits: Black letters on an orange field. 

2. Legend: Indicate system or service and voltage, if applicable. 

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and 

chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend 

label. 

D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches wide; 

compounded for outdoor use. 

2.2 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION 

MATERIALS 

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 

to 2 inches wide. 

B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification 

legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. 

C. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels: Cut from 0.014-inch thick aluminum sheet, with 

stamped, embossed, or scribed legend, and fitted with tabs and matching slots for permanently 

securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors. 

D. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use 

with self-locking nylon tie fastener. 

2.3 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE 

A. Description: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, polyethylene tape. 

1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. 

2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service. 



3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 

4. Printed legend shall indicate type of underground line. 

2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS 

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. 

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, 

configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, 

with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for 

mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches . 

D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, celluloseacetate 

butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and 

size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 10 by 

14 inches. 

E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - 

EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN 

FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." 

2.5 INSTRUCTION SIGNS 

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 

sq. in. and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. 

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 

2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 

3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable 

equipment. 

2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS 

A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white 

letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. 

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS 

A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties. 

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 

2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb, minimum. 



3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 

4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding. 

B. Paint: Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting 

Sections. 

C. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine 

screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. 



A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch 

Circuits More Than 20 Amps: Identify with orange self-adhesive vinyl label. 

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables of Auxiliary Systems: Identify the following systems with 

color-coded, self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands: 

1. Fire Alarm System: Red. 

2. Fire-Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow. 

3. Combined Fire Alarm and Security System: Red and blue. 

4. Security System: Blue and yellow. 

5. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue. 

6. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow. 

7. Control Wiring: Green and red. 

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification: For primary and secondary conductors No. 1/0 AWG 

and larger in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes use color-coding 

conductor tape. Identify source and circuit number of each set of conductors. For single 

conductor cables, identify phase in addition to the above. 

D. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three 

branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use color-coding conductor tape. Identify each 

ungrounded conductor according to source and circuit number. 

E. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, 

signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections. 

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and 

pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used 

by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and 

Operation and Maintenance Manual. 

F. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, 

lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Install underground-line 

warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway. 



G. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply 

with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self-adhesive warning labels. Identify system voltage with 

black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 

1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of 

equipment including, but not limited to, the following: 

a. Power transfer switches. 

b. Controls with external control power connections. 

2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise 

indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar 

equipment in finished spaces. 

H. Instruction Signs: 

1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and 

maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction 

signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment 

operation. 

2. Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red 

background with minimum 3/8-inch high letters for emergency instructions at equipment 

used for power transfer. 

I. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label 

that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. 

Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control 

panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, 

lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is 

provided with its own identification. 

1. Labeling Instructions: 

a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. 

Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high letters 

on 1-1/2-inch high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches 

high. 

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. 

c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for 

viewing from the floor. 

2. Equipment to Be Labeled: 

a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. 

b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. 

c. Transformers. 

d. Disconnect switches. 

e. Enclosed circuit breakers. 

f. Motor starters. 

g. Push-button stations. 

h. Power transfer equipment. 




i. Contactors. 

j. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. 

k. Battery inverter units. 

l. Power-generating units. 

m. Voice and data cable terminal equipment. 

n. Intercommunication and call system master and staff stations. 

o. Television/audio components, racks, and controls. 

p. Fire-alarm control panel and annunciators. 

q. Monitoring and control equipment. 

r. Terminals, racks, and patch panels for voice and data communication and for 

signal and control functions. 

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. 

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing 

without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. 

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. 

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and 

methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. 

E. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to 

the location and substrate. 

F. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall 

completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, 

side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot 

(15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested 

areas. 

G. Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below: 

1. Color shall be factory applied. 

2. Color coding for 208Y/120V three-phase systems 

a. Phase “A” Ungrounded conductor - Black 

b. Phase “B” Ungrounded conductor - Red 

c. Phase “C” Ungrounded conductor - Blue 

3. Color coding for 480Y/277V three-phase systems 

a. Phase “A” Ungrounded conductor - Brown 

b. Phase “B” Ungrounded conductor - Orange 

c. Phase “C” Ungrounded conductor - Yellow 

4. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum 

distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. 



Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands 

to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. 

H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or 

cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility. 

I. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous 

underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use 

multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete 

envelope exceeds 16 inches overall. 

J. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 09 painting 

Sections. 




SECTION 261200 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following types of transformers with medium-voltage primaries: 

1. Pad-mounted, liquid-filled transformers. 


A. NETA ATS: Acceptance Testing Specification. 


A. Product Data: Include copy of transformer nameplate, capacities, weights, dimensions, 

minimum clearances, installed devices and features, location of each field connection, and 

performance for size of transformer indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: Transformer outline drawing, prior to manufacturing. 

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformer 

assembly and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section 

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" Include the following: 



a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of 

any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 





D. Qualification Data: For testing agency. 




F. Specifications: include compliance information with The National (DOE) Efficiency Standard, 

and any exceptions taken, prior to manufacturing. 

G. Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for insulating fluid. 

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: Installation instruction manual and maintenance instruction 

manuals. 


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and 

capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational 

Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as 





B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of 

transformers and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section 

"Product Requirements." 



intended use. 

D. Comply with IEEE C2. 

E. Comply with ANSI C57.12.10, ANSI C57.12.28, IEEE C57.12.70, and IEEE C57.12.80. 


G. Perform testing in accordance with ANSI C57.12.00, Section 8. 


A. Packaging shall be of such to eliminate ingress of water and other contaminants. Items that 

could be damaged during shipment shall be removed and placed in separate packing. If left 

attached, items are to be protected. 

B. Handle using lifting eyes provided. Keep transformer in upright position. 


A. Service Conditions: IEEE C37.121, usual service conditions except for the following: 

1. Exposure to significant solar radiation. 




A. Coordinate size and location of concrete vaults. 

B. Coordinate installation so no piping or conduits are installed in space allocated for mediumvoltage 

transformers except those directly associated with transformers. 





1. Acme Electric Corporation; Power Distribution Products Division. 

2. Cooper Industries; Cooper Power Systems Division. 

3. Cutler-Hammer. 

4. Federal Pacific Transformer Company; Division of Electro-Mechanical Corp. 

5. GE Electrical Distribution & Control. 

6. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 


2.2 PAD-MOUNTED, LIQUID-FILLED TRANSFORMERS 

A. Description: Newly manufactured, constructed in accordance with IEEE C57.12.00, 

IEEE C57.12.28, IEEE C57.12.34, pad-mounted, 2-winding transformers. 

B. Electrical characteristics: Three-phase, 500 kVA, 13,800 – 480Y/277V, 60 Hertz. 

C. Compartments: High- and low-voltage compartments shall be as outlined in IEEE C57.12.34. 

They shall be separated by steel isolating barriers extending the full height and depth of the 

compartments. Enclosure integrity shall be as outlined in IEEE C57.12.28. 

D. Insulating Liquid: FM Approvals LLC (FM) Approved, UL Classified less-flammable RTE 

Envirotemp FR3, ABB BIOTEMP, or equivalent, in accordance with FM Approvals Class 

Number 6933. 

E. Insulation Temperature Rise: 65 deg C when operated at rated kVA output in a 40 deg C 

ambient temperature. Transformer shall be rated to operate at rated kilovolt ampere in an 

average ambient temperature of 30 deg C over 24 hours with a maximum ambient temperature 

of 40 deg C without loss of service life expectancy. 

F. Hot spot conductor temperature rise: 80 deg C. 

G. Basic Impulse Level: 95 kV high voltage, 30 kV low voltage. 

H. Windings: Primary and secondary windings shall be made of copper. 



I. Full-Capacity Voltage Taps: Four 2.5 percent taps, 2 above and 2 below rated high voltage; 

with externally operable tap changer for de-energized use and with position indicator and 

padlock hasp. 

J. High-Voltage Switch: 200 A, make-and-latch rating of 10-kA RMS, symmetrical, arranged for 

loop feed with 3-phase, 4-position, gang-operated, load-break switch that is oil immersed in 

transformer tank with hook-stick operating handle in primary compartment. 

K. Primary Fuses: 150-kV fuse assembly with fuses complying with IEEE C37.47. 

1. Provide Bay-O-Net oil-immersed expulsion fuses in series with oil-immersed currentlimiting 

fuses. The Bay-O-Net expulsion fuses shall be RTE Bay-O-Net fuse catalog 

numbers 4000353C** or 4038108C** or equivalent. The current-limiting fuses shall be 

RTE ELSP, or equivalent, and shall be coordinated with the Bay-O-Net fuses to protect 

the transformer from faults beyond their interrupting rating. In order to eliminate or 

minimize oil spills, the bayonet fuse assembly shall include an oil retention valve inside 

the housing, which closes when the fuse holder is removed and an external drip shield. 

Warning shall be conspicuously displayed within the high-voltage compartment 

cautioning against removing or inserting fuses unless the load-break switch is in the open 

position and the tank pressure has been released. 

L. Surge Arresters: Rated 18 kV, fully shielded, dead-front, metal-oxide-varister, elbow type with 

resistance-graded gap, suitable for plugging into inserts. Provide three arresters for each 

transformer provided. 

M. High-Voltage Terminations and Equipment: Dead front with six high-voltage bushing wells for 

dead-front bushing-well inserts, complying with IEEE 386 and including the following: 

1. Bushing-Well Inserts: 200 amperes, 15 kV Class, one for each high-voltage bushing 

well. 

2. Surge Arresters: Dead-front, elbow-type, metal-oxide-varistor units. 

3. Parking Stands: One for each high-voltage bushing well. 

4. Portable Insulated Bushings: Arranged for parking insulated, high-voltage, load-break 

cable terminators; one for each primary feeder conductor terminating at transformer. 

5. Loop feed switch handle. 

6. Tap changer handle. 

7. Ground pads. 

N. Low-Voltage Terminations and Equipment: Low-voltage compartment shall contain lowvoltage 

bushings, with staggered NEMA spade terminals, as outlined in IEEE C57.12.34, 

Section 9.7.3, including a fully insulated Xo bushing (with removable ground strap), 

Accessories, and ground pads. 

O. Accessories: 

1. Drain Valve: 1 inch globe valve in secondary compartment to serve as oil drain valve, 

bottom filter press connection, and equipped with sampling valve located on the side of 

the drain valve. 

2. One-inch globe valve to serve as top filter press connection & vacuum pump connection. 

3. Externally mounted dial-type thermometer. 

4. Liquid-level gage. 



5. Pressure-vacuum gage and pressure/vacuum bleeder with sampling valve. 

6. Automatic pressure relief valve, as outlined in IEEE C57.12.34, Section 9.9.2. 

7. Secondary spade terminals shall be provided additional support by the manufacturer, as 

specified in IEEE C57.12.34, Section 9.7.3.2. 

P. Markings: 

1. A laser-engraved anodized aluminum diagrammatic transformer nameplate, as outlined in 

ANSI C57.12.00, Section 5.12, Table 10, “Nameplate A”, and shall be permanently 

mounted in an easily readable location. The nameplate shall also include the designation 

“PCB Free”. 

2. Transformer shall have its kVA rating conspicuously displayed on its enclosure. 

Q. Transformer base: Include lifting lugs and provisions for jacking under base. The transformer 

base construction shall be suitable for using rollers or skidding in any direction. 

R. Access: Provide transformer top with an access handhole. 

S. Corrosion Protection: Paint bases, cabinets, and tanks Munsell 7GY3.29/1.5 green. The 

Munsell color notation is specified in ASTM D 1535. 

2.3 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each transformer, mounted 

with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 26 

Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 


A. Factory Tests: Perform design and routine tests according to standards specified for 

components. Conduct transformer tests according to ANSI C57.12.00, Section 8. 



A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for medium-voltage 

transformers. 

B. Examine roughing-in of conduits and grounding systems to verify the following: 

1. Wiring entries comply with layout requirements. 

2. Entries are within conduit-entry tolerances specified by manufacturer and no feeders will 

have to cross section barriers to reach load or line lugs. 

C. Examine concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed. 



D. Verify that ground connections are in place and that requirements in Division 26 Section 

"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance 

shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer. 

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Install transformers on concrete bases. 

1. Anchor transformers to concrete bases according to manufacturer's written instructions, 

seismic codes at Project, and requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports 


B. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written 

instructions and NFPA 70. 


A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in 

Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 



Systems." 


and Cables." 


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field 

tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 

3.6 FOLLOW-UP SERVICE 

A. Voltage Monitoring and Adjusting: If requested by Owner, perform the following voltage 

monitoring after Substantial Completion but not more than six months after Final Acceptance: 

1. During a period of normal load cycles as evaluated by Owner, perform seven days of 

three-phase voltage recording at secondary terminals of each transformer. Use voltmeters 

with calibration traceable to National Institute of Science and Technology standards and 

with a chart speed of not less than 1 inch per hour. Voltage unbalance greater than 

1 percent between phases, or deviation of any phase voltage from nominal value by more 

than plus or minus 5 percent during test period, is unacceptable. 



2. Corrective Actions: If test results are unacceptable, perform the following corrective 

actions, as appropriate: 

a. Adjust transformer taps. 

b. Prepare written request for voltage adjustment by electric utility. 

3. Retests: After corrective actions have been performed, repeat monitoring until 


4. Report: Prepare written report covering monitoring and corrective actions performed. 




SECTION 262200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with 

capacities up to 30 kVA: 

1. Distribution transformers. 


A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum 

clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of 

transformer indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required 


connection. 

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power wiring. 

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformers, 

accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section 

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following: 









D. Qualification Data: For testing agency. 




F. Field quality-control test reports. 

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and 





defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single 

manufacturer. 



intended use. 

D. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers." 


A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions 

within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is 

not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control 

of temperature and humidity. 


A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchorbolt 

inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in 

Division 03. 





1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products. 

2. General Electric Company. 

3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 




2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS 

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service. 

B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel. 

C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps. 

1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 

2. Coil Material: Copper. 

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 

A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561. 

B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Division 26 

Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." 

C. Cores: One leg per phase. 

D. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2. 

1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air. 

E. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250. 

1. Finish Color: Gray. 

F. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent 

taps below normal full capacity. 

G. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 

115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature. 

H. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger: 

1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels. 

2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2. 

I. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Maximum sound levels, when factory tested according to 

IEEE C57.12.91, as follows: 

1. 30 to 50 kVA: 45 dBA. 

2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer, 

mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in 

Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 




A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91. 



A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for 

each transformer. 

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by 

NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions. 

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where 

transformers will be installed. 

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Division 26 Section 

"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance 

shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer. 

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Construct concrete bases and anchor floor-mounting transformers according to manufacturer's 

written instructions and requirements in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls 




Systems." 


and Cables." 


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare 

test reports. 






C. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above. 

D. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed 

"Satisfactory Test" label to tested component. 


A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy 

period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. 

Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower 

than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap 

settings as test results. 

B. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings. 


A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. 




SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Distribution panelboards. 

2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 


A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating. 

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 


A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions 

determined according to SEI/ASCE 7. 




A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, 

transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions 

and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, 

and finishes. 

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 

1. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 12. 

2. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 

3. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 

4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 

5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent 

protective devices and auxiliary components. 

6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 



7. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent 

protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; 

include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 


D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective 

devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 

Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following: 







E. Field Quality-Control Reports: 



3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with 

requirements. 

F. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load 

balancing. 

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, 

operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section 

"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective 

devices. 

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective 

device that allows adjustments. 


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site 

testing. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and 

accessories from single source from single manufacturer. 

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for 

panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. 

Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. 





E. Comply with NEMA PB 1. 



A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary 

electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation. 

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1. 


A. Environmental Limitations: 

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work 

in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary 

HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions 

at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise 

indicated: 

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F. 

b. Altitude: Not exceeding 1000 ft. 

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows: 

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 

2. Altitude not exceeding 1000 feet. 


A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that 

penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, 

raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. 

Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors 

and panels. 

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchorbolt 

inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in 

Division 03. 



1.10 WARRANTY 


replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within 

specified warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 




1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 

2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types: 

Two spares for each panelboard. 


2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS 

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in 

Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." 

B. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets. 

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. 

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 12. 

b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 

c. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 

d. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive 

Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12. 

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match 

box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. 

3. Finishes: 

a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel factory finished immediately after 

cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish 

consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. 

C. Incoming Mains Location: Bottom. 

D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 

2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding 

conductors; bonded to box. 



E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 

2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 

3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 

F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load 

centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. 

G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or 

remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type 

of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit 

rating by an NRTL. 

H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit 

current available at terminals. 

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS 



1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 

2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 

3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type. 

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike. 

D. Mains: Circuit breaker, or as shown on the Drawings. 

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: 

Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device 

requires mechanical release for removal. 

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS 






B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type. 

C. Mains: As shown on the Drawings. 



D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without 

disturbing adjacent units. 

E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 

2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 






B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to 

meet available fault currents. 

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level 

overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable 

magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with frontmounted, 

field-adjustable trip setting. 

3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or fieldreplicable 

electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings: 

a. Instantaneous trip. 

b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. 

c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. 

d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I 2 t response. 

4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings 

less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. 

5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault 

protection (6-mA trip). 

6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault 

protection (30-mA trip). 

7. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: 

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 

b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor 

materials. 

c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching 

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity 

discharge (HID) lighting circuits. 

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable 

pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. 

e. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle 

in off position. 



2.5 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS 






B. Surge Protection Device: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, plug-in, parallelconnected, 

modular (with field-replaceable modules) type, with sine-wave tracking suppression 

and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current rating matching or 

exceeding the panelboard short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories: 


a. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 

b. Integral disconnect switch. 

c. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. 

d. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 

2. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 80 kA per mode/160 kA per phase. 

3. Minimum single-impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec. waveform described in 

IEEE C62.41.2. 

a. Line to Neutral: 70,000 A. 

b. Line to Ground: 70,000 A. 

c. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A. 

4. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. 

surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage. 

5. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V, threephase, 

four-wire circuits shall be as follows: 

a. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277. 

b. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277. 

c. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277. 

6. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 208Y/120 V, threephase, 

four-wire circuits shall be as follows: 

a. Line to Neutral: 400 V for 208Y/120. 

b. Line to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120. 

c. Neutral to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120. 

2.6 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES 

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective 

device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. 



B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from 

panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and 

switchboard class relays. 



A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1. 

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have 

been subjected to water saturation. 

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation 

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. 

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and 

temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards. 

C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration 

and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." 

D. Mount top of trim 84 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. 

F. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges. 

G. Install filler plates in unused spaces. 

H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing 

load balancing. 

I. Comply with NECA 1. 


A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning 

signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 



B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; 

incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a 

computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. 

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements 

for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, 

test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. 

C. Perform tests and inspections. 




D. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, 

and control circuit. 

2. Test continuity of each circuit. 

E. Tests and Inspections: 



2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate 

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: 

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days 

after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove 

front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of 

each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. 

c. Instruments and Equipment: 

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to 

detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record 

for device. 

F. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 

G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards 

included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial 

action taken, and observations after remedial action. 




A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as 

recommended by manufacturer. 

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated on the drawings. 

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final 

Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes. 

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 

2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of 

the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax 

machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. 

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings 

before and after changes and submit test records. 

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is 

not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement. 


A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's 

written instructions. 




SECTION 262713 - ELECTRICITY METERING 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes equipment for utility company's electricity metering. 


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual 

components and profiles, and finishes. Describe electrical characteristics, features, and 

operating sequences, both automatic and manual. Include the following: 

1. Electricity-metering equipment. 

B. Shop Drawings for Electricity-Metering Equipment: 

1. Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts. 

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring specific to this Project. Identify 

terminals and wiring designations and color codes to facilitate installation, operation, and 

maintenance. Indicate recommended types, wire sizes, and circuiting arrangements for 

field-installed wiring, and show circuit protection features. 

3. Mounting and anchoring devices recommended by manufacturer to resist seismic forces 

specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." 

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification for Electricity-Metering Equipment: Submit 

certification that equipment components and their mounting and anchorage provisions have 

been designed to remain in place without separation of any parts or loosening of factory-made 

connections when subjected to the seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and 

Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following: 

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether certification is based on actual test of assembled 

components or on calculations. 

2. Detailed description of equipment mounting and anchorage devices on which the 

certification is based and their installation requirements. 


E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electricity-metering equipment to include in emergency, 







intended use. 


A. Electrical Service Connections: Coordinate with Hanford Utility Group and components they 

furnish as follows: 

1. Comply with requirements of utilities providing electrical power and communication 

services. 

2. Coordinate installation and connection of utilities and services, including provision for 

electricity-metering components. 







2.2 EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRICITY METERING BY UTILITY COMPANY 

A. Current-Transformer Cabinets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company. 

B. Meter Sockets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company. 

1. Manufacturers: 

a. Milbank. 

b. Square D; Schneider Electric. 

2. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure. 

a. Structural strength of the housing, its anchorage and component attachment 

provisions, and anchorage devices recommended for anchoring the housing in 

place shall be adequate to prevent separation of equipment and its components 

from their installed positions during a seismic event as defined in Division 26 

Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." 

3. Minimum Short-Circuit Rating: 22,000 amperes symmetrical at rated voltage. 



4. Meter Socket: Type as approved by utility company, with rating coordinated with 

indicated tenant feeder circuit rating. 



A. Comply with equipment installation requirements in NECA 1. 

B. Install equipment for utility company metering. Install raceways and equipment according to 

utility company's written requirements. Provide empty conduits for metering leads and extend 

grounding connections as required by utility company. 


A. Test Owner's electricity-metering installation for proper operation, accuracy, and usability of 

output data. 

1. Connect a load of known kilowatt rating, 1.5 kW minimum, to a circuit supplied by 

metered feeder. 

2. Turn off circuits supplied by metered feeder and secure them in off condition. 

3. Run test load continuously for eight hours, minimum, or longer to obtain a measurable 

meter indication. Use test load placement and setting that ensures continuous, safe 

operation. 

4. Check and record meter reading at end of test period and compare with actual electricity 

used based on test load rating, duration of test, and sample measurements of supply 

voltage at test load connection. Record test results. 

5. Repair or replace deficient or malfunctioning metering equipment, or correct test setup; 

then retest. Repeat for each meter in installation until proper operation of entire system is 

verified. 




SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 

2. Wall-switches. 

3. Communications outlets. 

4. Cord and plug sets. 


1. Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for workstation outlets. 


A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. 

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. 

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. 

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. 

E. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 



B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking 

wall plates. 

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing 

label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. 




A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one 

source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and 

associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source. 



intended use. 



A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 

1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. 



A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following 

manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 

2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 

3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 

4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). 

2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES 

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 

configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. 

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be 


a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex). 

b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex). 

c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). 

d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex). 

2.3 CORD AND PLUG SETS 

A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of 

equipment being connected. 



1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with 

green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 

30 percent. 

2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for 

connection. 

2.4 SNAP SWITCHES 

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. 

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 



a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way). 

b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224 

(four way). 

c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four 

way). 

d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way), 

20AC4 (four way). 

2.5 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS 

A. Telephone Outlet: 



a. Cooper; 3560-6. 

b. Leviton; 40649. 

2. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; 

TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863. 

2.6 WALL PLATES 

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 

2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch thick, satin-finished stainless steel 

3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel 

4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed 

and labeled for use in "wet locations." 

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weatherresistant, 

die-cast aluminum with lockable cover. 




A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color. 

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White, unless otherwise indicated 

or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 



A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise 

noted. 

B. Coordination with Other Trades: 

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish 

materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by 

riding against outside of the boxes. 

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, 

paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and 

cables. 

3. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. 

C. Conductors: 

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on 

devices. 

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid 

scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, 

Article 300, without pigtails. 

D. Device Installation: 

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show 

signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect 

conductors. 

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last 

possible moment. 

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid 

conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 

7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice 

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 



9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device 

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. 

E. Receptacle Orientation: 

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted 

receptacles to the right. 

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount 

outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. 

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension 

vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under 

single, multigang wall plates. 


A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, 

stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and 

durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 

1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 

2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital 

readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement. 

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 

2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. 

3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 

4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 

5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 

6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit 

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar 

problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new 

ones, and retest as specified above. 




SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 




Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Fusible switches. 

2. Nonfusible switches. 

3. Enclosures. 


A. NC: Normally closed. 

B. NO: Normally open. 

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of 

earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 


from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified. 


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component 

indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data 

on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 12. 

2. Current and voltage ratings. 

3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 

4. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent 

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. 



5. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of 

overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent 

protective device. 

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. 



D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and 

components, from manufacturer. 











requirements. 

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in 

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 

Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit 

breakers. 

2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent 

protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective 

device. 


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site 

testing. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective 

devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from 

single manufacturer. 



C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed 

switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces 

and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. 





A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following 

conditions unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 1000 ft. 


A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment 

served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances 

for equipment access doors and panels. 




1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than 

three of each size and type. 

2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type. 


2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES 






B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, 

horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with 

capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. 



C. Accessories: 

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground 

conductors. 

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; 

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 

3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are 

specified. 

4. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 

5. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment. 

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES 






B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, 

horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with 

cover in closed position. 

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and 

NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and 

interlocked with cover in closed position. 

D. Accessories: 

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground 

conductors. 

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; 

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 

3. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 

2.3 ENCLOSURES 

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, 

to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 12. 

2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 

3. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 

4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: 

NEMA 250, Type 12. 





A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance 

with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 



A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless 


B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration 


C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and 

temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. 

D. Install fuses in fusible devices. 

E. Comply with NECA 1. 


A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide 

warning signs. 

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate. 



B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, 

connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 









3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: 

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days 

after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and 

circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to 

portable scanner. 

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of 

each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial 

Completion. 

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure 

temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide 

calibration record for device. 

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and 

malfunctioning controls and equipment. 

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and 

inspections. 

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches 

and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies 

detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 


A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as 

recommended by manufacturer. 




SECTION 262913 - ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes ac, enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less, of the following types: 

1. Combination magnetic controllers, full-voltage, non-reversing. 


1. Division 26 Section "Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers" for general-purpose, ac, 

adjustable-frequency, pulse-width-modulated controllers for use on variable and constant 

torque loads in ranges up to 200 hp. 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of motor controller and 

starter, including data proving that materials comply with specified requirements. Provide 

catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of switching and overcurrent 

protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure details. 

B. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 

C. Installation instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by 

Product testing agency specified under Quality Assurance. Include instructions for storage, 

handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 

D. Operation and maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in operation and 

maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and 

Maintenance Data," include the following: 

1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and all installed components. 

E. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosed 

controllers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 

Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" Include the following: 











F. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed and 

arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 100 miles of Project 

site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and 

repairs. 








C. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed controllers of a single type through one source from a 




intended use. 


F. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed 

controllers, minimum clearances between enclosed controllers, and for adjacent surfaces and 

other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions and clearances. 


A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent 

condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive 

substances, and physical damage. 

B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect them from weather, 

dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable 

materials from inside controllers; install electric heating of sufficient wattage to prevent 

condensation. 




A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including 

conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and 

required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. 

B. Coordinate features of enclosed controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices and control 

circuits to which they connect. 

C. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each enclosed controller with ratings and 

characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of motor and 

load. 




1. Spare Fuses: Furnish one spare for every five installed, but no fewer than one set of three 

of each type and rating. 

2. Indicating Lights: Two of each type installed. 





1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. 

2. General Electrical Company; GE Industrial Systems. 

3. Square D. 

2.2 ACROSS-THE-LINE ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 

A. Provide controllers of size and number of poles as indicated on the Drawings. 

B. Magnetic Controller: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, nonreversing, across the line, unless 


1. Control Circuit: 120 V. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, obtained from 

integral control power transformer with a control power transformer of sufficient capacity 

to operate connected pilot, indicating and control devices, plus 100 percent spare 

capacity. 

2. Overload Relay: Ambient-compensated type with inverse-time-current characteristic and 

NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping characteristic. Provide with heaters or sensors in each 

phase matched to nameplate full-load current of specific motor to which they connect and 

with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. 



C. Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination controller and disconnect 

switch. 

1. Fusible Disconnecting Means: NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, fusible switch with rejectiontype 

fuse clips rated for fuses. Select and size fuses to provide Type 2 protection 

according to IEC 947-4-1, as certified by an NRTL. 


A. Description: Flush- or surface-mounting cabinets as indicated. NEMA 250, Type 12, unless 

otherwise indicated to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 

1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 

2. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 


A. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty type. 

C. Push buttons: Push-to-test LED Red RUNNING pilot light. 


A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested enclosed 

controllers before shipping. 



A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers for compliance with requirements, 

installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. 



A. Select features of each enclosed controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of 

supply circuit and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of motor, controller, and load; 

and configuration of pilot device and control circuit affecting controller functions. 

B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled. 




A. For control equipment at walls, bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight structural-steel 

channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with 

Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 



C. Enclosed Controller Fuses: Install fuses in each fusible switch. 


A. Identify enclosed controller, components, and control wiring according to Division 26 Section 

"Identification for Electrical Systems." 

3.5 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION 

A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage 

Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. 

C. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic-control devices where applicable. 

1. Connect selector switches with enclosed controller circuit in both hand and automatic 

positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, hightemperature 

cutouts, and motor overload protectors. 


A. Conduit installation requirements are specified in other Division 26 Sections. Drawings 

indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties. 

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical 

Systems." 


A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element, bus, component, 



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the 

following: 

1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. 



2. Assist in field testing of equipment. 

3. Report results in writing. 

C. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 

1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection, except optional tests, 

stated in NETA ATS “ Motor Control – Motor Starters.” Certify compliance with test 

parameters. 




A. Set field-adjustable switches and trip ranges. 




SECTION 262923 - VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes solid-state, PWM, VFCs for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage 

induction motors. 


1. Division 26 Section "Transient-Voltage Suppression for Low-Voltage Electrical Power 

Circuits" for low-voltage power, control, and communication surge suppressors. 


A. BMS: Building management system. 

B. IGBT: Integrated gate bipolar transistor. 

C. LAN: Local area network. 

D. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative. 

E. PWM: Pulse-width modulated. 

F. VFC: Variable frequency controller. 


A. Product Data: For each type of VFC. Include dimensions, mounting arrangements, location for 

conduit entries, shipping and operating weights, and manufacturer's technical data on features, 

performance, electrical ratings, characteristics, and finishes. 

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring for VFCs. Provide schematic 

wiring diagram for each type of VFC. 

B. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that VFCs, accessories, 

and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and 

Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following: 











C. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. 


E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFCs, all installed devices, and components to include 

in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in 

Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 

1. Routine maintenance requirements for VFCs and all installed components. 

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective 

devices. 

F. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have 

been installed and arrange to demonstrate that settings for motor running overload protection 

suit actual motor to be protected. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 100 miles of Project 

site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and 

repairs. 








C. Source Limitations: Obtain VFCs of a single type through one source from a single 

manufacturer. 



intended use. 





A. Deliver VFCs in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path 

as indicated. 

B. Store VFCs indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. 

Protect VFCs from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage. 

C. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover VFCs to protect them from weather, dirt, dust, 

corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials 

from inside controllers; install electric heating of sufficient wattage to prevent condensation. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation, capable of driving full 

load without derating, under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40 deg C. 

2. Humidity: Less than 90 percent (noncondensing). 

3. Altitude: Not exceeding 1000 ft. 

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFCs, 

including clearances between VFCs, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with 

indicated maximum dimensions. 


A. Coordinate layout and installation of VFCs with other construction including conduit, piping, 

equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required 

clearances for equipment access doors and panels. 

B. Coordinate features of VFCs, installed units, and accessory devices with pilot devices and 

control circuits to which they connect. 

C. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each VFC and each installed unit with ratings 

and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of motor 

and load. 




1. Spare Fuses: Furnish two spare for every type and rating. 

2. Indicating Lights: One of each type installed. 







1. Baldor Electric Company (Graham). 

2. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. 

3. General Electric Company; GE Industrial Systems. 

4. Square D. 

2.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS 

A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, IGBT, PWM, VFC; listed and labeled as a complete unit and 

arranged to provide variable speed of an NEMA MG 1, Design B, 3-phase induction motor by 

adjusting output voltage and frequency. 

1. Provide unit suitable for operation of Premium-efficiency motor as defined by 

NEMA MG 1. 

B. Design and Rating: Match load type such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection 

used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection. 

C. Output Rating: 3-phase; 6 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage 

range. 

D. Unit Operating Requirements: 

1. Input ac voltage tolerance of 480 V, plus or minus 10 percent. 

2. Input frequency tolerance of 60 Hz, plus or minus 6 percent. 

3. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load. 

4. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent. 

5. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; 2.0 times the base 

load current for 3 seconds. 

6. Starting Torque: 100 percent of rated torque or as indicated. 

7. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent. 

E. Isolated control interface to allow controller to follow control signal over an 11:1 speed range. 

1. Electrical Signal: 4 to 20 mA at 24 V. 

2. Pneumatic Signal: 3 to 15 psig (20 to 104 kPa). 

F. Internal Adjustability Capabilities: 

1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm. 

2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm. 

3. Acceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds. 

4. Deceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds. 

5. Current Limit: 50 to a minimum of 110 percent of maximum rating. 



G. Self-Protection and Reliability Features: 

1. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors. 

2. Under- and overvoltage trips; inverter overtemperature, overload, and overcurrent trips. 

3. Motor Overload Relay: Adjustable and capable of NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 performance. 

4. Notch filter to prevent operation of the controller-motor-load combination at a natural 

frequency of the combination. 

5. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips. 

6. Loss-of-phase protection. 

7. Reverse-phase protection. 

8. Short-circuit protection. 

9. Motor overtemperature fault. 

H. Multiple-Motor Capability: Controller suitable for service to multiple motors and having a 

separate overload relay and protection for each controlled motor. Overload relay shall shut off 

controller and motors served by it when overload relay is tripped. 

I. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power interruption 

until motor has stopped. 

J. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on 

output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow 

speeds. 

K. Input Line Conditioning: 3% line reactor. 

L. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators shall indicate the following conditions: 

1. Power on. 

2. Run. 

3. Drive fault. 

4. Auto mode selected. 

M. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Start and stop pushbuttons. Auto-manual selector switch 

with manual speed control potentiometer. 

N. Indicating Devices: Meters or digital readout devices and selector switch, mounted flush in 

controller door and connected to indicate the following controller parameters: 

1. Output frequency (Hz). 

2. Motor speed (rpm). 

3. Motor status (running, stop, fault). 

4. Motor current (amperes). 

5. Motor torque (percent). 

6. Fault or alarming status (code). 

7. PID feedback signal (percent). 

8. DC-link voltage (VDC). 

9. Set-point frequency (Hz). 

10. Motor output voltage (V). 

O. Control Signal Interface: 



1. Electric Input Signal Interface: A minimum of 2 analog inputs (0 to 10 V or 0/4-20 mA) 

and 6 programmable digital inputs. 

2. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-setting input 

signals from the BMS or other control systems: 

a. 0 to 10-V dc. 

b. 0-20 or 4-20 mA. 

c. Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs. 

d. Fixed frequencies using digital inputs. 

e. RS485. 

f. Keypad display for local hand operation. 

3. Output Signal Interface: 

a. A minimum of 1 analog output signal (0/4-20 mA), which can be programmed to 

any of the following: 

1) Output frequency (Hz). 

2) Output current (load). 

3) DC-link voltage (VDC). 



6) Set-point frequency (Hz). 

4. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of 2 dry circuit relay outputs (120-V ac, 1 A) 

for remote indication of the following: 

a. Motor running. 

b. Set-point speed reached. 

c. Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent). 

d. PID high- or low-speed limits reached. 

P. Communications: Provide an RS485 interface allowing VFC to be used with an external system 

within a multidrop LAN configuration. Interface shall allow all parameter settings of VFC to be 

programmed via BMS control. Provide capability for VFC to retain these settings within the 

nonvolatile memory. 

Q. Integral Disconnecting Means: NEMA AB 1, circuit breaker disconnect with lockable handle. 


A. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 12 (minimum) 


A. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty type. 

C. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays. 



D. Standard Displays: 

1. Output frequency (Hz). 

2. Set-point frequency (Hz). 

3. Motor current (amperes). 

4. DC-link voltage (VDC). 

5. Motor torque (percent). 

6. Motor speed (rpm). 

7. Motor output voltage (V). 

E. Historical Logging Information and Displays: 

1. Real-time clock with current time and date. 

2. Running log of total power versus time. 

3. Total run time. 

4. Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each. 

F. Current-Sensing, Phase-Failure Relays for Bypass Controller: Solid-state sensing circuit with 

isolated output contacts for hard-wired connection; arranged to operate on phase failure, phase 

reversal, current unbalance of from 30 to 40 percent, or loss of supply voltage; with adjustable 

response delay. 


A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and tested VFCs before 

shipping. 



A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFCs for compliance with requirements, 

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 

B. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections 

before VFC installation. 



A. Select features of each VFC to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and 

motor; required control sequence; and duty cycle of motor, controller, and load. 

B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled. 




A. Anchor each VFC assembly to steel-channel sills arranged and sized according to 

manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and grout sills flush with 

mounting surface. 

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers 

and Supports for Electrical Systems." 


A. Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification 


B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFCs, including control 

sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions 

with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFC units. 

3.5 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION 

A. Install wiring between VFCs and remote devices according to Division 26 Section "Low- 

Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. 

C. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic-control devices where applicable. 

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only manual- and automatic-control devices that 

have no safety functions when switch is in hand position. 

2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both hand and automatic positions for 

safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature 

cutouts, and motor overload protectors. 


A. Conduit installation requirements are specified in other Division 26 Sections. Drawings 

indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties. 

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical 

Systems." 


A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element, bus, component, 





B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following 

field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 

C. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 

1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection, except optional tests, 

stated in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters. 




A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges. 



adjust, operate, and maintain variable frequency controllers. Refer to Division 01 Section 

"Demonstration and Training." 




SECTION 264313 - TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL 

POWER CIRCUITS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes TVSSs for low-voltage power, control, and communication equipment. 


1. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices with integral TVSSs. 

2. Division 26 Section "Panelboards" for factory-installed TVSSs. 


A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications. 

B. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating. 

C. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating weights, 

operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. 

B. Product Certificates: For transient voltage suppression devices, signed by product manufacturer 

certifying compliance with the following standards: 

1. UL 1283. 

2. UL 1449. 


D. Field quality-control test reports, including the following: 



3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements. 



E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transient voltage suppression devices to include in 


F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and 

capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational 

Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as 





B. Source Limitations: Obtain suppression devices and accessories through one source from a 


C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, dimensional requirements, and electrical performance 

of suppressors and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section 

"Product Requirements." 



intended use. 

E. Comply with IEEE C62.41, "IEEE Guide for Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power 

Circuits," and test devices according to IEEE C62.45, "IEEE Guide on Surge Testing for 

Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits." 

F. Comply with NEMA LS 1, "Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices." 

G. Comply with UL 1283, "Electromagnetic Interference Filters," and UL 1449, "Transient 

Voltage Surge Suppressors." 


A. Service Conditions: Rate surge protection devices for continuous operation under the following 

conditions, unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Not less than 115 percent of nominal system 

operating voltage. 

2. Operating Temperature: 30 to 120 deg F. 

3. Humidity: 0 to 85 percent, noncondensing. 

4. Altitude: Less than 1000 above sea level. 



1.7 WARRANTY 


replace components of surge suppressors that fail in materials or workmanship within five years 

from date of Substantial Completion. 




1. Replaceable Protection Modules: One of each size and type installed. 





1. Cutler-Hammer, Inc.; Eaton Corporation. 

2. General Electric Company. 


4. Tycor; Cutler-Hammer, Inc. 

2.2 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS 

A. Surge Protection Device Description: Modular design with field-replaceable modules, signwave-tracking 

type with the following features and accessories: 

1. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. 

2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 

3. Integral disconnect switch. 

4. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. 

5. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 

B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 80 kA per phase. 

C. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with voltages of 480Y/277, 3phase, 

4-wire circuits shall be as follows: 

1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277. 

2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277. 

3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277. 

D. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with voltages of 208Y/120, 3phase, 

4-wire circuits shall be as follows: 



1. Line to Neutral: 400 V for 208Y/120. 

2. Line to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120. 

3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120. 


A. NEMA 250, with type matching the enclosure of panel or device being protected. 


3.1 INSTALLATION OF SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 

A. Install devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service entrance 

ground. 

B. Install devices for panelboard and auxiliary panels with conductors or buses between suppressor 

and points of attachment as short and straight as possible. Do not exceed manufacturer's 

recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground. 

1. Provide multipole, 60-A circuit breaker as a dedicated disconnect for suppressor, unless 


3.2 PLACING SYSTEM INTO SERVICE 

A. Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment to their sources until surge protection 

devices are installed and connected. 


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to 

inspect, test, and adjust equipment installation, including connections. Report results in writing. 

1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written installation 

requirements. 

B. Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections 

and prepare test reports: 

C. Testing: Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 

1. After installing surge protection devices, but before electrical circuitry has been 

energized, test for compliance with requirements. 

2. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

3. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, 

"Surge Arresters, Low-Voltage Surge Protection Devices" Section. Certify compliance 

with test parameters. 



D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 



adjust, operate, and maintain transient voltage suppression devices. Refer to Division 01 

Section "Demonstration and Training." 




SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 

2. Emergency lighting units. 

3. Exit signs. 

4. Lighting fixture supports. 


A. BF: Ballast factor. 

B. CRI: Color-rendering index. 

C. CU: Coefficient of utilization. 

D. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating. 

E. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. 

F. RCR: Room cavity ratio. 

G. TCLP: Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure. 


A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. 

Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 

2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 

3. Ballast. 

4. Energy-efficiency data. 

5. Life, output, and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 



6. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each lighting fixture 

type, outfitted with lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the 

lighting fixture as applied in this Project. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions, 

weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. 

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power wiring. 

C. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, 

signed by product manufacturer. 

D. Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures. 

E. Field quality-control test reports. 

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, 


G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 




intended use. 



A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other 

construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, firesuppression 

system, and partition assemblies. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which 

manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace 

components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified 


1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: Five years from date of 

Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty 

for the remaining four years. 

2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast Batteries: Five years from date of 

Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty 

for the remaining four years. 



B. Special Warranty for Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast manufacturer 

agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified 


1. Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 

2. Warranty Period for Electromagnetic Ballasts: Three years from date of Substantial 

Completion. 

C. Special Warranty for T5 Fluorescent Lamps: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner 

and signed by lamp manufacturer agreeing to replace lamps that fail in materials or 

workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period 

indicated below. 

1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion. 




1. Lamps: 10 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 

2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of 

each type. 

3. Battery and Charger Data: 1 for each emergency lighting unit. 

4. Ballasts: 1 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 



A. In Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that 

introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each lighting fixture is based on the product 

named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a 

comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 

2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to 

NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. 

B. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 

C. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent 

warping and sagging. 



D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under 

operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to 

prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during 

relamping and when secured in operating position. 

E. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 

2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 

3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 

4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent. 

2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS 

A. Electronic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.11; instant-start type, unless otherwise indicated, 

and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for full light 

output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated. 

1. Sound Rating: A. 

2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 

3. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 

4. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 

5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 

6. BF: 0.85 or higher. 

7. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 

2.4 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT 

A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting 

fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924. 

1. Emergency Connection: Operate 1 fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 900 

lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to 

fixture ballast. 

2. Night-Light Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. 

3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or 

entering ceiling space. 

a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power 

and demonstrates unit operability. 

b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle 

charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 

4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 

5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer 

relay. 

6. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit 

initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in 



tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual 

confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response. 

7. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates coderequired 

test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is 

annunciated by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED. 

B. External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, suitable for powering one or 

more fluorescent lamps, remote mounted from lighting fixture. Comply with UL 924. 

1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. Connect 

unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast. 

2. Night-Light Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp in a remote fixture continuously. 

3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 

4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type. 

5. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. 

6. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and 

demonstrates unit operability. 

7. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; 

bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 








2.5 EXIT SIGNS 

A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, 

comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Internally Lighted Signs: 

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 

2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained 

power pack. 

a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 

b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 

c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage 

drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, 

relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and 

floated on charger. 

d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal 

power and demonstrates unit operability. 

e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle 

charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 



2.6 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS 

A. Description: Self-contained units complying with UL 924. 

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 

2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 

3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops 

to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery 

when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay 

disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on 

charger. 

4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and 

demonstrates unit operability. 

5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; 

bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 

6. Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures. 

7. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15 minutes when power is 

restored after an outage. 








2.7 FLUORESCENT LAMPS 

A. Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure (TCLP) 

test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1. 

B. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 54 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial lumens 

(minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 5000 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours, 


C. T5HO rapid-start lamps, rated 54 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches, 2900 initial 

lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 5000 K, and average rated life of 

20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. 

2.8 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS 

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- 

and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. 

B. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. 





A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each 

fixture. 

B. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches , brace to limit swinging. 

2. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for 

suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 

C. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities. 

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors 

and Cables." 


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify 

transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal. 

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and 

interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate 

compliance with standards. 




SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. 

2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays. 


1. Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on 

exterior surfaces of buildings. 


A. CRI: Color-rendering index. 

B. HID: High-intensity discharge. 

C. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. 

D. TCLP: Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure. 


A. Product Data: For each luminaire and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit 

designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 

1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected 

area, and verification of indicated parameters. 

2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. 

3. Details of installation and construction. 

4. Luminaire materials. 

5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with 

indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories. 

6. Photoelectric relays. 

7. Ballasts, including energy-efficiency data. 

8. Lamps, including life, output, and energy-efficiency data. 



9. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for 

components involved. 

B. Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures. 


D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires to include in emergency, operation, and 


E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 




intended use. 

B. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code." 


1.6 WARRANTY 


replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, 

perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty 

period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or 

unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage. 

1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 

2. Warranty Period for Lamps: Replace lamps and fuses that fail within 12 months from 

date of Substantial Completion; furnish replacement lamps and fuses that fail within the 

second 12 months from date of Substantial Completion. 




1. Lamps: Furnish at least one of each type. 

2. Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: Furnish at least one of each 

type. 

3. Ballasts: Furnish at least one of each type. 





A. In Exterior Lighting Device Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that 

introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 

1. Basis of Design Product: The design of each item of exterior luminaire and its support is 

based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the 

named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 

2.2 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet 

locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for 

luminaires. 

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 

D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and 

support to prevent warping and sagging. 

E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or 

deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires. 

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under 

operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to 

prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during 

relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or 

replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens. 

G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel. 

H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, 

and UV radiation. 

I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light 

distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field. 

J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 

2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 

3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 

K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and 

cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors. 



L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested 

luminaire before shipping. 

M. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual 

for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating 

finishes. 

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to 

remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind 

welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if 

present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal 

Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." 

2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of 

primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel. 

a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard catalog of colors. 

N. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes 

Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and 

designating finishes. 

1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the 

Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 

2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff 

complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax. 

a. Color: Dark bronze 

2.3 LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS 

A. Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A. 

B. Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory 

set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc (16 to 32 lx) and off at 4.5 to 10 fc (48 to 108 lx) with 15second 

minimum time delay. 

1. Relay with locking-type receptacle shall comply with NEMA C136.10. 

2. Adjustable window slide for adjusting on-off set points. 

2.4 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS AND LAMPS 

A. Low-Temperature Ballast Capability: Rated by its manufacturer for reliable starting and 

operation of indicated lamp(s) at temperatures minus 20 deg F and higher. 

B. Ballast Characteristics: 

1. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum. 

2. Sound Rating: A. 

3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 



4. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1, energy-saving, high power factor, 

Class P, automatic-reset thermal protection. 

5. Case Temperature for Compact Lamp Ballasts: 65 deg C, maximum. 

6. Transient-Voltage Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 Category A or better. 

C. Low-Temperature Lamp Capability: Rated for reliable starting and operation with ballast 

provided at temperatures minus 20 deg F and higher. 

D. Fluorescent Lamps: Low-mercury type. Comply with the EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching 

procedure (TCLP) test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according 

to NEMA LL 1. 


3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION 

A. Install lamps in each luminaire. 

B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports. 

C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. 

3.2 CORROSION PREVENTION 

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a 

dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment. 

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." 

In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied 

with a 50 percent overlap. 


A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. 

B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires 

and energizing circuits with normal power source. 

1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls. 

C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and 

interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate 

compliance with standards. 




SECTION 271500 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Pathways. 

2. Multiuser telecommunications outlet assemblies. 

3. Telecommunications outlet/connectors. 

B. Work Performed by Others: Procurement and installation of telecommunication service 

hardware and cabling will be performed by MSA / LMSI. 

C. Related Sections: 

1. Division 28 Section "Video Surveillance" for cabling associated with the closed-circuit 

television (CCTV) cameras. 


A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. 

B. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection 

or cross-connection. 

C. MUTOA: Multiuser telecommunications outlet assembly, a grouping in one location of several 

telecommunications outlet/connectors. 

D. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet 

cable terminates. 

E. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 

1.4 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION 

A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between 

the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the 

communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called 

"permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols. 



1. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 requires that a minimum of two telecommunications outlet/connectors 

be installed for each work area. 

B. A work area is approximately 100 sq. ft., and includes the components that extend from the 

telecommunications outlet/connectors to the station equipment. 

C. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet. This maximum allowable length 

does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet to the workstation equipment. The 

maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet in the 

horizontal cross-connect. 






B. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A. 

C. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A. 


A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways with structural members, 

HVAC, plumbing items, and architectural features in the paths with common supports. 

B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at 

each work area. 


2.1 PATHWAYS 

A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A. 

B. Cable Trays: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Cable Trays for Electrical 

Systems." 

C. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for 


1. Conduits to end devices shall be 1 inch minimum trade size. 

2. Conduit sections between pull points shall be no greater than 100 feet in length. 

3. Use 4 inch square minimum size outlet boxes for pull points, rather than conduit bodies. 



4. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep. 

2.2 BACKBOARDS 

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire rated with rating stamp exposed if painted, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. 

2.3 MULTIUSER TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET ASSEMBLY (MUTOA) 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that 

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Chatsworth Products, Inc. 

2. Hubbell Premise Wiring. 

3. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc. 


B. Description: MUTOAs shall meet the requirements for cable connecting hardware. 

1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables. 

2. Number of Connectors per Field: 

a. One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated. 

3. Mounting: Wall. 

4. NRTL listed as complying with UL 50 and UL 1863. 

5. Label shall include maximum length of work area cords, based on TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 

2.4 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS 

A. Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. Comply 

with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 

B. Workstation Outlets: Two-port-connector assemblies mounted in single faceplate. 

1. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Division 26 Section 

"Wiring Devices." 


A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical 

Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors. 

B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A. 



2.6 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS 

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, 

laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. 

B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 


3.1 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS 

A. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A-7. 

B. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks specified on the 

Drawings. Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings. 

C. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends 

between pull points. 

D. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" 

for installation of conduits and wireways. 

E. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible. 

F. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms: 

1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood 

is installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed 

around perimeter walls of room. 

2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions. 

3. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead. 

4. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to 

grounding system. 

G. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly, 

and form smooth gap-free corners and joints. 


A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" 

Chapter. 

B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A. 

C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall 

allowing at least 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar 

with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable 

electrical building ground. 



D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG 

equipment grounding conductor. 




SECTION 282300 – VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes video surveillance system consisting of cameras, data transmission 

wiring, a network switch marshalling panel, and a control station with its associated equipment. 

B. The closed-circuit television (CCTV) design is intended to provide observation of specific KW 

Basin Annex locations from Room 20A in 105-KW. The control station with its associated 

equipment and connection to the Annex marshalling panel will be installed by others. 


A. AGC: Automatic gain control. 

B. CCTV: Closed-Circuit Television 

C. HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface 

D. MPEG-4: Form of compression of audio and visual digital data 

E. NVR: Network Video Recorder 

F. NTSC: National Television System Committee. 

G. PTZ: Pan/Tilt/Zoom 

H. TCP/IP: Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol 

I. USB: Universal Serial Bus 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including dimensions and data on features, 

performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. 

B. Shop Drawings: Detail assemblies of standard components that are custom assembled for 

specific application on this Project. 



1. Functional Block Diagram: Show single-line interconnections between components for 

signal transmission and control. Show cable types and sizes. 

2. Dimensioned plan and elevations of equipment racks, control panels, and consoles. 

Show access and workspace requirements. 

3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring, and grounding. 

C. Equipment List: Include every piece of equipment by model number, manufacturer, serial 

number, location, and date of original installation. Add pretesting record of each piece of 

equipment, listing name of person testing, date of test, set points of adjustments, name and 

description of the view of preset positions, description of alarms, and description of unit output 

responses to an alarm. 

D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that cameras, camerasupporting 

equipment, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in 

Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the 

following: 









E. Field quality-control test reports. 

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cameras, power supplies, infrared illuminators, monitors, 

videotape recorders, digital video recorders, video switches, and control-station components to 

include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in 

Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" include the following: 

1. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended to be stored at the site for 

ready access. 

G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 




intended use. 

B. Comply with NECA 1. 





A. Environmental Conditions: Capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions 

without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability: 

1. Control Station: Rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 60 to 85 

deg F and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent, noncondensing. 

2. Interior, Controlled Environment: System components installed in air-conditioned 

interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 

50 to 100 deg F and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing. NEMA 250, 

Type 4 enclosures. 

1.7 WARRANTY 


replace components of cameras, equipment related to camera operation, and control-station 

equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. 







2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 

A. Video signal format shall comply with the NTSC standard composite video, interlaced. 

Composite video signal termination shall be 75 ohms. 

B. Surge Protection: Protect components from voltage surges originating external to equipment 

housing and entering through power, communication, signal, control, or sensing leads. Include 

surge protection for external wiring of each conductor entry connection to components. 

1. Minimum Protection for Power Connections 120 V and More: Auxiliary panel 

suppressors complying with requirements in Division 26 Section "Transient-Voltage 

Suppression for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits." 

2. Minimum Protection for Communication, Signal, Control, and Low-Voltage Power 

Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Transient-Voltage 

Suppression for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits" as recommended by 

manufacturer for type of line being protected. 



2.3 STANDARD CAMERAS 

A. Manufacturers: 

1. Pelco. 

B. Automatic Color Dome Camera: Assembled and tested as a manufactured unit, containing a 

dome assembly, color camera, motorized pan and tilt, zoom lens, and receiver/driver. 

1. Pickup Device: 768(H) by 494(V) pixels. 

2. Horizontal Resolution: 540 lines. 

3. Signal-to-Noise Ratio: Not less than 50 dB, with the camera AGC off. 

4. With AGC, manually selectable on or off. 

5. Sensitivity: Camera shall provide usable images in low-light conditions, delivering an 

image at a scene illumination of 0.65 lux at 1/60 sec. 

6. Manually selectable modes for backlight compensation or normal lighting. 

7. Pan and Tilt: Direct-drive motor, 360-degree rotation angle, and 90-degree tilt angle. 

Pan-and-tilt speed shall be variable controlled by operator. Movement from preset 

positions shall be not less than 200 degrees per second. 

8. Preset positioning: 8 user-definable scenes, each allowing 20-character titles. 

9. White Balance: Auto-tracing white balance, with manual override. 

2.4 LENSES 


1. Pelco. 

B. Description: Optical-quality coated optics, designed specifically for video surveillance 

applications, and matched to specified camera. Provide color-corrected lenses with color 

cameras. 

1. Auto-Iris Lens: Electrically controlled iris with circuit set to maintain a constant video 

level in varying lighting conditions. 

2. Zoom Lenses: Motorized, remote-controlled units, rated as "quiet operating." Features 


2.5 POWER SUPPLIES 

a. Electrical Leads: Filtered to minimize video signal interference. 

b. Motor Speed: Variable. 

c. Lens shall be available with preset positioning capability to recall the position of 

specific scenes. 

A. Power Supplies: Low-voltage power supplies matched for voltage and current requirements of 

cameras and accessories, type as recommended by camera and lens manufacturer. 

1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4. 



2.6 CAMERA-SUPPORTING EQUIPMENT 


1. Pelco. 

B. Minimum Load Rating: Rated for load in excess of the total weight supported times a minimum 

safety factor of two. 

C. Pan Units: Motorized automatic-scanning units arranged to provide remote-controlled manual 

and automatic camera panning action and equipped with matching mounting brackets. 

1. Scanning Operation: Silent, smooth, and positive. 

2. Stops: Adjustable without disassembly, to limit the scanning arc. 

D. Pan-and-Tilt Units: Motorized units arranged to provide remote-controlled aiming of cameras 

with smooth and silent operation and equipped with matching mounting brackets. 

1. Panning Rotation: 0 to 355 degrees, with adjustable stops. 

2. Tilt Movement: 90 degrees, plus or minus 5 degrees, with adjustable stops. 

3. Speed: 12 degrees per second in both horizontal and vertical planes. 

4. Wiring: Factory prewired for camera and zoom lens functions and pan-and-tilt power 

and control. 

5. Built-in encoders or potentiometers for position feedback. 

6. Pan-and-tilt unit shall be available with preset positioning capability to recall the position 

of a specific scene. 

E. Mounting Brackets for Fixed Cameras: Type matched to items supported and mounting 

conditions. Include manual pan-and-tilt adjustment. 

2.7 MONITORS 


1. Pelco. 

B. Color: 

C. Designed for continuous operation. 

1. Screen Size (Diagonal Dimension): 24 inch 

2. Monitor Display: LCD. 

3. Minimum Front Panel Devices and Controls: Power switch, and power-on indicator. 

4. Connection types: DVI, BNC, HDMI. 

5. Mounting: Ceiling, fixed wall mount, Tile/Swivel. 

6. Electrical: 120-V ac, 60 Hz. 

2.8 NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER 




1. AMA Security. 

B. Digital, time-lapse type, full frame and motion recorder. 

1. Recording Time: 400 hours minimum. 

2. Resolution: 720 by 480, minimum. 

3. Programming shall include the following: 

a. Password protection. 

b. Continuous recording option. 

c. Time-lapse operating modes. 

d. Search video by time, event, or motion. 

4. Programming: USB for software updating, image archiving, and image transfer to a PC. 

5. Storage: 10 TB hard drive. 

6. Compression: MPEG-4. 

7. Time and Date Generator: Records time (hr:min:sec) and date legend of each frame. 

8. Mounting: Standard 19-inch rack complying with EIA 310. 

2.9 VIDEO SWITCHERS 


1. Pelco. 

B. Pan-Tilt-Zoom Controls: Arranged for multiple-camera control, with switches to select camera 

to be controlled. 

1. Pan-and-Tilt Control: Joystick type. 

2. Zoom Control: Momentary-contact, "in-out" push button. 

3. Automatic-Scan Control: A push button for each camera with pan capability places that 

camera in automatic-scanning mode. 

2.10 CONTROL STATIONS 


1. Pelco. 

B. Heavy-duty, freestanding, modular metal furniture units arranged to house standard mounting 

electronic equipment. Coordinate video surveillance component arrangement and wiring with 

components and wiring of other systems. 

C. Equipment Mounting: Standard 19-inch rack complying with EIA 310. 

D. Normal System Power Supply: 120 V, 60 Hz. 



2.11 SIGNAL TRANSMISSION COMPONENTS 

A. Cable: Comply with Division 26 Section "Control Voltage Electrical Power Cables." 


3.1 WIRING 

A. Wiring Method: Install cables in cable trays and as otherwise indicated. 

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess 

and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars 

and distribution spools. 

C. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring, use numbered terminal strips in 

junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Tighten electrical 

connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If 

manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 

3.2 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM INSTALLATION 

A. Install cameras level and plumb. 

B. Set pan unit and pan-and-tilt unit stops to suit final camera position and to obtain the field of 

view required for camera. 

C. Install power supplies and other auxiliary components at control stations, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

D. Avoid ground loops by making ground connections at only the control station. 

E. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 26 Section 

"Identification of Electrical Systems." 


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect 

field-assembled components and equipment installation and supervise pretesting, testing, and 

adjusting of video surveillance equipment. 

B. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled, and 

that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. 

C. Pretesting: Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to verify that 

they comply with specified requirements. Conduct tests at varying lighting levels, including 

day and night scenes as applicable. Prepare video surveillance equipment for acceptance and 

operational testing as follows: 



1. Verify operation of auto-iris lenses. 

2. Set back-focus of zoom lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate nighttime lighting 

conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produces a clear image. 

Additionally, set zoom to full wide angle and aim camera at an object 50 to 75 feet away. 

Adjust until image is in focus from full wide angle to full telephoto, with the filter in 

place. 

3. Set and name all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel. 

4. Verify operation of control-station equipment. 

D. Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully completed and system has 

been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. 

E. Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies with 

Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for proper operation in 

all functional modes. 

F. Remove and replace malfunctioning items and retest as specified above. 

G. Record test results for each piece of equipment. 

H. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified 

requirements are met. 


A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 6 months of date of Substantial Completion, 

provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions and to optimize 

performance of the installed equipment. Tasks shall include, but are not limited to, the 

following: 

1. Check cable connections. 

2. Check proper operation of cameras and lenses. Verify operation of auto-iris lenses and 

adjust back-focus as needed. 

3. Adjust all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel. 

4. Recommend changes to cameras, lenses, and associated equipment to improve Owner' 

utilization of video surveillance system. 

5. Provide a written report of adjustments and recommendations. 


A. Clean installed items using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer. 

B. Clean video surveillance system components, including camera-housing windows, lenses, and 

monitor screens. 



adjust, operate, and maintain video surveillance equipment. 



1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for troubleshooting, 

servicing, and maintaining equipment. 

2. Demonstrate methods of determining optimum alignment and adjustment of components 

and settings for system controls. 

3. Review equipment list and data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 01 Section 

"Operation and Maintenance Data" 

4. Conduct a minimum of 4 hours' training as specified in instructions to Owner's 

employees in Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" 




SECTION 283100 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 



A. Design, furnish, install, test, certify, and place into service a complete addressable fire 

alarm system. The system shall be complete with all hardware, software, and memory 

specifically tailored for this installation. 

B. System design submittal and installation shall comply with HNF-36174 DOE Fire 

Protection Handbook – Hanford Chapter (current edition) and HNF-8818 RFAR 

Acquisition and Installation Procedure (current Edition). 

C. Provide a fire alarm system consisting of, but not limited to the following components: 

1. Fire alarm control panel (FCP) 

2. Conduit and wiring necessary to connect the FCP to alarm initiating devices, 

notification appliances and auxiliary equipment 

3. Addressable manual fire alarm stations 

4. Addressable analog area smoke detectors 

5. Addressable analog duct smoke detectors 

6. Conventional heat detectors 

7. Connections to sprinkler waterflow alarm switches 

8. Connections to sprinkler supervisory switches and tamper switches 

9. Sounder and signal strobe combination notification appliances 

10. Air handling systems shutdown relays 

11. Battery standby 

12. Conduit and GFE cable to building’s main telecommunications room 

D. Provide a fire alarm system that conforms to the requirements of NFPA 72 National Fire 

Alarm Code (latest edition), NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (latest edition), and 

NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 

(latest edition). 

1.2 SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 

A. The system shall identify any off normal condition and log each condition into the system 

database as an event. 

1. The system shall automatically display on the control panel the first event of the 

highest priority by type. The priorities and types shall include alarm, 

supervisory, and trouble. 

2. The system shall have a queue operation, and shall not require event 

acknowledgment by the system operator. The system shall have a labeled colorcoded 

indicator for each type of event. 



3. The user shall be able to review each event by selecting scrolling keys. 

4. New alarm, supervisory, or trouble events shall sound a silenceable audible 

signal at the control panel. 

B. Operation of any alarm-initiating device shall automatically: 

1. Update the control/display as described above. 

2. Audibly and visibly annunciate the alarm condition at the fire alarm control 

panel. 

3. Sound all alarm signals throughout the building. The fire alarm evacuation tone 

shall be the three-pulse temporal pattern. 

4. Turn on all strobe lights throughout the building. 

5. Operate the alarm relay and initiate the transmission of an alarm signal to the 

Hanford central station over a RFAR transmitter installed by the Hanford Radio 

Maintenance Group. 

6. Operate control relay contacts to shut down all HVAC units serving the floor of 

alarm initiation. 

C. Activation of a supervisory initiating device shall: 


2. Audibly and visibly annunciate the supervisory condition at the fire alarm control 

panel. 

3. Operate the supervisory relay and initiate the transmission of a supervisory signal 

to the Hanford central station over a RFAR transmitter. 

D. The entire fire alarm system wiring shall be electrically supervised to automatically 

detect and report trouble conditions to the fire alarm control panel. Any opens, grounds 

or disarrangement of system wiring and shorts across alarm horn/strobe wiring shall 

automatically: 


2. Operate the trouble relay contacts to initiate the transmission of a trouble signal 

to the Hanford central station over a RFAR transmitter. 

3. Visually and audibly annunciate a general trouble condition, on the FCP. The 

visual indication shall remain on until the trouble condition is repaired. 

E. The FCP shall have an optional LED Annunciator/Switch Card component installed and 

programmed for pre-defined disable groups particular to this installation. Disable groups 

shall consist of the following to facilitate routine inspection, testing and maintenance 

(ITM): 

1. All control relays that initiate drain actuation. 

2. All control relays that initiate/control HVAC shutdown listed in Section 1.2.B.6. 

3. All notification appliances. 



1.3 SYSTEM DESIGN 

A. System Design: Provide the services of a qualified factory trained fire alarm designer for the 

FCP to be installed on this project. The designer shall assure the completeness and 

correctness of the fire alarm system design by performing the following: 


1. Prepare shop drawings of FCP indicating location of components, 

interconnection of components and connections to alarm initiating, indicating, 

and auxiliary circuits. 

2. Prepare a system input/output matrix to verify that the proper sequences occur for 

each initiating point or zone. 

3. Prepare shop drawings of fire alarm layout, conduit and wiring plans. Show 

location of all fire alarm appliances, conduit layout, quantity, and type of wires in 

each conduit, and interface with other systems for functions such as central 

station signaling, fan shutdown, and damper operation. 

4. Prepare terminal-to-terminal field wiring diagrams for alarm initiating, indicating 

and auxiliary circuits; detail the interfaces with other systems; indicate labeling 

of each fire alarm system conductor. 

5. Calculate conductor sizes for each alarm initiating, indicating, and auxiliary 

circuit; limit voltage drops so that they do not exceed the FCP manufacturer’s 

limitations, for the most remote device on each circuit. 

6. Prepare battery load calculations for the FCP and any remote power supply 

panels and select proper battery size. Battery shall be sized to include an 

additional 20% safety margin above calculated system demand. 

7. Calculate alarm signal in all spaces to comply with ADAAG requirements: 

minimum 15 dBA above ambient at all locations, but not over 120 dBA at any 

location. 

8. Select alarm initiating, alarm indicating, and auxiliary devices compatible with 

FCP. 

A. Provide the following submittals according project submittal procedures: 

1. Calculations: Submit the following calculations at least 30 days prior to 

scheduled start of fire alarm system installation. 

a. System battery capacity calculations to demonstrate that the battery is 

sized to support the system operating in a “normal” (non-alarm) 

condition for not less than 24 hours plus a general alarm condition (all 

alarm notification appliances used for evacuation being activated) for not 

less than 5 minutes following the completion of the 24 hour period. 

Battery shall be sized to include an additional 20% safety margin above 

calculated system demand. 

b. Audible signal distribution calculations to demonstrate that the 

notification appliances are selected and located so fire alarm signal sound 

intensity levels in all occupied areas will be not less than those required 

by NFPA 72. 



c. Voltage drop calculations to demonstrate that the signal voltage at the 

most remote notification appliances on each circuit will not be less than 

the FCP or the notification appliance manufacturer’s recommendations. 

d. Submit final battery capacity calculations and final voltage drop 

calculations at least one week prior to final system acceptance test. 

2. Catalog Data: Submit catalog data at least 30 days prior to scheduled start of fire 

alarm system installation for all equipment furnished under this Section. 

3. Certifications: Submit certifications as follows: 

a. Within 30 days after Notice to Proceed, submit certifications of the 

qualifications of the fire alarm installing firm as described in the quality 

assurance paragraph of this Section. 

b. Within 30 days after Notice to Proceed, submit certifications of the 

qualifications of the fire alarm system technician as described in the 

quality assurance paragraph of this Section. 

c. Provide certification from the fire alarm control manufacturer that 

proposed alarm-initiating devices, alarm appliances, and auxiliary 

devices are compatible with the FCP and other auxiliary equipment. 

d. Provide "Record of Completion" and associated documentation for the 

completed system according to NFPA 72 prior to the system acceptance 

test. 

4. Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions at least 30 days prior to 


5. Materials and Parts List: Submit materials and parts list at least 30 days prior to 


6. Shop Drawings: Submit system shop drawings as follows: 

a. Prepare floor plan drawings using a minimum scale of 1/8" - 1'0" for 

plans and 1/4" = 1'-0" for details. 

b. Hand lettering shall be a minimum of 3/16" and other lettering a 

minimum of 1/8" to permit microfilm reductions. 

c. Show location of FCP, all fire alarm appliances, conduit layout, quantity 

and type of wires in each conduit, and interface with other systems for 

functions such as central station signaling, fan shutdown, damper 

operation, and elevator recall. 

d. Show layout of the FCP indicating location of components, 

interconnection of components, and connections to alarm initiating, 

indicating, and auxiliary circuits. 

e. Submit shop drawings at least 30 days prior to scheduled start of fire 

alarm system installation. Installation shall not proceed without design 

approval by the HANFORD Fire Protection Group. 



f. Submit final shop drawings at least one week prior to final system 

acceptance test. 

7. FCP Program: Submit FCP program as follows: 

a. Provide the FCP input/output matrix and a copy of the proposed FCP 

program at least 30 days prior to the anticipated final tie-in/acceptance 

date of the fire alarm system. 

b. Provide the final FCP input/output matrix and the final FCP program at 

least two weeks prior to the anticipated final tie-in/acceptance test. 

8. Test Reports: Submit test reports as follows: 

a. Submit a report of the pre-final tests indicating system status and 

corrective actions required before the final acceptance tests. 

b. Submit a test plan for the final acceptance tests at least 30 days prior to 

scheduled final acceptance tests. 

c. Submit a report of final acceptance tests according to requirements in 

NFPA 72. 

9. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams as follows: 

a. Provide terminal-to-terminal wiring diagrams for alarm circuits, 

supervisory circuits, remote power supply panels, and interfaces with 

other systems such as HVAC and elevators. 

b. Submit wiring diagrams at least 30 days prior to scheduled start of fire 

alarm system installation. 

c. Submit final wiring diagrams at least one week prior to final acceptance 

testing. 

10. O&M Manual: Submit operating and maintenance data. 

a. Submit operating and instruction manuals prior to testing of the system. 

b. Submit five complete sets of project-specific operating and maintenance 

instruction manuals upon successful completion of testing. Provide 

complete, step-by-step testing instructions giving recommended and 

required testing frequency of all equipment, methods for testing each 

piece of equipment, and a complete trouble shooting manual explaining 

how to test the primary internal parts of each piece of equipment. 

Maintenance instructions shall be complete, easy to read, understandable, 

and shall provide the following information: 

i. Provide instructions for replacing any components of the system, 

including internal parts. 

ii. Provide a list of recommended spare parts. 

iii. Provide instructions for periodic cleaning and adjustment of 

equipment with a schedule of these functions. 



iv. Provide a complete list of all equipment and components with 

information as to the address and telephone number of both the 

manufacturer and local supplier of each item. 

c. Provide operating instructions prominently displayed on a separate sheet 

located next to the FCP in accordance with UL Standard 864. 

11. Project Record Documents: Submit project record documents as follows: 

a. Provide updated shop drawings reflecting as-built conditions showing the 

work completed under this Section. Include notes on special systems or 

devices, new and existing, locations of equipment, actual conduit 

installation, wiring color-coding, wire tag notations, interconnections 

between all equipment, and internal wiring of the equipment. Include 

conduit size, conductor size, and number of conductors per conduit. 

b. Provide the updated shop drawings on Mylar reproducible media and on 

electronic media in AutoCAD “*.dxf” or “*.dwg” format. 

12. Warranties: Submit warranties. The subcontractor shall warrant all equipment 

and wiring free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects for one year (365 

days) from the date of final acceptance. 


A. Qualification of the Installing Firm: The installing firm shall: 

1. Be licensed by any state in the United States to engage in the design, fabrication, 

and installation of fire alarm systems. 

2. Have satisfactorily installed at least twenty fire alarm systems of equivalent 

nature and scope to the system described in this Section. 

3. Provide the services of a qualified fire alarm system technician to design the fire 

alarm system and to test the completed system. 

4. Be a factory-certified representative of the manufacturer of the FCP that will be 

used on this project. 

B. Qualifications of the fire alarm system technician: The fire alarm system technician shall: 

1. Be factory trained in the theory, operation, installation, and troubleshooting of 

the FCP that will be used for this project. 

2. Have satisfactorily designed at least twenty fire alarm systems of equivalent 


3. Have satisfactorily field-tested at least twenty fire alarm systems of equivalent 


4. Be NICET (National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies) Fire 

Alarm Certified, or certified by an equivalent organization acceptable to the 

Hanford Fire Authority Having Jurisdiction. 



1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING 

A. Materials and Equipment: Protect materials and equipment from damage during shipping, 

storage, and installation. 


2.1 GENERAL 

A. Provide materials and equipment that are new and unused, free of defects, specifically 

designed for the use intended, conform to the requirements of the NEC and NFPA 72, 

and are NRTL listed for the intended use. 

2.2 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL 

A. The fire alarm control panel (FCP) shall incorporate all control electronics, relays, and 

necessary modules and components in a surface mounted cabinet (dependent on FCP 

mounting location). The operating controls and zone/supervisory indicators shall be 

located behind locked door with viewing window. All control modules shall be labeled, 

and all zone locations shall be identified. The assembly shall contain a base panel, 

system power supply and battery charger with additional modules to meet the 

requirements of these specifications. 

B. System circuits shall be configured as follows: Addressable analog loops Class B/Style 4; 

Initiating Device Circuits (if used) Class B/Style B; Notification Appliance Circuits Class 

B/Style Y. 

C. The system shall store all basic system functionality and job specific data in non-volatile 

memory. The system shall survive a complete power failure intact. 

D. The system shall allow down loading of a job specific custom program created by system 

application software. It shall support programming of any input point to any output 

point. 

E. The system shall support distributed processor intelligent detectors with the following 

features: integral multiple differential sensors, environmental compensation, pre-alarm, 

dirty detector identification, automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment, dual 

normal/alarm LEDs, relay bases, and isolator bases. 

F. The system shall use full digital communications to supervise all addressable loop 

devices for placement, correct location, and operation. It shall allow swapping of “same 

type” devices without the need of addressing and impose the “location” parameters on 

replacement device. It shall initiate and maintain a trouble if a device is added to a loop 

and clear the trouble when the new device is defined in the system. 

G. The system shall have a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) listed detector 

sensitivity test feature, which will be a function of the smoke detectors and performed 

automatically. 

H. All panel modules shall be supervised for placement and initiate a trouble signal if 

damaged or removed. 

I. The system shall have a CPU monitoring circuit to initiate a trouble signal should the 

CPU fail. 



J. The system evacuation signal rate shall be suitable to support audio-visual combinationtype 

electronic three pulse temporal pattern sounder and strobe combination units. 

K. The system program shall meet the requirements of this project, current codes and 

standards, and satisfy the Hanford Fire Authority Having Jurisdiction. 

L. Passwords shall protect any changes to system operations. 

M. The power supply shall be a high efficiency switch mode type with line monitoring to 

automatically switch to batteries for power failure or brown out conditions. The 

automatic battery charger shall have low battery discharge protection. The power supply 

shall provide internal power and 24 Vdc for notification appliance circuits. All outputs 

shall be power limited. The battery shall be sized to support the system for 24 hours of 

supervisory and trouble signal current plus general alarm for 5 minutes. 

N. The FCP shall have a high contrast, alphanumeric display to show system status, alarm 

information, and supervisory information. The FCP shall have LED indicators for the 

following common control functions; AC Power, alarm, supervisory, monitor, trouble, 

disable, ground fault, CPU fail, and test. There shall be control keys and visual indicators 

for; reset, alarm silence, trouble silence, and drill. 

O. Battery boxes, if required, shall be UL Listed for the purpose. 

P. The FCP shall report to a Radio Fire Alarm Reporter box (RFAR) for transmission of 

signals to the Hanford Central Station. 

1. The RFAR shall be installed in accordance with the Hanford Chapter of the DOE 

Fire Protection Handbook and with Hanford document HNF-8818 “RFAR 

Acquisition and Installation Procedure”. 

2. FACP Alarm zones shall be individually reported via RFAR alarm zones. 

3. FACP common Trouble and Supervisory outputs shall report via RFAR TR/TR 

“Local Panel Trouble”. 

4. The FACP/RFAR zones shall be as follows: 

• Zone 1 – Automatic Sprinkler Water Flow 

• Zone 2 – Manual Pull Station Alarm 

• Zone 3 – Automatic Smoke Detection Alarm 

• Zone 4 – HEPA Heat Detection Alarm 

• Zone 5 – Trouble/Supervisory Signal 

5. Restoration of each signal condition identified above shall be transmitted to the 

Hanford Central Station. 

6. Loss of AC power shall be transmitted 6 hours after the detected failure. 

7. A test signal shall be sent once every 24 hours. 

8. For consistency, telephone wire color configuration shall be as follows: 

R. Manufacturers: FIRELITE MS-9200UDLS NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 



2.3 CONVENTIONAL THERMAL DETECTORS 

A. Provide conventional rate-of-rise thermal detectors that are compatible with and 

acceptable to the FCP manufacturer. 

1. The detector shall alarm at 135 º F or a temperature rise exceeding 15 º F per 

minute. The thermal detector shall be rated for plenum installation and be 

suitable for wall mount applications. For applications requiring other than 135 

º F, consult the Hanford Fire Protection Group. 

B. Manufacturers: FENWALL DETECT-A-FIRE “12-X27020-000”. 

2.4 ADDRESSABLE PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTORS 

A. Provide addressable, analog, intelligent, photoelectric type smoke detectors that are 

compatible with and acceptable to the FCP manufacturer. 

1. The photoelectric detector shall be rated for ceiling installation at a minimum of 

30 ft (9.1m) centers and be suitable for wall mount applications. 

B. Manufacturers: FIRELITE “SD355” NO EXCEPTIONS. 

2.5 DETECTOR MOUNTING BASES 

A. Provide standard detector mounting bases suitable for mounting on 3-1/2” or 4” octagon 

box and 4” square box. The base shall contain no electronics and support all detector 

types. Removal of the detector shall not affect communications with other detectors. 

B. Manufacturers: FIRELITE “B210LP” NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 

2.6 DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR AND HOUSING 

A. Provide addressable photoelectric duct smoke detectors that are compatible with and 

acceptable to the FCP manufacturer and listed for the maximum air flow velocity 

anticipated. 

B. Provide smoke detector duct housing assemblies to facilitate mounting an intelligent 

analog photoelectric detector along with a standard relay or isolator detector mounting 

base. Provide for variations in duct air velocity between 300 and 4000 feet per minute. 

Protect the measuring chamber from damage and insects. Provide an air exhaust tube and 

an air sampling inlet tube that extends into the duct air stream. Provide drilling templates 

and gaskets to facilitate locating and mounting the housing. Finish the housing in baked 

red enamel. 

C. Where a duct detector is installed in a concealed location, more than 10 ft above the 

finished floor, or in an arrangement where the detector alarm indicator is not readily 

visible to responding personnel, the detector shall be provided with a remote alarm 

indicator. Remote alarm indicator shall be installed in a readily accessible location and 

shall be clearly labeled to indicate its function. 

D. Provide duct detector wiring so that detector can be reset at FCP. 

E. Manufacturers: FIRELITE “D355PL” NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 



2.7 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM 

A. Refer to Section 21 1313, Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems, for pressure switches, flow 

switches and valve supervisory switches associated with the automatic sprinkler system. 

B. Provide INTELLIGENT single input or dual input modules as required to connect 

PRESSURE SWITCHES, FLOW SWITCHES, AND VALVE SUPERVISORY 

SWITCHES TO THE ADDRESSABLE ANALOG LOOP. Each input shall provide a 

supervised Class B input circuit. 

C. Manufacturers: FIRELITE “MMF-301”, FIRELITE “MMF-300-10”, NO 

SUBSTITUTIONS. 

2.8 ADDRESSABLE MANUAL PULL STATIONS 

A. Provide addressable double-action, non-coded manual pull stations that are acceptable to 

the FCP manufacturer and are compatible with the FCP. 

B. The fire alarm station shall be of Lexan or metal construction with an internal toggle 

switch. Provide a key locked test feature. Finish the station in red with white “PULL IN 

CASE OF FIRE” lettering. The manual station shall be suitable for mounting on 2-1/2” 

deep 1-gang boxes and 1-1/2” deep 4” square boxes with 1-gang covers. 

C. Provide the appropriate back boxes and mounting plates for flush-mounting or surface 

mounting (depending on the building construction). 

D. Manufacturers: FIRELITE “BG-12LX” NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 

2.9 ADDRESSABLE CONTROL RELAY MODULES 

A. Provide addressable control relay modules that are acceptable to the FCP manufacturer 

and are compatible with the FCP. 

B. The control relay module shall provide one form “C” dry relay contact rated at 2 amps at 

24 Vdc to control external appliances or equipment shutdown. The control relay shall be 

rated for pilot duty and releasing systems. The position of the relay contact shall be 

confirmed by the system firmware. 

C. Manufacturers: FIRELITE “CRF” NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 

D. Provide additional relays with voltage and current ratings as required to perform 

functions such as air handling system shutdown and elevator recall. 

2.10 SOUNDER AND SIGNAL STROBE COMBINATION DEVICES 

A. Provide NRTL listed 24 VDC audio-visual combination-type electronic three-pulse 

temporal pattern sounder and strobe combination units that are acceptable to the FCP 

manufacturer and are compatible with the FCP. 

B. Sounder shall include three-pulse temporal pattern generating electronics, audio 

transducer, and screw terminals housed in a red housing. Acoustical output shall meet 

requirements of UL 464. The audible signal shall be the “American National Standard 

Audible Emergency Evacuation Signal” (three-pulse temporal pattern) in accordance 

with ANSI S3.41, Audible Emergency Evacuation Signal. 



C. Strobe signal output and flash rate shall meet UL 1971 and ADAAG requirements. Unit 

shall have a xenon flash tube enclosed in a clear Lexan lens with “FIRE” in white 

lettering, and shall produce a synchronized strobe flash. Provide strobes with flash 

output levels as required to meet NFPA 72 visual signal requirements for each space. 

D. Horn/strobe shall mount to a 4” x 2-1/8” deep electrical box with single device cover. 

Provide weatherproof wall boxes for outdoor mounting. 

E. Manufacturers: Wheelock “HS” series, NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 

2.11 NOTIFICATION BOOSTER POWER SUPPLIES 

A. Provide notification circuit booster power supplies (as needed) that are acceptable to the 

FCP manufacturer and are compatible with the FCP. 

B. Manufacturers: FIRELITE “FCPS-24FS6” NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 

2.12 CONDUIT 

A. Install fire alarm wiring in intermediate metal conduit, rigid galvanized steel conduit, or 

electrical metallic tubing. Minimum conduit size 3/4 inch. 

B. Refer to Section 26 0533, Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems, for conduit 

systems. 

2.13 JUNCTION BOXES 

A. Refer to Section 26 0533, Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems, for junction boxes. 

2.14 WIRING 

A. Color Code: Use the following color code for the fire alarm system wiring: 

1. Black - 120-Volt AC phase wire. 

2. White - 120-Volt AC neutral wire. 

3. Green - System ground wire. 

4. Brown - Negative connection for strobe device. (If wired separately from horns.) 

5. Orange - Positive connection for strobe device. (If wired separately from horns.) 

6. Blue - Negative connection for horn circuit or horn/strobe combination circuit. 

7. Yellow - Positive connection for horn circuit or horn/strobe combination circuit. 

8. Gray - Negative conventional alarm initiating device connection. 

9. Violet - Positive conventional alarm initiating device connection. 

10. Black - Negative circuit connection for duct smoke detector reset, HVAC 

interlock, and other auxiliary connections. 

11. Red - Positive circuit connection for duct smoke detector reset, HVAC interlock, 

and other auxiliary connections. 

12. Black/Red Twisted Pair - Addressable device data loop, evacuation speaker 

circuit. 



B. Device and Wire Labels 

1. Labels for all new wires shall be in accordance with the Hanford Chapter of the 

DOE Fire Protection Handbook, Section 3.9 

C. Conductors: Provide alarm and supervisory signaling system conductors that meet the 

requirements of Article 760 in the NEC and are NRTL listed for the type of service to 

which they will be subjected. Minimum conductor requirements shall be as follows: 

2.15 TEST EQUIPMENT 

1. Use red-jacketed NEC type FPL cable with No. 16 AWG (minimum) twistedpair 

conductors for addressable devices; use shielded twisted-pair cables if 

required by the FCP manufacturer. Other low voltage conductors shall be type 

TFN, No. 16 AWG (minimum), thermoplastic insulation, and single solid copper 

conductor. 

2. Power conductors shall be type THHN/THWN, No. 12 AWG, thermoplastic 

insulation, and single solid copper conductor. 

3. Size conductors of the fire alarm systems as recommended by the manufacturer, 

based on the operating ampacity of the circuit and the permissible resistance and 

voltage drop characteristics that will allow proper operation of the equipment. 

Provide conductors selected to provide voltages within the manufacturer 

specification limits for the most remote fire alarm notification appliance or field 

device. 

4. Design each addressable analog loop so device loading will not exceed 80% of 

loop capacity in order to leave for space for future devices. 

A. Provide any special test equipment manufactured by the fire alarm equipment 

manufacturer for maintenance, testing, or troubleshooting. 

2.16 SURGE PROTECTION 

A. Provide a UL 1449 listed 120V surge protective device for the main FCP, each sub-FCP, 

and each booster power supply that has a 120V supply circuit. 

1. Device shall be capable of absorbing a maximum single pulse of at least 6,500 

amperes. 

2. Clamping voltage shall not exceed 330 volts line-to neutral when tested in 

accordance with ANSI/IEEE C62.31 category C1/B3. 

3. Manufacturer: EDCO model “FAS-120AC” or as recommended by the FCP 

manufacturer. 

B. Provide a UL 497B listed surge protective device for each analog initiating device 

signaling circuit entering/leaving each building that is monitored by the FCP. 

1. Device shall be capable of absorbing a peak 8x20 microsecond current of 10,000 

amperes at least 10 times. 

2. Clamping voltage shall not exceed 30 volts. 

3. Capacitance shall not exceed 50pf. 



4. Provide matching receptacle for plug-in surge protective devices. 

5. Manufacturer: EDCO model “PC642C-030LC” (protects 2 pairs) and “PCB1B” 

socket, or as recommended by the FCP manufacturer. 

C. Provide a UL 497B listed surge protective device for each 24-volt initiating device circuit 

or control circuit entering/leaving each building that is monitored by the FCP. 

1. Device shall be capable of absorbing a peak 8x20 microsecond current of not less 

than 10,000 amperes at least 10 times. 



4. Manufacturer: EDCO model “PC642C-030” (protects 2 circuits) and “PCB1B” 

socket, or as recommended by the FCP manufacturer. 

D. Provide a UL 497B listed surge four-wire protective device for each FCP RS-232 circuit 

entering/leaving each building monitored by the FCP. 



2. Clamping voltage shall not exceed 20 volts for RS-232 applications. 


4. Manufacturer: EDCO model “PC642C-020” with “PCB1B” socket, or as 

recommended by the FCP manufacturer. 

E. Provide a UL 497B listed surge four-wire protective device for each FCP RS-485 circuit 

entering/leaving each building monitored by the FCP. 



2. Clamping voltage shall not exceed 8 volts for RS-485 applications. 

3. Line to line and line to ground capacitance shall not exceed 50pf. 


5. Manufacturer: EDCO model “PC642C-008LC” with “PCB1B” socket, or as 

recommended by the FCP manufacturer. 

F. Provide a UL 497B listed surge protective device for each 24-volt notification appliance 

circuit entering/leaving each building that is monitored by the FCP. 

1. Protective device shall have a series resistance not exceeding 0.2 ohms per pair 

and shall be capable of carrying a continuous current of 5 amperes. 

2. Device shall be capable of absorbing a peak 8/20 microsecond current of 5000 

amperes and a 2000-ampere occurrence at least 50 times. 





5. Manufacturer: EDCO model “PHC-043” (protects 2 circuits) and “PCB1B” 

socket, or recommended by the FCP manufacturer. 

G. Provide a single point ground bus for each enclosure containing one or more surge 

protective devices. Manufacturer: EDCO model “TER-BUS” or as recommended by the 

FCP manufacturer. 


3.1 FIELD CONDITIONS 

A. Prior to installation carefully inspect the installed work of other trades, whether preexisting 

or part of this project and verify that such work is complete to the point where 

the installation of the fire alarm system may properly commence. 

B. Notify the Hanford Subcontract Technical Representative (STR) should conditions exist, 

not resulting from work of this project, that prohibit the installation from conforming to 

applicable codes, regulations, standards and the original approved design. 


A. General: 

1. Install the fire alarm system in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, and this 

specification. 

2. Refer to Section 26 0553, Identification for Electrical Systems, for supporting 

device requirements for fire alarm cabinets, conduit, and equipment. 

3. Verify dimensions in the field. Lay out work in the most direct and expeditious 

manner to avoid interference. 

4. Coordinate necessary shutdowns of existing systems by notifying the Hanford 

STR a minimum of seven working days before rendering such systems 

inoperative. Do not render inoperative, any system, without the prior approval of 

the Hanford STR. The Hanford STR will initiate and submit the Hanford Fire 

Protection Impairment Procedure. 

5. Coordinate fire alarm detectors and associated equipment with existing ceiling or 

roof materials, lighting, ductwork, conduit, piping, suspended equipment, 

structural and other building components. 

6. Coordinate installation of fire alarm system with work of other trades. Protect 

fire alarm equipment with suitable coverings until completion of Project. 

B. Device Mounting Heights: 

1. Install manual pull stations with center 48 inches above finished floor. 

2. Install combination audible/visual notification appliances with the bottom 80 

inches above finished floor or 6 inches below ceiling, whichever is lower. In high 

bay type areas the devices may be installed at a maximum of 96 inches above the 

floor. 

3. Comply with ADA Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) for device mounting 

heights and locations. 



C. FCP Installation 

1. Install FCP following manufacturer’s written instructions, NFPA 72, and the 

NEC. 

2. Locate the FCP in the Mechanical Room so fire department personnel entering 

the building can readily access it. Coordinate location of FCP with the Hanford 

Fire Protection Group. 

3. Install FCP with top of cabinet trim 6 feet-2 inches (maximum) above finished 

floor. Refer to manufacturer’s recommended installation height. 

4. Mount FCP plumb and rigid without distortion of the box. Surface-mount 

cabinets uniformly with wall surfaces. 

5. Install filler plates in unused spaces in FCP. 

6. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slabs other than 

slabs on grade. 

7. Train conductors in cabinet gutters neatly in groups; bundle and wrap with cable 

ties after completion of testing. 

8. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, 

according to the manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values. Where 

manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. 

D. Wiring Installation: 

1. Install fire alarm system wiring in conduit raceway. 

2. Do not pull wire or cable until the conduit system is complete between pull 

points. 

3. Bundle conductors in panels and boxes into groups by service and destination. 

4. Run electronic cable continuous between termination points. No splicing is 

permitted without prior approval from the Hanford STR. Where splicing is 

approved, use terminal strips that are acceptable to the Hanford Fire Protection 

Group; do not use “wire nuts.” 

5. Do not install AC current carrying conductors in the same raceway with the DC 

or digital fire alarm detection and signaling conductors. 

6. Circuit each addressable analog loop so device loading shall not exceed 80% of 

loop capacity in order to leave for space for future devices--the loop shall have 

Class B operation. Where it is necessary to interface conventional devices 

provide intelligent modules to supervise Class B wiring. 

7. Minimize the number of T-taps in fire alarm addressable data circuits and adhere 

to the manufacturer requirements/limitations. Make no T-Taps in notification 

appliance circuits. T-taps shall only be made on device terminals or on terminal 

strips that are acceptable to the Hanford Fire Protection Group, do not use “wire 

nuts.” 



8. Make allowances in conductor length at panels and other enclosures to permit 

forming the conductors neatly within the enclosures. Where wiring troughs are 

not provided with the enclosures, neatly cable and adequately support the wiring. 

9. Ring out and identify power and control conductors before terminal connections 

are made. Check polarity and phasing and make changes as required before 

making terminal connections. 

10. Test conductors for continuity and for freedom from shorts or unintentional 

grounds. 

E. Junction Box Installation: Refer to Section 26 0533, Raceways and Boxes for Electrical 

Systems, for installation requirements. 

F. Conduit Installation: Refer to Section 26 0533, Raceway and Boxes for Electrical 

Systems, for conduit installation requirements. Provide minimum 3/4” fire alarm system 

conduit. 

G. Install sounder and signal strobe notification appliances in the following locations to 

obtain an audible signal level that is at least 15 dB above ambient but does not exceed 

120 dB at any location: 

1. Corridors 

2. Mechanical Equipment Rooms 

3. HEPA Filter Room 

4. Loading Bays 

5. Stairways 

6. Common Areas such as Restrooms (strobes only). 

H. Surge Protective Device Installation 

1. Install a 120V surge protective device for the main FCP, each sub-FCP, and each 

booster power supply. 

2. Install a surge protective device for each initiating device circuit, notification 

appliance circuit, data, and signaling line circuit entering/leaving each building 

that is monitored by the FCP. 

3. If permitted by the FCP manufacturer, install surge protective devices in the FCP 

cabinet. 

4. If the FCP manufacturer does not allow surge protective devices to be installed 

within the FCP cabinet, install one or more metal enclosures near the protected 

fire alarm equipment. Provide separate enclosures for 120V and signal voltage 

devices, or provide one enclosure with a metal partition to separate the 120V 

from the signal voltage devices. 

5. Install a single point ground bar in the enclosure for the surge protective devices. 

Bond the ground bar to the enclosure and to the power circuit equipmentgrounding 

conductor. Connect each surge protective device to the ground bar 

with a separate 12 AWG solid, green-insulated, ground wire. Keep ground wires 

as short and straight as possible. 



6. Install surge protective devices in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, 

keeping leads and ground conductors as short and straight as possible. 

I. Identification 


1. Label each conductor at each terminal and junction point. Use wire markers 

specified in Section 26 0553, Identification for Electrical Systems, On wire 

markers indicate the type of fire alarm circuit (e.g. Pull Stations, Fan Shutdown, 

Alarm Strobes, etc.). 

2. Mark floor in front of cabinet(s) to show the NEC required working clearances 

according to Section 26 0553, Identification for Electrical Systems. 

3. Label fire alarm junction boxes with 2-1/4” x 1/2” (minimum size) pressure 

sensitive vinyl markers having “FIRE ALARM” in red letters on a white 

background. 

4. Label all devices with address/zone information. Use self-adhesive vinyl labels 

with 3/4 inch (minimum) lettering easily visible without a ladder. 

A. Exposed Surfaces: Paint exposed fire alarm conduit, panels, cabinets, pullboxes, 

supports, and other electrical equipment as follows: 

1. Galvanized Surfaces: Paint for repairing galvanized materials shall be zinc-rich 

type. 

2. Refinishing: Thoroughly clean and touch up shop primed or finish painted 

surfaces damaged in handling or installation with paint supplied with the 

equipment or an approved matching paint. 

3. Interior Conduit: Paint new exposed interior conduit in rooms finished and/or 

occupied to match the existing background paint color. Paint conduit to be 

painted with one coat of primer. Paint conduit to match the existing background 

colors with two coats of paint to provide a minimum thickness of 6 mils. 


A. Install devices or equipment not specifically covered by these specifications in 

accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

3.5 CONNECTION TO HANFORD CENTRAL STATION 

A. Refer to Hanford Document HNF-8818 (latest edition) for information on procurement 

and installation of the RFAR system. 

B. Provide knockouts and conduit between the FCP and the RFAR panel, ¾” minimum. 


A. Blow out junction boxes and fire alarm equipment not hermetically sealed with clear, dry, 

oil-free (15 psig maximum) air to remove dust and dirt prior to energizing. 




A. Provide the services of a qualified factory trained and certified technician for the FCP 

installed on this project. The factory technician shall assure the completeness and 

correctness of the installation by performing the following: 

1. Prepare as-built documentation of FCP indicating location of components, 

interconnection of components, and connections to alarm initiating, indicating 

and auxiliary circuits. 

2. Field verify and mark as-built shop drawings of fire alarm layout, conduit and 

wiring plans, and point-to-point field wiring diagrams. 

3. Verify correct labeling of fire alarm system conductors. 

4. Verify that conductor sizes are adequate for each alarm initiating, indicating and 

auxiliary circuit. 

5. Prepare as-built battery load calculations. Battery shall be sized to include the 

additional 20% safety margin above calculated system demand. 

6. Measure and adjust audible alarm signal in all spaces to comply with ADAAG 

requirements: minimum 15 dBA above ambient, but not over 120 dBA at any 

location. 

7. Test all devices for proper supervision and alarm operation. 

8. Test all interlocks with HVAC and elevator system for proper operation. 

9. Perform pre-final acceptance inspections and tests of the fire alarm system 

modifications. 

10. Prepare final acceptance test plan. 

B. After the pre-final test, provide a report to the Hanford Project Leader indicating the 

status of the fire alarm system and any corrective actions required before the acceptance 

tests. 

C. Submit a detailed test plan for the final acceptance test. 

1. Submit the test plan not less than 10 working days before the planned final 

acceptance date. 

2. Follow test methods outlined in NFPA 72. 

D. Submit FCP program at least two weeks prior to final acceptance test. 

E. Submit final drawings, calculations, and manufacturer’s data at least one week prior to 

final acceptance test. 

F. Coordinate date of final acceptance test with installer, Hanford Project Leader, Hanford 

Fire Protection Group representative, and subtier subcontractors for HVAC, sprinklers, 

and elevator controls. Make corrective actions before final acceptance test date. 

3.8 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TEST 

A. NOTIFY HANFORD STR AT a minimum of 2 weeks in advance of final acceptance 

tests. The more advance notice will help minimize scheduling conflicts and delays. 



Perform final acceptance tests in the presence of authorized representatives of Hanford’s 

STR, Fire Protection Division, and Facility Operations Director (FOD). 

B. Before the final acceptance test begins, present a preliminary copy of the Record of 

Completion to the authorized representative of the Hanford Fire Protection Group. 

1. Preliminary Record of Completion shall be of the form required by NFPA 72. 

2. Indicate on the preliminary Record of Completion that the pre-final inspections 

and tests have been performed and all corrective actions have been completed. 

3. The final acceptance test will not proceed before the Record of Completion is 

presented to the authorized representative of the Hanford Fire Protection Group. 

C. Perform final acceptance tests on the completed fire alarm system: 

1. Follow the approved test plan and comply with NFPA 72 requirements. 

2. Test FCP and the connected initiating, alarm, and auxiliary devices. 

3. Perform 24-hour discharge test on the FCP batteries. 

4. Hanford will perform tests on connections made by Hanford. 

5. Hanford Radio Maintenance Group will perform the acceptance test of the RFAR 

system before turning the system over to the Hanford Fire Protection Group. 

D. At the final acceptance test, have marked-up shop drawings and point-to-point wiring 

diagrams available for review and verification. Final acceptance test will not proceed 

without these as-built documents. If Hanford verification of the as-built documents 

reveals errors, re-verify the complete fire alarm raceway and wiring system in the 

presence of a Hanford Fire Protection Group representative. 

E. Correct deficiencies discovered in the final acceptance test and re-test fire alarm system 

until satisfactory test results are obtained. 

F. Upon successful completion of acceptance tests, submit a final “Record of Completion” 

and “Inspection and Testing Form” as required by NFPA 72 (latest edition). 

G. Submit a “recommended spare parts” list for the installed fire alarm system, along with 

the Record of Completion. 

3.9 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION PLACARD 

A. Furnish and install a permanently mounted placard in or adjacent to the fire alarm control 

cabinet. 

B. Provide the following information typewritten or engraved on the placard: 

1. Name, address and telephone number of installing subcontractor. 

2. Reference to the standards, including date of issue to which the system conforms 

(e.g. NFPA 72 and NFPA 70, latest edition). 

3. Circuit number of power supply to FCP and location of the electrical panelboard. 

4. Location of fire alarm system Operating and Maintenance Instructions if they are 

not stored in the FCP cabinet. 



5. Location of fire alarm system as-built documents. 




SECTION 283233 – RADIATION DETECTION AND ALARM 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes installation of the following equipment: 

1. Continuous Air Monitors for detecting airborne alpha and beta contamination. 

2. Area Radiation Monitors for detecting gamma radiation levels. 

3. Personnel Contamination Monitor. 

4. Hand and Foot Monitor. 

B. Work Performed by Others: Procurement of the radiation detection and alarm equipment will 

be performed by others (BFE). 


A. ARM: Area Radiation Monitor. 

B. CAM: Continuous Air Monitor. 

C. GFE: Government Furnished Equipment. 

D. HFM: Hand and Foot Monitor. 

E. PCM: Personnel Contamination Monitor. 


A. Field Quality-Control Reports: 




requirements. 

B. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. 








A. Store, protect, and handle all radiation instrumentation according to manufacturer’s instructions. 


A. Do not deliver or install equipment until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in 

spaces is complete and dry, work above equipment is complete, and temporary HVAC system is 

operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels 

during the remainder of the construction period. 


A. Coordinate layout and installation of radiation detection equipment with other construction, 

including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to 

workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace 

clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. 



A. GFE Equipment: Eberline/Thermo 

1. Alpha Continuous Air Monitors: Alpha 6A-1 

2. Beta Continuous Air Monitors: AMS-4 

3. Area Radiation Monitors: Alpha EC4-X 

4. Personnel Contamination Monitor: APCM-2 Half Body Counter 

5. Hand and Foot Monitor: HFM-6 



A. Install radiation detection equipment and accessories according to manufacturer’s instructions. 


and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.” 



C. Mount equipment level and plumb. 

D. Identify components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 



Systems." 


and Cables." 

C. Provide signal and alarm cabling for each radiation detection instrument per manufacturer 

instructions and design drawings. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Control- 

Voltage Electrical Power Cables." 


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect 

field-assembled components and equipment installation and supervise pretesting, testing, and 

adjusting of equipment. 

B. Inspection: Verify that units are properly installed, connected, and labeled, and that 

interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. 

C. Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies with 

Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for proper operation in 

all functional modes. 

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 

E. Record test results for each piece of equipment. 

F. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified 

requirements are met. 




SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain. 

2. Removing existing vegetation. 

3. Clearing and grubbing. 

4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 

5. Removing above and below-grade site improvements. 

6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing site utilities. 

7. Temporary erosion-control measures. 


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads and other adjacent occupied or used 

facilities during site-clearing operations. 

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities 

without permission from Buyer’s Technical Representative. 

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Buyer’s 


B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on site. 

C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before 

site clearing. 

D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion-control measures are in 

place. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in 

Division 31 Section “Earth Moving”. 

1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site from Buyer’s Technical Representative 

approved source. 





A. Protect benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. 

B. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Buyer’s 


3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL 

A. Provide temporary erosion-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soilbearing 

water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent areas and walkways according to Site 

Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion-control measures during construction until final grades are 

established and stabilized. 

C. Restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal of erosion control measures. 

3.3 EXISTING UTILITIES 

A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in 

place. 

1. Arrange with Buyer’s Technical Representative to shut off indicated utilities. 

B. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities unless permitted under 

the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services 

according to requirements indicated: 

1. Notify Buyer’s Technical Representative not less than five (5) days in advance of 

proposed utility interruptions. 

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Buyer’s Technical Representative’s 

written permission. 

3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 

A. Remove obstructions, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. 

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with approved fill material unless 

further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 



3.5 SITE IMPROVEMENTS 

A. Remove existing above and below-grade improvements as indicated. 




SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade pavements. 

2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 

3. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade. 

4. Base course for asphalt paving. 

5. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches. 


A. Material submittals for each type of fill material used. 

1. Borrow fill gradation and soil classification laboratory report. 

2. Laboratory testing reports for Maximum Dry Density of Borrow fill material. 

3. Base Course gradation and testing report with comparison to WSDOT specifications. 

4. Control Density Fill mix design. 

5. Tested strengths for proposed Controlled Density Fill material. 

6. Bedding course material. 

B. Field quality control reports. 

1. Truck Trip tickets for Controlled Density Fill. 

2. In-place field compaction reports for all granular fill material. 

C. Testing Agency Qualifications. 

D. Excavation shoring/safety plan as needed for any excavations that are at or exceed four (4) feet 

depth and where the sides of excavations are not laid back at a 1.5 horizontal to 1.0 vertical 

slope ratio. 


A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation. 

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to 

support sides of pipe. 

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. 

B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and hot-mix asphalt paving. 



C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying 

pipe. 

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. 

E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward 

capillary flow of pore water. 

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and 

dimensions indicated. 

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond 

indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Buyer’s Technical Representative. 

Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to 

Contract provisions for changes in the Work. 

2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated 

lines and dimensions without direction by Buyer’s Technical Representative. 

Unauthorized excavation, as well as, remedial work directed by Buyer’s Technical 

Representative, shall be without additional compensation. 

G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. 

H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical 

and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below 

the ground surface. 

I. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill 

immediately below drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials. 

J. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground 

services within buildings. 


A. Pre-excavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

B. All excavation work shall comply with DOE-0344, Hanford Site Excavation, Trenching and 

Shoring. 

C. Obtain all necessary excavation permits. 


2.1 SOIL MATERIALS 

A. General: Excavated on site soil materials will be removed from site, provide borrow soil 

materials from off site for general backfill needs. Locations of available Hanford pits will be 

provided at time of bid. Availability of satisfactory soils is up to the Contractor to verify. 



B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to 

ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than three (3) 

inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious 

matter. 

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT 

according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups. 

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within two (2) percent 

of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. 

D. Base Course: Top Course conforming to WSDOT M41-10 Section 9-03.9(3). 

E. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed 

stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1 and 1/2 

inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. 

F. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed 

stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a one (1) 

inch sieve and not more than eight (8) percent passing a No. 200 sieve. 

G. Drainage Course: Use Base Course. 

2.2 CONTROLLED DENSITY FILL (CDF) 

A. Excavatable Slurry Fill / Backfill. 

1. Contain a maximum of 94 lbs of cement per yard of slurry fill / backfill. 

2. Minimum stable air content of 20 percent. 

3. Maximum water content of 36 gallons per yard of backfill. 

4. Maximum compressive strength of 150 psi at 28 days. 

5. CDF shall not to be used in saturated ground conditions or standing water. Contractor 

shall notify Buyer’s Technical Representative if saturated ground conditions or standing 

water are encountered. 


A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape 

manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of six (6) inches 

wide and four (4) mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with 

metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal 

detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored to comply with local practice or 

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 





A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by 

settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving 

operations. 

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations. 

C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove 

temporary protection before placing subsequent materials. 

3.2 EXCAVATION, GENERAL 

A. All excavation work shall comply with DOE-0344, Hanford Site Excavation, Trenching and 

Shoring. 

B. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface 

and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil 

materials, and obstructions. 

1. All excavated materials shall be removed and disposed of by methods approved by the 


3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES 

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus two (2) 

inches. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and 

removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Minimize disturbance to bottom of 

excavation. Some over excavation will likely be needed. Excavation shall be trimmed 

out with crushed rock fill and compacted before placing foundations. 

3.4 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS 

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and 

subgrades taking into account base material and thickened edges as applicable. 

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES 

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. 

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or 

conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of 

pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated. 



1. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit or as indicated. 

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to be uniform and even. Remove 

projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. Allow for pipe bedding as indicated. 

1. Excavate trenches six (6) inches deeper than elevation required to allow for bedding 

course. 

3.6 SUBGRADE INSPECTION 

A. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements to identify soft pockets and areas of 

excess yielding. Do not proof-roll when subgrade is wet or saturated. 

B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or 

construction activities, as directed by Buyer’s Technical Representative, without additional 

compensation. 

C. Test or inspect subgrade materials as required for compaction requirements as applicable. 

3.7 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION 

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation 

of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. 

Concrete fill, with 28 day compressive strength of 2,500 psi, may be used when approved by 


1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit Controlled 

Density Fill and as approved by the Buyer’s Technical Representative. 

3.8 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS 

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, 

and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 

1. Stockpile soil materials at least 2 feet away from edge of excavations. 

3.9 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL 

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms. Shape bedding course to provide 

continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of 

conduits. 

C. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated directly under footings and to 24 inches 

beyond face of footings with Controlled Density Fill (CDF). 



D. Trenches under Roadways and Fire Lanes: Provide four (4) inch thick, concrete-base slab 

support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches below surface of roadways. After installing 

and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of four (4) inches of concrete 

before backfilling or placing roadway base course. Concrete is specified in Division 03 Section 

“Cast-in-Place Concrete”. 

E. Place Controlled Density Fill (CDF) as initial backfill of to a height of 12 inches over the pipe 

or conduit when CDF is used. 

1. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. 

F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation. 

G. Install detectable warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 

six (6) inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 

3.10 SOIL FILL 

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than one (1) vertical to four (4) 

horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. 

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 

1. Under unimproved areas, use satisfactory borrow fill material. 

2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory borrow fill material except where CDF is 

required. 

3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill or CDF. 

4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill or CDF. 

5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill or CDF. 

3.11 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL 

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before 

compaction to within two (2) percent of optimum moisture content. 

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain 

frost or ice. 

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that 

exceeds optimum moisture content by more than two (2) percent. 

3.12 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS 

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than eight (8) inches in loose depth for 

material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than four (4) inches in loose 

depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. 

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and 

uniformly along the full length of each structure. 



C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight 

according to ASTM D 1557: 

1. Under structures, and pavements, compact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each 

layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent. 

2. Under building slabs, walkways and steps, compact top 12 inches of existing subgrade 

and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 

3. Under unpaved areas, compact top six (6) inches below subgrade and compact each layer 

of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent. 

4. For utility trenches not under structures or pavement, compact each layer of backfill soil 

material at 85 percent. 

3.13 GRADING 

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to be free of irregular surface changes. Comply with 

compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 

B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent 

unintended ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 

1. Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus one (1) inch. 

2. Walks: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 

3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10 

foot straightedge. Over excavation and trimming out excavations with gravel is anticipated. 

3.14 BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS 

A. Place base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 

B. On prepared subgrade, place base course under pavements and walks as follows: 

1. Shape base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 

2. Place base course that exceeds six (6) inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal 

thickness, with no compacted layer more than six (6) inches thick or less than three (3) 

inches thick. 

3. Compact imported subgrade and base course to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry 

unit weight according to ASTM D1557. Material should be within two (2) percent of 

optimum moisture content during compaction. 

3.15 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE 

A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 

B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabson-grade 

as follows: 



1. Place drainage course that exceeds six (6) inches in compacted thickness in layers of 

equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than six (6) inches thick or less than three 

(3) inches thick. 

2. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not 

less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. 


A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to 

perform tests and inspections. 

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with 

subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with 

requirements. 

C. Testing frequency: 

1. Under Structures and Pavements: Provide one (1) compaction test per lift per day for 

every 3,000 square feet of subgrade or fill material. 

2. In trenches: Provide one compaction test per lift per day for every 150 linear feet of 

subgrade or fill material. Other areas: Provide one (1) compaction test per lift per day for 

every 5,000 square feet of subgrade or fill material. 

D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of 

compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to 

depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 


A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep 

free of trash and debris. 

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed, or partially completed 

surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent 

construction operations or weather conditions. 

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, 

backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, 

and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 

3.18 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS 

A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and 

debris, and dispose of them only as approved by the Buyer’s Technical Representative. 




SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Hot-mix asphalt paving. 


1. Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” for aggregate subbase and base courses and for 

aggregate pavement shoulders. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical 

and performance properties. 

1. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each 

job mix proposed for the Work. 

2. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work. 

3. Herbicide product information and application recommendations. 

4. Material Certificates: For each paving material, from manufacturer. 

B. Testing Agency Qualifications 

C. Field quality control reports. 

1. Batch ticket from each truck delivery showing conformance to the approved job mix. 

2. Temperature records for ambient, subgrade and paving material taken in field. 

3. In place material compaction test reports. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with WSDOT and 

approved by Buyer’s Technical Representative. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable 

requirements of 2010 Standard Specification M41-10 of WSDOT for asphalt paving work. 

1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in 

WSDOT standard specifications; do not apply to this Section. 

2. Requirements set forth in this specification shall govern over requirements of WSDOT 

specifications. 





A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet, if puddling is 

evident, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the 

following conditions are not met: 

1. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F. 

2. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of 

placement. 

3. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of placement. 


2.1 AGGREGATES 

A. Aggregate and blend sand shall conform to 2010 WSDOT Standard Specification M41-10 

Section 9-03.8. 

2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS 

A. Asphalt material shall conform to 2010 WSDOT Standard Specification M41-10, Section 9-02. 


A. Herbicide: In conformance with 2010 WSDOT Standard Specification M41-10 Section 5- 

04.3(5)D. Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA. Provide in granular, 

liquid, or wettable powder form. 

2.4 MIXES 

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having 

jurisdiction and complying with the following requirements: 

1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where 

Project is located. 



A. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft 

pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll when subgrade is wet or saturated. 

B. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 



3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION 

A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material 

from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving. 

B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and 

written application instructions. Apply to prepared subgrade or surface of compacted-aggregate 

base before applying paving materials. 

3.3 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING 

A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place 

asphalt mix by hand in areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of 

mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted. 

1. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F. 

2. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and 

tears in asphalt-paving mat. 

B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser 

width are required. 

C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools 

to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent 

segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface. 

3.4 JOINTS 

A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct 

joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix 

asphalt course. 

1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 

2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses from two (2) to six (6) inches. 

3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches. 

4. Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends a day’s work and resumes 

work at a subsequent time. Construct these joints using either “bulkhead” or “papered” 

method according to 2010 WSDOT Standard Specification M41-10 Section 5-04.3(12)A, 

for both “Ending a Lane” and “Resumption of Paving Operations”. 

3.5 COMPACTION 

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without 

excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratoryplate 

compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 

1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F. 



B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and 

outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, 

and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements. 

C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while 

hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix 

asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density: 

1. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to 

ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent. 

D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still 

warm. 

E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to 

proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly. 

F. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled 

and hardened for at least 24 hours. 

G. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic for the duration of the required hardening period. 

3.6 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES 

A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the 

following tolerances: 

1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 

2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 

B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within 

the following tolerances as determined by using a 10 foot straightedge applied transversely or 

longitudinally to paved areas: 

1. Base Course: 1/4 inch. 

2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch. 

3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. 

Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch. 


A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and 

inspections. 

B. Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken. 

C. Remove and replace where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with 

specified requirements. 



3.8 DISPOSAL 

A. Removal of any asphalt material that has been placed at the site shall be in accordance with 

disposal requirements of the Buyer’s Technical Representative. 




SECTION 331116 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and related components outside the building for 

fire-service mains. 



B. Field quality-control and pressure test reports. 

C. Cleaning reports. 

D. Operation and maintenance data. 


A. Regulatory Requirements: 

1. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression waterservice 

piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing. 

B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. 

C. Comply with FMG's “Approval Guide” or UL's “Fire Protection Equipment Directory” for fireservice-main 

products. 

D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and 

valve and hydrant supervision for fire-service-main piping for fire suppression. 


A. Interruption of Existing Water-Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities 

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions: 

1. Notify the Buyer’s Technical Representative no fewer than five (5) days in advance of 

proposed interruption of service. 

2. Do not proceed with interruption of water-distribution service without written permission 

from Buyer’s Technical Representative. 




A. Coordinate connection to water main with Fire Water System Manager. 


2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot 

end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 

1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray-iron standard 

pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. 

2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, 

and steel bolts. 


A. Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless 


2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES 

A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least 

equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined. 

B. Tubular-Sleeve Pipe Couplings: 

1. Description: Metal, bolted, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, with center 

sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and bolt fasteners and with ends of same sizes as piping to be 

joined. 

2.4 GATE VALVES 

a. Standard: AWWA C219. 

A. Gate Valves over two (2) in.: AWWA C509 or AWWA C515, UL listed or FM approved, Class 

250, non-rising stem, open left, mechanical joint inlet and outlet with mechanical joint 

unassembled accessories or Mueller AquaGrip system. 

2.5 GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES 

A. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section, 

adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering “FIRE 

WATER”, and bottom section with base that fits over valve and with a barrel approximately 

five (5) inches in diameter. 



B. Indicator Posts: UL 789, FMG-approved, vertical-type, cast-iron body with operating wrench, 

extension rod, and adjustable cast-iron barrel of length required for depth of burial of valve. 


3.1 EARTHWORK 

A. Refer to Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 


A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following 

applications. 

B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure 

rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping unless specifically noted on plans. 

D. Flanges, unions, and special fittings may be used, instead of joints indicated, on aboveground 

piping and piping in vaults. 

E. Underground Fire-Service-Main Piping NPS 6 shall be the following: 

1. Ductile-iron, mechanical-joint pipe; ductile-iron, mechanical-joint fittings; and 

mechanical joints. 

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS 

A. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 

1. Underground Valves, NPS 4 inch and Larger, for Indicator Posts: UL/FMG, cast-iron, 

non-rising stem gate valves with indicator post. 

3.4 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS 

A. See Division 22 Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing” for piping-system common 

requirements. 

3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION 

A. Make fire water loop line connection according to the following: 

1. Locate isolation valve installed by others. 



2. Verify that all joints are restrained from valve to fire water main. If not restrained, 

coordinate for and make notices of outage needed on associated segment of fire water 

main. 

3. Remove cap and associated thrust-block just downstream of valve. 

4. Connect in new distribution pipe to valve once distribution line has been installed, tested 

and approved for service. 

5. Open existing isolation valve. 

B. Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41. 

C. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 42”, with top at least 12 inches below level of 

maximum frost penetration. 

D. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. 

Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps. 

3.6 JOINT CONSTRUCTION 

A. Make pipe joints according to the following: 

1. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Water-Service Piping: AWWA C600 and 

AWWA M41. 

2. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service-Main Piping: UL 194. 

3. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials, 

with OD, and with system working pressure. 

3.7 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION 

A. Anchorage, General: Install water-distribution piping with restrained joints. Anchorages and 

restrained-joint types that may be used include the following: 

1. Concrete thrust blocks. 

2. Locking mechanical joints. 

3. Bolted flanged joints. 

B. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. 

Include anchorages for the following piping systems: 

1. Fire-Service-Main Piping: According to NFPA 24. 

C. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of installed 

ferrous anchorage devices. 


A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each 

underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box. 



B. UL/FMG, Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install each underground valve and valves in 

vaults with stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post. 


A. Connect water-distribution piping to existing fire water main at capped isolation valve installed 

by others. 

B. Connect water-distribution piping to building fire water distribution piping. 


A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks 

have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to 

stabilize system. 

B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times working pressure or 200 psi for 

two (2) hours. 

1. Increase pressure in 50 psig increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold 

at test pressure for two (2) hours; decrease to 0 psig. Slowly increase again to test 

pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is two (2) quarts per 

hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until 

leakage is within allowed limits. 

C. Prepare reports of testing activities. 


A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for 

underground water-distribution piping in accordance with Division 31 Section “Earth Moving”. 


A. Clean water-distribution piping as follows: 

1. Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been 

altered, extended, or repaired before use. 

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if 

method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in 

NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean water until dirty water 

does not appear at points of outlet. 

B. Prepare reports of purging activities. 




SECTION 400511 - COMPRESSION FITTINGS ON COPPER AND STAINLESS STEEL TUBING 



A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 

and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 DESCRIPTION 

A. Definitions 

1. Compression Fitting: A tube fitting consisting of two ferrules, a nut and the fitting body. The 

tubing is utilized to provide one of the sealing joints in the assembly. 

2. Hex Flat: This describes 1/6 turn on a 6-sided Swagelok compression fitting or 60 degrees 

revolution with 360 degrees being one complete revolution. 

B. Acronyms 

1. ASME – American Society of Mechanical Engineers 

2. ASTM – American Society of Testing Materials 

3. B&PV – Boiler and Pressure Vessel 

4. DOT – Department of Transportation 

5. HVAC – Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning 

6. ID – Inner Diameter 

7. LIR – Laboratory Implementation Requirements 

8. MAWP – Maximum Allowable Working Pressure 

9. OD – Outside Diameter 

10. SS – Stainless Steel 

11. TB – Technical Bulletin 

C. Related Sections 

1. Division 22 Section “Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment”. 

Equipment”. 

2. Division 22 Section “Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment”. 

3. Division 22 Section “General-Service Compressed Air Piping”. 

4. Division 22 Section “Nitrogen Gas Piping”. 



1.3 STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver tubing material and fittings to site in clean, degreased, and dry condition. 

B. Maintain end seals and covers to physically protect parts and preserve cleanliness. 

C. Remove end seals and covers only for cleaning, fabrication, erection, or inspection. 

D. Exercise care in the handling and storage of materials and pre-fabrications to ensure that 

contamination by foreign material does not occur. 

E. Do not drag tubing off trucks or rack (causes longitudinal scratches). 

1.4 PREREQUISITES 

D. Review drawings, details, manuals, and other material required for instrument or process 

tubing and fitting installation. 

E. Use the following guidelines during the performance of this specification: 

1. Fitting Removal 

a. If applicable, verify piping system has been properly isolated, drained, and tagged. 

b. Tube caps and fittings should not be used to bleed or vent any instrument/process lines at 

normal system pressures. This is an unsafe act that may result in serious injury or 

contamination. 

F. When working with potentially contaminated systems, ensure catch bags, filters, or other 

mechanisms are used to contain any contaminants. 


2.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED 

A. Swagelok Tube Fitting Gap Inspection Gages for initial installation (See Attachment 4.4, Table 

4.4-1) 

B. Special Tools 

1. Tube benders (with bend radius as required by Attachment 4.2, Table 4.2-1) 

2. Tube cutter (see Attachment 4.1) 

3. Tube deburring tool or equivalent 

C. Additional Equipment/Tools 

1. Applicable personal protective equipment 

2. 6-inch ruler 

3. Scribe (for marking fittings) or equivalent (indelible pen or felt tip marker – low chloride if 

on stainless steel) 



4. Open end wrenches (as required for application) 

5. Tubing, as applicable for work to be done 

6. Fittings and fitting components, as applicable for work to be done 

2.2 TUBING MATERIAL 


1. Standards for Seamless Ferritic and Austentic Tubing and Piping: ASTM A213 

2. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, annealed, Type 304 or 316 

3. Seamless Copper Water Tube: ASTM B88, soft annealed, Type K or L 

4. Seamless Bright Annealed Copper Tube: ASTM B68 

5. Seamless Carbon Steel Tubing: ASTM A179, maximum hardness 72 HRb. 

6. Seamless Copper Tube: ASTM B75, soft annealed 


A. Follow Attachments 4.1 through 4.8 for proper installation, remake, and maintenance of 

Swagelok compression fittings. 

3.2 PARTS REPLACEMENT 

A. Do not connect, mix, or interchange parts (caps, plugs, ferrules, bodies, etc.) of tube fittings made 

by different manufacturers (such as Parker to Swagelok). Improper fitting seal, DAMAGE, or 

INJURIES may result. 

B. Use all SS fittings and ferrules on SS tubing. 

C. Use all brass fittings and ferrules on copper tubing. 

3.3 POST INSTALLATION INSPECTION AND TESTING 

A. Inspection 

1. Ensure lines are terminated correctly by performing visual continuity checks on each tubing 

run. 

2. Ensure tubing and fittings are of the type and size specified. 

3. Ensure tubing is free of wrinkles, flats, axial scratches, gouges, and humps. 

4. Ensure tubing is properly supported and protected from damage. 

5. Ensure threads are mostly or fully covered by fitting nut. 

6. Check for proper pull up of the fitting with appropriate size no-go gage. 



B. Leak Test 

Note: Some fittings (e.g., bulkhead fittings) are not gageable. 

1. Test to determine the integrity of the component and related equipment to perform their 

intended functions. Pressure test all new piping and overall system, and any pressure system 

that has been modified or repaired, shall be pressure-tested before operating. Pressure test 

existing pressure systems (even if they have been previously tested) that, due to changes in 

mission or use, present significant hazards such as stored energy, toxicity, flammability, 

corrosiveness, or oxygen depletion, before operation. Testing must conform to the conditions 

of the relevant codes and standards (e.g., B&PV, B31, or DOT). 

Note: Pressure and leak testing on systems in radiological service or containing hazardous 

materials require hazard control plans or activity hazard analysis. 

2. On pressure systems, perform a pressure test in accordance with an appropriate ASME 

B&PV Code, or appropriate section of B31 piping codes. 

3. Systems under 15 PSIG may be pressure tested in accordance with appropriate ASME B31 

section. 

PART 4 ATTACHMENTS 

4.1 Tube Cutting 

4.2 Tube Bending 

4.3 Tubing Installation 

4.4 Swagelok Fitting Initial Installation 

4.5 Tube Fitting Tightening Due to Leaking Fitting 

4.6 Tube Fitting Removal and Reconnection 

4.7 Tube Cap Installation 

4.8 Tube Cap Reinstallation 




Attachment 4.1 

Tube Cutting 

CAUTION: • When cutting, ensure tubing does not get hot. Heat hardening of tubing may 

cause fitting failure. 

• Tube cutters used for SS up to 1” OD must be specially designed to avoid work 

hardening. 

• Due to the possibility of introducing foreign particles internal to tubing, ensure tubing is 

clean and deburred after cuts (hacksaw use is highly discouraged). 

NOTE: Tubing shall be cut using tools designed and maintained (sharp cutting surfaces) 

specifically for that purpose. 

4.1.1 Tube Cutters 

A. Using tube cutters, cut tubing squarely with gradually applied force. Use 1/8 turn of cutter knob 

for every two revolutions on steel or stainless steel. Use 1/8 turn of cutter knob for each 

revolution when cutting copper tubing. 

B. Deburr ID of tubing. 

C. Clean as necessary. 

4.1.2 Hacksaw (hacksaw use is highly discouraged) 

A. When using a hacksaw to cut tubing, use tube sawing guide instead of a vise to ensure a square 

cut and to keep tubing from flattening out. 

B. Hacksaw blade should have 24 teeth per inch minimum. 

C. For proper entry into fitting and to prevent system contamination and/or restricted flow, deburr 

both ID and OD of tubing. 

D. Clean as necessary. 

Contract 44577 KW Annex – Rev. D 44577-CSI-SPEC-001 400511 Att 4.1-1



Tube Bending 

NOTES: 1. Tubing minimum bending radius shall be based on the applicable tubing OD (tube fittings shall 

be used whenever smaller bending radii are required). 

2. Tube bending will result in wall thinning and the need to derate the tubing design pressure per 

ASME (e.g., ANSI/ASME B31.9 Section 102.4.5). 

4.2.1 Use table 4.2-1 to determine minimum tubing bend radius. 

Table 4.2-1 Minimum Bending Radius for Tubing (requires derating) 

Tubing 

OD 

(inch) 

For Tube Bend 

≤ 180 0 

Min Bend 

Radius 

(inch) 

Calculated 

Bend Radius 

(diameters) 

1/8 3/8 3 22 

1/4 

1/4 

3/8 

1/2 

5/8 

3/4 

1 

9/16 

3/4 

15/16 

1-1/2 

2-1/4 

3 

4 

2.25 

3 

2.5 

3 

3.6 

4 

4 

Resulting Wall Thinning 

(%) 

NOTE: 1. All tube bends shall be made using tools designed specifically for that purpose. Caution shall be 

exercised to ensure a smooth, even bend with minimal flattening, wrinkles, humps, or other 

damage to tubing. 

2. Tube benders vary, but requirements for minimum bend radius shall be met. 

3. Actual bend radius can be greater than required minimum. 

4.2.2 Select tube bender that meets the minimum bend radius requirements from Step 4.2.1 (Table 4.2-1). 

4.2.3 Bend tubing as follows: 

A. Ensure even bends with no flattening or other damage to tubing. 

Contract 44577 KW Annex – Rev. D 44577-CSI-SPEC-001 400511 Att 4.2-1 

31 

22 

27 

22 

19 

17 

17


B. Bend tubing so that deformed section at bend does not enter fitting. See dimension L on Figure 

4.2-1 and Table 4.2-2. 

Figure 4.2-1 Guidance for Determining Length Between Tube Bend and Fitting 

Table 4.2-2 Determining Length Between Tube Bend and Fitting 

T (inch) Tubing OD 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1 

L (inch) 

Length of 

Straight 

Tube 

Recommended 

Absolute 

Minimum 

3/4 

5/8 

13/16 

11/16 

15/16 

3/4 

1 3/16 


1 

1 1/4 

1 1/6 

1 1/4 

1 1/16 

1 1/2 

1 

5/16 

CAUTION: Do not spring tubing into position in fitting as this can result in excessive stress on 

tubing and connections leading to leakage. 

C. Tube line fabrication (bend angles and measured lengths) must be accurate so that the tube end 

easily enters the fitting in proper alignment. 

D. When a section of bent tubing is being connected, ensure that tubing is in proper alignment with 

fitting before tightening. 

E. Use bends where practical instead of fittings. 

4.2.4 Verify and document based on applicable Project Quality Management Plan.



Tubing Installation 

4.3.1 Flush or blow down tubing and fitting(s), where practical. 

4.3.2 Ensure that visible internal surfaces of tubing are clean of any foreign matter. Remove all filings, 

chips, and grit before attachment of fittings. Cover ends until final installation. 

4.3.3 Use related attachments with this one as necessary. 

A. Tube Cutting (Attachment 4.1) 

B. Tube Bending (Attachment 4.2) 

C. Swagelok Fitting Installation (Attachment 4.4) 

4.3.4 Plan tubing layout to ensure: 

A. Tubing does not block access to doors, bolts and equipment that needs to be accessed for 

maintenance. 

B. When attaching tubing to an item that may occasionally be removed for repair or maintenance, 

ensure method of connecting and running tubing allows easy removal. 

C. Ensure tubing is kept clear of controls and does not impede operator’s access to controls. 

D. If tubing is run in an area that will expose it to damage, e.g., being stepped on or used as a hand 

hold, review with supervisor or technical support for need/method to protect tubing. 

E. Ensure tubing is appropriately supported. Refer to LANL Specification Section 22 0529 Hangers 

and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. 

F. Ensure valves or other devices that require torque to be executed in their operation are mounted 

so that a twisting movement is not applied to tubing. Normally this would require valves or other 

devices to be mounted using a bracket to hold it in place. 

G. If possible, gang tubing vertically rather than horizontally to avoid collection of dirt, corrosives, 

and contaminants. 

H. Ensure fittings are staggered and offset when making multiple runs to provide easier installation 

and conserve space. 

I. Verify slope requirements are met per appropriate design standards. 

NOTE: Straight runs between two fixed fittings should be avoided. This does not allow for 

expansion and or for tubing to be properly bottomed in fitting when being made up. 



J. If necessary, use expansion loops in tubing to allow for thermal growth. 

K. If necessary, make layout sketch of tubing runs by measuring distances with a flexible steel rule. 

Some suggestions to consider: 

1. Consult fitting vendor catalog to determine distance to end point of tubing. (See Attachment 

4.2 on bending tubing) 

2. Measure all dimensions to and from centerline of tubing. 

3. For clearances, it is necessary to allow for one-half tubing OD to clear obstructions to prevent 

rubbing. 

4. Tube bends can be measured square and excess tubing trimmed from end after bending. For 

more accurate tube length measurement, length of tubing in a bend can be calculated using 

Table 4.3-1 and the equation below: 

Degrees of Bend 30 0 

Table 4.3-1 Bend Angle Cross Reference To Bend Factor 


45 0 

Bend Factor 0.52 0.78 1.04 1.57 3.14 

60 0 

90 0 

Required Tube Length = Bend Bend 

X 

Factor Radius 

NOTE: Example: For a 90 0 bend with a bend radius of 2 inches: 

Required Tube Length = (1.57) x (2 inches) = 3.14 inches 

4.3.5 Label piping system. Refer to Section 22 0554, Identification for Plumbing, HVAC, and Fire Piping 

and Equipment. 

4.3.6 Verify and document based on applicable Project Quality Management Plan. 

180 0



Swagelok Fitting Initial Installation 

NOTE: When using compression fittings other than Swagelok, the manufacturer’s installation 

instructions shall be furnished by the fitting supplier. 

4.4.1 Refer to the following for: 

• Tube Cutting (Attachment 4.1) 

• Tube Bending (Attachment 4.2) 

4.4.2 Flush or blow down tubing / fitting(s), where practical. 

4.4.3 Ensure that visible internal and external surfaces of tubing and fitting(s) are clean of any 

foreign matter. 

NOTE: Tubing surface finish is very important to proper sealing. Tubing with any depression, scratch, 

raised portion, or other surface defect will be difficult to seal. 

4.4.4 Ensure: 

• No axial scratches along tubing where ferrule seats 

• Ferrule(s) are not scratched or deformed 

• Fittings components are of proper type 

• Parts are not mixed or interchanged with another manufacturer 

• No damaged threads on fitting bodies and nuts 

NOTES: • The small tapered end of ferrule goes into fitting body. 

• Swagelok fittings have a two piece ferrule: front ferrule (large piece) and back 

ferrule (small piece). 

• Do not use Teflontape on tube end of fitting body threads. A small amount of low- chloride 

lubricant on stainless steel threads can be used to minimize galling (do not get inside the process; (Swagelok 

Silver- or High Purity-Goop are acceptable). 

4.4.5 Makeup nut and ferrule(s) on tubing. See Figure 4.4-1. 

Figure 4.4-1 Swagelok Fitting Exploded View Showing Ferrules Orientation 



NOTE: Fittings are not normally disassembled prior to use as contaminants may enter fitting or ferrules 

may be lost. 

4.4.6 Align tubing with fitting so that tubing end easily enters fitting in proper alignment. 

4.4.7 Insert tubing end until it bottoms against shoulder in fitting body. While holding tube end against 

shoulder in fitting body, tighten nut finger tight. This is necessary to prevent movement of the tube 

while the nut forces the ferrule to grip the tube and to seal through any minor imperfections that may 

exist on the outside of the surface. 

NOTE: • If unexpected resistance is felt when threading nut to finger tight, then fitting should be 

cleaned or replaced, as applicable. 

• Do not force an improperly fitted tube line into the fittings. If tubing is oval or will not easily fit 

through fitting nuts, ferrules, and bodies, do not force tubing into fittings. 

• Tightening fittings finger tight means manually, with no tools. 

Figure 4.4-2 Swagelok Fitting Cutaway View 

4.4.8 Scribe fitting at 6 o’clock position. Use indelible pen or felt tip marker. If desired, fitting body may 

also be marked temporarily to verify number of turns in the following step. 

NOTE: When scribing nut and fitting body on fittings where scribe reference on body may be used for 

more than one nut (e.g., union, elbow, etc.), ensure that scribe marks relating to each nut are 

distinguishable. 

4.4.9 While holding fitting body steady with backup wrench: 

A. For tubing OD ≥ 1/4 inch: Tighten nut 1-1/4 turns (as shown in Figure 4.4-3 below left) to swage 

ferrule. (Nut mark should be at 9 o’clock position). 



B. For tubing OD < 1/4 inch: Tighten nut 3/4 turn (as shown in Figure 4.4-4 below right) to swage 

ferrule. (Nut mark should be at 3 o’clock position). 

Figure 4.4-3 Tightening Nut 1 1/4 Turns Figure 4.4.-4 Tightening Nut 3/4 Turn 

(for tubing OD ≥ 1/4 inch) (for tubing OD < 1/4 inch) 

CAUTION: • Never permit the fitting body to rotate during tube end make-up. Two wrenches must 

be used. Assemble port connectors to components first and hold with wrench while making 

up the tube joint. All types of union bodies must be held while each of the tube ends is 

makeup. 

• Never attempt to makeup by torque or feel. Always turn the nut the prescribed amount 

(listed above) regardless of torque required. 

NOTE: • A gap inspection gage is used with Swagelok fittings to verify proper swaging and pull 

up. 

• Gap inspection gages should be used unless physical makeup of fitting prevents their use. 

• Gap inspection gage is not required on jam nut of Bulkhead Union Fitting or other 

fittings without shoulders. Step 4.4.10 provides alternative inspection method. 

• During initial installation using gap inspection gage, Swagelok fittings do not require 

disassembly and visual inspection if made up to manufacturer’s instructions. 

Tubing OD (inch) 

Swagelok Gage Series 

Table 4.4-1 Swagelok Gap Double-Ended Inspection Gages 

1/8 

200 

1/4 

400 

5/16 

500 


3/8 

600 

1/2 

810 

5/8 

1010 

3/4 

1210 

1 

1610


NOTE: Only the following Swagelok Gap Inspection Gage ends are to be used in this procedure: 

• For tubing OD ≥ 1/4 in.: Use 1-1/4 TURNS FROM FINGER TIGHT end 

• For tubing OD < 1/4 in.: Use 3/4 TURNS FROM FINGER TIGHT end 

C. Attempt to insert gap inspection gage between fitting nut and body hex. 

• For tubing OD ≥ 1/4 inch: Use 1-1/4 TURNS from FINGER TIGHT end 

• For tubing OD < 1/4 inch: Use 3/4 TURN from FINGER TIGHT end 

Figure 4.4-5 Typical Swagelok Gap Gage 

CAUTION: Do not tighten fittings with gap gage in place. 

NOTE: • If gap inspection gage fits between nut and body hex, fitting is not sufficiently tightened. 

• If any tubing/fitting makeup is found to be questionable, then remake, replace, or repair as 

necessary. 

• If using Swagelok MS-IG 468 (multiple size) no-go gage, measure from finger tight. 

D. If gap inspection gage fits between nut and body hex, tighten in 1/4 hex flat increments until gage 

does NOT fit into space. DO NOT tighten more than 2 hex flats (1/3 turn) past: 

• For tubing OD ≥ 1/4 inch: 9 o’clock position (refer to Figure 4.4-3) 

• For tubing OD < 1/4 inch: 3 o’clock position (refer to Figure 4.4-4) 

E. When gap inspection gage will NOT fit between nut and body hex, installation of fitting is 

correct. 



4.4.10 If a gap inspection tool cannot be used and personnel safety depends on proper makeup, then check 

for proper fitting makeup as follows: 

NOTE: Scribe mark is reference point used in subsequent fitting tightening. 

A. Scribe fitting and nut in their final position. 

CAUTION: If tubing end does not sufficiently extend past ferrule, improper fitting seal may result. 

B. Remove nut , disassemble fitting, and visually inspect for: 

• Ferrule(s) orientation is correct. 

• Ferrule(s) swaged. 

• Tubing extends past end of ferrule to ensure tubing bottoms out in fitting. 

• If end tubing is visible, verify tube end is properly cut and free of burrs. 

NOTE: • It is recommended that Swagelok fittings not be tightened > 1/6 to 1/4 turn past scribe mark. 

• When reconnecting fitting, a slight increase in resistance (torque rise) will be felt indicating 

ferrule is being resprung to its original position. 

• Fitting end plugs and port connections require only 1/4” turn from finger tight makeup in 

all sizes. Tightening fitting finger tight normally means manually, with no tools. Sizes 

1/16 to 3/16 can be damaged (tube snapped or cut) by over tightening. 

C. Reconnect nut as follows: 

1. While ensuring tubing is aligned and bottomed against shoulder in fitting body, tighten nut 

finger tight. 

2. Tighten nut to its original position as indicated by scribe marks, then snug slightly (with 

wrench), typically 1/6 to 1/4 turn maximum. 

4.4.11 Verify fitting(s) makeup completed and document based on applicable Project Quality Management 

Plan. 




Tube Fitting Tightening Due to Leaking Fitting 

WARNING: • Before tightening fittings, system must be depressurized. 

NOTES: 

• It is recommended that fittings not be tightened more than 1/6 to 1/4 turn past the scribe mark. 

• If fitting is not scribed, tightening may be done using good craft practice. 

4.5.1 If fitting leaks, tighten fitting in increments of 1/4 hex flat until leak stops. 

4.5.2 If fitting still leaks, evaluate as follows: 

• If practical, take fitting apart and examine for scratches on tubing or ferrule, damaged threads, 

or improper tubing alignment. If no problems are found, or replacement is not required, 

reconnect per applicable steps of appropriate attachment. 

• Determine if fitting should be replaced. Take necessary action to replace fitting. 




Tube Fitting Removal and Reconnection 

4.6.1 Fitting Removal (system must be depressurized) 

A. Inspect fitting for previously scribed marks. 

B. If fitting is not scribed, before disconnecting, perform as follows: 

1. Inspect fitting for leaks and indication of leaking. 

2. Inspect fitting for looseness (by hand). 

3. If leaks or looseness are noted: 

a. Evaluate the need to replace fitting. 

b. If necessary, replace fitting per applicable attachment of this specification. 

NOTE: • When scribing nut and fitting body on fittings where scribe reference on body may be used 

for more than one nut (e.g., union, elbow, etc.), scribe marks relating to each nut are to be 

distinguishable. 

• For maximum number of remakes, mark the fitting and nut before disassembly to prevent 

over tightening caused by guesswork. 

4. If no leaks or looseness are noted, scribe fitting. Use this mark as original installation 

scribe mark. 

WARNING: In all applications where root or instrument isolation valves are installed, tube caps or fittings 

can be used to release trapped pressure in instrument lines, after the root valve or instrument 

isolation valve(s) are closed. For other applications, Step 1.5.B of this specification’s main 

section provides guidance. 

5. Remove fitting. Ensure proper cleanliness level is maintained. 

4.6.2 Fitting Reconnection 

A. If both ends of tubing/fitting(s) are open, flush or blow down tubing/fitting(s), where 

practical. 

B. Verify that visible internal and external surfaces of tubing and fitting(s) are clean of any 

foreign matter. 

C. Check fittings visually for condition of threads, ferrule, and tubing. If fitting is damaged, 

initiate action to replace. 

CAUTION: If Safety Installation Collar was installed on Swagelok fitting, remove it before 

reconnection. 



NOTE: Safety Installation Collar may have been installed with Swagelok fittings on large OD tubing to 

verify proper swaging. 

D. Insert assembly into fitting until ferrule seats into fitting. 

NOTE: If resistance is felt when threading nut to finger tight, fitting should be cleaned or 

replaced, as applicable. 

E. Thread nut onto body finger tight and tighten to original scribe mark. 

NOTE: • A slight torque rise will be felt indicating ferrule is being resprung to its original 

position. 

• It is recommended that fittings NOT be tightened more than 1/6 to 1/4 turn past scribe 

mark. 

F. If connecting swaged ferrule/tubing/nut assembly with new fitting body (where fitting 

body will not have scribe mark): 

1. Tighten nut until rise in torque is felt. 

2. Scribe fitting body (align with nut scribe mark). 

3. Snug fitting slightly with wrench. 

G. If fitting body and nut are scribed: 

1. Retighten nut by hand. 

2. With two wrenches, tighten nut to its original position as indicated by scribe marks. 

A noticeable increase in mechanical resistance will be felt indicating the original 

position. Then tighten 1/6 to 1/4 turn with wrench. 

3. If torque rise is NOT felt, tighten nut an additional 1/12 turn (1/2 hex flat). 

H. Verify and document based on applicable Project Quality Management Plan. 




Tube Cap Installation 

CAUTION: Connecting, mixing or interchanging parts (caps, plugs, ferrules, bodies, etc.) with tube 

fittings made by different manufacturers (such as Parker to Swagelok) may cause improper 

fitting seal, damage, or injuries. 

4.7.1 Inspect for damaged threads on fitting bodies and nuts. 

4.7.2 Verify that visible internal and external surfaces of tubing and fitting(s) are clean of any foreign 

matter. 

NOTE: If resistance is felt when threading nut to finger tight, cap or fitting should be cleaned or replaced, 

as applicable. 

4.7.3 While holding fitting body with backup wrench, tighten tube cap finger tight. 

4.7.4 Using wrench, tighten tube cap 1/4 turn (1 1/2 hex flats) to seat tube cap. 

4.7.5 Scribe tube cap in final position 

4.7.6 If tube cap leaks 

A. Mark tube cap and fitting. 

B. Tighten tube cap an additional 1/2 hex flat. Repeat as necessary in 1/2 

hex flat increments up to limit of 2 hex flats (1/3 turn). 

C. Scribe tube cap in final position. 





Tube Cap Reinstallation 

4.8.1 Inspect for damaged threads on fitting bodies and nuts. 

4.8.2 Verify that visible internal surfaces of tubing and fitting(s) are clean of any foreign matter. 

NOTE: If resistance is felt when threading nut to finger tight, cap or fitting should be cleaned or replaced, 

as applicable. 

4.8.3 While holding fitting body with backup wrench, tighten tube cap finger tight. 

4.8.4. Using wrench, tighten tube cap to original position. 

4.8.5 If tube cap is not leaking, go to Step 4.8.7. 

4.8.6 If tube cap leaks: 

A. Mark tube cap and fitting. 

B. Tighten tube cap an additional 1/2 hex flat. Repeat as necessary in 1/2 hex flat 

increments up to limit of 2 hex flats (1/3 turn). 




SECTION 400527 - PIPING AND TUBING INSPECTION CHECKLIST 



A. Inspection of piping and tubing installations per design documents 

B. Inspection of installation workmanship 

C. Leak Testing 

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND TESTING 

A. Perform inspections and testing in accordance with Division 22 Sections “Nitrogen Gas 

Piping”, and “General-Service Compressed Air Piping”, and Division 40 Sections, 

“Process Plant Non-Potable Water Pipe (Modified for IXM)” and “Compression Fittings 

on Copper and Stainless Steel Tubing”. 

B. Quality Assurance Program 


Not used. 


1. For all work, the fabricator is required to develop and implement a documented 

quality assurance (QA) program which complies with the Contractor Requirements 

Document (CRD) of DOE Order 414.1 (latest). 

2. The fabricator is responsible for maintaining quality and shall perform in-process 

and final inspection on his work as required herein. The fabricator must comply 

with all applicable federal, state, or local codes. 

3.1 INSPECTION ATTRIBUTES 

A. General: 

1. Approved design documents present. 

2. Code to which it was designed identified (e.g., UPC, applicable ASME B31 code). 

3. Design followed: 

a. Required materials used (metal, polymer, schedule, markings per material 

standard on tube, pipe, and fittings). 

b. No counterfeit materials. 

4. Routing layout, configuration. 

5. Elevations (if elevation is critical). 

6. Slope (if slope is critical). 



3.2 CUTTING 

7. Location of components, instruments, fittings. 

8. Orientation of components where flow direction is important (e.g. check valves, 

reducers, globe valves, etc.). 

9. Support locations, types, attachments. 

10. Integrity and workmanship. 

A. Pipes are cut square. 

B. Surfaces are free of sharp edges and burrs. 

C. End preparation weld bevel for welded pipes. 

3.3 JOINING SWAGE FITTINGS 

A. Division 40, Section “Compression Fittings on Copper and Stainless Steel Tubing”, 

followed for cutting, bending, and assembly of these. 

3.4 THREADING 

1. Correct parts (body, nut and ferrules). 

2. Tube ends cut square. 

3. Clean and smooth tube ends. 

4. Tube aligned straight. 

5. Tube inserted into fitting body to right depth. 

6. Finger tight followed by the right torque or turns (follow vendor’s instructions). 

7. Go/No-Go gage check where applicable (follow vendor’s instructions). 

A. Pipe or tubing size. 

B. Threading tool identification. 

C. Cleanliness. 

D. Proper thread lubricant-sealant. 

E. Threads not damaged. 

F. Proper alignment before joining. 

G. Sufficient insertion of pipe threads. 

H. Proper alignment after joining. 

3.5 COLD BENDING 

A. Tangent point marked. 

B. Bend angle and dimensions. 

C. Bend free of wrinkles. 

D. Pipe or tubing wall not thinned below minimum design. 



E. Ovality of cross section not over 8% of nominal diameter. 

F. No deep gouges or scratches. 

3.6 WELDING 

A. Certified welding inspector accepts job: 


1. Welder certified. 

2. Correct welding procedure used. 

3. Weld map documenting weld symbols 

(depth on penetration, type -- fillet, butt, etc.). 

4. Correct base metal used. 

5. Correct filler metal used. 

6. Weld procedures followed. 

A. Weld surfaces free of contaminants. 

B. Inside piping surfaces free of all non-adhering material. 

C. Verify no moisture in the system. 

D. Special cleaning done when required (e.g. refrigerants, oxygen, tritium). 

3.8 FLANGE ASSEMBLY 

A. Proper support of both sides of open flange. 

B. Removal of old gasket. 

C. Cleanliness. 

D. No flange face imperfections. 

E. Verify flange face finish compatible with new gasket. 

F. Verify correct gasket. 

G. Verify gasket condition. 

H. Verify right bolts, verify size and markings. 

I. Align flange and support flange ends. 

J. Lubricate bolts and nuts (unless new and coated). 

K. Verify compatibility of lubricant, if used. 

L. Use washers. 

M. Visual verification of fastener condition. 

N. Verify use of correct fastener lubrication. 



O. Verify adhesive compatibility, if used. 

P. Verify Installation of all bolts. 

Q. Torque wrench and multiplier calibration. 

R. Torque bolts in star pattern, three passes. 

S. Verify bolt torque. 

T. Verify full engagement of nut (bolt threads at least flush with top on nut). 

3.9 LEAK TESTING 

A. Hydrostatic Leak Test: 

1. Test boundaries, valve alignment and closure. 

2. Joints visible. 

3. Pressure control and overpressure protection of test. 

4. System relief devices isolated. 

5. Water cleanliness and chemistry (ppm chloride limit on stainless). 

6. Hydrotest pressure, considering changes in elevation. 

7. Supports completed. 

8. Temporary supports where necessary (hydro of steam or gas lines). 

9. Variable springs constrained. 

10. Expansion joints constrained. 

11. Verification of pressure rating of components. 

12. Use of strainers to protect equipment. 

13. Ambient temperature above minimum. 

14. Fill and venting. 

15. Time at pressure. 

16. Visual inspection for leaks. 

17. Tightening of leaking mechanical or flange joints. 

18. Flush and water disposal. 

19. Dry and clean pipe. 

20. System and valve alignment returned to specified condition. 

B. Pneumatic Test Piping (typically Small Bore -- 2 inch and smaller -- and below 150 psi) 

1. Verify component pressure rating. 



2. Examine assembly of all threaded, bolted, and other mechanical joints. 

3. Verify test boundaries (valve alignment). 

4. Joints visible. 

5. Non-flammable nontoxic gas used. 

6. Test pressure in accordance with B31.3. 

7. Test rig equipped with Code pressure relief device. 

8. Approved leak detection solution. 

9. Initially pressurize gradually to lesser of 25 psi or 25 percent of test pressure for 

preliminary check. 

10. Gradually increase pressure in steps, allow time between steps for strain 

equalization. 

11. Reduce pressure to the design pressure prior to checking for leaks. 

12. Depressurize system following test to no more than operating level. 

C. In-Service Leak Testing 

3.10 SUPPORTS 

1. Joints are visible. 

2. System is at normal operating pressure for at least 10 minutes. 

3. Joints covered with bubble solution (gas). 

4. No visible leaks (liquid). 

5. No bubbles at joints (gas). 

A. Hangers and Supports installation are per Division 22, Section “Hangers and Supports for 

Plumbing Piping and Equipment”. 

B. Conformance with Division 22, Section “Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing 

Piping and Equipment”. 

C. Verify condition of the support steel; note any corrosion, or bent or deformed parts, 

missing bolts or cracks in or near welds. 

D. Identify any missing bolts. 

E. Identify any missing grout between the anchorage and mounted concrete surface. 

F. Verify that structural surfaces are in close contact in bolted connections. 

3.11 INSULATION 

A. Insulation installation per Division 23, Section “HVAC Insulation”. 

B. Pipe surface clean and dry. 



C. Type and condition of insulation. 

D. Insulation thickness. 

E. Type and condition of lagging (jacket). 

F. Visual inspection of installation for workmanship. 


A. Additional checks or inspections performed where required by the governing QA plan. 

3.13 DOCUMENTATION 

A. Assembly drawing or sketch initialed at each swage joint (if required by QA plan). 

B. Work package complete, signed-off, and filed. 




SECTION 402319 - PROCESS PLANT NON-POTABLE WATER PIPE (MODIFIED FOR IXM) 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. IXM water distribution piping and specialties designated "IXM Distribution". 

2. IXM Distribution piping to tanks, valves, fittings, and accessories within the building 

envelope. 


4. Stainless-steel braided PTFE hose (1” and smaller). 

5. Elastomeric flexible hose (Larger than 1”) 









14. Associated Datasheets are as follows: 

Document No. Title 

ECRT-INSTR-DS-159 FQI-770-701 

Contract 44577 KW Annex – Rev E. 44577-CSI-SPEC-001 402319-1


ECRT-INST-DS-131 FE/FQIT-770-702 

B. Equipment DescriptionBuyer-Furnished Material: 

1. Buyer will furnish IXM and water supply at a specified flow rate of 70 gpm and a normal 

operating pressure of 100 psig. 





2. Stainless-steel braided PTFE hose (1” and smaller) 

3. Elastomeric flexible hose. 






9. Fasteners. 






E. Certificates of Shop Inspection and Data Report for piping: As required by ASME B31.3 and 

that the piping has been designed, manufactured and constructed in accordance with the Seller’s 

QA plan. 


















by the Buyer. 


H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For IXM piping specialties to include in emergency, 






4. Weld maps. 


Record (PQR). 














Work). 



with ASME NQA-1-2008, as approved by the Buyer and described in Section 014000, Quality 


B. The highest functional classification for the scope of this Specification section for items and 

services is classified as General Service. 

C. Quality levels are defined on the associated line lists, valve lists and datasheets accompanying 

this section. 


Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications" or AWS B2.2/B2.1M, 

"Standard for Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification." 















341.4.1 and 344.2. 







343. 







i. cracks; 




to edge; and 





ASME B31.3, paragraph 345. 





1. Comply with ASME B31.3, "Process Piping," Normal Service Category, for IXM piping. 



2. Comply with ASME B31.3, Normal Service Category, as applicable, for materials, products, 

and installation. 

3. Safety Valves: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. Safety 

valves shall bear the appropriate ASME label. 

4. Pressure Vessels: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. 

Pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. 




"Structural Welding Code – Steel," and Section 055000, Metal Fabrications. Perform 100% 

visual examination of final weld joints for piping supports, anchors, and all other structural 

welds shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1 and D1.6 as applicable for statically loaded 

structures. 

K. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and 



L. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, 


M. All items and processes are subject to review, inspection, or surveillance by the Buyer's Quality 


facility. 

N. Hold, Witness, and Verification points shall be identified in the Fabrication, Inspection and Test 


approved portions of work in accordance with specification requirements before notifying 

Buyer. 

O. Seller shall control fabrication, assembly, inspection, testing, and related activities, performed in 


















































A. General Design Requirements and Conditions for the IXM Distribution piping system: 





5. Normal operating flow rate at 70 gpm, maximum. 

6. Fluid properties are the same as deionized water at 68 deg F. 

7. Piping Code: ASME B31.3, Normal Service category. 

B. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that IXM Distribution 

piping, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 220548, 

Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. Include the following: 







review 30 days prior to scheduled installation date. 


A. Interruption of Existing IXM Service(s): Do not interrupt IXM water service to facilities 

occupied by Buyer or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after 

arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated: 

1. Notify Buyer no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of IXM water 

distribution service(s). 

2. Do not proceed with interruption of IXM water distribution service(s) without Buyer's 

written permission. 





1. Process systems service connections are specified in Section 011100, Statement of Work. 

2. General requirements for Instrumentation installations are specified in Section 220519, 

Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping. 

3. General requirements for Electrical power connections are specified in Section 260519, 

Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 








B. Individual pipe spools that are delivered to the fabrication site shall be cleaned in accordance 

with Part 3.1.A and capped with chloride/halogen free plastic caps. 

C. Pipe spools and valves shall be labeled with the full fill line numbers or valve numbers in accordance 

with Section 220553, Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. 



A. Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings: Schedule 40S, ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP316L or 

TP304L, unless otherwise indicated; seamless pipe and ASTM A 403/A 403M, Class S, 

seamless fittings matching pipe thickness and grade, for welded joints. Piping shall be restricted 

to 1-in. and larger. 

B. Stainless steel certified material is: 

1. L-Grade material supplied with CMTR’s 







C. Certified TP 316L or TP304L stainless steel pipe: pipe fittings, tubing and tubing fitting, plate, 

rod bar, sheet and strip shall get the following tests: 






shall taken from representative samples from each size and heat of finished product. Prepare 

specimens as required, sensitize specimens by heating for 1 h at 1250 o + 10 o F and 

quench with water. Ensure that corrosion rate for each specimen does not exceed 0.0020 

in. per month for full five 48-h periods. Ensure that corrosion rate for final specimen 

does not exceed corrosion rate of any of the previous specimens by more than 0.0002 in. 

per month. 

D. Wrought Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and 
















minutes. 








3. Hosexpress 












pressure. 














minutes. 






3. Hosexpress 












1. Standard: MSS SP-72, or MSS SP-110, and ASME B 16.34, 




5. Port: full-port 






9. Ends: FNPT or Flanged ends. 

B. Description: Air Operated Ball Valves, NPS 3 and Smaller: 

1. Standard: MSS SP-72 or MSS SP-110 and ASME B 16.34, 




5. Port: full-port 



8. Seals UHMWPE/RPTFE/TFM,, 

9. Ends: FNPT or flanged ends, 


separate on/off confirms. 










7. NIBCO Inc. 







2.5 PRESSURE CONTROL VALVES 

A. Pressure Control Valves: 

1. Body: ASTM A351 Grade CF8M stainless steel and stainless steel trim; 

2. Spring-loaded, diaphragm-operated, relieving type, composition diaphragm and seat material. 

3. Manual pressure-setting adjustment. 

4. Pressure rated for 150-psig minimum inlet pressure; and capable of controlling delivered 

fluid pressure within 0.5 psig for each 10-psig inlet pressure. 

5. Ends: FNPT. 




1. Cashco, Inc. 

2. Fisher Control, Inc. 


A. Direct-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gauges: Indicating-dial type complying with 

ASME B40.100. 

1. Case: Field Liquid-fillable type, Type 304 Stainless steel, 4-inch diameter. 

2. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Pressure Connection: Stainless steel, NPS 1/4, bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type 

is indicated. 

4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 

5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. 

6. Pointer: Black metal. 

7. Window: Laminated safety Glass. 

8. Ring: Stainless steel. 

9. Accuracy: Grade 1A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale. 

10. Pressure Range: 0 psig to 160 psig of pressure. 

B. Pressure-Gauge Fittings: 

1. Valves: NPS 1/4 stainless-steel needle type. 






1. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. 

2. KOBOLD Instruments, Inc. 

3. Marsh Bellofram. 

4. REO TEMP Instrument Corporation. 




8. WIKA Instrument Corporation. 

9. Winters Instruments. 


A. General Requirements for Quick Couplings: Assembly with locking-mechanism feature for 

quick connection and disconnection of compressed-air hose. 

B. Automatic-Shutoff Quick Couplings: Straight-through brass body with O-ring or gasket seal 

and stainless-steel or nickel-plated-steel operating parts. 



























A. Except where specifically accepted otherwise, welding materials shall be selected so that the 

deposited weld metal is similar in chemical composition and not significantly harder or stronger 

than the base material (e.g., stainless steel L-grade base metal shall be welded with L-grade filler 

metal). Lot tests (charpy V-Notch and Bend) temperatures shall be at or below the design 

metal temperature. 

B. Stainless-steel welding material shall meet the requirements of AWS D1.6/D1.6M, stainless 

steel E308/ER308 or E309/ER309 electrodes 









grades of stainless steel, such as 304L pipe to 316L valve the welding procedure application 

list shall specify the filler material type. 

F. For all filler metal, a typical test report in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel 

Section II, Part C, is required. 


electrodes, and fluxes) shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Segregation of carbon 

steel, low alloys, and alloy consumables is required during storage, baking, holding, and handling 

(including portable ovens). 

2.9 FASTENERS 







C. Stainless-steel bolts, cap screws, and studs shall be per ASTM A193/A 193M, Grade B8 (Class 

2), and nuts shall be heavy hex nuts per ASTM A194/A 194M, Grade 8, 8S (Nitrinic 60) or 8SA 


















steel, 


steel, and 





Conformance. 




A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for compressed air and thermal conditions of 

compressed air piping system contents. 




flanges. 















E. All exposed carbon steel shall be coated as specified in the detailed design drawings. Prepare, 

prime, and top coat structural steel in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 

The final coat shall be light gray. All coatings shall be applied in such a manner as to produce a 

uniform smoothness. Special attention shall be paid to crevices, weld lines, carriers, and edges 

to obtain the required thickness. 
























etc.). 









1. Clean piping and fittings, valves, gauges, and other components of oil, grease, and other 
































steel. 















or mercury. 










B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of Nitrogen 

Gas Piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction 

loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to 

layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. 




D. Pipes shall be designed with provisions for draining as shown on the drawings. Slope piping and 

provide drain valves at low points. Self draining configurations shall be employed to the extent 

practical. 

E. Mismatched bore diameter connections shall be prepared in accordance with ASME B31.3 

Figure 328.4.3(a). The trimmed bore shall not be less than the thickness of the thinner walled 

pipe. Misaligned pipe limitation shall be in accordance with the code. However bore trimming 

to correct piping misalignment is not permitted. 

F. Weld piping and attachments to pressure retaining components in accordance with ASME 

B31.3, Process Piping Code, for Normal Service. 



G. Perform weld NDE in accordance with ASME B31.3, Process Piping Code, For Normal Service 

and sub-section 1.4.G of this section. 

H. Maintain material traceability through fabrication for materials requiring CMTRs. 

I. Install piping to maintain headroom and neither interfere with use of space nor take more space 


J. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected 

equipment. 

K. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance. 

L. Install nipples, unions, and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher 

than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. 

M. Follow the recommendations in ASME PCC-1-2010 for flange fit-up, bolt torques and bolt 

torque sequence. 

N. Make joints in threaded piping systems with joint lubricant specified. Apply lubricant to male 

threads only. 

O. Install piping to permit valve servicing. 

P. Install piping free of sags and bends. 

Q. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. 

R. Once fabrication has started, plug or cap ends of piping when installation is not in progress. 

Cap or plug openings in fabricated pipe spool assemblies until installation in piping system. 

S. Pressure-Leak test Normal Service Category piping system in accordance with ASME B31.3 


T. Sleeve and caulk pipes penetrating facility walls. Provide UL/FM approved throughpenetration 










thinning as approved by the Buyer. Bending is restricted to bends having a minimum 

center-line bend radius of 3 times the pipe nominal outside diameter. 


metals. 









A. Provide access where valves and other equipment are not exposed. 

B. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. 

C. Install the valve actuator and valve stem extensions in accordance with the drawings and 


D. Install check valves to maintain correct direction of flow as indicated on the system P&IDs. 

E. Install pressure regulators on piping where reduced pressure is required. 

F. Install pressure relief valve and full-size discharge piping to designated drains. 












E. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe 

rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. Comply with requirements in Section 220529, Hangers 

and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment, for trapeze hangers. 

F. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. 

G. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling. 

H. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum 

rods. 

I. Install hangers with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 










J. Install supports for vertical piping every 10 feet. 

3.6 Fasteners 







C. Flange bolt torque values shall be per gasket manufacturer recommendation not to exceed 75% 

of bolt allowable yield strength as defined in the applicable ASTM standard and using appropriate 






A. Testing Agency: Buyer will engage qualified testing agency to perform field tests and 

inspections of piping and prepare test reports. 





systems. 





c. Hydrostatic test for positive pressure piping. 

4. Perform the following tests on IXM piping: 

a. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage 

due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping 

may be used. 

b. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. 

Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid. 

c. Isolate any tanks and determine that the IXM system is full of water. 

d. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the 

system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for 

any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Hydrostatic test 



piping in accordance with ASME B31.3, "Process Piping" Section 345.4 

hydrostatic leak test. 

e. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine 

piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, 

repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no 

leaks. 

f. Prepare written report of testing. 



b. Final tie-in test. 

c. Operational pressure test. 

d. Verify correct labeling of equipment and components. 




b. Test methods used. 

c. Results of tests. 


above. 



SECTION 431510 - LOW PRESSURE AIR PURGE PIPING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Low Pressure Air Purge Piping and specialties designated “AIR" ventilation purge, or decant 

pump exhaust on the Drawings. 

2. Process Condensate Drain Piping designated “CND” from demisters, HEPA filter housings, 

and exhaust stack. 

3. Ventilation Air Purge Piping to containers, casks, valves, fittings, and accessories within 

the building envelope. 






9. Butterfly valves. 

10. Vacuum breakers. 


12. Pressure transmitters. 






B. Equipment DescriptionThis Section includes piping and related specialties for low pressure air 

purge systems operating at 10 psig or less. 


1. Interface equipment for the STS Container and cask fill and vent ports. 







4. Elastomeric flexible hose (larger than 1”). 


6. Butterfly valves. 

7. Vacuum breakers. 


9. Pressure transmitters. 







E. Certificates of Shop Inspection and Data Report for piping: As required by ASME B31.3 and that 

the piping has been designed, manufactured and constructed in accordance with the Seller’s QA 

plan. 



F. Weld Inspection Reports: The Seller shall prepare and submit weld Inspection reports that include 

the following information: 














by the Buyer. 


H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For Ventilation Air and condensate piping specialties to 

include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 





4. Weld maps. 


Record (PQR). 














Work). 






Safety Significant. 

C. Quality levels are defined on the associated line lists, valve lists and datasheets accompanying this 

section. 


Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications" or AWS B2.2/B2.1M, "Standard 

for Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification." 















341.4.1 and 344.2. 







343. 







i. cracks; 




to edge; and 





ASME B31.3, paragraph 345 as applicable. 



according to training provided by Swagelok Company and Division 40, Section 400511 

Compression Fittings on Copper and Stainless Steel Tubing. 




1. Comply with ASME B31.3, "Process Piping," Normal Service category for low-pressure 

Air Purge piping and process condensate drain piping. 

2. Comply with ASME B31.3, as applicable, for materials, products, and installation. 

3. Safety Valves (if required): ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, 

Division 1. Safety valves shall bear the appropriate ASME label. 

4. Pressure Vessels (if required): ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, 

Division 1. Pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. 





K. All piping, tubing and components indicated on the Drawings with a (Z) are Safety Significant 

SSCs (Structure Systems or Components). 





b. Pipe wall thickness/schedule per ASTM; 

c. Pipe wall material type per ASTM; 

d. Support material type; 

e. Weld filler material; and 

f. Weld type. 

L. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and 



M. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, 


N. All items and processes are subject to review, inspection, or surveillance by the Buyer's Quality 


facility. 

O. Hold, Witness, and Verification points shall be identified in the Fabrication, Inspection and Test 


approved portions of work in accordance with specification requirements before notifying Buyer. 

P. Seller shall control fabrication, assembly, inspection, testing, and related activities, performed in 





A. Refer to Section 011100, Summary of Work, for definition of general requirements that apply to all 

specification sections prepared for this Project. 













6. Low Pressure Air Purge Piping: System of Air Purge piping and specialties operating at 

pressures of 10 psig or less. 
































A. General Design Requirements and Conditions for the Low Pressure Air Purge and Process Condensate 

Drain Piping System: 






6. Fluid properties are the same as Air at 68 deg F. 

7. Piping Code Low pressure system: ASME B31.3, Normal Service. 

B. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that Low Pressure Air 

Purge Piping, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 

220548, Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. Include the 

following: 







review 30 days prior to scheduled installation date. 





1. Equipment that is to be located indoors will be in a temperature controlled industrial type 

location. 

2. Facility interior ambient conditions are 65 to 80 °F. 

3. Facility exterior ambient conditions are -27 to 110 °F. 


B. Interruption of Existing Service(s): Do not interrupt services to facilities occupied by the Buyer or 

others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide 

temporary service according to requirements indicated: 


service(s). 


permission. 




2. Electrical power connections (if required) are specified in Section 260519, Low-Voltage 

Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 


A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with 

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 





B. Individual pipe spools that are delivered to the fabrication site shall be cleaned in accordance with 

Part 3.1.A and capped with chloride/halogen free plastic caps. 

C. Pipe spools shall be labeled with the full fill line numbers in accordance with Section 220553, 

Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. 





A. Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings: Schedule 10S, ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP316L or 

TP304L, unless otherwise indicated; seamless pipe and ASTM A 403/A 403M, Class S, seamless 

fittings matching pipe thickness and grade, for welded joints. 

B. Certified TP 316L or TP304L stainless steel pipe: pipe fittings, tubing and tubing fitting, plate, rod 

bar, sheet and strip shall get the following tests: 







Prepare specimens as required, sensitize specimens by heating for 1 h at 1250 °F + 10 o F 


0.0020 in. per month for full five 48-h periods. Ensure that corrosion rate for final specimen 

does not exceed corrosion rate of any of the previous specimens by more than 


C. Wrought Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and 








C. Steel pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Type E or S, Grade B, 

or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Grade B, standard weight, Schedule 40 and Schedule 10. 





The final coat shall be light gray. All coatings shall be applied in such a manner as to produce 

a uniform smoothness. Special attention shall be paid to crevices, weld lines, carriers, and 

edges to obtain the required thickness. 














minutes. 






3. Hosexpress 














pressure. 












minutes. 






3. Hosexpress 














1. Standard: MSS SP-72, or MSS SP-110 and ASME B 16.34, 








9. Ends: FNPT, flanged, or butt-weld, 











7. NIBCO Inc. 

8. Flowtek, Inc. 






2.6 BUTTERFLY VALVES 

A. 200 CWP, Stainless-steel, Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and stainless-steel disc: 




c. Body Design: Lug type; Class 150; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at 

rated pressure without use of downstream flange. 

d. Body Material: ASTM A 351-CF8M stainless steel. 



g. Disc: ASTM A 351-CF8M stainless steel. 




1. Bray Controls, 

2. Tyco Flow Control, Keystone. 

2.7 VACUUM BREAKERS 

A. Vacuum Breaker: In-line pattern, stainless steel. 

1. Product: Fisher Y692VB Series or Buyer reviewed substitute, 

2. Pressure Rating: 8 psig, 


4. Body Material: stainless-steel, CF8M, 

5. Diaphragm casing: stainless-steel, CF8M, 

6. Spring Case: stainless-steel, CF8M, 

7. Disk Holder: stainless-steel, S30200, 

8. Disk: Ethylene propylene (EPR/EPDM), 

9. Diaphragm: Ethylene propylene (EPR/EPDM), 

10. Trim: stainless-steel, S30200, 

11. O-rings: Ethylene propylene (EPR/EPDM) 



12. Ends: Class 150, raised face flanged, 

13. Body Size: 2-inches, 

14. Orifice size: 1-3/16 inch, 

15. Vacuum Control Pressure Range: 1 to 3 inches w.c., 


Product Substitution procedures, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable 


1. Emerson Process Management, Fisher Controls Division. 


A. General Requirements for Quick Couplings: Assembly with locking-mechanism feature for quick 

connection and disconnection of compressed-air hose. 

B. Automatic-Shutoff Quick Couplings: Straight-through brass body with O-ring or gasket seal and 

stainless-steel or nickel-plated-steel operating parts. 



















E. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements contained in Section 012513, 







2.9 PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS 

A. Pressure instrumentation shall have calibration ports and instrument isolation valves to facilitate 

installed calibration. 

B. All instrumentation with local displays (such as filter differential pressure transmitters) needs to 

be readily accessible for surveillance readings. 

C. Electronic differential pressure transmitter shall be designed to measure the differential air 

pressure as indicated on the drawings or as required. The output shall be a 2-wire, 4 to 20-mA, 

loop-powered device with an input range as indicated in the drawings, but not more than twice the 

actual measure variable. The accuracy, including linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability, shall be 

less than plus or minus 2 percent. Provide gauge root valves at all transmitters. Transmitters shall 

be nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL)- approved. 

D. HEPA Filter Differential Pressure Transmitters (DPT-750-560) 

1. Wetted Material: Stainless steel. 

2. Power Requirements: Loop powered. 

3. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent. 

4. Range: Minus 40 to 40 in. w.g. 

5. Span: 10 in. w.g. 

6. Output: HART 4 to 20 mA, 

7. Process Ports: 1/4-in. female national pipe thread. 

8. Manufacturer: Yokogawa Model EJA110A Series. 


A. Except where specifically accepted otherwise, welding materials shall be selected so that the deposited 

weld metal is similar in chemical composition and not significantly harder or stronger than 



the base material (e.g., stainless steel L-grade base metal shall be welded with L-grade filler metal). 

Lot tests (charpy V-Notch and Bend) temperatures shall be at or below the design metal temperature. 

B. Stainless-steel welding material shall meet the requirements of AWS D1.6/D1.6M, stainless steel 

E308/ER308 or E309/ER309 electrodes 









grades of stainless steel, such as 304L pipe to 316L valve the welding procedure application list 

shall specify the filler material type. 

F. For all filler metal, a typical test report in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Section 

II, Part C, is required. 


electrodes, and fluxes) shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Segregation of carbon steel, 

low alloys, and alloy consumables is required during storage, baking, holding, and handling (including 

portable ovens). 


A. Graded fasteners shall be carefully controlled as defined in the Section 014000, Quality Assurance 

and Control. 



C. Stainless-steel bolts, cap screws, and studs shall be per ASTM A193/A 193M, Grade B8 (Class 2), 

and nuts shall be heavy hex nuts per ASTM A194/A 194M, Grade 8, 8S (Nitrinic 60) or 8SA 




















steel, 


steel, and 





Conformance. 


A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for compressed gas and thermal conditions of low or high 

pressure Nitrogen piping system contents (as applicable). 




flanges. 



B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel for carbon steel flanges or stainless steel for 

stainless steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated. 



























etc.). 











































steel. 













or mercury. 










B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of Low 

Pressure Air Purge Piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and 

calculate friction loss, expansion and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated 

unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. 




D. Mismatched bore diameter connections shall be prepared in accordance with ASME B31.3 Figure 

328.4.3(a). The trimmed bore shall not be less than the thickness of the thinner walled pipe. 



Misaligned pipe limitation shall be in accordance with the code. However bore trimming to 

correct piping misalignment is not permitted. 

E. Weld piping and attachments to pressure retaining components in accordance with ASME B31.3, 

Process Piping Code, For Normal Service. 

F. Perform weld NDE in accordance with ASME B31.3, Process Piping Code, For Normal Service 

and sub-section 1.4.G of this section. 

G. Maintain material traceability through fabrication for materials requiring CMTRs. 

H. Install piping to maintain headroom and neither interfere with use of space nor take more space 


I. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected 

equipment. 

J. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance. 

K. Install nipples, unions, and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than 

system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. 

L. Follow the recommendations in ASME PCC-1-2010 for flange fit-up, bolt torques and bolt torque 

sequence. 

M. Make joints in threaded piping systems with joint lubricant specified. Apply lubricant to male 

threads only. 

N. Install piping to permit valve servicing. 

O. Install piping free of sags and bends. 

P. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. 

Q. Once fabrication has started, plug or cap ends of piping when installation is not in progress. Cap 

or plug openings in fabricated pipe spool assemblies until installation in piping system. 

R. Pressure-Leak test Normal Service Category piping system in accordance with ASME B31.3 


S. Sleeve and caulk pipes penetrating facility walls. Provide UL/FM approved through-penetration 










thinning as approved by the Buyer. Bending is restricted to bends having a minimum center-line 

bend radius of 3 times the pipe nominal outside diameter. 


metals. 









A. Provide access where valves and other equipment are not exposed. 

B. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. 

C. Install the valve actuator and valve stem extensions in accordance with the drawings and 


D. Install check valves to maintain correct direction of flow as indicated on the system P&IDs. 

E. Install pressure regulators on piping where reduced pressure is required. 

F. Install pressure relief valve and full-size discharge piping to designated drains. 












E. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. 

Support pipe rolls on trapeze. Comply with requirements in Section 220529, Hangers and 

Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment, for trapeze hangers. 

F. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. 

G. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling. 

H. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum 

rods. 

I. Install hangers with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 











J. Install supports for vertical piping every 10 feet. 



3.6 FASTENERS 





C. Flange bolt torque values shall be per gasket manufacturer recommendation not to exceed 75% of 

bolt allowable yield strength as defined in the applicable ASTM standard and using appropriate 






A. Testing Agency: Buyer will engage qualified testing agency to perform field tests and inspections 

of piping and prepare test reports. 





systems. 





c. Piping purge test. 

d. Standing pressure test for positive pressure piping. 











b. Piping purge test. 

c. Piping purity test. 

d. Final tie-in test. 

e. Operational pressure test. 

f. Verify correct labeling of equipment and components. 








above. 




PIPING CODE: S-2 Air/Vent (AIR) and Process Condensate Drain (CND) Piping 




Inspection and Test Method 


Pipe 





ASTM A 312, Grade TP 304L, seamless, ASME B31.3, Process Piping Category 

"Normal Fluid Service" 

Wall Thickness Schedule 10S or as stated on fabrication drawing 

Fittings 

Flanges 

Bolts/Nuts 

Gaskets 

Valves 

ASTM A 403, Class WP-S 304L, butt welding in accordance with ASME B16.9, 

wall thickness to match pipe. Corrosion allowance = 0.03-in. 

Bends: Formed pipe bends having minimum center-line bend radius of 5 x pipe nominal 

outside diameter. 

Class 150, ASTM A 182, Grade F 304L forged, raised face weld neck, in accordance 

with ASME B16.5 or as specified on drawing. 

ASTM A 193 or ASTM A 320 any type of grade B8 and having hex nuts in accordance 

with ASTM A 194 any type of Grade 8. It is preferred to have either the bolt 

as grade B8S/B8SA or the nut as grade 85/85A to minimize potential for galling of 

mated components. 

Garlock "BLUE-GARD" 3000, 1/8-inch thick compressed gaskets with dimensions 

conforming to ASME B1 6.21 Table 1-5 

ASME B16.34, ball or plug type valve, stainless steel body, stainless steel ball, 

flanged or butt weld ends, UHMWPE seats. Manual locking handle. 

Note: 














Fittings 

Autolok TM quick couplings, made by the OPW Company, 300 Series SST, Threaded 

or Welded as specified on fabrication drawings. Size and type as specified on the 

fabrication drawings. 

Campbell Chemjoint TM size and type as specified on the fabrication drawings. 

River Bend Hose Fittings, size and type as specified on the fabrication drawings. 



Note: 









PIPING CODE: S-2 IXM Water Piping (Specification Section 402319) 





Method 


Pipe 





ASTM A 312, Grade TP 304L, seamless, ASME B31.3, Process Piping Category 

"Normal Fluid Service" 

Wall Thickness Schedule 40S or as stated on fabrication drawing 

Fittings 

Cam-Lock Connectors 

Flanges 

Bolts/Nuts 

Gaskets 

Valves 

ASTM A 403, Class WP-S 304L, butt welding in accordance with ASME 

B16.9, wall thickness to match pipe. Corrosion allowance = 0.03-in. 

Bends: Formed pipe bends having minimum center-line bend radius of 5 x 

pipe nominal outside diameter. 

Quick Disconnects: Autolok TM quick couplings, made by the OPW Company, 

300 Series SST, threaded or welded as indicated on fabrication drawings. 


Class 150, ASTM A 182, Grade F 304L forged, raised face weld neck, in 

accordance with ASME B16.5 or as specified on drawing. 

ASTM A 193 or ASTM A 320 any type of grade B8 and having hex nuts in 

accordance with ASTM A 194 any type of Grade 8. It is preferred to have 

either the bolt as grade B8S/B8SA or the nut as grade 85/85A to minimize 

potential for galling of mated components. 

Garlock "BLUE-GARD" 3000, 1/8-inch thick compressed gaskets with dimensions 

conforming to ASME B1 6.21 Table 1-5 

ASME B16.34, ball or plug type valve, stainless steel body, stainless steel 

ball, flanged or butt weld ends, UHMWPE seats. Manual locking handle. 

Note: 

1) Based on 50°F minimum basin water temperature and 80°F summer inside HVAC design temperatures.

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?